20240731IPC to Staff 22c - PDF Attachements Combined.pdf

ADDENDUM NO 1.

To: All prospective Respondents

Re: The 2022 Design Build and Install 500kV Capacitor Bank Midpoint Station
PA# 129210

The following items are addressed in this Addendum No 1:

Attachments

1. The updated construction work schedule for this project has been added to
the Download Documents tab. It is labeled Reference_MPSN210001
Construction Work Schedule.xlsx

Acknowledgement of receipt of this Addendum No 1. shall be entered on “5. Pricing
Data” tab within Power Advocate. Failure to provide such acknowledgement may
render the bid as non-responsive and subject to rejection.

Dated: December 1, 2021

By: April Curtis
Sr. Contracting Agent
ADDENDUM NO. 01
Midpoint Substation Replace C506 Capacitor Bank 2023 Station Structural Project

TO: All Prospective Respondents 
RE: Request for Bid – Zycus Event# 1318417153 
The following items are addressed in this Addendum No. 01: 
1. Attachments: 
1.1. Midpoint Cap Bank Removal Photo.zip  
1.2.  Control Cabinet.JPG 
1.3. Pole Spec.pdf 
2. Clarifications & Changes: 
2.1. The Midpoint Cap Bank Removal Photo.zip file was  
2.2. The bid close date has been extended by two weeks.  New bid close date is: July 6, 2023 at 5PM MDT. 
3. Submitted Questions & Answers: 
3.1. The plans indicate to reinstall Kirk Key locks. Will IPC be providing new Kirk Key Locks for the
contractor to install or is contractor to reuse existing?
Answer: New Kirk Key locks will be used, and Idaho Power Personnel will install them. 
3.2. Would we get clarification on the location of the existing capacitor bank control house that is needing 
to be removed/disposed from SC‐2 on Exhibit C (General summary scope of work)? 
Answer: Yes. See the photo titled “Control Cabinet” the large cabinet on the west end—middle right 
of the photo. 
3.3. Will IPC be providing new grounding rods in the area of the new cap bank, or would you like us to 
reuse the existing grounding rods? 
Answer: IP is not aware of any grounding rods. What grounding rods are you referring to?  
3.4. Does Idaho Power have a cable list/schedule that could be provided?  
Answer: We will, but haven’t received it from the capacitor Bank supplier yet
3.5. Would it be possible to extend the bid date two (2) weeks? 
Answer: Yes. See section 2 Clarifications & Changes above. 
3.6. Will IPC be providing the 1/8” steel plates on drawing 21D‐78444, plate detail #1 (59D)? The 
bolts/anchoring, nuts, and washers are accounted for on the BOM but not the 60 steel plates being 
called out. 
Answer: IPC is supplying these 60 plates and has accounted for them on the MFT (Material 
Fabrication Transmittal). 
3.7. What is the weight of the complete cap bank platforms being removed? 
Answer: Unknown 
3.8. Can the cap banks be taken down in sections, or do we have to take the platform down in one piece? 
Answer: All the equipment can be removed from the Platforms and then they can be taken down 
however the contractor wants as long as all safety protocols are followed 
3.9. Will the overhead conductors be removed for crane access? 
ADDENDUM NO. 01
Midpoint Substation Replace C506 Capacitor Bank 2023 Station Structural Project

Answer: No. 
3.10. On the foundation removals, do the anchors extending below the foundation into the rock need to be 
removed? 
Answer: Yes, there are multiple locations where the new pier foundations will be in the same location 
as the existing foundations. 
3.11. How many of the post insulator foundations have had the additional footing added as shown on 
drawing 21D‐48019‐51RM? 
Answer: The modifications detailed are below grade, so IPC cannot determine a count on these 
foundations. Also, some of the piers are tied together above grade (see attached picture, 
IMG_4039.JPG) which is not shown in our drawing sets. Could the Contractor submit a cost adder per 
pier for this additional concrete fix.  
3.12. What is the diameter of the steel laser pole?
Answer: The base diameter is roughly 18”. 
3.13. What diameter hole do we need to drill for the direct embed of the steel laser pole?
Answer: The minimum hole diameter should be 12” larger than the butt of the butt of the pole, see 
attached Pole Spec. 
3.14. What is the minimum cure time needed for the new foundations before GE’s work begins on 
10/23/23? 
Answer: 14 days. 
3.15. Do the 500kV VTs need to be kept vertical, or can they be moved in a horizontal position? 
Answer: They can be moved horizontal as long as all precautions are taken so that they do not leak 
oil. 

Respondent shall provide acknowledgement of this Addendum No. 01 within the Zycus event. Failure to provide 
such acknowledgement may render the bid as non‐responsive and subject to rejection. 

ADDENDUM NO 2.

To: All prospective Respondents

Re: The 2022 Design Build and Install 500kV Capacitor Bank Midpoint Station
PA# 129210

The following items are addressed in this Addendum No 2:

Attachments:
1. Reference_Product Manual Bypass Breakers 1hsb435416-11
Questions

1. Q: Please provide the technical data and ratings for the existing disconnect switches and
bypass breaker that are to be used in this project. Please include the wiring diagrams and
schematics for controls of breaker and for disconnect status signals and alarms.
Answer: The bypass breakers are made by ABB and are LTB E1 Bypass, 1HSB435416-11ens.
The manual (see Attachments above) has been posted to the PowerAdvocate Download
Documents tab.
As you can see below, the bypass and disconnect air breaks are 3000Amp, ITE-TTR’s
The disconnect status signals and alarms have yet to be designed or installed.

ADDENDUM NO 2.

2. Q: Doc 1. RFB Page 3 Section D. To verify if bonds are required, the document instructs the
bidder to contact the RFB Coordinator. Please confirm if bonds are applicable and required
for this proposal.
Answer: Bonds are not required for this project.
3. Q: Doc 1. RFB Page 3 Section E. To verify if financial statements are required, the document
instructs the bidder to contact the RFB Coordinator. Please confirm if financial statements
are required for this proposal.
Answer: We are not asking for submitted financials for this project.
4. Q: Doc 4. Exhibit B C506 Spec. Please see two clauses below which appear to conflict. Please
confirm if there is any size limit in control building, or if the bidder is to provide whatever
spacing is required. Page 05 Section 4.30. The Contractor shall supply space requirements
for Contractor supplied control equipment that will reside within the Control Building. Page
14 Section 6.14. IPC shall supply space requirements for Contractor supplied control
equipment within the Control Building.
Answer: Please supply us the overall sizes of your control equipment and we will size our
control building accordingly. Follow Page 05 Section 4.30 and disregard page 14 Section 6.14.

ADDENDUM NO 2.

Acknowledgement of receipt of this Addendum No 2. shall be entered on “5. Pricing
Data” tab within Power Advocate. Failure to provide such acknowledgement may
render the bid as non-responsive and subject to rejection.

Dated: December 9, 2021

ADDENDUM NO 3.

To: All prospective Respondents

Re: The 2022 Design Build and Install 500kV Capacitor Bank Midpoint Station
PA# 129210

The following items are addressed in this Addendum No 3:

Bid Event Extension:

This bid event has been extended to February 25, 2022.

Last day for submitted questions has been extended to February 17th.

Acknowledgement of receipt of this Addendum No 3. shall be entered on “5. Pricing
Data” tab within Power Advocate. Failure to provide such acknowledgement may
render the bid as non-responsive and subject to rejection.

Dated: December 27, 2021

ADDENDUM NO 4.

To: All prospective Respondents

Re: The 2022 Design Build and Install 500kV Capacitor Bank Midpoint Station
Zycus # 1313255353

The following items are addressed in this Addendum No 4:

Attachments:
Exhibit B_MPSN210001 Series Capacitor C506 Specification Revision 2.
Clarification:
The Exhibit B_MPSN210001 Series Capacitor C506 Specification Revision 2 has the following updates:

1. Corrected the HMWY-LGHN series cap impedances in the system model. These were incorrectly
doubled in the prior version.
2. Added more information for the transformers in the system model. The impedances in the
previous version were PU impedances on the transformer base instead of the 100 MVA system
base. The new information includes impedance and configuration information for all windings.
3. Updated fault current values resulting from the correction of the HMWY-LGHN series cap
impedance.

Additional Information: (not included in the specification:

The rated currents for the following series compensated lines:
o LGHN-HMWY – 2000 A
o HMWY-MPSN #2 –2750 A
o HMWAY-CDHL – 2000 A
o CDHL-PPLS – 2000 A
Questions:

(Reference 1: Exhibit B MPSN210001 Series Capacitor C506 Specifications)
1. Question: Could you please confirm if the fault currents provided in Reference 1 are the total
fault current at each location? (I.e. they are not the current flowing through the series
capacitor circuit as a result of each fault?)
Answer: Yes, all the different fault currents listed in section 5.4, 5.5 and 5.6 are to our
knowledge the total fault currents for each location. If your modeling of the system
reveals something different we assume you will let us know so we can look into it.

ADDENDUM NO 4.

Acknowledgement of receipt of this Addendum No 4. shall be entered on “5. Pricing
Data” tab within Power Advocate. Failure to provide such acknowledgement may
render the bid as non-responsive and subject to rejection.

Dated: January 24, 2022

ADDENDUM NO 5.

To: All prospective Respondents

Re: The 2022 Design Build and Install 525kV Series Capacitor Bank Midpoint Station
Zycus # 1313255353

The following items are addressed in this Addendum No 5:
Clarification:
The Construction Work Schedule has been updated. As a result, the dates in the
Project Construction Agreement and the Exhibit C Special Conditions have been
updated to match. Please see the new and revised attachments (listed below).
Attachments:
The following files has been included in the Attachments section:
1. 2022-02-02 Reference_MPSN210001 Construction Work Schedule.xlsx
2. Revised 2-2-22_Exhibit C Special Conditions.pdf
3. Revised 2-2-22_Project Construction Agreement LGL138.docx

Please initiate a private eForum message to me to acknowledge receipt of this
Addendum No 5.

Dated: February 3, 2022
CSF026 (5/16/2016) IPC
Independent Contractors Request for
Unescorted Physical or Electronic Access
Independent Contractor’s employees will not be permitted unescorted access to Idaho Power Company without the successful
passing in the previous 6 months of criminal background check, identity verification, drug test, and applicable training. Return
completed form to [e-mail] or fax to [phone].
CONTRACT WORKER INFORMATION
Date: Independent Contractor Company Name:
Contract Worker: First Name Middle Initial Last Name
Contract Worker has: Date Successfully Passed:
Successfully Passed Drug Test using criteria listed below
Successfully Passed Seven Year Criminal Background Check using criteria listed below
Successfully Passed Identity Verification using criteria listed below
By signing below Independent Contractor hereby warrants that all statements contained herein are true and correct.
Independent Contractor also hereby warrants that its employee has successfully passed a drug test, seven-year criminal
background check, and identity verification, utilizing provided criteria below or hereby requests an exception in the space
above. Independent Contractor agrees to update each request for access at least every six and a half years after the initial
request, for cause, or at the request of Idaho Power. Further, Independent Contractor agrees to indemnify and hold harmless
Idaho Power from and against any claim of damages and/or imposition of fines resulting from Independent Contractor’s
negligent and/or willful provision of false or inaccurate information on, or in relation to, this request. Independent Contractor
agrees to permit Idaho Power (with reasonable prior notice to Independent Contractor) to audit Independent Contractor’s
records and processes that support this certification.
Signature of Authorized Representative of Independent Contractor Date
Printed Name and Title of Authorized Representative of Independent Contractor
MINIMUM SCREENING CRITERIA – Must have been completed within the previous 6 months:
If Independent Contractor is requesting an exception to the Drug Test, Identify Verification, or the Criminal Background Check, please note reason for requested
exception. Exceptions must be requested for identified felony or misdemeanor convictions involving: (a) violence to persons/property, (b) theft or fraud, (c)
drug/alcohol, or (d) traffic/other. Independent Contractor shall not allow persons who have not met Idaho Power’s criteria to perform work, unless Independent
Contractor has received assent, in writing, from Idaho Power.
Drug Test Criteria:
Drug test shall be a five (5) Panel Drug Test, which should be recognizable at testing labs as a “SamHSA5 panel at 50NG – THC cut-off.”
Identity Verification:
Verify that the name, gender, birth date, and social security number all match up to each other.
Seven Year Criminal Background Check Criteria:
County Criminal — A search in all provided and developed (from SSN Trace) counties of residence, employment, and school attendance for previous 7 years
using all names provided and developed (from SSN Trace).
National Criminal Record Locator — Used to identify jurisdictions in which an applicant may have a criminal record or is a registered sex offender. This is a
search of a proprietary criminal database containing more than 400 million records. The records comprising the database are obtained from county, state,
and federal entities as well as incarceration and law enforcement records. In addition, the database includes OFAC lists, FBI Most Wanted, Fugitive Lists from
ten federal agencies (such as US Marshals, US Secret Service, US DEA), and fugitive lists from numerous state and local law enforcement agencies. This search
is a “locator” device designed to identify jurisdictions in which an applicant potentially has a criminal record or is a registered sexual offender. As employment
decisions should not be made based on this database information, a search will automatically be conducted in the originating jurisdiction if one or more
possible records are found. This locator searches records from the past 7 years using the applicant’s first name, last name, and date of birth.
[ ECP 027, Annex A, 2/6/2018]
IPC Change Order - LGL 034 (6/05/18) Page 1 of 1
IPC KIT No.: Change Order #
Effective Date of this
Change Order
Change Order Title Work Order Number
Agreement Title
Agreement Date Contractor
The Parties Agree To The Following:
DESCRIPTION OF CHANGE
MODIFIED EXHIBITS
No Modified Exhibits
Modified Exhibits attached and hereby incorporated into this Change Order include:
ADJUSTMENT TO CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT TO CONTRACT TIME
Adjustment to the Contract Price for this Change Order is as follows:
No adjustment to the Contract Price. (Option 1)
By unit prices pursuant to General Conditions GC-17.3.a. The units and
quantities are described in “Description” above. The new total Unit Price
Estimate is $ . The new total Unit Price Estimate amount may not be
exceeded by Contractor without the prior written approval of IPC. The new
Unit Price Estimate including this Change Order is $ . (Option 2)
By fixed lump sum pursuant to General Conditions GC-17.3.b. The fixed lump
sum dollar adjustment to the Contract Price is $ . The new lump sum
amount including this Change Order is $ . (Option 3)
Updated total Contract Price (this amount includes this Change Order
and all other fully executed Change Orders): $ .
Adjustment to the Approved Schedule for this Change Order is
in accordance with General Conditions section GC-8, “Time
and Order of Completion” and is as follows:
The Approved Schedule remains unchanged (no change to
Contract Time, Guaranteed Substantial Completion Date,
and/or Final Completion, phased or interim completion
dates).
The Approved Schedule, Contract Time, Milestone Dates,
Phased Completion, Guaranteed Substantial Completion
Date, and/or Final Completion Date is adjusted as follows:
Except as provided in this Change Order, all terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, as amended from time to time, remain unchanged.
Prepared By:
Accepted By: , Contractor
Contractor’s Signature
Title
Approved by , IPAR
Approved by , IPC
Idaho Power Company Signature
Title
IPC Conditional Waiver & Release Upon Progress Payment LGL 125 (3/9/16)
Page 1 of 1
CONDITIONAL WAIVER AND RELEASE UPON PROGRESS PAYMENT
Upon receipt by the undersigned of payment (either in the form of a check, wire transfer, ACH deposit or
other tender, i.e., “Progress Payment”) from Idaho Power Company in the sum of $ and made
payable to (“Contractor”), and upon acceptance
of the Progress Payment by Contractor, either upon completion of the wire transfer or ACH deposit or
when the check has been properly endorsed and has been paid by the bank upon which it is drawn, this
document shall become effective to release and Contractor shall be deemed to waive and release any notice
of any mechanic’s lien, materialman’s lien, construction lien, design professional’s lien, or similar lien, any
stop notice or bonded stop notice, or any bond right or claim the undersigned has on the job of Idaho
Power Company located at:
(Project Description and Location)
to the extent described in this document. This release covers the final payment for labor, services,
equipment, or materials furnished by Contractor to the job of Idaho Power Company referenced above
through only and does not cover any retention retained before or after the release date;
extras furnished before the release date for which payment has not been received; extras or items
furnished after the release date. Rights based upon work performed or items furnished under a written
change order which has been fully executed by the parties prior to the release date are covered by this
release unless specifically reserved by the claimant in this release. This release of any mechanic’s,
materialman’s, construction, design professional’s, or similar lien, stop notice or bonded stop notice, or
bond right or claim shall not otherwise affect the contract rights, including rights between parties to the
contract based upon a rescission, abandonment, or breach of the contract, or the right of the undersigned to
recover compensation for furnished labor, services, equipment or material that was not compensated by
the Progress Payment. Before any recipient of this document relies on it, said party should verify evidence
of payment to the undersigned.
Dated this day of , 20 .
CONTRACTOR
By
IPC KIT #:
IPC Asset Suite No.:
(Amount Paid)
(Contractor Name)
[ ECP 027, Annex A, 2/6/2018]
CID #54326 Certificate of Substantial Completion LGL 153 (2/5/18)
Page 1 of 1
White – Contract File Yellow – Project Leader Pink – Contractor
Certificate of Substantial Completion
Work Order:

Project Description:

Project Leader:

Construction Manager:

Engineer/Designer:

Inspector:

Contractor:

Contractor Foreman:

1. This Certificate of Substantial Completion (“Certificate”) applies to:
All Work
OR
The following Milestones:
2. Idaho Power Company (IPC) and Contractor inspected the Work subject to this Certificate (as stated in Section 1
above) and IPC confirms that Contractor achieved Substantial Completion on:
3. A preliminary list of items to be completed or corrected by Contractor prior to the Final Completion Date is attached
hereto and incorporated by this reference (“Punch List”). The Punch List may not be
all-inclusive, and the failure to include an item does not alter the responsibility of Contractor to complete all the
Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
4. In accordance with the Special Conditions (Exhibit C to the Agreement):
As-Built Documentation reflecting all deviations from the original documentation was submitted on:
OR

As-Built Documentation reflecting all deviations from the original documentation shall be provided upon Final
Completion of the Work.
This Certificate does not constitute an acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents nor is it a waiver
of any of Contractor’s obligations as set forth in the Contract Documents.
Contractor certifies Substantial Completion:

Contractor’s Authorized Representative Signature By (Print Name) Date Certified
Idaho Power Company accepts this Certificate of Substantial Completion:

IPAR Signature By (Print Name) Date Accepted

CID# 56230 Notice of Final Completion LGL 160 (2/5/18)

White – Contract File Yellow – Project Leader Pink – Contractor
Notice of Final Completion
KIT #

Project Description:

Idaho Power Authorized Representative:

Contractor:

Pursuant to Section 21 of the General Conditions for Construction Services, Contractor certifies to IPC as follows:
Required
Substantial Completion has occurred; and
All Punch List Items, site clean-up, and Restoration have been completed; and
All applicable Record Documents have been provided to, and to Contractor’s knowledge accepted by, IPC; and
Contractor has delivered to IPC a final certificate of occupancy and all other governmental approvals necessary for
IPC to occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended purpose; and
If Applicable
Contractor has provided IPC with four copies of Operations and Maintenance manuals
Contactor has returned to IPC all IPC property (including, but not limited to, keys and access badges/cards); and
Contractor has completed all Work and other actions set forth in Change Orders.
As-Built Documentation reflecting all deviations from the original documentation.
The date upon which Contractor completed all Work was:

Authorized Contractor Signature By (PRINT NAME) Date Certified
Idaho Power Company accepts this Notice of Final Completion
Idaho Power Company does NOT accept this Notice of Final Completion
Noted
Deficiencies:

Upon resolution of the deficiencies noted above, Contractor shall resubmit the Notice of Final Completion.

Authorized IPC Signature By (PRINT NAME) Date
(DATE OF FINAL COMPLETION)

IPC Conditional Waiver & Release Upon Final Payment LGL 036 (3/9/2016)
Page 1 of 1
CONDITIONAL WAIVER AND RELEASE UPON FINAL PAYMENT
Upon receipt by the undersigned of payment (either in the form of a check, wire transfer, ACH deposit or
other tender, i.e., “Final Payment”) from Idaho Power Company in the sum of $ and made payable
to (“Contractor”), and upon acceptance of the Final
Payment by Contractor, either upon completion of the wire transfer or ACH deposit or when the check has
been properly endorsed and has been paid by the bank upon which it is drawn, this document shall become
effective to release and the undersigned shall be deemed to waive and release any notice of any mechanic’s
lien, materialman’s lien, construction lien, design professional’s lien, or similar lien, any stop notice or
bonded stop notice, or any bond right or claim the undersigned has on the job of Idaho Power Company
located at:
(Project Description and Location)
to the extent described in this document. This release covers the Final Payment for labor, services,
equipment, or materials furnished by Contractor to the job of Idaho Power Company referenced above and
does not cover Disputed Claims listed below, if any. Rights based upon work performed or items furnished
under a written change order which has been fully executed by the parties prior to the release date are
covered by this release unless specifically reserved by the claimant in this release. This release of any
mechanic’s, materialman’s, construction, design professional’s, or similar lien, stop notice or bonded stop
notice, or bond right or claim shall not otherwise affect the contract rights, including rights between parties
to the contract based upon a rescission, abandonment, or breach of the contract. Before any recipient of
this document relies on it, the recipient should verify evidence of payment to the undersigned. Contractor
represents and covenants, and will take all actions necessary to terminate any claim of a lien filed at any
county recorder’s office elsewhere, that it has already paid or will use the money received from the Final
Payment promptly to pay in full all laborers, subcontractors, materialmen, and suppliers for all work,
services, materials, or equipment that are the subject of this waiver and release.
DISPUTED CLAIMS: The following invoices, applications for payment, retention, or change orders are
reserved by Idaho Power Company from this Final Payment (be specific):
Dated this day of , 20 .
CONTRACTOR
By
IPC KIT #:
IPC Asset Suite No.:
(Amount Paid)
(Contractor Name)
[ ECP 027, Annex A, 2/6/2018]
Annex A - Form of Incident Investigation Report
Employee Full Name (First, MI, Last):Occupation/Job Title:Years in Job Title:
Employee Full Name (First, MI, Last):Occupation/Job Title:Years in Job Title:
Employee Full Name (First, MI, Last):Occupation/Job Title:Years in Job Title:
WHAT
happened?
Provide a factual, chonological description of the incident:
Job Name:Location of job where incident occurred:
Job Address:City:State, Zip:
Date of Incident:Time of Incident:
Time Reported to IPC:Whom did you contact at IPC:
Corrective
Action Taken
Explain actions you have taken or plan to take to prevent similar incidents (include the date actions were taken or will be taken):
Injury/Damage
List any injuries and/or damages resulting from the incident:
Supervisor:Occupation/Job Title:Date:
Project Manager:Occupation/Job Title:Date:
Safety Manager:Occupation/Job Title:Date:
Signatures
WHO was
Involved?
WHERE did it
happen?
WHEN did it
happen?
[ ECP 027, Annex A, 2/6/2018]
CSF026 (5/16/2016) IPC
Independent Contractors Request for
Unescorted Physical or Electronic Access
Independent Contractor’s employees will not be permitted unescorted access to Idaho Power Company without the successful
passing in the previous 6 months of criminal background check, identity verification, drug test, and applicable training. Return
completed form to [e-mail] or fax to [phone].
CONTRACT WORKER INFORMATION
Date: Independent Contractor Company Name:
Contract Worker: First Name Middle Initial Last Name
Contract Worker has: Date Successfully Passed:
Successfully Passed Drug Test using criteria listed below
Successfully Passed Seven Year Criminal Background Check using criteria listed below
Successfully Passed Identity Verification using criteria listed below
By signing below Independent Contractor hereby warrants that all statements contained herein are true and correct.
Independent Contractor also hereby warrants that its employee has successfully passed a drug test, seven-year criminal
background check, and identity verification, utilizing provided criteria below or hereby requests an exception in the space
above. Independent Contractor agrees to update each request for access at least every six and a half years after the initial
request, for cause, or at the request of Idaho Power. Further, Independent Contractor agrees to indemnify and hold harmless
Idaho Power from and against any claim of damages and/or imposition of fines resulting from Independent Contractor’s
negligent and/or willful provision of false or inaccurate information on, or in relation to, this request. Independent Contractor
agrees to permit Idaho Power (with reasonable prior notice to Independent Contractor) to audit Independent Contractor’s
records and processes that support this certification.
Signature of Authorized Representative of Independent Contractor Date
Printed Name and Title of Authorized Representative of Independent Contractor
MINIMUM SCREENING CRITERIA – Must have been completed within the previous 6 months:
If Independent Contractor is requesting an exception to the Drug Test, Identify Verification, or the Criminal Background Check, please note reason for requested
exception. Exceptions must be requested for identified felony or misdemeanor convictions involving: (a) violence to persons/property, (b) theft or fraud, (c)
drug/alcohol, or (d) traffic/other. Independent Contractor shall not allow persons who have not met Idaho Power’s criteria to perform work, unless Independent
Contractor has received assent, in writing, from Idaho Power.
Drug Test Criteria:
Drug test shall be a five (5) Panel Drug Test, which should be recognizable at testing labs as a “SamHSA5 panel at 50NG – THC cut-off.”
Identity Verification:
Verify that the name, gender, birth date, and social security number all match up to each other.
Seven Year Criminal Background Check Criteria:
County Criminal — A search in all provided and developed (from SSN Trace) counties of residence, employment, and school attendance for previous 7 years
using all names provided and developed (from SSN Trace).
National Criminal Record Locator — Used to identify jurisdictions in which an applicant may have a criminal record or is a registered sex offender. This is a
search of a proprietary criminal database containing more than 400 million records. The records comprising the database are obtained from county, state,
and federal entities as well as incarceration and law enforcement records. In addition, the database includes OFAC lists, FBI Most Wanted, Fugitive Lists from
ten federal agencies (such as US Marshals, US Secret Service, US DEA), and fugitive lists from numerous state and local law enforcement agencies. This search
is a “locator” device designed to identify jurisdictions in which an applicant potentially has a criminal record or is a registered sexual offender. As employment
decisions should not be made based on this database information, a search will automatically be conducted in the originating jurisdiction if one or more
possible records are found. This locator searches records from the past 7 years using the applicant’s first name, last name, and date of birth.
[ ECP 027, Annex A, 2/6/2018]
IPC Change Order - LGL 034 (6/05/18) Page 1 of 1
IPC KIT No.: Change Order #
Effective Date of this
Change Order
Change Order Title Work Order Number
Agreement Title
Agreement Date Contractor
The Parties Agree To The Following:
DESCRIPTION OF CHANGE
MODIFIED EXHIBITS
No Modified Exhibits
Modified Exhibits attached and hereby incorporated into this Change Order include:
ADJUSTMENT TO CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT TO CONTRACT TIME
Adjustment to the Contract Price for this Change Order is as follows:
No adjustment to the Contract Price. (Option 1)
By unit prices pursuant to General Conditions GC-17.3.a. The units and
quantities are described in “Description” above. The new total Unit Price
Estimate is $ . The new total Unit Price Estimate amount may not be
exceeded by Contractor without the prior written approval of IPC. The new
Unit Price Estimate including this Change Order is $ . (Option 2)
By fixed lump sum pursuant to General Conditions GC-17.3.b. The fixed lump
sum dollar adjustment to the Contract Price is $ . The new lump sum
amount including this Change Order is $ . (Option 3)
Updated total Contract Price (this amount includes this Change Order
and all other fully executed Change Orders): $ .
Adjustment to the Approved Schedule for this Change Order is
in accordance with General Conditions section GC-8, “Time
and Order of Completion” and is as follows:
The Approved Schedule remains unchanged (no change to
Contract Time, Guaranteed Substantial Completion Date,
and/or Final Completion, phased or interim completion
dates).
The Approved Schedule, Contract Time, Milestone Dates,
Phased Completion, Guaranteed Substantial Completion
Date, and/or Final Completion Date is adjusted as follows:
Except as provided in this Change Order, all terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, as amended from time to time, remain unchanged.
Prepared By:
Accepted By: , Contractor
Contractor’s Signature
Title
Approved by , IPAR
Approved by , IPC
Idaho Power Company Signature
Title
IPC Conditional Waiver & Release Upon Progress Payment LGL 125 (3/9/16)
Page 1 of 1
CONDITIONAL WAIVER AND RELEASE UPON PROGRESS PAYMENT
Upon receipt by the undersigned of payment (either in the form of a check, wire transfer, ACH deposit or
other tender, i.e., “Progress Payment”) from Idaho Power Company in the sum of $ and made
payable to (“Contractor”), and upon acceptance
of the Progress Payment by Contractor, either upon completion of the wire transfer or ACH deposit or
when the check has been properly endorsed and has been paid by the bank upon which it is drawn, this
document shall become effective to release and Contractor shall be deemed to waive and release any notice
of any mechanic’s lien, materialman’s lien, construction lien, design professional’s lien, or similar lien, any
stop notice or bonded stop notice, or any bond right or claim the undersigned has on the job of Idaho
Power Company located at:
(Project Description and Location)
to the extent described in this document. This release covers the final payment for labor, services,
equipment, or materials furnished by Contractor to the job of Idaho Power Company referenced above
through only and does not cover any retention retained before or after the release date;
extras furnished before the release date for which payment has not been received; extras or items
furnished after the release date. Rights based upon work performed or items furnished under a written
change order which has been fully executed by the parties prior to the release date are covered by this
release unless specifically reserved by the claimant in this release. This release of any mechanic’s,
materialman’s, construction, design professional’s, or similar lien, stop notice or bonded stop notice, or
bond right or claim shall not otherwise affect the contract rights, including rights between parties to the
contract based upon a rescission, abandonment, or breach of the contract, or the right of the undersigned to
recover compensation for furnished labor, services, equipment or material that was not compensated by
the Progress Payment. Before any recipient of this document relies on it, said party should verify evidence
of payment to the undersigned.
Dated this day of , 20 .
CONTRACTOR
By
IPC KIT #:
IPC Asset Suite No.:
(Amount Paid)
(Contractor Name)
[ ECP 027, Annex A, 2/6/2018]
CID #54326 Certificate of Substantial Completion LGL 153 (2/5/18)
Page 1 of 1
White – Contract File Yellow – Project Leader Pink – Contractor
Certificate of Substantial Completion
Work Order:

Project Description:

Project Leader:

Construction Manager:

Engineer/Designer:

Inspector:

Contractor:

Contractor Foreman:

1. This Certificate of Substantial Completion (“Certificate”) applies to:
All Work
OR
The following Milestones:
2. Idaho Power Company (IPC) and Contractor inspected the Work subject to this Certificate (as stated in Section 1
above) and IPC confirms that Contractor achieved Substantial Completion on:
3. A preliminary list of items to be completed or corrected by Contractor prior to the Final Completion Date is attached
hereto and incorporated by this reference (“Punch List”). The Punch List may not be
all-inclusive, and the failure to include an item does not alter the responsibility of Contractor to complete all the
Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
4. In accordance with the Special Conditions (Exhibit C to the Agreement):
As-Built Documentation reflecting all deviations from the original documentation was submitted on:
OR

As-Built Documentation reflecting all deviations from the original documentation shall be provided upon Final
Completion of the Work.
This Certificate does not constitute an acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents nor is it a waiver
of any of Contractor’s obligations as set forth in the Contract Documents.
Contractor certifies Substantial Completion:

Contractor’s Authorized Representative Signature By (Print Name) Date Certified
Idaho Power Company accepts this Certificate of Substantial Completion:

IPAR Signature By (Print Name) Date Accepted

CID# 56230 Notice of Final Completion LGL 160 (2/5/18)

White – Contract File Yellow – Project Leader Pink – Contractor
Notice of Final Completion
KIT #

Project Description:

Idaho Power Authorized Representative:

Contractor:

Pursuant to Section 21 of the General Conditions for Construction Services, Contractor certifies to IPC as follows:
Required
Substantial Completion has occurred; and
All Punch List Items, site clean-up, and Restoration have been completed; and
All applicable Record Documents have been provided to, and to Contractor’s knowledge accepted by, IPC; and
Contractor has delivered to IPC a final certificate of occupancy and all other governmental approvals necessary for
IPC to occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended purpose; and
If Applicable
Contractor has provided IPC with four copies of Operations and Maintenance manuals
Contactor has returned to IPC all IPC property (including, but not limited to, keys and access badges/cards); and
Contractor has completed all Work and other actions set forth in Change Orders.
As-Built Documentation reflecting all deviations from the original documentation.
The date upon which Contractor completed all Work was:

Authorized Contractor Signature By (PRINT NAME) Date Certified
Idaho Power Company accepts this Notice of Final Completion
Idaho Power Company does NOT accept this Notice of Final Completion
Noted
Deficiencies:

Upon resolution of the deficiencies noted above, Contractor shall resubmit the Notice of Final Completion.

Authorized IPC Signature By (PRINT NAME) Date
(DATE OF FINAL COMPLETION)

IPC Conditional Waiver & Release Upon Final Payment LGL 036 (3/9/2016)
Page 1 of 1
CONDITIONAL WAIVER AND RELEASE UPON FINAL PAYMENT
Upon receipt by the undersigned of payment (either in the form of a check, wire transfer, ACH deposit or
other tender, i.e., “Final Payment”) from Idaho Power Company in the sum of $ and made payable
to (“Contractor”), and upon acceptance of the Final
Payment by Contractor, either upon completion of the wire transfer or ACH deposit or when the check has
been properly endorsed and has been paid by the bank upon which it is drawn, this document shall become
effective to release and the undersigned shall be deemed to waive and release any notice of any mechanic’s
lien, materialman’s lien, construction lien, design professional’s lien, or similar lien, any stop notice or
bonded stop notice, or any bond right or claim the undersigned has on the job of Idaho Power Company
located at:
(Project Description and Location)
to the extent described in this document. This release covers the Final Payment for labor, services,
equipment, or materials furnished by Contractor to the job of Idaho Power Company referenced above and
does not cover Disputed Claims listed below, if any. Rights based upon work performed or items furnished
under a written change order which has been fully executed by the parties prior to the release date are
covered by this release unless specifically reserved by the claimant in this release. This release of any
mechanic’s, materialman’s, construction, design professional’s, or similar lien, stop notice or bonded stop
notice, or bond right or claim shall not otherwise affect the contract rights, including rights between parties
to the contract based upon a rescission, abandonment, or breach of the contract. Before any recipient of
this document relies on it, the recipient should verify evidence of payment to the undersigned. Contractor
represents and covenants, and will take all actions necessary to terminate any claim of a lien filed at any
county recorder’s office elsewhere, that it has already paid or will use the money received from the Final
Payment promptly to pay in full all laborers, subcontractors, materialmen, and suppliers for all work,
services, materials, or equipment that are the subject of this waiver and release.
DISPUTED CLAIMS: The following invoices, applications for payment, retention, or change orders are
reserved by Idaho Power Company from this Final Payment (be specific):
Dated this day of , 20 .
CONTRACTOR
By
IPC KIT #:
IPC Asset Suite No.:
(Amount Paid)
(Contractor Name)
[ ECP 027, Annex A, 2/6/2018]
Annex A - Form of Incident Investigation Report
Employee Full Name (First, MI, Last):Occupation/Job Title:Years in Job Title:
Employee Full Name (First, MI, Last):Occupation/Job Title:Years in Job Title:
Employee Full Name (First, MI, Last):Occupation/Job Title:Years in Job Title:
WHAT
happened?
Provide a factual, chonological description of the incident:
Job Name:Location of job where incident occurred:
Job Address:City:State, Zip:
Date of Incident:Time of Incident:
Time Reported to IPC:Whom did you contact at IPC:
Corrective
Action Taken
Explain actions you have taken or plan to take to prevent similar incidents (include the date actions were taken or will be taken):
Injury/Damage
List any injuries and/or damages resulting from the incident:
Supervisor:Occupation/Job Title:Date:
Project Manager:Occupation/Job Title:Date:
Safety Manager:Occupation/Job Title:Date:
Signatures
WHO was
Involved?
WHERE did it
happen?
WHEN did it
happen?
[ ECP 027, Annex A, 2/6/2018]
CSF026 (5/16/2016) IPC
Independent Contractors Request for
Unescorted Physical or Electronic Access
Independent Contractor’s employees will not be permitted unescorted access to Idaho Power Company without the successful
passing in the previous 6 months of criminal background check, identity verification, drug test, and applicable training. Return
completed form to [e-mail] or fax to [phone].
CONTRACT WORKER INFORMATION
Date: Independent Contractor Company Name:
Contract Worker: First Name Middle Initial Last Name
Contract Worker has: Date Successfully Passed:
Successfully Passed Drug Test using criteria listed below
Successfully Passed Seven Year Criminal Background Check using criteria listed below
Successfully Passed Identity Verification using criteria listed below
By signing below Independent Contractor hereby warrants that all statements contained herein are true and correct.
Independent Contractor also hereby warrants that its employee has successfully passed a drug test, seven-year criminal
background check, and identity verification, utilizing provided criteria below or hereby requests an exception in the space
above. Independent Contractor agrees to update each request for access at least every six and a half years after the initial
request, for cause, or at the request of Idaho Power. Further, Independent Contractor agrees to indemnify and hold harmless
Idaho Power from and against any claim of damages and/or imposition of fines resulting from Independent Contractor’s
negligent and/or willful provision of false or inaccurate information on, or in relation to, this request. Independent Contractor
agrees to permit Idaho Power (with reasonable prior notice to Independent Contractor) to audit Independent Contractor’s
records and processes that support this certification.
Signature of Authorized Representative of Independent Contractor Date
Printed Name and Title of Authorized Representative of Independent Contractor
MINIMUM SCREENING CRITERIA – Must have been completed within the previous 6 months:
If Independent Contractor is requesting an exception to the Drug Test, Identify Verification, or the Criminal Background Check, please note reason for requested
exception. Exceptions must be requested for identified felony or misdemeanor convictions involving: (a) violence to persons/property, (b) theft or fraud, (c)
drug/alcohol, or (d) traffic/other. Independent Contractor shall not allow persons who have not met Idaho Power’s criteria to perform work, unless Independent
Contractor has received assent, in writing, from Idaho Power.
Drug Test Criteria:
x Drug test shall be a five (5) Panel Drug Test, which should be recognizable at testing labs as a “SamHSA5 panel at 50NG – THC cut-off.”
Identity Verification:
x Verify that the name, gender, birth date, and social security number all match up to each other.
Seven Year Criminal Background Check Criteria:
x County Criminal — A search in all provided and developed (from SSN Trace) counties of residence, employment, and school attendance for previous 7 years
using all names provided and developed (from SSN Trace).
x National Criminal Record Locator — Used to identify jurisdictions in which an applicant may have a criminal record or is a registered sex offender. This is a
search of a proprietary criminal database containing more than 400 million records. The records comprising the database are obtained from county, state,
and federal entities as well as incarceration and law enforcement records. In addition, the database includes OFAC lists, FBI Most Wanted, Fugitive Lists from
ten federal agencies (such as US Marshals, US Secret Service, US DEA), and fugitive lists from numerous state and local law enforcement agencies. This search
is a “locator” device designed to identify jurisdictions in which an applicant potentially has a criminal record or is a registered sexual offender. As employment
decisions should not be made based on this database information, a search will automatically be conducted in the originating jurisdiction if one or more
possible records are found. This locator searches records from the past 7 years using the applicant’s first name, last name, and date of birth.
΀WϬϮϳ͕ŶŶĞdž͕ϮͬϲͬϮϬϭϴ΁
IPC Change Order - LGL 034 (6/05/18)
Page 1 of 1
IPC KIT No.: Change Order #
Effective Date of this
Change Order
Change Order Title Work Order Number
Agreement Title
Agreement Date Contractor
The Parties Agree To The Following:
DESCRIPTION OF CHANGE
MODIFIED EXHIBITS
No Modified Exhibits
Modified Exhibits attached and hereby incorporated into this Change Order include:
ADJUSTMENT TO CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT TO CONTRACT TIME
Adjustment to the Contract Price for this Change Order is as follows:
No adjustment to the Contract Price. (Option 1)
By unit prices pursuant to General Conditions GC-17.3.a. The units and
quantities are described in “Description” above. The new total Unit Price
Estimate is $ . The new total Unit Price Estimate amount may not be
exceeded by Contractor without the prior written approval of IPC. The new
Unit Price Estimate including this Change Order is $ . (Option 2)
By fixed lump sum pursuant to General Conditions GC-17.3.b. The fixed lump
sum dollar adjustment to the Contract Price is $ . The new lump sum
amount including this Change Order is $ . (Option 3)
Updated total Contract Price (this amount includes this Change Order
and all other fully executed Change Orders): $ .
Adjustment to the Approved Schedule for this Change Order is
in accordance with General Conditions section GC-8, “Time
and Order of Completion” and is as follows:
The Approved Schedule remains unchanged (no change to
Contract Time, Guaranteed Substantial Completion Date,
and/or Final Completion, phased or interim completion
dates).
The Approved Schedule, Contract Time, Milestone Dates,
Phased Completion, Guaranteed Substantial Completion
Date, and/or Final Completion Date is adjusted as follows:
Except as provided in this Change Order, all terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, as amended from time to time, remain unchanged.
Prepared By:
Accepted By: , Contractor
Contractor’s Signature
Title
Approved by , IPAR
Approved by , IPC
Idaho Power Company Signature
Title
IPC Conditional Waiver & Release Upon Progress Payment LGL 125 (3/9/16)
Page 1 of 1
CONDITIONAL WAIVER AND RELEASE UPON PROGRESS PAYMENT
Upon receipt by the undersigned of payment (either in the form of a check, wire transfer, ACH deposit or
other tender, i.e., “Progress Payment”) from Idaho Power Company in the sum of $ and made
payable to (“Contractor”), and upon acceptance
of the Progress Payment by Contractor, either upon completion of the wire transfer or ACH deposit or
when the check has been properly endorsed and has been paid by the bank upon which it is drawn, this
document shall become effective to release and Contractor shall be deemed to waive and release any notice
of any mechanic’s lien, materialman’s lien, construction lien, design professional’s lien, or similar lien, any
stop notice or bonded stop notice, or any bond right or claim the undersigned has on the job of Idaho
Power Company located at:
(Project Description and Location)
to the extent described in this document. This release covers the final payment for labor, services,
equipment, or materials furnished by Contractor to the job of Idaho Power Company referenced above
through only and does not cover any retention retained before or after the release date;
extras furnished before the release date for which payment has not been received; extras or items
furnished after the release date. Rights based upon work performed or items furnished under a written
change order which has been fully executed by the parties prior to the release date are covered by this
release unless specifically reserved by the claimant in this release. This release of any mechanic’s,
materialman’s, construction, design professional’s, or similar lien, stop notice or bonded stop notice, or
bond right or claim shall not otherwise affect the contract rights, including rights between parties to the
contract based upon a rescission, abandonment, or breach of the contract, or the right of the undersigned to
recover compensation for furnished labor, services, equipment or material that was not compensated by
the Progress Payment. Before any recipient of this document relies on it, said party should verify evidence
of payment to the undersigned.
Dated this day of , 20 .
CONTRACTOR
By
IPC KIT #:
IPC Asset Suite No.:
(Amount Paid)
(Contractor Name)
΀WϬϮϳ͕ŶŶĞdž͕ϮͬϲͬϮϬϭϴ΁
CID #54326 Certificate of Substantial Completion LGL 153 (2/5/18)
Page 1 of 1
White – Contract File Yellow – Project Leader Pink – Contractor
Certificate of Substantial Completion
Work Order: Project Description:
Project Leader: Construction Manager:
Engineer/Designer: Inspector:
Contractor: Contractor Foreman:
1. This Certificate of Substantial Completion (“Certificate”) applies to:
All Work
OR
The following Milestones:
2. Idaho Power Company (IPC) and Contractor inspected the Work subject to this Certificate (as stated in Section 1
above) and IPC confirms that Contractor achieved Substantial Completion on:
3. A preliminary list of items to be completed or corrected by Contractor prior to the Final Completion Date is attached
hereto and incorporated by this reference (“Punch List”). The Punch List may not be
all-inclusive, and the failure to include an item does not alter the responsibility of Contractor to complete all the
Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
4. In accordance with the Special Conditions (Exhibit C to the Agreement):
As-Built Documentation reflecting all deviations from the original documentation was submitted on:
OR

As-Built Documentation reflecting all deviations from the original documentation shall be provided upon Final
Completion of the Work.
This Certificate does not constitute an acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents nor is it a waiver
of any of Contractor’s obligations as set forth in the Contract Documents.
Contractor certifies Substantial Completion:

Contractor’s Authorized Representative Signature By (Print Name) Date Certified
Idaho Power Company accepts this Certificate of Substantial Completion:

IPAR Signature By (Print Name) Date Accepted

CID# 56230 Notice of Final Completion LGL 160 (2/5/18)

White – Contract File Yellow – Project Leader Pink – Contractor
Notice of Final Completion
KIT #

Project Description:

Idaho Power Authorized Representative:

Contractor:

Pursuant to Section 21 of the General Conditions for Construction Services, Contractor certifies to IPC as follows:
Required
Substantial Completion has occurred; and
All Punch List Items, site clean-up, and Restoration have been completed; and
All applicable Record Documents have been provided to, and to Contractor’s knowledge accepted by, IPC; and
Contractor has delivered to IPC a final certificate of occupancy and all other governmental approvals necessary for
IPC to occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended purpose; and
If Applicable
Contractor has provided IPC with four copies of Operations and Maintenance manuals
Contactor has returned to IPC all IPC property (including, but not limited to, keys and access badges/cards); and
Contractor has completed all Work and other actions set forth in Change Orders.
As-Built Documentation reflecting all deviations from the original documentation.
The date upon which Contractor completed all Work was:

Authorized Contractor Signature By (PRINT NAME) Date Certified
Idaho Power Company accepts this Notice of Final Completion
Idaho Power Company does NOT accept this Notice of Final Completion
Noted
Deficiencies:

Upon resolution of the deficiencies noted above, Contractor shall resubmit the Notice of Final Completion.

Authorized IPC Signature By (PRINT NAME) Date
(DATE OF FINAL COMPLETION)

IPC Conditional Waiver & Release Upon Final Payment LGL 036 (3/9/2016)
Page 1 of 1
CONDITIONAL WAIVER AND RELEASE UPON FINAL PAYMENT
Upon receipt by the undersigned of payment (either in the form of a check, wire transfer, ACH deposit or
other tender, i.e., “Final Payment”) from Idaho Power Company in the sum of $ and made payable
to (“Contractor”), and upon acceptance of the Final
Payment by Contractor, either upon completion of the wire transfer or ACH deposit or when the check has
been properly endorsed and has been paid by the bank upon which it is drawn, this document shall become
effective to release and the undersigned shall be deemed to waive and release any notice of any mechanic’s
lien, materialman’s lien, construction lien, design professional’s lien, or similar lien, any stop notice or
bonded stop notice, or any bond right or claim the undersigned has on the job of Idaho Power Company
located at:
(Project Description and Location)
to the extent described in this document. This release covers the Final Payment for labor, services,
equipment, or materials furnished by Contractor to the job of Idaho Power Company referenced above and
does not cover Disputed Claims listed below, if any. Rights based upon work performed or items furnished
under a written change order which has been fully executed by the parties prior to the release date are
covered by this release unless specifically reserved by the claimant in this release. This release of any
mechanic’s, materialman’s, construction, design professional’s, or similar lien, stop notice or bonded stop
notice, or bond right or claim shall not otherwise affect the contract rights, including rights between parties
to the contract based upon a rescission, abandonment, or breach of the contract. Before any recipient of
this document relies on it, the recipient should verify evidence of payment to the undersigned. Contractor
represents and covenants, and will take all actions necessary to terminate any claim of a lien filed at any
county recorder’s office elsewhere, that it has already paid or will use the money received from the Final
Payment promptly to pay in full all laborers, subcontractors, m aterialmen, and suppliers for all work,
services, materials, or equipment that are the subject of this waiver and release.
DISPUTED CLAIMS: The following invoices, applications for payment, retention, or change orders are
reserved by Idaho Power Company from this Final Payment (be specific):
Dated this day of , 20 .
CONTRACTOR
By
IPC KIT #:
IPC Asset Suite No.:
(Amount Paid)
(Contractor Name)
΀WϬϮϳ͕ŶŶĞdž͕ϮͬϲͬϮϬϭϴ΁
Annex A - Form of Incident Investigation Report
Employee Full Name (First, MI, Last): Occupation/Job Title: Years in Job Title:
Employee Full Name (First, MI, Last): Occupation/Job Title: Years in Job Title:
Employee Full Name (First, MI, Last): Occupation/Job Title: Years in Job Title:
WHAT
happened?
Provide a factual, chonological description of the incident:
Job Name: Location of job where incident occurred:
Job Address: City: State, Zip:
Date of Incident: Time of Incident:
Time Reported to IPC: Whom did you contact at IPC:
Corrective
Action Taken
Explain actions you have taken or plan to take to prevent similar incidents (include the date actions were taken or will be taken):
Injury/Damage
List any injuries and/or damages resulting from the incident:
Supervisor: Occupation/Job Title: Date:
Project Manager: Occupation/Job Title: Date:
Safety Manager: Occupation/Job Title: Date:
Signatures
WHO was
Involved?
WHERE did it
happen?
WHEN did it
happen?
΀WϬϮϳ͕ŶŶĞdž͕ϮͬϲͬϮϬϭϴ΁
Exhibit A
General Conditions For Construction Services

TABLE OF CONTENTS
GC‐1 DEFINITIONS .................................................................................................................................................... 2 
GC‐2 IPC’S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE ................................................................................................... 5 
GC‐3 CONTRACTOR’S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE .............................................................................. 6 
GC‐4 IPC’S RESPONSIBILITIES .............................................................................................................................. 6 
GC‐5 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITY ............................................................................................................ 7 
GC‐6 CONTRACTOR INFORMED AS TO CONDITIONS ................................................................................. 11 
GC‐7 INTERPRETATION AND MODIFICATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ..................................... 11 
GC‐8 TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION ..................................................................................................... 12 
GC‐9 SCHEDULE OF VALUES OR PROGRESS PAYMENT SCHEDULE ....................................................... 14 
GC‐10 UNIT PRICE WORK AND ESTIMATED QUANTITIES ......................................................................... 14 
GC‐11 SUBMITTALS ................................................................................................................................................. 15 
GC‐12 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION ........................................................................................................................ 16 
GC‐13 INSPECTION, COVERED WORK, DEFECTIVE WORK, AND RIGHT OF ACCESS .......................... 17 
GC‐14 IPC SUSPENSION OF WORK ...................................................................................................................... 18 
GC‐15 DELAY AND DELAY CLAIMS ...................................................................................................................... 18 
GC‐16 ADDITIONAL WORK .................................................................................................................................... 20 
GC‐17 CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL WORK .......................................................................................................... 20 
GC‐18 DISPUTE RESOLUTION ............................................................................................................................... 22 
GC‐19 RETAINAGE AND PROGRESS PAYMENTS ............................................................................................. 23 
GC‐20 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION ................................................................................................................... 24 
GC‐21 FINAL COMPLETION ................................................................................................................................... 25 
GC‐22 FINAL PAYMENT .......................................................................................................................................... 26 
GC‐23 WARRANTY OF TITLE/ RISK OF LOSS/WARRANTY OF WORKMANSHIP AND QUALITY .... 26 
GC‐24 COLLATERAL WORK ................................................................................................................................... 28 
GC‐25 REGULATIONS AND PERMITS .................................................................................................................. 28 
GC‐26 EASEMENT AGREEMENTS ......................................................................................................................... 29 
GC‐27 UNDERGROUND UTILITIES ...................................................................................................................... 29 
GC‐28 INFRINGEMENT OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS; LICENSES .......................................... 29 
GC‐29 REMOVAL OF EQUIPMENT ....................................................................................................................... 29 
GC‐30 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT ................................................................................................................... 29 
GC‐31 IPC’S RIGHT TO TERMINATION FOR CONVENIENCE ....................................................................... 30 
GC‐32 IPC’S RIGHT TO TERMINATE THE AGREEMENT FOR CAUSE ........................................................ 30 
GC‐33 IPC’S RIGHT TO IMMEDIATELY TERMINATE OR SUSPEND ........................................................... 32 
GC‐34 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS, ARTIFACTS, WETLAND CONDITIONS, AND MATERIALS
BROUGHT TO WORK SITE .............................................................................................................................................. 32 
GC‐35 CONTRACTOR’S RECORD .......................................................................................................................... 33 
GC‐36 DATA SECURITY AND PROTECTION AND SECURITY SCREENING REQUIREMENTS ............. 33 
GC‐37 EDISON ELECTRIC INSTITUTE/OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ADMINISTRATION
PARTNERSHIP BEST PRACTICES FOR UTILITY CONTRACTORS RULES ......................................................... 37 

2023 Midpoint Substation Replace C506 Series Capacitor Bank                  General Conditions for Construction Services LGL 139 (11/01/2022) 
Page 2 of 37 
General Conditions for Construction Services
GC‐1 DEFINITIONS
GC-1.1 The definitions set forth below apply to all of the Contract Documents and are expressly
incorporated into the same by this reference:
“Access Roads” mean all roads which are used to gain access to the Work. “Access Roads” are in three
categories:
1. Existing roads to the Work that do not need to be improved.
2. Existing roads to the Work that must be improved.
3. Roads that are to be constructed as part of the Work.
“Addenda” means written or graphic instruments issued by IPC prior to the opening of bids and the
execution of the Agreement that clarify, correct, or modify the bidding and performance requirements
or the bidding documents by additions, deletions, clarifications, or corrections.
“Additional Work” means labor, services, materials, equipment, transportation, tools, or facilities
requested by IPC in writing, outside the original scope of Work, not inferable as within the Project,
and not included in the Contract Documents. Where the context requires, the term “Additional Work”
may also mean a modification that results in a reduction or deletion in Work.
“Application for Progress Payment” is defined in Section GC-19.2 of these General Conditions for
Construction Services (“General Conditions”).
“Approved Schedule” means all critical and interim progress dates, as set forth in the Agreement and
Contract Documents associated with Contractor’s performance of the Work. The Approved Schedule
includes all Milestone Dates (if applicable) and other critical dates, from Commencement Date to Final
Completion Date.
“Approved,” “Considered Necessary,” “Acceptable,” “Satisfactory,” or words of like import, mean
approved or considered necessary by, acceptable, or satisfactory to IPC’s Authorized Representative,
unless another meaning is plainly intended.
“Certificate of Substantial Completion” is defined in Section GC-20 of these General Conditions.
“Change Order” means a written agreement between IPC and Contractor that affects the Work, and
may affect the Guaranteed Substantial Completion Date, Approved Schedule, the Contract Price, and
such other terms of the Contract Documents as are agreed upon by the Parties.
“Collateral Work” means work being carried out by IPC through separate contractors or consultants,
IPC’s employees, or agents that may be at or near the Work site.
“Commencement Date” means the date Contractor commences the Work as specified by IPC or, if no
Commencement Date is specified, as promptly as practicable following the Effective Date of the
Agreement.
“Construction Roads” mean all roads improved or constructed for the convenience of or to
accommodate Contractor but are not a part of the Work.
“Contractor’s Authorized Representative” means a designated representative authorized to act with
full authority for Contractor. Contractor agrees to appoint a competent and qualified representative
and shall grant such representative authority to make binding and enforceable decisions for
Contractor. Contractor shall inform IPC in writing of the name, address, and telephone number of such
2023 Midpoint Substation Replace C506 Series Capacitor Bank                  General Conditions for Construction Services LGL 139 (11/01/2022) 
Page 3 of 37 
representative. IPC shall have the right to approve or reject Contractor’s Authorized Representative.
Contractor’s Authorized Representative shall not be changed without advance written notice to IPC
and approval of the replacement by IPC.
“Contract Documents” are defined in the Agreement, but shall in no event include submittals or
subsurface information. In case of any inconsistency, conflict or ambiguity among the Contract
Documents, Contractor shall promptly notify IPC of the inconsistency, conflict, or ambiguity and IPC
will provide written clarification of IPC’s intended meaning.
“Contract Price” means the amount set forth in the Agreement as total compensation payable to
Contractor for the Work upon its full, timely, and satisfactory completion of the Work and Project, as
that amount may be amended from time to time by Change Order, as provided in the Contract
Documents.
“Contract Time” means the period of time between the Commencement Date and Final Completion
Date as set forth in the Agreement.
“Date of Final Completion” is defined in Section GC-21 of these General Conditions.
“Day” or “day” means calendar day, unless otherwise specified.
“Delay Claims” mean claims by Contractor for additional time made under Section GC-15 of these
General Conditions.
“Delay Liquidated Damages” mean the liquidated damages payable pursuant to the Agreement by
Contractor to IPC in the event of failure to attain Substantial Completion of the Work by the
Guaranteed Substantial Completion Date.
“Directive” means a written statement issued by IPC, directing performance of Additional Work prior
to any agreement or adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Time. A Directive shall propose whether
and to what extent the Contract Price or Contract Time should be adjusted. A Change Order will be
issued to change the Contract Documents.
“Drawings” mean, collectively, all maps, plans, or drawings and any such supplementary drawings as
IPC may issue from time to time.
“Elevation” and the figures or values in reference thereto, or an abbreviation thereof, mean the
elevation relative to United States Geological Survey Sea Level Datum, as represented by various
bench marks in the vicinity of the Work, or shall mean the elevation relative to the arbitrary datum
plane fixed by IPC for the particular Work.
“Engineer of Record” or “Engineer” means the person or firm that developed the Drawings and
Technical Specifications. The Engineer reports to IPC.
“Float” means the number of days by which an activity on the Approved Schedule may be delayed
from its earliest start date without necessarily extending the Guaranteed Substantial Completion Date.
“Final Completion” is defined in Section GC-21.2 of these General Conditions.
“Final Completion Date” means the date set forth in the Agreement by which the Contractor must
achieve Final Completion of the Work.
“Force Majeure Event” means an event or circumstance that causes a breach, default, or delay in the
performance of obligations under the Contract Documents, where such event involves a fire, flood,
earthquake, atypical elements of nature, riots, civil disorders, rebellions or revolutions in any country,
changes in governmental rules, laws, regulations, ordinances, permits, or licenses, relating to the Work,
or any other cause beyond the reasonable control of the Party claiming such Force Majeure Event;
provided, a Force Majeure Event claimed by Contractor requires that (i) Contractor and its
Subcontractors are without fault in causing such breach, default, or delay, and (ii) such breach, default,
2023 Midpoint Substation Replace C506 Series Capacitor Bank                  General Conditions for Construction Services LGL 139 (11/01/2022) 
Page 4 of 37 
or delay could not have been anticipated or prevented by reasonable precautions and cannot
reasonably be circumvented by Contractor or its Subcontractors through the use of alternate sources,
work around plans, or other means, and (iii) Contractor has complied with the Notice of Delay
provisions in Section 15 of these General Conditions. For purposes of clarity, late performance of
services or late delivery of goods by Subcontractors, suppliers, or vendors shall not constitute a Force
Majeure Event nor form the basis for limiting any liquidated damages payable in connection with the
Contract Documents.
“Guaranteed Substantial Completion Date” means the date set forth in the Agreement by which the
Contractor must achieve Substantial Completion of the Work.
“Hazardous Material” means any substance or material identified now or in the future as hazardous
under any federal, state, or local law or regulation, or any other substance or material that may be
considered hazardous or otherwise subject to statutory or regulatory requirement governing
handling disposal and/or cleanup.
“IPC’s Authorized Representative” or “IPAR” means the person designated in writing by IPC from time
to time to act on its behalf.
“IPC Data” is defined in Section 26 of the Agreement.
“Milestone Date(s)” means the interim completion dates set forth in the Agreement by which
Contractor must achieve the Milestones described in the Special Conditions (Exhibit C to the
Agreement).
“Milestone(s)” means the interim Work, as described in the Special Conditions (Exhibit C to the
Agreement), that Contractor must complete to meet the Milestone Dates.
“Notice of Final Completion” means the document Contractor gives to IPC stating that Contractor has
determined that Final Completion of the Work and the Project has occurred, as set forth in Section GC-
21.1 of these General Conditions.
“Owner” means IPC.
“Progress Payment Schedule” is defined in Section GC-9 of these General Conditions.
“Project” means the total construction, the final intended improvement, or other final result, of which
the Work to be performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole, or a part, as set forth in
the Agreement.
“Punch List” means the document, prepared by Contractor and IPC in accordance with Section GC-20.2
of these General Conditions detailing the Punch List Items.
“Punch List Items” mean those outstanding items required to complete the Work that, in the
reasonable judgment of IPC, do not affect the operability, safety, or mechanical or electrical integrity
of the Work or Project. The Punch List Items shall be completed by Contractor prior to Final
Completion of the Work, but the failure to complete the Punch List Items shall not prevent the Project
from being ready for commercial operations at the full rated output in a safe and continuous manner
and in accordance with all laws and permits.
“Record Documents” means all redlined drawings, as-built drawings, samples, Shop Drawings,
operation and maintenance manuals, performance curves, warranties, keys, certifications, submittals,
and other Project data associated with construction.
“Request For Information” is the Contractor’s form for requesting information as it pertains to the
Drawings or Technical Specifications during construction.
2023 Midpoint Substation Replace C506 Series Capacitor Bank                  General Conditions for Construction Services LGL 139 (11/01/2022) 
Page 5 of 37 
Restoration” or “Restore” means to remove all waste or excess construction materials; clean up and
dispose all brush, trees, and debris; grade and reseed all disturbed areas; and repair and replacement
of any and all property damage caused by Contractor.
“Safety Program” is defined in Section GC-5.4 of these General Conditions.
“Samples” mean physical examples which illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship and
establish standards by which the Work will be judged.
“Schedule of Submittals” means the detailed timeline for performance of the submittal activities on
the Project.
“Schedule of Values” is defined in Section GC-9 of these General Conditions.
“Shop Drawings” mean all Drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or information
that are specifically prepared or assembled by or for Contractor and submitted by Contractor to
illustrate some portion of the Work.
“Specifications”, or “Technical Specifications” mean, collectively, all terms and requirements
pertaining to the Work and any amendments, revisions, deductions or additions thereto, and all
written agreements made or to be made, pertaining to the Work or to the quantities and qualities of
labor, materials, or equipment to be constructed, installed, or furnished by Contractor.
“Subcontractor” means a person or entity that performs or furnishes any portion of the Work for
Contractor or Subcontractor, at any and all tiers. The term Subcontractor does not include the
Engineer or any separate contractor employed by IPC. The term Subcontractor does include, without
limitation, contractors, consultants, and material suppliers.
“Substantial Completion” is defined in Section GC-20.1 of these General Conditions.
“Unit Price Work” means Work in which all or a part of the Contract Price is based upon agreed unit
prices set forth in a Schedule of Unit Prices.
“Warranty Notice” is defined in Section GC-23 of these General Conditions.
“Warranty Period” is defined in Section GC-23 of these General Conditions.
“Work” means all materials, equipment, labor, engineering, and services described in the Contract
Documents and incidental to or reasonably inferred to be necessary for the full and satisfactory
completion of the Project consistent with IPC’s intended results.
“Work Clarification” means IPC’s form for resolving additional information requests, clarifying
conflicting information, issuing Additional Work, or interpreting discrepancies found during
construction. The Work Clarification may or may not result in a Change Order.
“Work site” means the geographical area in and around which the Work is to be performed, and the
ingress and egress thereto.
GC-1.2 Prior to taking action on any term(s) which is ambiguous, unclear, conflicting, or not otherwise
defined in the Contract Documents, Contractor agrees to refer such term(s) to IPC for interpretation.
GC‐2 IPC’S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE
GC-2.1 IPC shall furnish an IPAR to act on behalf of IPC under this Agreement.
GC-2.2 IPC or the IPAR may observe Contractor’s Work in progress, perform field checks of materials and
equipment to certify performance of Work for purposes of authorizing payment and completion, or
perform such other functions as IPC deems advisable. Such observations shall not be construed to
create an obligation on the part of IPC to make on-site observations to check the quantity or quality
of the Work. IPC shall neither have control over or charge of, nor be responsible for, the construction
means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for the safety precautions and programs in
2023 Midpoint Substation Replace C506 Series Capacitor Bank                  General Conditions for Construction Services LGL 139 (11/01/2022) 
Page 6 of 37 
connection with the Work, since these are solely the Contractor’s responsibilities under the Contract
Documents.
GC-2.3 IPC, by and through the IPAR, reserves the right to stop Work, request the removal of an employee,
agent, or representative of Contractor from the Work site, or take such other action the IPAR deems
reasonable in the event the IPAR observes a potentially life threatening or otherwise dangerous
situation. IPC or the IPAR may also stop Work if the person sought to be removed poses a danger to
himself, others or to property, as judged by the IPAR. Delay caused by IPC’s exercise of this right shall
not be the basis for a claim for additional compensation from Contractor, based on Section GC-15
relating to Delay Claims, or otherwise, and Contractor shall bear all costs and expenses of catch- up
work required to put the Work in compliance with the Approved Schedule when Work resumes after
being stopped in accordance with this Section.
GC-2.4 None of the IPAR’s assistants or agents shall have the authority to waive on behalf of IPC any of the
obligations of Contractor. Waiver of any obligation may only be accomplished in writing, with the
signatures of Contractor and IPC.
GC‐3 CONTRACTOR’S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE
GC-3.1 Contractor shall provide a Contractor’s Authorized Representative having competent on-site
supervision during any and all construction activities by the forces of Contractor or Subcontractors.
Contractor’s Authorized Representative shall be the single point of contact with IPC. Contractor’s
Authorized Representative shall be identified in the Agreement, and at a minimum be on-site from the
Commencement Date to the Date of Final Completion. The Contractor’s Authorized Representative
shall be authorized to act on Contractor’s behalf with respect to the Work. If Contractor desires to
change the person serving as Contractor’s Authorized Representative, IPC reserves the right, within
its sole and reasonable discretion, to deny Contractor’s selected replacement of the Contractor’s
Authorized Representative. IPC shall have the right to approve the person proposed to replace the
Contractor’s Authorized Representative.
GC-3.2 Contractor’s Authorized Representative shall be responsible for administration of the day-to-day
operation of the Project and the Work site safety for Subcontractors, Contractor, Contractor’s agents
and employees, all workers, vendors, and members of the public.
GC-3.3 Contractor’s Authorized Representative shall give personal attention constantly to the faithful
prosecution of the Work, and shall be present in person on the site of the Work continually during its
progress.
GC‐4 IPC’S RESPONSIBILITIES
GC-4.1 IPC shall furnish the data and documents required of IPC under the Contract Documents.
Contractor shall make requests for such data and documents so as to allow IPC reasonable time to
respond without delaying the performance of the Work.
GC-4.2 IPC shall make undisputed payments to Contractor when they are due as set forth in Section GC-
19 and the Contract Documents.
GC-4.3 IPC shall perform construction inspections, tests, and approvals as set forth in Section GC-13.
GC-4.4 IPC shall not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for,
Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety
precautions and programs incidental thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with the laws and
regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. IPC shall not be responsible for Contractor’s
failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
2023 Midpoint Substation Replace C506 Series Capacitor Bank                  General Conditions for Construction Services LGL 139 (11/01/2022) 
Page 7 of 37 
GC‐5 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITY
GC-5.1 Contractor shall supervise, inspect, and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such
attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in
accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means,
methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction.
GC-5.2 Subcontractors.
GC-5.2.1 Contractor may cause any part of the Work to be performed by a Subcontractor; provided
however that Contractor shall require, by written agreement, Subcontractors and its officers,
agents and employees to be bound by the provisions of the Contract Documents in all respects
and assume toward the Contractor all of the obligations and responsibilities that Contractor, by
this Agreement, assumes toward IPC. Contractor shall require Subcontractors to enter into
similar written agreements with its Subcontractors. Each such agreement shall preserve and
protect the rights of IPC under this Agreement with respect to the Work to be performed by the
Subcontractor, so that Contractor’s subcontracting or otherwise delegating thereof will not
prejudice such rights. Contractor shall not, in any manner thereby, be discharged from its
obligations and liabilities hereunder, but shall be liable and responsible for all acts, omissions,
and negligence of any Subcontractor, and their officers, agents, and employees. Contractor and
its Subcontractors shall comply at all times with FAR 52-219-8, Utilization of Small Business
Concerns. Idaho Power reserves the right, within its sole and reasonable discretion, to deny
Contractor’s use of any Subcontractor. Upon request of IPC, copies of all subcontracts shall be
furnished to IPC and the IPAR.
GC-5.3 Contractor’s Responsibility for Work and Safety.
GC-5.3.1 Notwithstanding any provision in the Contract Documents to the contrary, Contractor shall
at all times be responsible for, and shall not be relieved of, its obligations to secure the quality of
Work, the safe conduct of the Work and safety of the Work site, and the rate of progress required
by the Contract Documents. Contractor alone shall be and remain solely liable and responsible
for the means, methods, techniques, procedures or sequences selected by Contractor and
Subcontractor, for safety precautions and programs incident to the Work in progress, and for
any failure of Contractor and Subcontractor to comply with safety laws and regulations
applicable to the Work.
GC-5.4 Protection of Workers and Others.
GC-5.4.1 Contractor shall be solely and completely responsible for the training of its employees and
the conditions of the Work site, including without limitation, the safety of all persons and
property during the performance of the Work. This requirement will apply continuously and will
not be limited to normal working hours. Contractor shall be responsible to:
a. Develop a safety program applicable to all construction phases of the Project (“Safety
Program”). The Safety Program shall require all of the employees and agents of Contractor
and all Subcontractors to comply with federal, Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (“OSHA”) law and regulations, and any other federal, state and local safety
and health laws, orders, ordinances, and regulations. In any situation where any law or
regulation is in conflict with any other law or regulation, Contractor and Subcontractor shall
follow the most stringent requirements.
b. Assure that all employees and agents of Contractor and Subcontractors are informed of the
applicable provisions of the Safety Program.
c. Provide designated safety personnel at the Work site whose responsibilities shall include:
i) Regular inspection of the Work site for compliance with federal, OSHA, state and local
safety and health laws and regulations relating to work safety and health.
2023 Midpoint Substation Replace C506 Series Capacitor Bank                  General Conditions for Construction Services LGL 139 (11/01/2022) 
Page 8 of 37 
ii) Maintenance of a detailed written record evidencing the conduct of inspections of the
Work site, the detection of acts or practices by employees or agents of Contractor or
Subcontractor that are not in compliance with the Safety Program or applicable law, and
the corrective action taken by Contractor to maintain compliance with the Safety
Program and applicable law.
iii) Conducting weekly meetings with employees and agents of Contractor and
Subcontractor to discuss matters related to the Safety Program and compliance
therewith.
iv) Implementation and adherence to the Safety Program, including without limitation the
undertaking of corrective action to maintain adherence to the Safety Program and
applicable law.
d. Provide personal protective equipment (“PPE”) for all employees and agents of Contractor
and all Subcontractors, as required by OSHA.
e. Immediately report to IPC all incidents, including without limitation, accidents, injuries and
all incidents involving the public or other utilities, arising out of or in connection with the
Work. Additionally, within 48 hours of the incident, Contractor shall provide to IPC a written
incident investigation report in substantially the same form included in Annex A to the
Agreement or, if no form is included in Annex A, then in a form acceptable to IPC.
GC-5.4.2 Notwithstanding IPC’s rights in Section GC-33, if IPC observes and is aware of a practice or
condition which poses an immediate threat of personal injury or harm at the Work site, IPC
reserves the right to direct Contractor to immediately eliminate such practice or condition. If IPC
does direct Contractor to immediately eliminate such practice or action, Contractor shall cease
all activities to the extent necessary to avoid the risk of imminent harm or injury at the Work
site.
GC-5.4.3 None of the rights retained by IPC as herein specified shall be interpreted to, nor shall create
any obligation on the part of IPC to conduct Work site safety inspections, or to otherwise develop
or implement a Work site Safety Program or practices, or assume any responsibility for safe
conditions of the Work site, the same being the sole and exclusive responsibility of Contractor.
GC-5.5 Contractor’s Employees.
GC-5.5.1 Contractor shall immediately remove from the Work and the Work site, any person who is,
may be, or appears to be, creating any unsafe condition, disorder or disruption, or who is
disposed to be disorderly, or who is not skilled or competent to perform the Work, and such
person shall not thereafter be permitted on the Work site.
GC-5.5.2 Contractor acknowledges and agrees that certain portions of the Work may be specialized
work appropriate for workers skilled not only in the general trade but also for workers who have
specialized expertise in the particular line of Work required. Contractor agrees that such Work
shall be performed by workers who are skilled and specialized in the Work to which they are
assigned. Contractor is solely responsible for making sure that all of its employees and workers
have been adequately trained for the Work to which they are assigned. Upon request by IPC,
Contractor shall provide evidence of required licenses and certifications.
GC-5.5.3 None of the Contractor’s superintendents, supervisors, or engineers may be withdrawn from
the Work without Contractor providing due written notice to IPAR; provided, however, that no
such withdrawal shall be made if it will jeopardize successful completion of the Work.
GC-5.6 Provisions Relating To Labor and Rates of Wages.
GC-5.6.1 Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining labor relations policies and procedures in
such a manner as to reasonably provide harmony among workers, and shall invoke National
Labor Relations Board procedures for the resolution of jurisdictional disputes when available
2023 Midpoint Substation Replace C506 Series Capacitor Bank                  General Conditions for Construction Services LGL 139 (11/01/2022) 
Page 9 of 37 
and appropriate. Contractor shall cooperate and require its Subcontractors to cooperate with
IPC and other contractors in establishing and maintaining Work rules and practices as needed
in the general interest of the Project and Work, and shall cooperate insofar as is lawful and
practicable in achieving the prompt resolution of labor disputes at the Project; provided that,
Contractor and IPC shall each separately and solely be responsible for labor relations policies as
they affect their own employees. Contractor shall inform IPC in writing of developments in labor
relations or collective bargaining which may result in picketing or Work stoppages at the Project.
Contractor shall ensure Subcontractors comply with these provisions with respect to
cooperation on labor relations. Contractor shall be responsible for paying, and for requiring
Subcontractors to pay, all employees performing Work at the Project wages and benefits not less
than that required by law, or by applicable labor agreement in the case of unionized
Subcontractors, or by applicable wage and personnel policies in the case of nonunion
Subcontractors. Contractor and Subcontractors shall be responsible for compliance with all state
and federal laws, ordinances, regulations, and statutes dealing with labor relations that are
applicable to said Contractor’s and Subcontractor’s employees, including without limitation,
laws dealing with maximum hours of Work and overtime premium pay.
GC-5.7 Weapons and Intoxicants.
GC-5.7.1 Contractor shall not permit the possession or use of weapons upon the Work site or upon
any premises occupied or controlled by Contractor pertaining to the Work. While performing
Work for IPC, Contractor, Subcontractors at all tiers, and their respective employees and agents
shall not possess, use, sell or be under the influence of alcohol, drugs, or other controlled
substances (excluding those used or possessed pursuant to a valid prescription and which do
not adversely affect the Work).
GC-5.8 Materials, Equipment, and Tools.
GC-5.8.1 Contractor shall, at its expense, furnish all material, labor, tools, false work, scaffolding,
cribbing, rigging, water, air, steam, electrical energy, equipment, supplies, and all other
miscellaneous items that may be required to accomplish the Work, unless otherwise specifically
stated in the Contract Documents. Contractor shall mark all of its tools and equipment so that
they can easily be identified as belonging to Contractor.
GC-5.8.2 Contractor shall transport, store, and protect all IPC-furnished materials and equipment after
issuance or transfer from IPC to Contractor or its agents and shall be responsible for the IPC-
furnished materials and equipment throughout the performance of the Work. Contractor shall
be solely liable for any damage (whether to person or property), loss, or theft to IPC- furnished
materials or equipment once the materials or equipment are issued or transferred to Contractor
until such time as Final Completion of the Work or until excess materials and all equipment are
returned in undamaged condition to IPC’s designated warehouse, storage yard, or other IPC-
designated location. Contractor shall maintain appropriate insurance to fully protect IPC’s
interest set forth in this Section.
GC-5.8.3 Contractor shall return to IPC’s designated salvage, warehouse, or other IPC-designated
location all excess, unused, salvaged and scrap material removed from existing installations to
IPC’s designated salvage, warehouse, or other IPC-designated location unless otherwise
specifically stated in the Contract Documents or unless specifically authorized otherwise in
writing by IPC.
GC-5.9 Protection of the Work.
GC-5.9.1 Contractor shall take all precautions necessary to protect the Work, shall be responsible for
the protection and safekeeping of the Work, and shall maintain all lights, guards, signs,
temporary passages, or other protection necessary for that purpose. All Work shall be done at
Contractor’s risk, and Contractor shall promptly repair or replace any loss or damage resulting
from fire or from any other cause free from all expense to IPC. Contractor shall be responsible
2023 Midpoint Substation Replace C506 Series Capacitor Bank                  General Conditions for Construction Services LGL 139 (11/01/2022) 
Page 10 of 37 
for any loss or damage to material, tools, equipment or other articles used or held for use in
connection with the Work. Contractor shall perform the Work to completion without damage to
any Work, Collateral Work, or property of IPC or of others and without interference with the
operation of existing machinery or equipment.
GC-5.10 Cleaning Up.
GC-5.10.1 As a part of the Work, Contractor shall completely remove and satisfactorily dispose of all
temporary works; shall tear down and dispose of all temporary buildings; shall remove or grade,
to the extent directed, all embankments or cofferdams made for construction purposes; shall
restore all temporary rights-of-way and Access Roads; shall satisfactorily fill excavations as
directed; shall remove all construction plant and equipment; shall satisfactorily dispose of all
rubbish and waste resulting from operations under the Contract Documents; and shall do all
work necessary to restore the Work site to at least as good an order and condition as at the
beginning of the Work. If Contractor fails to clean up as provided in this Section, IPC may do so
and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor and withheld from IPC’s pay to
Contractor.
GC-5.11 Record Documents / As-Builts.
GC-5.11.1 Contractor shall maintain in a safe place at the Project site two record copies of all Drawings,
Specifications, Change Orders, Directives, and Work Clarifications in good order and annotated
to show changes made during construction. These Record Documents, together with all
approved Samples and a counterpart of all approved Shop Drawings, shall be available to IPC for
reference at all times during and at the completion of the Work. These Record Documents,
Samples, Shop Drawings, operation and maintenance manuals, performance curves, and other
Project data shall be delivered to IPC prior to Substantial or Final Completion of the Work, as set
forth in Exhibit C to the Agreement.
GC-5.12 Weekly Meetings and Reports.
GC-5.12.1 When requested by IPC, Contractor and designated Subcontractors shall participate in
weekly meetings with IPC and other necessary and desired persons and entities. Such meetings
shall be held at the Project site unless approved otherwise by IPC. Contractor shall prepare,
circulate, and correct minutes of such meetings. Contractor shall also prepare and submit to IPC,
no less frequently than monthly, written reports on the progress of the Work in such form and
in such detail as reasonably required by IPC.
GC-5.13 Three-way Communication Training.
GC-5.13.1 To the extent any of Contractor’s employees, or the employees of any Subcontractor, may
engage in oral two-party, person-to-person communication with IPC personnel by means of a
two-way communication system to obtain or release clearance orders and/or perform
switching activities related to the Work, and in accordance with the requirements of the North
American Electric Reliability Corporation’s mandatory standard COM‐002—Operating
Personnel Communications Protocols, all such employees shall receive three-way
communication training prior to commencement of any Work under this Agreement. Contractor
shall ensure, and shall certify pursuant to a signed attestation form (“Attestation Form”), that
such three-way communication training has been provided its employees, and the employees
of any Subcontractor, who may engage in any of the activities described in this Section GC-
5.13.1. Contractor shall submit all completed Attestation Forms to IPC within 10 days following
commencement of Work under this Agreement. If requested by IPC, Contractor shall provide an
updated Attestation Form.
2023 Midpoint Substation Replace C506 Series Capacitor Bank                  General Conditions for Construction Services LGL 139 (11/01/2022) 
Page 11 of 37 
GC‐6 CONTRACTOR INFORMED AS TO CONDITIONS
GC-6.1 Contractor acknowledges and agrees that it has examined all the available records and has
conducted a field examination of the Project site and right-of-way; and that it is informed of the
subsurface conditions and surface and subsurface water conditions to be encountered, the character
of equipment and facilities needed for the prosecution of the Work, the location and suitability of all
construction materials, the quantities in the various sections of the Work, the local weather and labor
conditions, laws applicable to the Work, and all other matters in connection with the Work and
services to be performed under the Contract Documents. Any errors, inconsistencies, or omissions
discovered or reasonably known to Contractor during this examination shall be reported promptly in
writing to IPC.
GC-6.2 Any records of subsurface condition, water records, or other observations that may have been
made by IPAR or IPC have been made in good faith. Such records may be made available to Contractor
for its information; provided that IPC makes no expressed or implied representation, warranty, or
guarantee as to the accuracy of the records or any interpretation of them. Contractor agrees that it
has formed its own opinions of the character of the Work to be performed and of materials to be
excavated from its own inspection of the site and its own interpretation of records and review of the
Contract Documents.
GC-6.3 Contractor further agrees that the Contract Price and Approved Schedule is based on its own
knowledge and judgment of the conditions and hazards involved, and not upon any representations
of IPC or IPAR.
GC-6.4 Contractor acknowledges and agrees that it has examined the Contract Documents. Any design
errors or omissions discovered by Contractor during this review shall be reported promptly in writing
to IPC.
GC-6.5 Contractor recognizes that electronic media or CADD form (collectively “CADD Files”) are not
intended to be used for construction, are not Construction Documents under the terms of the
Agreement and may result in variances when plotted. Any use of any kind or any changes of any kind
to the CADD Files will be at the Contractor’s sole risk, and without liability, risk or legal exposure to
IPC or its members, partners, officers, directors, agents, and employees or IPC consultants or
contractors. In the event Contractor or Subcontractor, uses the CADD Files, Contractor shall release
and, to the fullest extent permitted by law, indemnify, hold harmless and defend IPC and its members,
partners, officers, directors, agents, and employees and IPC consultants from, for, and against any and
all claims, demands, losses, expenses, damages, penalties and liabilities of any kind, including without
limitation attorneys’ fees and costs, arising out of or relating in any way to such use of or change to
the CADD Files.
GC‐7 INTERPRETATION AND MODIFICATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
GC-7.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to describe a functionally complete Project to be
constructed. Contractor agrees and acknowledges that any labor, documentation, services, materials,
or equipment that may be reasonably inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing
custom or trade usage as being required to produce the intended result will be provided by
Contractor, whether or not specifically called for, at no additional cost to IPC. The Contract Documents
are to be construed as complimentary. What is required by one shall be considered to be required by
all. In the case of conflicts, ambiguities or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall
request interpretation from IPC, and IPC shall promptly provide clarification to Contractor, which
interpretation shall be binding on Contractor and IPC.
GC-7.2 Contractor agrees that all claims of Contractor, including without limitation, questions concerning
interpretation, clarification of this Agreement, the acceptable fulfillment of this Agreement on the part
of Contractor shall be submitted in writing to IPC for determination within seven Days of discovery.
Contractor agrees that Contractor’s failure to ask for a determination within the time allotted shall
constitute a waiver by Contractor of all of its rights to future claims, judicial or otherwise.
2023 Midpoint Substation Replace C506 Series Capacitor Bank                  General Conditions for Construction Services LGL 139 (11/01/2022) 
Page 12 of 37 
GC-7.3 IPC will issue all determinations, instructions, and clarifications within 14 Days and shall be final,
unless the Contractor files with IPC, within 14 Days after IPC notifies Contractor of any such
determination, instruction or clarification, a written protest stating clearly and in detail the basis
thereof. IPC will issue a decision in writing upon each such protest within 14 Days of receipt of protest,
and its decision will be final. At all times, Contractor shall proceed with the Work in accordance with
the determinations, instruction, and clarifications of IPC. Contractor shall be solely responsible for
requesting instruction or interpretations and shall be solely liable for any cost and expense arising
from its failure to do so. Contractor agrees that Contractor’s failure to protest IPC’s determinations,
instructions, clarifications, or decisions within 14 Days after receipt thereof shall constitute a waiver
by Contractor of all of its rights to further protest or make a claim, judicial or otherwise.
GC-7.4 Changes to the Contract Documents may only be made by a Change Order or amendment to the
Contract Documents executed by both Parties.
GC‐8 TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION
GC-8.1 Time limits stated in the Agreement and Contract Documents are of the essence of the Agreement.
Contractor agrees and acknowledges that it shall achieve Substantial Completion on or before the
Guaranteed Substantial Completion Date, and that all Work shall be completed by the Final Completion
Date. On or prior to the date specified in the Special Conditions (Exhibit C to the Agreement),
Contractor shall submit to IPC a progress construction schedule in the form of a critical path method
diagram which specifies the dates on which Contractor plans to begin and complete various parts of
the Work and shall contain dates in all respects consistent with the Milestone Date(s), Guaranteed
Substantial Completion Date, and Final Completion Date. The schedule shall identify all Work
activities and events that are critical to ensuring Substantial Completion and Final Completion of the
Project and the Work by and in conformance with the dates set forth in the Agreement and Contract
Documents, including coordination between submittal and Shop Drawing approvals and related Work
activities, and coordination with other contractors performing work for IPC. The schedule shall
identify in reasonable detail all phases of construction, all Work activities (including without
limitation procurement, submittal, and Shop Drawing activities), and all events that will occur during
performance of the Work, and shall graphically represent the logical sequence of such phases of
construction, Work activities, and events that will occur on the Project. The schedule shall include
work activities to be performed by IPC and those working for, through, or on behalf of IPC. The
schedule shall also be in a form (including machine-readable electronic format if requested by IPC)
and with contents acceptable to IPC, and upon review and acceptance by IPC, the schedule shall
become Exhibit E to the Agreement. In the event Contractor submits a schedule in a form unacceptable
to IPC, Contractor shall promptly revise the same in accordance with the requirements and
recommendations of IPC and shall resubmit the revised schedule for acceptance. When IPC has
approved a schedule, the schedule shall be acknowledged through any of (a) the initials of both
Contractor and IPC on each page of the accepted schedule, (b) physical marking by IPC of the schedule
with the word “Approved” or words or phrases of similar import, (c) execution via signatures on the
schedule by IPC and Contractor, or (d) written acknowledgment (by electronic means or otherwise)
of IPC that makes it clear from the context that the schedule is approved. The accepted schedule so
marked or acknowledged, along with all dates set forth in the Agreement and Contract Documents,
shall be referred to as the “Approved Schedule”. Contractor shall provide an electronic version of the
Approved Schedule when requested by IPC.
Contractor shall monitor the progress of the Work for conformance with the Approved Schedule and
shall, on a monthly basis, submit to IPC written updates reporting the actual status of the Work as
compared to the Approved Schedule. Contractor’s written updates shall reflect the reasons (to the
best of Contractor’s knowledge) for deviation, if any, from the Approved Schedule; impacts upon the
schedule caused by Change Orders; and shall reflect the progress of the Work achieved by the
Contractor during the previous update period. Contractor is responsible for coordinating its own
schedules, including, without limitation, the schedules of Subcontractors, as well as construction-
related activities of others. Contractor acknowledges and agrees that other contractors and IPC may
2023 Midpoint Substation Replace C506 Series Capacitor Bank                  General Conditions for Construction Services LGL 139 (11/01/2022) 
Page 13 of 37 
be performing work related to the Project and that Contractor will need to coordinate its Work around
the work of those contractors and IPC.
GC-8.2 Changes to the Approved Schedule may only be made by a Change Order or amendment to the
Contract Documents executed by both Parties.
GC-8.3 At all times during the performance of the Work, Contractor shall monitor the progress of the Work
to ensure progress is achieved in accordance with the Approved Schedule. In Project updates required
under Section GC-8.1, Contractor shall promptly advise IPC of any delays or potential delays that may
negatively impact the progress of the Work or that may jeopardize Substantial Completion or Final
Completion of the Project and the Work by and in accordance with the dates and times set forth in the
Approved Schedule. In the event Contractor advises IPC of such delays or potential delays, Contractor
shall provide IPC a written plan to recover such delays that shall set forth any changes in schedule
logic, the performance of overtime work, the performance of shiftwork, and the use of additional labor
required to recover the identified delay.
Contractor acknowledges that the Approved Schedule contains Float. Contractor agrees that all Float
on the Approved Schedule may be consumed by Contractor or IPC as necessary. In the event the
Contractor or IPC have competing need for the use of Float, then the Float at issue shall be allocated
equally between the parties. Use of Float by either party shall be without liability to the other for
adjustments in the Contract Time or Contract Price, or for any additional payment of any sort by
reason of the loss or use of any Float.
GC-8.4 IPC, for any reason, may require the Contractor at any time to perform any portion of the Work on
an overtime or shiftwork basis. If IPC requires overtime or shiftwork, the premium portion of the labor
cost to perform such overtime or shiftwork shall be considered Additional Work, provided IPC has
required such to accelerate the Approved Schedule and promote IPC’s interest. Overtime work or
shiftwork required to enable Contractor to meet the Approved Schedule as required in Section GC-
8.1, or to correct Defective Work, or to otherwise serve Contractor’s interest, is not Additional Work.
The Contract Price, the Approved Schedule, or both will be appropriately adjusted pursuant to Section
GC-17.3 for all overtime or shiftwork constituting Additional Work. Such adjustments in Contract
Price shall be limited to the Contractor’s direct costs for the performance of overtime or shiftwork,
and shall not include overhead and profit. In no event will the Contractor be entitled to recovery of
indirect costs or impact costs associated with the performance of such overtime or shiftwork,
including without limitation, costs related to inefficiencies that arise out of performance of Work
under overtime or shiftwork conditions, the stacking of trades, or other like indirect or impact costs.
GC-8.5 If IPC determines that Contractor’s performance of the Work is not in accordance with the
Approved Schedule, or that Contractor has failed to reach the level of completion required by the
Approved Schedule, IPC shall have the right to direct the Contractor to accelerate the progress of
construction. Without waiving any other right or remedy it may have under the Contract Documents,
IPC may direct the Contractor to accelerate the progress of construction by (1) working additional
shifts; (2) working overtime; or (3) supplying additional manpower, materials, and equipment
necessary to meet the Approved Schedule. Upon receipt of such a request from IPC, Contractor shall
immediately implement the corrective measures directed by IPC until the progress of the Work meets
the requirements of the Approved Schedule. IPC’s request that Contractor accelerate the progress of
performance of the Work under this Section GC-8.5 shall not constitute Additional Work and is for the
sole purpose of ensuring the Contractor’s maintenance of the Approved Schedule.
GC-8.6 Contractor shall coordinate Work with IPC and those working for, through, or on behalf of IPC. IPC
may require Contractor to make reasonable changes in the sequence of Work at any time during the
performance of the Work in order to facilitate the performance of work by IPC or those working for,
through, or on behalf of IPC. To the extent such changes materially affect (whether by increasing or
decreasing) Contractor’s time and costs, were not reasonably anticipated, and the procedures of
Section GC-15 below have been complied with, the Approved Schedule and Contract Price may be
equitably adjusted as provided in Section GC-15.
2023 Midpoint Substation Replace C506 Series Capacitor Bank                  General Conditions for Construction Services LGL 139 (11/01/2022) 
Page 14 of 37 
GC‐9 SCHEDULE OF VALUES OR PROGRESS PAYMENT SCHEDULE
GC-9.1 If required in the Special Conditions (Exhibit C to the Agreement), Contractor shall submit to IPC:
(a) a schedule of values apportioning the value, as a percent of the total Contract Price, of each phase
or division of Work (“Schedule of Values”); or, (b) a schedule of payment milestones and applicable
progress payments to be made upon IPC’s determination that Contractor has achieved such payment
milestones (a “Progress Payment Schedule”). The Schedule of Values or Progress Payment Schedule,
as applicable, shall be in a form acceptable to IPC and shall become part of the Contract Documents as
Exhibit F to the Agreement.
The Schedule of Values will include an approximate dollar value (or percentage of the Contract Price)
associated with each Work component or the Progress Payment Schedule will include a dollar amount
(or percentage of the Contract Price) associated with each applicable payment milestone. The cost of
Contractor’s overhead, fee, and construction indirects shall be included in the Schedule of Values or
Progress Payment Schedule, as applicable. The summation of the dollar amount allocated to each
Schedule of Values or Progress Payment Schedule component shall be equal to the Contract Price.
Contractor agrees that the cost specified for each component of Work in the Schedule of Values or
Progress Payment Schedule is a representative estimate of the anticipated cost of completion;
however, IPC and Contractor acknowledge that the actual cost of completion of a particular
component of Work may ultimately differ from that specified in the Schedule of Values or Progress
Payment Schedule. Neither the Contract Price nor the dollar values for components of Work listed on
the Schedule of Values or Progress Payment Schedule shall change based upon actual costs for
applicable components.
The Schedule of Values or Progress Payment Schedule, as applicable, shall be amended by the
Contractor during the course of the Work, not less often than monthly, for approval by IPC, to account
for any Change Orders issued during such monthly period. The Schedule of Values or Progress
Payment Schedule, as applicable, will be incorporated into the Contract Documents only following
approval by IPC in writing. Approval of the amended Schedule of Values or Progress Payment
Schedule, shall be represented by any of (a) the initials of both Contractor and IPC on each page of the
Schedule of Values or Progress Payment Schedule, (b) physical marking by IPC of the Schedule of
Values or Progress Payment Schedule, with the word “Approved” or words or phrases of similar
import, (c) execution via prominent signatures on the Schedule of Values or Progress Payment
Schedule, by IPC and Contractor, or (d) written acknowledgment (by electronic means or otherwise)
of IPC that makes it clear from the context that the Schedule of Values or Progress Payment Schedule
is approved.
GC‐10 UNIT PRICE WORK AND ESTIMATED QUANTITIES
GC-10.1 Contractor acknowledges and agrees that the IPC is not a guarantor of the estimated quantities
of any unit price items stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and that IPC
shall not be required to purchase any minimum amount of Unit Price Work. If the Agreement
specifically provides that all or a part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work (by inclusion of a Schedule
of Unit Prices in the Agreement or by other written document included in the Contract Documents
stating that all or a portion of the Work will be considered Unit Price Work), Contractor agrees that it
shall not be entitled to additional compensation for anticipated profits, for loss of profits or for any
damages in the event (i) there is a difference between the quantities of the various kinds of Work
actually performed or materials actually delivered and the estimated quantities of labor, materials or
equipment set forth in the Contract Documents; or (ii) no Work is ordered under certain unit items.
Unit prices are inclusive of all costs for the Unit Price Work, including but not limited to costs of labor,
services, materials, equipment, tools, supervision, insurance, bonds, applicable taxes, and overhead
and profit for that Work. No other mark-up whatsoever will be allowed on items or units within the
Schedule of Unit Prices.
2023 Midpoint Substation Replace C506 Series Capacitor Bank                  General Conditions for Construction Services LGL 139 (11/01/2022) 
Page 15 of 37 
GC‐11 SUBMITTALS
GC-11.1 Contractor shall submit Drawings, Samples, product data, and other documents as required by
IPC to IPC for review and approval. IPC, at its sole discretion, may require Contractor to develop a
Schedule of Submittals. If IPC requires a Schedule of Submittals, Contractor shall submit Shop
Drawings and Samples in accordance with that Schedule of Submittals.
a. Shop Drawings.
i) Contractor shall submit a minimum of four copies of Shop Drawings to IPC.
ii) Data shown on Contractor’s Shop Drawings shall be complete with respect to quantities,
dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials, and similar data to show IPC
the services, materials, and equipment Contractor proposes to provide and to enable IPC to
review the information for the limited purposes required by Section GC-11.4.
b. Samples.
i) Contractor shall submit two Samples, unless Contractor requests a returned Sample.
Contractor shall clearly identify each Sample as to material, supplier, pertinent data such as
catalog numbers, the use for which intended and other data as IPC may require to enable IPC
to review the submittal for limited purposes as required by Section GC-11.4.
GC-11.2 If a Shop Drawing or Sample is required by the Contract Documents or the Schedule of Submittals,
any related Work performed prior to IPC review and approval of the pertinent submittal will be at the
sole expense, risk or removal, and responsibility of Contractor.
GC-11.3 Submittal Procedures:
a. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample submittal, Contractor shall have reviewed and
coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample with (i) other Shop Drawings and Samples related to
the Work, (ii) the requirements of the Work, (iii) the Contract Documents, and (iv) the site
conditions. Contractor shall also have determined and verified:
i) All field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria,
installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar information with respect
thereto;
ii) The suitability of all materials with respect to intended use, fabrication, shipping, handling,
storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and
iii) All information relative to Contractor’s responsibilities for means, methods, techniques,
sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident
thereto.
b. Contractor’s submittals shall each bear a stamp or specific written certification that Contractor
has satisfied Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor’s
review and approval of that submittal.
c. With each submittal, Contractor shall give IPC specific written notice of any variations that the
Shop Drawing or Sample may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents.
Contractor’s written notice shall be both a written communication separate from the Shop
Drawings or Sample submittal; and, in addition, by a specific notation made on each Shop Drawing
or Sample submitted to IPC for review and approval of each variation.
GC-11.4 IPC’s Review
(i) IPC will provide timely review (within 30 Days) of Shop Drawings and Samples. IPC’s review
and approval is solely to visually determine if the items encompassed within the submittals will,
upon proper installation or incorporation in the Work by Contractor, be compatible with the
design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract
Documents. If IPC does not respond to the submission of a submittal within the 30 Days, then
2023 Midpoint Substation Replace C506 Series Capacitor Bank                  General Conditions for Construction Services LGL 139 (11/01/2022) 
Page 16 of 37 
Contractor shall provide IPC with written notice of IPC’s failure to respond in a timely manner, (ii)
inform IPC whether the delay has an impact to any specific activities in the Approved Schedule,
and (iii) provide IPC a detailed explanation of the impact to the schedule.
b. IPC’s review and approval will not extend to means, methods, technique, sequences, or procedures
of construction (except where a particular means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of
construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety
precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will
not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. IPC’s review and approval shall
not constitute acceptance of any Work, and shall not limit IPC’s rights and remedies under this
Agreement or law in any way.
c. IPC’s review and approval shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from
the requirements of the Contract Documents unless (i) Contractor has complied with the
requirement of Section GC-11.3.c, and (ii) IPC has given written approval of each such variation
by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or
Sample. IPC’s review and approval shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility from
complying with the requirements of Section GC-11.3 or any other requirements of the Contract
Documents.
GC-11.5 Resubmittal Procedures. Contractor shall make corrections required by IPC and shall return the
required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings. Contractor shall submit new Samples for
review and approval if required by IPC. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions
other than the correction called for by IPC on previous submittals. IPC may, at its sole discretion,
require Contractor to reimburse IPC reasonable rates for IPC’s review of Contractor’s resubmittals.
GC‐12 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION
GC-12.1 Contractor shall submit to IPC for IPC’s review and approval, data on all materials and equipment
that differ in any respect from materials and equipment specified in the Specifications, Drawings, and
the Contract Documents. Materials proposed by Contractor and Subcontractors for use in Work not
specifically mentioned in the Specifications shall be included and highlighted.
GC-12.2 Contractor acknowledges and agrees that if the name, brand, or model of a manufacturer’s article,
product, item of equipment, or system is specified, it shall be used as a measure of quality and utility
or as a standard. No intent to limit competition shall be inferred or implied. If more than one
manufacturer’s name is specified, the first named manufacturer is the basis of design. Second, third,
and subsequent named manufacturers shall be considered substitutions.
GC-12.3 If Contractor desires to use another brand or manufacture of quality, appearance, and utility equal
to the product specified, Contractor shall request substitution as provided herein. IPC will either
accept or reject the substitution, and IPC’s decision shall be final. Unless substitutions are requested
and approved as provided herein, deviations from the Drawings, Specifications, and Contract
Documents will not be permitted.
GC-12.4 Requests for substitution will be considered by IPC only if Contractor complies with the following
procedures:
a. Submits complete technical data, including drawings; complete performance specifications; test
data and tests as may be required by IPC; and samples of the article proposed for substitution as
applicable.
b. Submits comparative data on the material, equipment, or system to be replaced by the proposed
substitution.
c. Includes in the transmittal letter a signed statement that the proposed substitution is in full
compliance with the Contract Documents.
2023 Midpoint Substation Replace C506 Series Capacitor Bank                  General Conditions for Construction Services LGL 139 (11/01/2022) 
Page 17 of 37 
d. Submits requests for substitutions to IPC in duplicate.
e. Submits requests for substitutions that contain not less than the following information in the
headline or subject of the transmittal letter:
i) Project Title.
ii) Subject (Unit or Division of Work).
iii) Drawing and Specification references; Drawing number and detail; Specification section,
Article, Paragraph, and Subparagraph.
GC-12.5 IPC will consider the service of the proposed substitution in its evaluation of the substitution. IPC
may require data on not less than three readily accessible, comparable installations of the item
proposed for substitution completed in the five years prior to the Contractor’s request for the
substitution. IPC may also require Contractor to furnish to IPC a written warranty with adequate
safeguards, assuring satisfactory performance of a proposed substitute item or system for a stated
minimum period of time.
GC-12.6 IPC may reject a proposed substitution for any reason, including without limitation, if a proposed
substitution requires changes in related Work, which in the opinion of IPC, constitutes a deviation
from Contract Documents or aspects of design.
GC-12.7 Contractor shall be responsible for changes in other parts of the Work caused by a substitution
at no additional cost to IPC.
GC-12.8 Contractor shall not proceed with a substitution until IPC has accepted the substitution in writing.
Such acceptance shall not relieve the Contractor from complying with the requirements of the
Drawings, Specifications, and Contract Documents.
GC-12.9 Substitutions submitted to IPC that do not comply with the above requirements will be returned
to Contractor without review. Contractor shall furnish originally specified items unless a request for
substitution is submitted and accepted by IPC in writing in accordance with above requirements.
GC‐13 INSPECTION, COVERED WORK, DEFECTIVE WORK, AND RIGHT OF ACCESS
GC-13.1 Contractor agrees that IPC may, at its sole discretion, perform inspections of all Work, including
without limitation, any material and equipment furnished by Contractor. Contractor shall furnish to
IPC and its agents, access at all times to the Work and to the premises used by Contractor, and shall
cooperate with and make reasonable accommodations for inspections, including without limitation
temporarily discontinuing portions of the Work or uncovering or disassembling portions of the Work.
Contractor agrees that IPC shall not have any duty to make such inspections, and that any inspection
by IPC shall not limit IPC’s rights and remedies in any way. Contractor agrees that visits or inspections
by IPC shall not be construed to create an obligation on the part of IPC to make on-site inspections or
observations to check the quantity or quality of the Work. IPC shall neither have control over nor have
charge of, nor be responsible for, the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or
procedures, or for the safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since these are
Contractor’s responsibilities under the Contract Documents. IPC’s inspection of the Work shall not
relieve Contractor of any obligation or responsibility under the Contract Documents, including
without limitation, its responsibility to construct the Work in compliance with the Contract
Documents.
GC-13.2 If, prior to Final Completion of the Work and without limitation to any other remedies available
to IPC, the Work or any portion thereof is found to be defective, out of compliance with Contract
Documents, or shall be damaged in whole or in part by Contractor or those working through, for, or
on behalf of Contractor, Contractor agrees to promptly repair or replace such defective Work or
damage in a manner satisfactory to IPC and without adjustment to Contract Time or Contract Price. In
no case shall defective, non-conforming, or imperfect Work be deemed to be accepted by IPC.
2023 Midpoint Substation Replace C506 Series Capacitor Bank                  General Conditions for Construction Services LGL 139 (11/01/2022) 
Page 18 of 37 
GC-13.3 At the request of IPC, Work that has been covered prior to inspection shall be uncovered by
Contractor for the purpose of inspection. If the Work uncovered under this Section was required to
have been inspected prior to covering or is determined to be defective or out of compliance with
Contract Documents, then (i) Contractor shall bear the costs of uncovering, remediation or
replacement of the Work, and recovering the Work; (ii) and Contractor’s Contract Time or Contract
Price shall not be adjusted.
GC-13.4 If the Work uncovered (i) was not required to be inspected prior to covering by Contractor, and
(ii) is in conformance with Contract Documents, and without defect , then such costs shall be the
responsibility of IPC. IPC shall pay costs at the agreed unit prices for such class of Work. In the event
the work of uncovering materials and the repair or replacement thereof is not covered by agreed unit
prices, IPC shall pay for such work on the basis of actual direct cost of labor, materials, equipment use
and incidental expense, as stated in Section GC-17.3.c., except that no percentage mark-up for
Contractor’s overhead and profit shall be added to actual direct cost of labor, materials, equipment use
and incidental expense.
GC-13.5 If Contractor shall fail to repair or replace any defective or non-compliant Work or materials after
reasonable notice, IPC, at its option, may cause such Work or materials to be repaired or replaced, and
the expense thereof shall be charged to Contractor and may be deducted from any amount payable by
IPC to Contractor.
GC-13.6 If during performance of the Work, Contractor or any of its Subcontractors cause damage to IPC
infrastructure or facilities, or to third party-owned property for which IPC is ultimately responsible
for repairing or replacing, IPC may, within its sole discretion, cause such damage to be repaired or
replaced and either: (i) charge Contractor for all expenses incurred by IPC for such repair or
replacement; or, (ii) deduct all expenses incurred by IPC for such repair or replacement from any
amount payable by IPC to Contractor.
GC‐14 IPC SUSPENSION OF WORK
GC-14.1 IPC may, without cause, by written order to the Contractor, suspend, delay, or interrupt the Work,
in whole or in part, for such period as IPC may determine.
GC-14.2 Adjustments to the Contract Time for any IPC suspension, delay, or interruption of the Work
effected pursuant to this section shall be made in accordance with the terms of Section GC-15 hereof.
GC-14.3 No adjustment to Contract Time shall be made if the Contractor is or otherwise would have been
responsible for the suspension, delay, or interruption of the Work, or if another provision of these
General Conditions or the Special Conditions (Exhibit C to the Agreement) (if applicable) is applied to
render an equitable adjustment. Not in limitation of the generality of the foregoing, the failure of
Contractor to timely deliver documents required by these General Conditions, including, but not
limited to, the Approved Schedule and the Schedule of Values or Progress Payment Schedule, as
applicable, shall (not in limitation of other rights and remedies of IPC) form the basis of IPC’s right to
suspend performance of the Agreement and Work under the Contract Documents until Contractor has
satisfied such obligations, and shall not form the basis for an extension of time for Contractor’s
obligations under the Contract Documents, it being understood that Contractor shall at all times
diligently perform all of its obligations under the Contract Documents.
GC‐15 DELAY AND DELAY CLAIMS
GC-15.1 Basis of Claim. Contractor may make a delay claim pursuant to Sections GC-15.2 through GC-15.4
(“Delay Claims”) if all of the following occurs:
a. If Contractor’s critical path is delayed at any time in the progress of the Work due to Additional
Work, a Force Majeure Event, or the discovery of undisclosed or concealed Hazardous Materials,
all of which were not reasonably anticipated in the area or time in which the affected portion of
the Work is to be or is being performed; and
2023 Midpoint Substation Replace C506 Series Capacitor Bank                  General Conditions for Construction Services LGL 139 (11/01/2022) 
Page 19 of 37 
b. If Contractor and any Subcontractor or vendor to either (or any person or entity for whose acts or
omissions any of them are responsible) is without fault in causing such delay; and
c. If such delay could not have been prevented by reasonable precautions by Contractor or
Subcontractor, and
d. If the delay cannot reasonably be circumvented by Contractor or Subcontractor through the use
of alternate sources, work around plans or other means; and
e. If such delay will prevent the Contractor from achieving the Guaranteed Substantial Completion
Date
f. Notwithstanding the provisions in this Section GC-15.1, no extensions of the Contract Time shall
be allowed for delays or suspensions to the extent caused by the acts or omissions of the
Contractor or Subcontractors, or anyone for whose acts or omissions any of them are responsible
(including their respective vendors), or by the failure of such persons or entities to perform as
required by this Agreement.
GC-15.2 Notice of Delay. Upon the occurrence of any Directive, event, or circumstance that causes any
delay to the Work or Project that will prevent the Contractor from achieving the Guaranteed
Substantial Completion Date and the deadlines set forth in the Approved Schedule, and not later than
72 hours after the occurrence of such Directive, event, or circumstance, Contractor shall provide IPC
written notice identifying the Directive, event, or circumstance that will or may give rise to such delay
and the Work activities, Work sequences, and construction phases that will or may be delayed.
Contractor agrees and acknowledges that the failure of Contractor to provide written notice as
required by this Section 15.2 or to acquire the requisite prior written authorization to proceed with
changes to the Work that will or may cause delay arising from a Directive, event, or circumstance shall
result in waiver of Contractor’s claim for time extensions for delays arising out of such Directive,
event, or circumstance.
GC-15.3 Delay Claim Procedure. Claims by Contractor for extensions of time as a result of the delay for
which Contractor has given IPC notice shall be submitted in writing to IPC not later than 21 Days after
the occurrence of the delay causing Directive, event, or circumstance that gives rise to Contractor’s
claim. Contractor shall be permitted to submit such claims only if it has fully complied with the
requirements of Section GC-15.2, and only if the claim is permitted pursuant to Section GC-15.1.
Contractor’s claim for time extension shall specifically identify the delay causing Directive, event, or
circumstance preventing Contractor from achieving the Guaranteed Substantial Completion Date,
shall provide a detailed quantification of the time impact of the delay upon the Work, and shall indicate
how the delay satisfies Section GC-15.1. Contractor’s quantification of time impact of such delay shall
include a detailed analysis of the Approved Schedule that (1) identifies the Work activities, Work
sequences, and construction phases impacted by the delay; (2) quantifies the time impact upon each
activity, sequence, and phase; (3) and provides a list of logic changes, if any. Contractor shall also
provide an updated schedule in electronic and paper format. Failure of Contractor to provide such
written claim and detailed analysis to IPC within the timeframe established shall result in waiver of
Contractor’s claim for time extension.
GC-15.4 Time Extension. To the extent that IPC determines that it is not possible to revise the Approved
Schedule to accommodate the change without impacting the Guaranteed Substantial Completion Date,
and further determines that the facts justify a change in the Guaranteed Substantial Completion Date,
IPC will:
a. For properly submitted, valid, and approved Delay Claims, IPC will issue a Change Order extending
the Guaranteed Substantial Completion Date for as much time as IPC deems reasonable for
Contractor to complete all or any affected portion of the Work. Contractor shall not be entitled to
additional compensation or delay damages arising out of or related to the claim.
b. If, however, IPC determines that the facts do not justify a change in the Guaranteed Substantial
Completion Date claims for the same will be denied.
2023 Midpoint Substation Replace C506 Series Capacitor Bank                  General Conditions for Construction Services LGL 139 (11/01/2022) 
Page 20 of 37 
c. No Consequential Damages. Contractor acknowledges and agrees that an extension of the
Guaranteed Substantial Completion Date shall be Contractor’s sole and exclusive remedy for any
delay, hindrance, disruption, loss of productivity or inefficiency, of whatever kind, nature or cause,
affecting Contractor’s commencement, prosecution, or completion of the Work and Contractor
shall not be entitled to compensation in connection with any such delay, hindrance, disruption,
loss of productivity or inefficiency including, without limitation, direct damages, indirect damages,
consequential damages, impact damages or other similar damages or recoveries, for any reason.
GC‐16 ADDITIONAL WORK
GC-16.1 IPC may direct Additional Work without affecting the validity of the Agreement. All Additional
Work must be authorized by an applicable Directive, Work Clarification, or Change Order. Contractor,
upon receipt of a Directive, Work Clarification, or Change Order, and subject to the terms of Sections
GC-8 and GC-15, shall expeditiously proceed and carry out the Work directed by such written order.
For purposes of clarity, any reduction or deletion in Unit Price Work to an amount less than the Unit
Price Estimate shall not require a Directive, Work Clarification, or Change Order, unless requested by
IPC, it being understood that IPC shall be obligated to pay Contractor only for the actual number of
units of Unit Price Work actually performed or delivered.
GC-16.2 IPC shall have the authority to order changes in the Work that have little or no affect upon either
the cost of the Work or the time required to complete the Work, and such changes in the Work shall
be directed by IPC through a Work Clarification and shall bind IPC and Contractor. Contractor agrees
and acknowledges that no additional compensation shall be paid, no schedule adjustment shall be
permitted, and no reduction in Contract Price shall result from changes ordered by IPC under this
Section 16.2.
GC-16.3 Upon receipt of such Directive, Work Clarification, or Change Order, and subject to the terms of
Sections GC-8 and Section GC-15, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work
described therein and shall notify IPC of its agreement or disagreement with the Contract Price,
Approved Schedule, or Guaranteed Substantial Completion Date adjustment or method of adjustment,
if any, described in such written order. If Contractor objects to IPC’s proposal or denial of
compensation or Approved Schedule or Guaranteed Substantial Completion Date adjustments, then
Contractor may submit a written claim in accordance with Sections GC-17.1 and GC-17.2 below, but
shall proceed with the Work.
GC-16.4 Any Change Order developed pursuant to Section GC-16 shall be in substantially the form
attached as an annex to the Agreement, or such other form as is acceptable to IPC.
GC‐17 CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL WORK
GC-17.1 Upon the occurrence of any Directive or Work Clarification by IPC, or event or circumstance that
causes or requires the Contractor to perform what it believes to be Additional Work, and not later
than 72 hours after the occurrence of such Directive, event or circumstance, Contractor shall provide
IPC written notice identifying the event or circumstance that gives rise to such Additional Work and
the impact such work will have on the Approved Schedule. Contractor acknowledges and agrees that
failure of Contractor to provide written notice as required by this Section, or to acquire the requisite
written authorization to proceed with Additional Work arising from a Directive or Work Clarification,
shall result in waiver of Contractor’s claims for increase in the Contract Price or extensions of time for
performance of the Work.
GC-17.2 Contractor acknowledges and agrees that claims by the Contractor for Additional Work, seeking
recovery of the cost or expense of such work, shall be submitted to IPC in writing not later than 21
Days after occurrence of the Directive, Work Clarification, event, or circumstance that gives rise to
Contractor’s claim. Contractor shall be permitted to submit such claims only if it has fully complied
with the requirements of Section GC-17.1. Contractor’s claim for such work shall specifically identify
the Directive, Work Clarification, event, or circumstance causing the performance of such work and
2023 Midpoint Substation Replace C506 Series Capacitor Bank                  General Conditions for Construction Services LGL 139 (11/01/2022) 
Page 21 of 37 
shall specifically identify the Additional Work performed by the Contractor. Contractor’s claim shall
also contain a comprehensive quantity survey and cost accounting of the work Contractor claims as
Additional Work. Contractor agrees that failure of Contractor to provide such written claim to IPC
within the time frame established shall result in waiver of Contractor’s claim for such Additional
Work.
GC-17.3 Adjustments to the Contract Price shall be as follows:
a. By applying unit prices (if any) applicable to the Additional Work and agreed to by IPC, such unit
prices being set forth in an Exhibit attached to the Agreement and incorporated therein; or
b. By fixed lump sum adjustment to the Contract Price agreed to by IPC and Contractor; or
c. If neither (a) or (b) above applies, then the Contract Price shall be adjusted in the amount of actual
direct cost of added labor, Contractor-furnished materials, subcontracts and equipment less
estimated savings for deleted labor, Contractor-furnished materials, subcontracts, and equipment,
plus 10% of the net direct cost amount for Contractor’s overhead, profit, and indirect costs.
Contractor acknowledges and agrees that the overhead-profit percentage fee shall cover all
Contractor’s profit and job site overhead for superintendents, transportation and use of small
tools and equipment not susceptible to classification under transportation equipment or heavy
equipment, general office overhead, insurance, bond, if any, and all other indirect and incidental
expense.
Notwithstanding the foregoing, Contractor acknowledges and agrees that any adjustment to the
Contract Price pursuant to subsections (a), (b), or (c) of this Section GC-17.3 includes all applicable
taxes and costs, including but not limited to, overhead, profit, and markup.
If the Additional Work includes a reduction or deletion in Work, then the reduction or deletion will be
credited to IPC on the basis of reduced Contract Time and accelerated Guaranteed Substantial
Completion Date, or reduction in Contract Price, or both. The amount of credit to be allowed IPC on
the Contract Price under this Section will be the amount of the actual net decrease in cost plus a
deduction in Contractor’s overhead-profit by an amount equal to 10% of such net decrease. Except as
otherwise agreed to by IPC, in the event a reduction or deletion in Work is to Unit Price Work, the
reduction to the Contract Price shall be equal to the number of units so reduced or deleted multiplied
by the dollar amount set forth for each unit of such Work in the Schedule of Unit Prices.
GC-17.4 Calculations for purposes of Section GC-17.3.c. shall be based on the following:
a. Labor. IPC shall pay straight-time labor (straight-time payroll) direct costs and overtime labor
(premium payroll) direct costs, for those hours directly involved in completing the Additional
Work.
i) Straight-time payroll is defined as the wage rate paid for hours worked during the normal 40
hour work week.
ii) Premium payroll is defined as a wage rate higher than straight-time, payable for overtime
work. The premium payroll shall not exceed 1.5 times straight-time and will be reimbursed
only if (i) given written approval in advance by IPC, and (ii) overtime is not incurred as result
of Contractor’s actions, omissions, delays, defaults, or inefficiencies. The premium pay in
excess of the straight-time rate is not subject to the overhead-profit percentage fee.
b. Subsistence: IPC shall pay subsistence only if Contractor shows that, as a result of the Additional
Work, the workers’ number of days on the job were extended and that those workers were
actually being paid subsistence by Contractor prior to and during the time period in question.
Subsistence is not to be included in the hourly payroll rate. Subsistence will be compensated at
the direct cost paid to the employee and is not subject to any markup, overhead, or profit
percentage fee.
2023 Midpoint Substation Replace C506 Series Capacitor Bank                  General Conditions for Construction Services LGL 139 (11/01/2022) 
Page 22 of 37 
c. Contractor-furnished Materials. Contractor-furnished materials verified by IPC as necessary for
the Additional Work will be compensated at actual invoice cost plus the overhead-profit
percentage fee set forth in Section GC-17.3.c.
d. Subcontracts. Subcontracts at any tier must be approved in advance by IPC for any portions of
Additional Work. IPC has the right, but not the duty, to inspect the contract entered into between
and amongst Contractor and Subcontractor. Subcontract costs will be compensated at actual
invoice cost plus the overhead-profit percentage fee set forth in Section GC-17.3.c.
e. Equipment.
i) For Additional Work involving the use of trucks, tractors, derricks, cranes, and excavators,
Contractor shall be paid for (i) actual use at agreed rental prices not to exceed rental prices of
comparable equipment available to IPC from commercial rental sources, or (ii) at rental rates
not to exceed 60 percent of the monthly rental rates established in the latest edition of the
Rental Rate Blue Book for Construction Equipment, whichever is lower. Hourly rates calculated
using the Rental Rate Blue Book shall be 60 percent times the Blue Book monthly rate divided
by 176. Said rental prices shall include, unless otherwise specifically agreed to, the furnishing
of all necessary power or fuel, lubricating oils and greases, rigging, maintenance and repairs, but
unless otherwise specifically agreed to, shall not include labor for operating purposes.
Contractor’s expense of furnishing all gas, oil, lubrication, maintenance and repair (excluding
operating personnel) shall not exceed the operating rates established in the Rental Rate Blue
Book. For heavy equipment (not self-propelled or readily movable), equipment hauling costs
to and from Contractor’s nearest equipment yard or nearest project site to the Project will be
paid for at the actual rate paid by Contractor provided that rate does not exceed the average rate
charged for similar transportation by local heavy equipment transporters. Said rental prices
shall determine the complete payment for equipment furnished, including profit,
superintendents, general overhead and other indirect expense.
ii) For Additional Work requiring Rental Equipment, Contractor shall furnish to IPC a detailed
list of equipment by type, size, and proposed rental rate. Hourly, weekly, and monthly rental
rates shall be given for each type of equipment listed. Contractors shall use a rental rate of
monthly, weekly, or hourly, whichever equals to a lesser charge for IPC.
iii) Hourly rates shall be paid only on such time as equipment is in “actual use”. Time of “actual
use” is defined as the time equipment is on the Work site actually in use.
iv) Standby will be paid to Contractor during any period of Additional Work to compensate
Contractor for keeping, to the extent required in the notice, its equipment committed to the
Additional Work in a standby status. The standby charge for equipment shall not exceed 25%
of the agreed upon rental rate and will only be made to equipment that is in operable
condition.
GC‐18 DISPUTE RESOLUTION
GC-18.1 Except as may be expressly provided elsewhere in the Contract Documents to the contrary, any
dispute arising out of or in connection with this Agreement or its performance, including but not
limited to its validity, construction, or enforcement shall, to the extent possible, be settled amicably
by negotiation between the Parties represented by management of each Party, prior to either Party
taking legal action. Both Contractor and IPC agree to make good faith efforts to resolve any dispute
under the Agreement. Negotiations and meetings conducted pursuant to this Section shall be
confidential and shall be treated as compromise and settlement discussions not admissible in any
legal proceeding involving this Agreement, in accordance with state and Federal Rules of Evidence.
2023 Midpoint Substation Replace C506 Series Capacitor Bank                  General Conditions for Construction Services LGL 139 (11/01/2022) 
Page 23 of 37 
GC‐19 RETAINAGE AND PROGRESS PAYMENTS
GC-19.1 Retainage. From each payment to Contractor, IPC may withhold 5% of the amount otherwise due
after deduction of any amounts as set forth in Section GC-19.2 below; provided however, that IPC may
increase retention to 20% if Contractor fails to provide a performance bond issued by a surety
acceptable to IPC when requested to do so by IPC. IPC may, at its option and in its sole discretion,
reduce the amount to be retained at any time, collect or not collect retainage, or change its retainage
practice at any time during the Agreement without waiving any of its rights under the Agreement.
GC-19.2 Application for Progress Payment. Monthly during performance of the Work, or on such other
schedule as shall be set forth in Progress Payment Schedule, Contractor may make application for
payment that shall include an itemized and detailed invoice and be in conformance with the Schedule
of Values, Progress Payment Schedule, or Schedule of Unit Prices, as applicable. An Application for
Progress Payment that includes a request for payment for Additional Work shall include reference to
the Change Order authorizing the Additional Work and any other substantiating data available to
Contractor and requested by IPC. No payments will be made under the Contract Documents except as
certified by the IPAR. The IPAR will make a determination based on measurement or approximation
of whether the Application for Progress Payment is consistent with the Schedule of Values, Progress
Payment Schedule, Approved Schedule, or Schedule of Unit Prices (each as applicable), and whether
the Application for Progress Payment accords with the IPAR’s determination of the amount of Work
performed and materials incorporated into the Work. The IPAR will review Contractor’s timeliness
and quality of Work through the date of the Application for Progress Payment; Contractor’s payment
status with its employees and Subcontractors; and overall compliance with the Contract Documents in
the performance of the Work. Based on the IPAR’s review, the IPAR may either reject the Application
for Progress Payment or authorize payment in whole or in part. The IPAR will only certify payment
for those amounts that the IPAR has no dispute or objection, less retainage, any offsets, prior
payments, and other amounts chargeable to Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents.
IPC shall only be obligated to pay for materials after the materials have been delivered onsite and
installed in accordance with this Agreement.
GC-19.3 The amount authorized for payment by the IPAR, if any, will be paid by IPC to Contractor within
30 Days of the IPAR’s approval of payment. The IPAR shall advise Contractor at the time of
disapproving or nullifying an application for payment of the specific reasons for its disapproval or
nullification. If the reasons for the IPAR’s objections or disputes are cured, Contractor may renew its
Application for Progress Payment on those items and submit a revised invoice and application.
Progress payments will only be made upon the IPAR’s approved invoices. A progress payment by IPC,
or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by IPC, shall not constitute acceptance of Work that
is defective or not in accordance with the Contract Documents.
GC-19.4 As a condition precedent to IPC’s obligation to make payment to Contractor for any amount
sought under a Application for Progress Payment, submitted pursuant to the Contract Documents,
Contractor shall provide to IPC upon IPC’s request and in a form acceptable to IPC (i) executed waivers
of lien and claim in the amount of Contractor’s invoice or Application for Progress Payment, in the
form or substantially the form attached as an annex to the Agreement; (ii) executed waivers of lien
and claim from each Subcontractor for which Contractor seeks payment, in the amount sought by
Contractor in its invoice or Application for Progress Payment; and (iii) a duly executed and
acknowledged sworn statement from Contractor showing all Subcontractors that have provided
Work, the amount of each subcontract Contractor has executed with the Subcontractor, the amount
requested for payment to each such Subcontractor, and the amounts to be paid to and retained by the
Contractor from such progress payment, together with similar sworn statements from all such
Subcontractors. The waiver and release forms submitted by the Contractor shall be conditional as to
the payment sought by the current Application for Progress Payment and shall be unconditional as to
the payment received pursuant to the prior payment Application for Progress Payment.
2023 Midpoint Substation Replace C506 Series Capacitor Bank                  General Conditions for Construction Services LGL 139 (11/01/2022) 
Page 24 of 37 
GC-19.5 Contractor shall promptly pay each Subcontractor the amount paid to the Contractor by IPC on
account of each Subcontractor’s performance of the Work. The Contractor’s subcontract agreements
and purchase order agreements shall require each Subcontractor to make payment in a similar
manner to the entities with which it has contracted for performance of the Work. IPC reserves the
right to communicate directly with Subcontractors regarding payment, and to pay such entities
directly or by means of multiple-payee checks as IPC deems necessary to protect its interests. Should
the Contractor withhold payment from any Subcontractors, Contractor shall notify IPC in writing. IPC
may withhold such funds from Contractor until the dispute is resolved; provided that such
withholding does not conflict with applicable law. Nothing in this Section GC-19.5 shall be construed
or interpreted to (i) create a contractual relationship of any kind between IPC, on the one hand, and
Subcontractors on the other; or (ii) place any obligation on IPC to pay Subcontractors.
GC-19.6 Contractor shall continue performance of the Work and shall maintain the progress of the Work
in accordance with the Approved Schedule throughout the duration of any dispute arising out of the
Work or the Agreement, including but not limited to, disputes arising out of Delay Claims made in
accordance with Section GC-15 and disputes arising out of claims for Additional Work, made in
accordance with Section GC-17. If Contractor continues to perform the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents throughout the duration of such dispute, IPC shall continue to make payments in
accordance with the Contract Documents on undisputed items.
GC-19.7 Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the foregoing sections, IPC reserves the right, at its
discretion, to withhold payments which may otherwise be due Contractor if (i) Contractor fails to
correct defective, non-conforming, or damaged Work; (ii) Contractor fails to make substantial
progress on the Work; (iii) Contractor fails to ensure Subcontractors are promptly paid; (iv) there is
reasonable evidence of a potential third party claim against IPC related to the Work; (v) there is
reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Price;
(vi) there is reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time, and
that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the
anticipated delay; (vii) Contractor is otherwise in breach of any provision of the Contract Documents;
or (viii) IPC has any other good faith dispute with Contractor.
GC-19.8 Contractor’s obligations under this Section GC-19 shall include but not limited to the obligation
to pay all Subcontractors and any other person or entity having construction lien rights regarding the
Project due to their performance of the Contractor’s obligations under the Agreement. Contractor
agrees to keep the Project and Work site free and clear of any and all such lien claims filed by any such
person or entity. Within 15 Days after written demand from IPC, the Contractor shall remove any such
lien claim from the Project or Project site by payment, settlement or the furnishing and perfection of
a lien release bond or deposit pursuant to applicable law; upon the Contractor’s failure or refusal to
do so, IPC may do so in which event Contractor shall pay IPC’s attorneys’ fees, costs, disbursements
and expenses so incurred. In addition to all other obligations herein, Contractor agrees to indemnify,
hold harmless, reimburse, and defend IPC and others with an interest in the Project or Project site, if
any, from, for, and against any and all liens referenced in this Section GC-19.8, and actions, suits,
proceedings, costs, disbursements and expenses incurred, including but not limited to attorneys’ fees,
related to such liens.
GC‐20 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
GC-20.1 The term “Substantial Completion” means when (a) the materials and equipment for the Project
have been installed substantially in accordance with the Contract Documents, are operational, and
have been checked and tested as required by IPC; (b) a Punch List of the uncompleted items (not
impacting the use, occupation and operation of the Project) and dates for completion of those items
shall be established, unless IPC waives in writing completion of Punch List Items; (c) IPC has received
a temporary or final certificate of occupancy, if applicable, and all other governmental approvals
necessary and required for IPC to occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion for its intended
purpose; and (d) IPC can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use.
2023 Midpoint Substation Replace C506 Series Capacitor Bank                  General Conditions for Construction Services LGL 139 (11/01/2022) 
Page 25 of 37 
GC-20.2 Not less than five Days prior to Substantial Completion, Contractor shall submit to IPC the
proposed Punch List for the Work. The Punch List shall include a list of Punch List Items, an estimate
of the cost (inclusive of parts, material, labor, supervision, equipment rental costs, and overhead) to
complete each Punch List Items and an estimate of the scheduled date of completion for each Punch
List Item. Within five Days following receipt of such proposed Punch List, IPC shall notify Contractor
in writing that it accepts such Punch List, or IPC shall state its reasons for disagreement with such
Punch List in reasonable detail; provided, however, that IPC’s acceptance or rejection in whole or in
part of such Punch List (including the estimate of costs to complete the Punch List Items) shall not
relieve Contractor of its liability to complete each Punch List Item in accordance with this Agreement.
Unless otherwise specified in the Punch List, all Punch List Items must be completed to the reasonable
satisfaction of IPC by the Final Completion Date. If Contractor does not complete a Punch List Item
within the allotted time, IPC shall have the right to complete such item and set off the cost thereof
against any outstanding amounts due Contractor. Notwithstanding any other provision of this
Agreement to the contrary, if the completion of any Punch List Item requires the Work or Project to
be de-activated or inoperable, IPC shall have the option of completing such Punch List Items itself (at
Contractor’s expense) or specifying the dates and times when such Punch List Items may be
completed by Contractor.
GC-20.3 When Contractor believes there has been Substantial Completion of the Work, Contractor shall:
i) prepare and submit to the IPAR a Certificate of Substantial Completion in a form acceptable to IPC,
or substantially the form attached as an annex to the Agreement, that will list the items (including all
remaining Punch List Items) yet to be completed or corrected, and will identify a date for each of those
items to be completed or corrected by Contractor; ii) provide to IPC all Record Documents as required
pursuant to Exhibit C. If the IPAR does not agree with the items or representations in Contractor’s
Certificate of Substantial Completion, the IPAR will advise Contractor of the changes it requires and
Contractor will revise and resubmit the Certificate of Substantial Completion. After approval by the
IPAR and written acceptance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion by IPC, IPC will take
possession and control of the Project. For purposes of the Contract Documents, the date that
Contractor submits a conforming Certificate of Substantial Completion that is accepted in writing by
IPC shall be deemed the date of Substantial Completion of the Work.
GC-20.4 Within 35 Days following acceptance by IPC of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, the
retention withheld by IPC shall be reduced to the lesser of (i) one hundred fifty percent (150%) of the
estimated value of the Work yet to be completed (including any rework) in accordance with this
Agreement, or (ii) five percent (5%) of the Contract Price; provided, however, that IPC shall not be
required to reduce retention pursuant to this Section if a dispute exists between IPC and Contractor.
GC‐21 FINAL COMPLETION
GC-21.1 Notice of Final Completion. Promptly after Contractor determines that Final Completion of the
Work has occurred, Contractor shall issue to the IPAR a Notice of Final Completion in a form
acceptable to IPC, or substantially the form attached as an annex to the Agreement, which shall include
relevant Record Documents as identified in Exhibit C, performance test reports as required by IPC, a
completed Punch List, and the date upon which all of Contractor’s Work was completed. After receipt
of the Notice of Final Completion, the IPAR shall respond to Contractor in writing and either accept
such Notice of Final Completion or identify any deficiencies, which deficiencies shall be promptly
corrected by Contractor and the Notice of Final Completion resubmitted to the IPAR. The date the
Notice of Final Completion has been accepted in writing by IPC shall be the Date of Final Completion.
GC-21.2 Final Completion of the Work. Final Completion of the Work, and the date on which Final
Completion of the Work shall have been deemed to occur, shall be when (a) Substantial Completion
has occurred; (b) all Punch List Items, site clean-up, and Restoration has been completed; (c) Record
Documents have been accepted by IPC; (d) Contractor’s Notice of Final Completion has been
affirmatively accepted, in writing, by IPC; (e) Contractor has provided IPC with four copies of
Operations and Maintenance manuals; (f) IPC has a final certificate of occupancy and all other
2023 Midpoint Substation Replace C506 Series Capacitor Bank                  General Conditions for Construction Services LGL 139 (11/01/2022) 
Page 26 of 37 
governmental approvals necessary for IPC to occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof
for its intended purpose; and (g) Contractor shall have returned to IPC all IPC property. Contractor
shall achieve Final Completion of the Work by the Final Completion Date.
GC-21.3 IPC Property. Upon Final Completion of the Work, Contractor, its employees, agents and
subcontractors at all tiers shall return all IPC property (including, without limitation, security access
cards, keys, passwords, tokens, pagers and parking cards) issued to them. Contractor shall be
responsible for replacement cost of any unreturned IPC property.
GC‐22 FINAL PAYMENT
GC-22.1 Upon Final Completion of the Work, Contractor shall submit the following to IPC:
a. Final Application for Progress Payment;
b. Release of any and all liens and claims and consent of surety (if applicable);
c. All documents, data, and warranties as provided in these General Conditions; and
d. An affidavit of Contractor, if requested by IPC, that all indebtedness connected with the Work,
including but not limited to, payroll, payments to suppliers, and rentals have been fully and finally
paid;
Within 30 Days of IPC’s acceptance of the Notice of Final Completion and IPC’s receipt and acceptance
of the information and documents set forth in this Section GC-22.1, IPC shall pay Contractor any
undisputed balance due on the Contract Price and any Change Orders and retention withheld by IPC,
less 150% of the value of any disputed item(s). Acceptance of final payment by Contractor and
Subcontractor shall constitute a complete release of IPC from all claims, including without limitation
all liens as allowed by applicable law (whether statutory or otherwise and including mechanic’s or
suppliers’ liens, provision of all such final lien releases shall be a condition precedent to payment of
any moneys due); (ii) all potential claims for additional compensation hereunder by Contractor or
Subcontractor with respect to any Work performed or furnished in connection with the Agreement;
and (iii) all potential claims against IPC for any act or omission of IPC or of any other person or entity
relating to or affecting the Agreement and arising prior to the date of such payment. The payment by
IPC shall not be deemed a waiver by IPC of any obligation of Contractor under this Agreement and
shall not constitute a waiver of any claim or right IPC may have at any time against Contractor
including, without limitation, unsettled liens, warranty rights, and indemnification obligations of
Contractor.
GC-22.2 Notwithstanding the provisions in Sections GC-19 and GC-22, the aggregate of IPC’s payments to
Contractor, excluding payments provided for under Change Orders, shall not exceed the Contract
Price.
GC‐23 WARRANTY OF TITLE/ RISK OF LOSS/WARRANTY OF WORKMANSHIP AND QUALITY
GC-23.1 Warranty of Title; Risk of Loss: Contractor warrants that title to all Work included within
Contractor’s Application for Progress Payment will pass to IPC no later than the time of payment and
that such title shall be free and clear of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances of the
Contractor, Subcontractors, or other entities claiming interest in the Project, lands, or improvements
by reason of having provided labor, material or equipment to the Project. Notwithstanding the
passage of title as set forth in this Section GC-23.1, Contractor shall, except as otherwise provided in
this Agreement, bear the risk of loss with respect to, and shall have care, custody and control of, all
materials, equipment, spare parts, supplies and maintenance equipment (including temporary
materials, equipment, and supplies) located within the Project site, off-site, and any other completed
Work until such time as the transfer of care, custody, and control to IPC is effected upon Substantial
Completion of the Work.
2023 Midpoint Substation Replace C506 Series Capacitor Bank                  General Conditions for Construction Services LGL 139 (11/01/2022) 
Page 27 of 37 
GC-23.2 Contractor represents, warrants, and covenants to IPC that all materials and equipment
incorporated into the Work covered by the Agreement shall be new, of the quality specified and, where
not specified, of a grade suitable for their intended use and in conformance with the Specifications,
Drawings, Samples and other descriptions set forth in the Agreement. Contractor shall, and Contractor
shall cause its Subcontractors, to perform all obligations and Work under this Agreement in a prompt
and diligent manner, and with superior workmanship. Contractor’s Work shall be in strict compliance
with the Contract Documents and other requirements referenced in this Agreement. Any Work not
conforming to these requirements, including but not limited to substitutions not properly approved
and authorized, shall be considered defective. Contractor warrants all equipment, materials, and labor
furnished or Work performed by Contractor and Subcontractor under the Agreement against defects
in materials, workmanship, and non-conformities for a period commencing on the Effective Date and
terminating on either (i) two years following Final Completion of the Work, or (ii) the warranty period
otherwise provided by Contractor and Subcontractor, whichever is longer (“Warranty Period”).
Contractor’s warranty shall not limit the time period within which IPC may exercise its warranty
rights for the reporting of defects and deficiencies which are identified after the expiration of the
Warranty Period but are deemed to have occurred prior to, or during the Warranty Period.
Contractor’s equipment and materials warranty shall not limit any other right or remedy available to
IPC for breaches of this Agreement.
GC-23.3 Contractor shall perform such tests as IPC may require to verify that such repairs and
replacements comply with the requirements of the Agreement. Contractor shall pay for all costs
incidental to such repair, replacement and testing, including, without limitation, the value of any IPC-
furnished materials spoiled or damaged by the Contractor’s failure to comply with the Contract
Documents, and the removal, replacement and reinstallation of equipment and materials. Contractor
warrants such repaired or replaced work against defective materials and workmanship for a period
of two years from and after IPC’s acceptance of the repair and replacement work. Should Contractor
fail to promptly make the necessary repair, replacement and test, or should IPC determine that an
emergency or exigent circumstances exist such that IPC must repair or replace any equipment or
apparatus as promptly as practicable, IPC may perform or cause to be performed the same at
Contractor’s expense. IPC reserves the right to have any such repair or replacement work done when
IPC deems advisable. Contractor and its surety or sureties, if any, shall be liable for the satisfaction
and full performance of the warranties and obligations as set forth herein.
GC-23.4 Upon Notice received from IPC during the Warranty Period, Contractor shall, without additional
compensation:
a. Construction: Re-perform or cause to be re-performed any Work that is found to be deficient and
non-conforming in that it fails to meet the standard set out in Section GC-23.2; and
b. Equipment and Materials: Take such steps as may be necessary to repair or replace (at IPC’s
option) any equipment or materials found to be defective or non-conforming due to failure to meet
the standards set out in Section GC-23.2. Contractor agrees that Work not conforming to these
requirements, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may be considered
defective.
c. This Section GC-23 shall not limit any other remedies available to IPC under this Agreement or
applicable law.
GC-23.5 Warranty Notice: Contractor’s warranty obligations and liabilities are conditioned on IPC
delivering notice of an alleged deficiency or defect, after actual discovery thereof by IPC. Any such
Notice of deficiency or defect shall state with reasonable specificity the observation of the deficiency
or defect and the reasons supporting IPC’s belief concerning the alleged deficiency or defect.
Contractor shall respond to any such Notice not later than five Days after receipt of any such notice,
and Contractor shall promptly commence the appropriate re-performance, repair, or replacement,
consistent with Section GC-23.4.
2023 Midpoint Substation Replace C506 Series Capacitor Bank                  General Conditions for Construction Services LGL 139 (11/01/2022) 
Page 28 of 37 
GC-23.6 All warranties or guarantees incorporated into the Project shall be delivered to IPC upon payment
for the same but in no event later than Contractor’s final Application for Progress Payment. Final
payment is contingent upon receipt of all such written warranties, which must be valid and
enforceable by IPC. Effective upon the written demand of IPC or upon the insolvency, bankruptcy,
dissolution, or other incapacity of the Contractor, Contractor assigns to IPC all Contractors and
Subcontractors’ warranties in materials and equipment and other portions or components of the
Work.
GC-23.7 Contractor shall collect, assemble in a binder and submit to IPC written warranties and related
documents provided by Contractors and Subcontractors, including but not limited to suppliers of
equipment, appliances, and other components of the Project. Contractor shall ensure that all such
written warranties extend to IPC.
GC-23.8 In addition to the warranties set forth in above, Contractor shall make any and all repairs or
replacements resulting from defects in materials or workmanship or non-conforming Work at its own
cost for a period of two years following Final Completion of the Work. In addition to all other
obligations herein, Contractor shall indemnify, defend, reimburse, and hold IPC and the IPC’s
employees and agents harmless from all claims, liabilities, losses, actions, awards, costs, expenses and
damages, whether actual or merely alleged and whether directly incurred or from a third party,
including but not limited to attorney’s fees and related costs, arising from any such defects or non-
conforming Work during such periods. Contractor shall make the repairs and replacements required
of Contractor promptly upon receipt of written notification from IPC. If Contractor fails to make such
repairs and replacements promptly, IPC may repair or replace the defective element of the Project
and Contractor shall reimburse IPC for the cost thereof, (together with an administrative fee of fifteen
percent (15%) of the cost of the repairs or replacement work) within 10 Days after written demand;
and, IPC may also withhold payments to Contractor.
GC‐24 COLLATERAL WORK
GC-24.1 IPC reserves the right to have separate contractors, IPC’s employees or agents, as it may elect,
enter upon the property near, or the location of, the Work for the purpose of constructing or installing
collateral work. Contractor shall cooperate and work in harmony with IPC’s employees, agents, and
other contractors used by IPC.
GC‐25 REGULATIONS AND PERMITS
GC-25.1 Contractor shall comply with all federal, state, and local laws, ordinances, and regulations
affecting the conduct of the Work, and all such orders or decrees as currently exist and those which
may be enacted later, by bodies or tribunals having jurisdiction or authority over the Work; shall give
all notices; and shall procure all applicable permits, licenses, and inspections and pay all fees and
charges in connection therewith, except as may otherwise be provided in the Contract Documents. In
addition to all other obligations herein, Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and save harmless IPC,
affiliates, directors, officers, employees, agents and its representatives, and each of them from, for, and
against any and all claims, losses, costs, damages, and expense, whether actual or merely alleged and
whether directly incurred or from a third party, including attorney and expert fees and costs both at
trial and on appeal, arising from or based on the violation of any such laws, ordinances, regulations,
orders, or decrees, whether such violations be by Contractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or
employees. Upon and as a condition of achievement of Final Completion of the Work, Contractor shall
provide to IPC the originals of all permits, receipts, certificates, licenses, and other documents
received in complying with this Section GC-25.1.
GC-25.2 Should any discrepancy or inconsistency be discovered between the Agreement and any law,
ordinance, regulation, order, or decree, Contractor shall immediately report the same in writing to
IPC. If Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to laws, statutes, ordinances, building or
other codes, and rules, and regulations or other lawful orders of public authorities without such notice
2023 Midpoint Substation Replace C506 Series Capacitor Bank                  General Conditions for Construction Services LGL 139 (11/01/2022) 
Page 29 of 37 
to IPC, Contractor shall assume responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to
correction. Contractor shall be responsible for the compliance of all laws, ordinances, regulations,
orders, or decrees by Subcontractors.
GC‐26 EASEMENT AGREEMENTS
GC-26.1 Contractor agrees to abide by and conform with all conditions set forth in the easements
pertaining in any manner to the Work; such easements being expressly made a part of the Contract
Documents.
GC‐27 UNDERGROUND UTILITIES
GC-27.1 Contractor shall, unless otherwise specifically provided for in writing, make arrangements with
utilities and a locating company to identify the location of all underground utilities prior to
commencing Work. Contractor agrees that all Work shall be done at Contractor’s risk regardless of
whether IPC or any other person requests the location of the underground utilities. If any loss or
damage shall result, Contractor shall promptly repair or replace such loss or damage free from all
expense to IPC.
GC‐28 INFRINGEMENT OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS; LICENSES
GC-28.1 Contractor represents and warrants that any Work performed by Contractor and Subcontractor,
and each component thereof, including code and any embedded software, when properly used as
contemplated herein, and their copying, use, modification and distribution as contemplated by the
Agreement shall not infringe or misappropriate any third party’s intellectual property rights. To the
extent necessary for IPC’s use of the Work and Work Product as contemplated by the Agreement,
Contractor grants to IPC a license (or sublicense, as applicable) to all intellectual property included or
incorporated into the Work and the Work Product. Contractor represents and warrants to IPC that it
has obtained all authorizations and agreements necessary for Contractor to sublicense to IPC (or other
form of authorization for IPC) all third party intellectual property incorporated into the Work and
Work Product to the fullest extent necessary for IPC to use the Work and Work Product for the
purposes contemplated by the Agreement. In addition to all other obligations herein, Contractor shall
assume all liability and fully defend, indemnify and save harmless IPC, its members, partners, officers,
directors, affiliates, agents, and employees of any of them, successors of the foregoing and assigns,
from, for, and against all claims, suits, proceedings, damages, losses, expenses, fees and royalties,
including but not limited to attorneys’ and expert witnesses’ fees and related costs, disbursements
and expenses, arising from any infringement or misappropriation, whether actual or merely alleged
and whether directly incurred or from a third party, of any patent, trademark, copyright, or other
intellectual property right of any article, machine, manufacture, structure, composition, arrangement,
improvement, design, device, methods or process embodied or used in the performance of the
Agreement or the Work. IPC and its successors and assigns will give written notice of all such
infringement and misappropriation claims, suits, or proceedings instituted against it to the
Contractor, who shall defend same, and IPC will give Contractor reasonable assistance at Contractor’s
expense.
GC‐29 REMOVAL OF EQUIPMENT
GC-29.1 Contractor shall not sell, assign, mortgage, hypothecate, or remove equipment or materials which
have been installed or which may be necessary for the completion of the Work, without the written
consent of the IPAR.
GC‐30 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT
GC-30.1 Contractor shall not assign any of the Contract Documents or any portion thereof or any rights
therein, or delegate any of its duties, in each case whether by operation of law or otherwise, to any
2023 Midpoint Substation Replace C506 Series Capacitor Bank                  General Conditions for Construction Services LGL 139 (11/01/2022) 
Page 30 of 37 
person, persons, entity, or organization without the prior written consent of IPC. The Parties
acknowledge that the Work contemplated by the Contract Documents constitutes specialized services,
and as such IPC may withhold its consent to Contractor’s assignment of its rights and delegation of its
duties in IPC’s sole discretion. No assignment, even though IPC shall have consented to such
assignment, shall relieve Contractor from its liability or obligations under the Contract Documents for
the performance and completion of the Work by the time and in the manner herein contracted for,
and all such assignment shall be subject to the rights provided to IPC herein. IPC may assign the
Agreement and any rights and obligations relating to the Agreement (including but not limited to its
right to assert claims and defenses against Contractor) at IPC’s discretion. Each contract or
arrangement Contractor executes with a Subcontractor shall state that the Subcontractor agrees to
the assignment of the subcontract to IPC, and Contractor shall ensure that each contract Subcontractor
executes related to the Project shall have the same requirement.
GC‐31 IPC’S RIGHT TO TERMINATION FOR CONVENIENCE
GC-31.1 IPC may, at its option, for any reason, and without notice and without cause, terminate or suspend
the Agreement in whole or in part, at any time by written notice thereof to Contractor, whether or not
Contractor is in default. Such termination shall also terminate all subcontracts pertaining to such
Work. Contractor hereby waives any claims for damages, including without limitation loss of
anticipated profits, on account thereof, and shall cause Subcontractors to waive the same. As the sole
right and remedy of Contractor, IPC shall pay Contractor in accordance with Section GC-31.3 below;
provided, however, that those provisions of the Contract Documents which by their very nature
survive final acceptance of the Work shall remain in full force and effect after such termination.
GC-31.2 Upon receipt of any such notice, Contractor shall, unless the notice requires otherwise:
a. Immediately discontinue Work on the date and to the extent specified in the notice;
b. Place no further orders or subcontracts for materials, services, or facilities other than may be
necessary or required for completion of such portion of the Work not terminated;
c. Promptly terminate and cancel, upon terms satisfactory to IPC, all orders and subcontracts to the
extent they relate to the performance of the Work terminated or, at IPC’s election, assign IPC those
orders and subcontracts and revoke agreements specified in such notice; and
d. Assist IPC, as specifically requested in writing, in the maintenance, protection, and disposition of
property acquired by IPC under the Agreement.
GC-31.3 IPC shall not be liable for indirect, incidental, or consequential damages of any kind related to
termination of this Agreement. Upon any such termination, IPC will pay to Contractor an undisputed
amount determined in accordance with the following (without duplication of any item):
a. Subject to offsets, all undisputed amounts due and owing and not previously paid to Contractor
for Work completed prior to such notice and for Work thereafter completed as specified in such
notice.
b. The reasonable costs incurred pursuant to Section GC-31.2.d. above.
GC‐32 IPC’S RIGHT TO TERMINATE THE AGREEMENT FOR CAUSE
GC-32.1 Each of the following shall constitute an event of default by Contractor under this Agreement:
a. If Contractor utilizes improper materials or inadequately skilled workers;
b. If Contractor fails to make prompt payment when due to any Subcontractor;
c. If Contractor fails to abide by the orders, regulations, rules, ordinances, or laws of governmental
authorities having jurisdiction;
d. If Contractor fails to perform under the Agreement or Contract Documents;
2023 Midpoint Substation Replace C506 Series Capacitor Bank                  General Conditions for Construction Services LGL 139 (11/01/2022) 
Page 31 of 37 
e. If Contractor abandons the Work;
f. If Contractor assigns the Agreement in violation of the Agreement or Contract Documents;
g. If Contractor subcontracts Work without consent of IPC in violation of the Agreement or Contract
Documents;
h. If Contractor fails, neglects, refuses, or is unable at any time during the course of the performance
of the Work to provide sufficient material, equipment, services, or labor to timely perform the
Work;
i. If Contractor sells or transfers all or substantially all of its assets;
j. If Contractor merges with or into any other entity;
k. If Contractor is in breach of any representation, obligation, or warranty given in this Agreement;
or
l. If IPC assesses Delay Liquidated Damages in an amount equal to any individual cap, if such cap
exists (unless such Delay Liquidated Damages cap is increased by mutual written agreement of
the Parties). If no such cap exists, IPC has the right to terminate the Agreement for cause at any
point Contractor fails to complete the Work in accordance with the Agreement and the Approved
Schedule.
GC-32.2 IPC will issue a written notice of default to Contractor in the event of default pursuant to Section
GC-32.1. If, after receipt of such written notice, Contractor fails to cure the default(s) within seven
Days, IPC may, without prejudice to any other rights or remedies it may have under the Agreement,
terminate the Agreement for cause; provided, however, that if the nature of the default is such that it
could not reasonably be cured within the seven day period, then IPC may terminate the Agreement
for cause immediately upon providing written notice to Contractor. IPC will issue a written notice of
termination to Contractor at the time this Agreement is terminated. Upon such termination, IPC may:
a. Take possession of the Work site;
b. Take possession of all Contractor’s materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment;
c. Accept assignment of subcontracts at all tiers; and
d. Finish the Work by whatever reasonable method IPC may deem necessary.
GC-32.3 If IPC terminates this Agreement pursuant to Section GC-32.2, IPC shall not be required to make
any payments for Work completed from and after the date of termination. IPC shall determine the
total expenses that will be incurred by it and accrued in completing the Work including, without
limitation, any costs of accelerated or expedited construction methods incurred in an attempt to
mitigate delay, liquidated damages, charges for administering subcontracts, and legal fees associated
with the termination. If such expenses exceed the balance of the Contract Price that is unpaid as of the
date of termination, then Contractor shall be liable for and shall pay to IPC the amount of such excess
within ten (10) Days following receipt of IPC’s demand for such payment. IPC shall not be required to
obtain the lowest price for completing the Work, but may make such expenditures as in its sole
judgment shall best accomplish such completion. All unpaid Delay Liquidated Damages that have
accrued up to the date of termination shall be immediately due and payable by Contractor to IPC
regardless of IPC’s failure to request such amounts.
GC-32.4 If IPC terminates this Agreement pursuant to Section GC-32.2, IPC shall have the right to (i) offset
any amounts owed by IPC to Contractor, under any active agreement between Contractor and IPC,
against any and all amounts owed by Contractor to IPC as of the date of termination, (ii) apply any
amounts held as accumulated retainage or any amounts held as security for the completion of Punch
List Items or uncompleted Work or to cover the cost of Punch List Items or uncompleted Work against
any and all amounts owed by Contractor to IPC as of the date of termination, (iii) draw upon and retain
2023 Midpoint Substation Replace C506 Series Capacitor Bank                  General Conditions for Construction Services LGL 139 (11/01/2022) 
Page 32 of 37 
any security to cover the cost of any and all amounts owed by Contractor, and (iv) stop all further
payments to Contractor until the Work is complete.
GC-32.5 If a termination of the Agreement in whole or in part pursuant to this Section 32 is deemed in a
final judgment to be wrongful, then the termination shall automatically be converted to a termination
for the IPC’s convenience pursuant to Section GC-31.
GC-32.6 This Agreement shall terminate immediately at IPC’s discretion if (i) Contractor files a petition
seeking to take advantage of any law relating to bankruptcy, insolvency, reorganization, winding up,
or composition or readjustment of debts and, in the case of any such proceeding instituted against
Contractor (but not by Contractor) such proceeding is not dismissed within 30 Days of such filing; or
Contractor makes a general assignment for the benefit of its creditors, or if a receiver is appointed on
account of the insolvency of Contractor.
GC‐33 IPC’S RIGHT TO IMMEDIATELY TERMINATE OR SUSPEND
GC-33.1 Notwithstanding Sections GC-31 and GC-32 above, IPC may terminate or suspend this Agreement
or any SOW or the Work performed thereunder, in whole or in part, immediately and without prior
notice to Contractor if, in IPC’s sole and reasonable discretion, IPC determines that Contractor’s or any
Subcontractor’s acts or omissions with respect to the Work or the Work site pose an imminent threat
to: 1) the life, safety, or physical security of, those performing labor or Work or furnishing materials or
equipment at or near the Work site, or any other persons who may be affected thereby, including,
without limitation, IPC employees, agents, or any separate IPC consultants or contractors at or near
the worksite, or members of the public; or 2) the environment, including without limitation, any public
or private lands.
If IPC exercises its rights under this Section GC-33, Contractor and all Subcontractors performing Work
at or near the Work site shall immediately discontinue all Work as directed by IPC. No Work shall
resume and neither Contractor nor any Subcontractor shall enter the Work site unless and until IPC
determines, in its sole discretion, that the conditions or circumstances giving rise to any such
suspension of the Work, the Agreement, or any SOW have been abated and IPC provides notice to
resume the Work. Alternatively, IPC may exercise its right to terminate the applicable SOW, or the
Agreement, or both, in accordance with Section GC-31 or Section GC-32 above.
GC‐34 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS, ARTIFACTS, WETLAND CONDITIONS, AND MATERIALS
BROUGHT TO WORK SITE
GC-34.1 If after the commencement of the Work, Hazardous Material is discovered at the Work site,
Contractor shall immediately stop Work in the affected area. Contractor shall immediately report the
condition to IPC in writing and, if required, the government agency with jurisdiction.
GC-34.2 Contractor shall not be required to perform any Work relating to or in the area of Hazardous
Material without written direction by IPC.
GC-34.3 If Contractor or Subcontractor did not bring the Hazardous Material to the Work site, IPC shall be
responsible for retaining an independent testing laboratory to determine the nature of the material
encountered and whether the material requires corrective measures or remedial action. Contractor
shall resume Work in the area affected by any Hazardous Material only upon written direction by IPC
after the Hazardous Material has been removed or rendered harmless and only after approval, if
necessary, of the governmental agency with jurisdiction.
GC-34.4 If Contractor incurs additional costs or is delayed due to the presence or remediation of
Hazardous Material, Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or
the Contract Time; provided, however, that Contractor is required to take all reasonable measures to
mitigate any delay or cost, and that Contractor will not be entitled to an equitable adjustment if
Contractor brought the Hazardous Material to the Work Site. Contractor shall only be able to recover
2023 Midpoint Substation Replace C506 Series Capacitor Bank                  General Conditions for Construction Services LGL 139 (11/01/2022) 
Page 33 of 37 
additional actual direct costs caused by the presence or remediation of Hazardous Material, not
indirect, incidental, or consequential costs.
GC-34.5 Contractor agrees that Safety Data Sheets (SDS) as required by law and pertaining to materials
or substances used or consumed in the performance of the Work, whether obtained by Contractor,
Subcontractors, IPC, or others, shall be maintained at the Work site by Contractor and made available
to IPC, Subcontractors, IPC, and others.
GC-34.6 Contractor shall be solely responsible for the proper delivery, handling, application, storage,
removal and disposal of all materials and substances brought to the Work site by Contractor and
Subcontractor in accordance with the Contract Documents and used or consumed in the performance
of the Work.
GC-34.7 Contractor shall defend, indemnify, reimburse, and hold harmless IPC, its agents, officers,
directors, partners, agents and employees, and the successor of the foregoing, from, for, and against
any and all claims, damages, losses, costs and expenses, whether actual or merely alleged and whether
directly incurred or from a third party, including but not limited to attorney’s and expert witness fees,
costs and expenses incurred arising out of or relating to the delivery, handling, application, storage,
removal and disposal of all materials and substances brought to the Work site by the Contractor,
Subcontractor, or anyone for whose acts or omissions they are responsible for, in accordance with the
Contract Documents; provided that injury to persons or damage to property is not exclusively caused
by the sole negligence of IPC.
GC-34.8 The terms of this Section GC-34 shall survive the completion of the Work or any termination of
this Agreement.
GC-34.9 If after the commencement of the Work, a wetland condition or archeological site is discovered
at the Work site, the Contractor shall immediately stop Work in the affected area. Contractor
immediately shall report the condition to IPC in writing and, if required, the government agency with
jurisdiction. The term “wetland condition” shall mean and include any “wetland” and “waterbody”
subject to regulation under the federal Clean Water Act and similar terms as used in applicable federal,
state and local statutes, rules and regulations. The term “archeological site” shall mean and include
any cairn, burial, human remains, funerary object, sacred object or object of cultural patrimony of any
native Indian.
GC-34.10 Contractor shall not install any material that contains asbestos. If requested by IPC in writing,
Contractor shall certify in writing that Contractor’s Work did not contain any asbestos materials.
Contractor shall provide such certification to IPC as part of the Record Documents.
GC‐35 CONTRACTOR’S RECORD
GC-35.1 During the term of the Agreement and for a period of five years thereafter, Contractor shall keep
all books, records, and other documents pertaining to the Work, and IPC shall have the right to
examine any books, records, and other documents of the Contractor pertaining to the Work and
including, but not limited to, costs or charges submitted to or paid by IPC as compensation to
Contractor hereunder. IPC will give Contractor three Days’ advance written notice of such intended
examinations. Contractor’s records shall be kept in accordance with generally accepted accounting
principles in the particular industry in which Contractor works and shall be kept in such a manner
and in sufficient detail to clearly disclose the nature and amounts of the different items of service and
cost pertaining to the Agreement and the basis of charges and allocations to the Work.
GC‐36 DATA SECURITY AND PROTECTION AND SECURITY SCREENING REQUIREMENTS
GC-36.1 Data Security. IPC Data will remain the sole property of IPC. Contractor may not use IPC Data for
any purpose other than to perform its obligations under this Agreement. IPC Data may not be sold,
assigned, leased or otherwise disposed of or commercially exploited by Contractor. Contractor
represents, warrants, and covenants to IPC that Contractor has developed and implemented, currently
2023 Midpoint Substation Replace C506 Series Capacitor Bank                  General Conditions for Construction Services LGL 139 (11/01/2022) 
Page 34 of 37 
has in place, and shall maintain during the term of this Agreement a comprehensive information
security program that includes administrative, technical, and physical safeguards and controls
sufficient to: (i) ensure the security and confidentiality of IPC Data; (ii) protect against anticipated
threats or hazards to the security or integrity of such information; and (iii) protect against
unauthorized access to, or disclosure or use of, all IPC data that Contractor accesses, receives, stores,
processes, transmits, maintains, or possesses (collectively, “Security”). Contractor shall document its
Security and all safeguards, procedures, and controls and keep them current in light of changes in
relevant technology and provide IPC with a copy of the same upon request and at no cost to IPC. Such
Security shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
GC-36.1.1 Contractor shall utilize industry-accepted firewalls, up-to-date anti-virus software, and non
end-of-life operating systems;
GC-36.1.2 Contractor shall ensure access is controlled to the physical location of the hardware
containing IPC Data;
GC-36.1.3 Contractor shall secure electronic access to Contractor’s information systems containing
IPC Data;
GC-36.1.4 Contractor shall store, process, and maintain any and all IPC Data on designated target
servers that reside physically within the boundaries of the United States;
GC-36.1.5 Contractor shall not transfer any IPC Data outside of its network via unencrypted means;
GC-36.1.6 Contractor shall not process or transfer IPC Data to any unencrypted portable or laptop
computing device, or any other unencrypted portable storage medium;
GC-36.1.7 Contractor shall provide its workforce position appropriate cybersecurity awareness
training, including, but not limited to, an anti-phishing program;
GC-36.1.8 Contractor shall take measures to protect IPC Data against destruction, loss, or damage due
to potential environmental hazards, such as fire and water damage or technological failures;
GC-36.1.9 Contractor’s and Subcontractors’ personnel may not access or store IPC Data on any
personal or third-party devices, including mobile devices, tablets, or personally owned laptops,
unless such devices have been configured with industry standard security and encryption
features, which shall include at a minimum remote wipe and remote shutdown capabilities;
GC-36.1.10 Contractor shall two-factor authentication for remote access to systems that access or
store IPC Data;
GC-36.1.11 Contractor shall secure and prevent misuse of its own email resources; and
GC-36.1.12 Upon termination of this Agreement, Contractor shall require the destruction or erasure of
physical or electronic media containing IPC Data so that such information cannot practicably be
read or reconstructed.
GC-36.2 Compliance with Data Protection Rules. Contractor will observe and comply with all applicable
federal and state data privacy and data protection laws and regulations that are now in effect or
hereafter promulgated that are applicable to the Work provided by Contractor under this Agreement
or any IPC Data that Contractor controls, access, receives, stores, processes, transmits, maintains, or
possesses in connection with the Work. In addition, Contractor will comply with all IPC’s policies,
standards, and data protection rules in effect when the Work is commenced and shall sign and comply
with all IPC forms related to the same.
GC-36.3 Information Security Training. Contractor shall comply with IPC’s information security
requirements as communicated by IPC to Contractor. Contractors who require electronic access to
any network or information system owned by IPC shall complete IPC’s on-line information security
training. Contractor shall authorize only those employees who are necessary for and directly involved
in Contractor’s performance of its obligations under this Agreement, to have access to the IPC Data
2023 Midpoint Substation Replace C506 Series Capacitor Bank                  General Conditions for Construction Services LGL 139 (11/01/2022) 
Page 35 of 37 
(whether physically or through computer system access) and solely on a “need to know” basis
(collectively, “Authorized Persons”). Contractor shall not authorize anyone other than Authorized
Persons to have access to the IPC Data at any time. Authorized Persons shall sign an agreement
regarding compliance with IPC’s information security standards, including both electronic and
physical access requirements prior to receiving access.
GC-36.4 Security Screening. Contractor acknowledges and agrees that certain portions of IPC’s premises
may have restricted access and may require prior authorization by IPC or an IPC designated escort to
allow Contractor access. If notified by IPC that access is restricted, Contractor shall comply with
federal, state, local laws or regulations, and IPC policies requiring background checks, social security
verification, and drug and alcohol testing of employees prior to performing work for IPC. Contractor
shall comply with all IPC policies and screening requirements that are communicated to Contractor
related to security screening at restricted sites. No work can begin until these requirements have been
met. Contractor acknowledges and agrees that failure to follow IPC policies can result in the
imposition of fines to IPC.
GC-36.5 Security Incident Response Plan. Contractor shall develop and implement a “Response Plan,”
which shall be policies and procedures to address Security Incidents. The Response Plan shall include
appropriate provisions for mitigating the harmful effects of Security Incidents (defined below) and
addressing and remedying the occurrence(s) to prevent the recurrence of similar Security Incidents
in the future. The development and implementation of the Response Plan shall follow industry
standard practices, such as those that at a minimum are consistent with the contingency planning
requirements of NIST Special Publication 800-61 Reb. 4, IR-1 through IR-10 as those standards may
be amended. Immediately upon learning of a Security Incident related to the products and Work
provided to IPC, Contractor shall implement its Response Plan and, within 24 hours of implementing
its Response Plan, shall notify IPC in writing of that implementation as described below.
GC-36.6 Security Incident. Contractor shall promptly notify IPC if Contractor discovers or becomes aware:
(a) that Contractor is not in compliance with or has violated any of the requirements of these terms
and conditions; (b) of any unauthorized disclosure or use of or access to IPC Data or any unauthorized
intrusion, penetration, or security breach involving Contractor systems that affects IPC Data or IPC’s
network or systems; or (c) Contractor initiates its Response Plan (each of (a), (b), and (c) a “Security
Incident”). Any reasonably suspected or confirmed Security Incident must be reported to IPC
immediately via email to [e-mail] and by telephone at [phone].
Contractor acknowledges that in some instances, IPC has a reporting obligation to regulators and
other third parties in the event of an actual or suspected Security Incident and that Contractor’s
compliance with the foregoing notification obligation is necessary for IPC’s compliance with
regulatory and legal obligations. Notification of an actual or su spected Security Incident must include
a description of the nature of the event, the date and time of the event, suspected amount of
information exposed, steps being taken to investigate the circumstances of the exposure and
remediate or mitigate the Security Incident. Contractor shall provide written updates of the notice to
IPC addressing any new facts and circumstances learned after the initial written notice is provided
and shall provide such updates within a reasonable time after learning of those new facts and
circumstances. Contractor shall cooperate with IPC in IPC’s efforts to determine the risk to the bulk
electric system posed by the Security Incident. In addition to all other remedies permitted under the
Agreement and applicable law, Contractor shall be required to promptly remedy and mitigate any
damages, losses, or expenses caused by a breach in the security of Contractor’s systems that adversely
impacts IPC and take all measures as may be reasonably necessary to prevent any further Security
Incident. Without obligating IPC to undertake any specific actions in the event of a Security Incident,
Contractor must cooperate with and assist IPC in its own investigation, analysis, and resolution of
Security Incidents, including if requested by IPC, providing breach notifications to individuals and
regulatory and law enforcement agencies or providing support to IPC if IPC decides to deliver such
notices. Contractor shall provide IPC with details of the investigation and final disposition of the
Security Incident relevant to the Work provided to IPC or which may impact the confidentiality,
2023 Midpoint Substation Replace C506 Series Capacitor Bank                  General Conditions for Construction Services LGL 139 (11/01/2022) 
Page 36 of 37 
integrity, or availability of such Work and of any IPC Data or systems. Contractor shall reasonably
cooperate with governmental authorities and non-governmental entities in any action or proceeding
as may be deemed necessary by IPC as the result of such Security Incident. Within 5 calendar days of
a Security Incident, Contractor shall develop and execute a plan that reduces the likelihood of the same
or a similar Security Incident from occurring in the future consistent with the requirements of its
Response Plan and industry standards (e.g., NIST Special Publication 800-61 Rev. 2 and NIST Special
Publication 800-184, as may be amended) and shall communicate that plan to IPC. Contractor shall
provide recommendations to IPC on actions that IPC may take to assist in the prevention of
recurrence, as applicable or appropriate. Within 5 calendar days of notifying IPC in writing of the
Security Incident, Contractor shall recommend actions to be taken by IPC on IPC-controlled systems
to reduce the risk of a recurrence of the same or a similar Security Incident, including, as appropriate,
the provision of action plans and mitigating controls. Contractor shall coordinate with IPC in
developing those action plans and mitigating controls. Contractor will provide IPC guidance,
recommendations, and other necessary information for recovery efforts and long term remediation
and/or mitigation of cyber security risks posed to IPC Data, equipment, systems, and networks as well
as any information necessary to assist IPC in relation to the Security Incident.
GC-36.7 Notification to Affected Parties. Contractor will, at its sole cost and expense, assist and cooperate
with IPC with respect to any investigation of a Security Incident, disclosures to affected parties, and
other remedial measures as requested by IPC in connection with a Security Incident or required under
any applicable laws related to a Security Incident. In the event a Security Incident results in IPC Data
being disclosed such that notification is required to be made to any person or entity, including without
limitation any customer, shareholder, or current or former employee of IPC or Contractor, under any
applicable laws, including privacy and consumer protection laws, or pursuant to a request or directive
from a governmental authority, such notification will be provided by IPC, except as required by
applicable law or approved by IPC in writing. IPC will have sole control over the timing and method
of providing such notification.
GC-36.8 Unrelated Security Incidents: As used in this Section GC-36, “Contractor’s Proprietary
Information” means information and data that embodies a trade secret owned or controlled by
Contractor or licensed to Contractor by a third party. In the event (a) Contractor’s Proprietary
Information, as such information relates to the products and/or Work provided to IPC under this
Agreement, has been corrupted or destroyed without authorization or has been accessed, acquired,
compromised, modified, used or disclosed by any unauthorized person, or by any person in an
unauthorized manner or for an unauthorized purpose; (b) Contractor knows or reasonably believes
that an act or omission has compromised or may reasonably compromise the cybersecurity of the
products and Work provided by Contractor to an entity other than IPC; or (c) Contractor receives any
valid complaint, notice, or communication which relates directly or indirectly to (i) Contractor’s
handling of Contractor Proprietary Information or Contractor's compliance with applicable law in
connection with Contractor Proprietary Information or (ii) the cybersecurity of the products and
Work provided by Contractor to an entity other than IPC (“Unrelated Security Incident”), Contractor
shall provide to IPC a confidential report describing, to the extent legally permissible, a detailed
summary of the facts and circumstances of the Unrelated Security Incident, including a description of
(1) why the Unrelated Security Incident occurred, (2) the nature of the Contractor's Proprietary
Information disclosed, and (3) the measures being taken to address and remedy the occurrence to
prevent the same or a similar event from occurring in the future.
GC-36.9 Audit Rights. Upon request, Contractor shall provide to IPC the opportunity to review a copy of
the Contractor’s policies, procedures, evidence and independent audit report summaries that are part
of Contractor’s cyber security framework (e.g. ISO-27001, SOC2). IPC or its third-party designee may,
but is not obligated to, perform audits and security tests of Contractor’s IT or systems environment
and procedural controls to determine Contractor’s compliance with the system, network, data, and
information security requirements of this Agreement. Audits of Contractor shall be done with at least
30 calendar days advance notice. These audits and tests will not unduly affect Contractor’s operations
2023 Midpoint Substation Replace C506 Series Capacitor Bank                  General Conditions for Construction Services LGL 139 (11/01/2022) 
Page 37 of 37 
and may include coordinated security tests, interviews of relevant personnel, review of
documentation, and technical inspection of systems and networks as they relate to the receipt,
maintenance, use, retention, and authorized destruction of IPC Data. Contractor shall provide all
information reasonably requested by IPC in connection with any such audits and shall provide
reasonable access and assistance to IPC upon request. Contractor will comply, within reasonable
timeframes at its own cost and expense, with all reasonable recommendations that result from such
inspections, tests, and audits. IPC reserves the right to view, upon request, any original security
reports that Contractor has undertaken or commissioned to assess Contractor’s own network
security. If requested, copies of these reports will be reviewed on site at Contractor’s facility at IPC’s
expense. Contractor will notify IPC of any such security reports or similar assessments once they have
been completed. Any regulators of IPC or its affiliates shall have the same rights of audit as described
herein upon request.
GC-36.10 Subcontractors. To the extent that Contractor is permitted to engage Subcontractors to perform,
or otherwise provide support to assist Contractor to perform, any portion of the Work hereunder,
then: (a) Contractor shall not share or disclose, or engage a Subcontractor to access, store, process,
transmit, or otherwise possess any IPC Data, unless and until such Subcontractor has agreed in writing
to protect IPC Data in a manner substantially similar (but in any case no less restrictive) to that
required of Contractor under the Agreement, and then only on a need-to-know basis; (b) Contractor
shall cause such Subcontractors to comply with the obligations and restrictions associated with
substantially the same work, tasks, functions, and responsibilities performed by such Subcontractors
that are applicable to Contractor under the Agreement, including, without limitation, those obligations
set forth in these terms and conditions; and (c) Contractor shall remain responsible for the work,
tasks, functions, and responsibilities performed by Subcontractors to the same extent as if such work,
tasks, functions, and responsibilities were performed directly by Contractor and, for purposes of the
Agreement, such work shall be deemed Work performed by Contractor.
GC-36.11 Indemnification. In addition to any other indemnification obligation of Contractor set forth in
this Agreement, Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold IPC, IPC Affiliates, and its and their
respective officers, directors, employees, representatives, agents, successors, and assigns harmless
from, for, and against any Damages (defined in Section 17 of the Agreement) to the extent such
Damages arise out of or in connection with: (i) a Security Incident (including a Security Incident by a
Subcontractor); or (ii) Contractor’s, or any Subcontractor’s, failure to comply with the requirements
of this Section GC-36.
GC-36.12 Injunctive Relief. Contractor acknowledges and agrees that any breach or threatened breach of
the obligations set forth in this Section GC-36 may result in a substantial likelihood of irreparable
harm and injury to IPC, for which monetary damages alone may be an inadequate remedy, and which
damages may be difficult to accurately measure. Accordingly, Contractor agrees that in addition to any
other remedies available, IPC shall have the right to obtain injunctive relief as well as other equitable
relief allowed by the federal and state courts. The foregoing remedy of injunctive relief is agreed to
without prejudice to IPC’s right to exercise any other rights and remedies it may have, including
without limitation, the right to terminate this Agreement and seek damages or other legal or equitable
relief.
GC-36.13Survival. The rights and obligations set forth in this Section GC-36 shall survive the expiration or
termination of this Agreement for any reason.
GC‐37 EDISON ELECTRIC INSTITUTE/OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ADMINISTRATION
PARTNERSHIP BEST PRACTICES FOR UTILITY CONTRACTORS RULES
GC-37.1 In conjunction with an initiative promulgated by the Edison Electric Institute (“EEI”) and the
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (“OSHA”) intended to reduce injuries and fatalities of
workers in the electrical transmission and contracting industry, IPC requires that all contractors and
subcontractors performing work for IPC for the purposes of electrical transmission, distribution, or
generation, comply with the EEI and OSHA Partnership Best Practices for Utility Contractors rules, as
2023 Midpoint Substation Replace C506 Series Capacitor Bank                  General Conditions for Construction Services LGL 139 (11/01/2022) 
Page 38 of 37 
those practices may be amended from time to time. These rules can also be accessed at OSHA’s
website. Contractor agrees to manage and train its employees and Subcontractors to ensure their
compliance with these rules. Failure of Contractor to comply with the referenced Rules will constitute
a material breach of this Agreement.

END OF GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION SERVICES
Page 1 of 5
Internal Use Only

Station Design Construction Issue
Date: 04/19/2023

Type of Issue: Structural Station: MPSN

Project Title: REPLACE C506 SERIES CAPACITOR BANK

Work Order: 27577662,27577670 Budget ID: MPSN210001

Project Leader: Bracke, Mike Contracted Construction Administrators:
Design Engineer: Swander, Eric Mindy Chambers: 388-2033
Station Designer: Coggins, Pam Inspectors:
Apparatus Area Leader: Southern-Greg Habel Heath Schab: 388-2020
SP Area Leader: Southern - Michael Wilcox
Comm Area Leader: Southern - Adam Mattson
System Protection Engineer: N/A
Apparatus Engineer: N/A
Comm. Engineer: N/A

Order of Contents
Checked contents are included in the package.
Document Transmittal………………………………………………....List of Documents included in Package
Design Summary …...……..……………………Additional Information, Instructions, Etc from Project Team
BOM/MR……………………………………….……………………...…… Bill of Material/Material Request
Design List (s)……………..…………………….……………………………..….. SCADA, Cable, SER/DFR
Removal Inventory List………………………….……………………………………. List of Items Removed
Nameplate Engraving List.………………………..…………….…………….Equipment Specification Labels
Manufacturer Information………………………….………….…..…Drawings, User Guides, References, Etc
MFT…………………………………………………………….….….…….Material Fabrication Transmittal
CCR ………………………………………………….………….….………………Customer Change Request
Station Construction Drawings ...……………..….…. Specific Drawings Showing Work to be Accomplished

Change to Switching Diagram
> 138KV
< 138KV

Construction Drawing Issue Package
Construction Crew Copies:
 All “Original” documents stamped “Station Construction Issue” in red ink needs to be updated by
foremen/crew with construction/as-built changes in green after job completion. Return to Idaho Power
Company, TDEC Scheduler – CHQ -3. This includes drawings, cable lists, bills of material, removal lists,
document transmittal, and miscellaneous documents bearing “Station Construction Issue”. All design
documents need to be signed by the construction Foreman.
 Documents stamped in red ink “Station Copy” (control jobs only) also require changes entered in green by
foreman/crew. These are to be filed at the station.
Please note: Record Issue copy only has a date stamp in red ink. It supersedes the station Construction Issue
copy.
Page 2 of 5
Internal Use Only
Station Design & Engineering Construction Issue
(Continued)

Documents in package

78449001.dwg 00 MIDPOINT STATION 500KV CAPACITOR BANK NOT IDENTIFIED
47949003.DWG 01 MIDPOINT STATION HMWY #1 500KV LINE
C506,L506,L507,L508,542Z
& 543Z SINGLE LINE
58667001.dwg 05 MIDPOINT STATION 500kV YARD SWITCHING DIAGRAM
47949003RM.DWG 01 MIDPOINT STATION REMOVAL DRAWING SINGLE LINE
47951001RM.DWG 14 MIDPOINT STATION 500KV YARD ATS & AC LOAD CENTER
LOCAL SERVICE
SCHEMATIC
58667001RM.DWG 05 MIDPOINT STATION 500KV YARD SWITCHING DIAGRAM
48019054RM.dwg 60 MIDPOINT STATION 500KV SOUTH YARD YARD PLAN
48019058RM.dwg 64 MIDPOINT STATION GROUNDING PLAN
48019061RM.dwg 66 MIDPOINT STATION 500KV SHOSHONE, IDAHO CABLE & CONDUIT PLAN
48019098RM.dwg 68 MIDPOINT STATION FOUNDATION PLAN FOUNDATION PLAN
48019101RM.dwg 68 MIDPOINT STATION FOUNDATION PLAN
48019024RM.dwg 70 MIDPOINT STATION 500KV SHOSHONE IDAHO
345/500KV HIGH BUS
SUPPORT FOUNDATION DETAIL
48019064RM.DWG 72 MIDPOINT STATION 500KV SHOSHONE, IDAHO ELEVATIONS & SECTIONS
48019065RM.DWG 72 MIDPOINT STATION 500KV SHOSHONE, IDAHO ELEVATIONS & SECTIONS
48019023RM.dwg 70 MIDPOINT STATION 500KV SHOSHONE IDAHO
CAPACITOR FOUNDATION
POST FOUNDATION DETAIL
48019030RM.dwg 70 MIDPOINT STATION 500KV SHOSHONE IDAHO LADDER FOOTINGS FOUNDATION DETAIL
48019050RM.dwg 70 MIDPOINT STATION 500KV SHOSHONE IDAHO CAPACITOR FOUNDATION FOUNDATION DETAIL
48019051RM.dwg 70 MIDPOINT STATION 500KV SHOSHONE IDAHO
CAPACITOR POST
INSULATOR FOUNDATION DETAIL
48019054.dwg 60 MIDPOINT STATION 500KV SOUTH YARD YARD PLAN
48019058.dwg 64 MIDPOINT STATION GROUNDING PLAN
48019061.dwg 66 MIDPOINT STATION 500KV SHOSHONE, IDAHO CABLE & CONDUIT PLAN
500 CABLE &
CONDUIT
SKETCH 66 MIDPOINT STATION CONDUIT SKETCH
48019098.dwg 68 MIDPOINT STATION FOUNDATION PLAN FOUNDATION PLAN
Page 3 of 5
Internal Use Only
48019101.dwg 68 MIDPOINT STATION FOUNDATION PLAN
78444001.dwg 68 MIDPOINT STATION 500KV CAPACITOR BANK SERIES CAPACITOR FOUNDATION PLAN
78253001.dwg 70 MIDPOINT STATION C506 500KV CAP BANK PIER FOUNDATION DETAIL
78254001.dwg 70 MIDPOINT STATION YARD LOAD CENTER PRECAST CONCRETE PAD FOUNDATION DETAIL
78311001.dwg 70 MIDPOINT STATION PRECAST LIGHT POLE FOUNDATION DETAIL
78444002.dwg 70 MIDPOINT STATION 500KV CAPACITOR BANK SERIES CAPACITOR FOUNDATION DETAIL
78444003.dwg 70 MIDPOINT STATION 500KV CAPACITOR BANK SERIES CAPACITOR FOUNDATION DETAIL
48019064.DWG 72 MIDPOINT STATION 500KV SHOSHONE, IDAHO ELEVATIONS & SECTIONS
48019065.DWG 72 MIDPOINT STATION 500KV SHOSHONE, IDAHO ELEVATIONS & SECTIONS
48019165.dwg 74 MIDPOINT STATION
500KV INSULATOR
SUPPORT STEEL DETAIL STRUCTURAL DETAIL
78250001.dwg 74 MIDPOINT STATION
YARD LOAD CENTER
ENCLOSURE 72YLS06 (200A DP1/DC1) STRUCTURAL DETAIL
78250002.dwg 74 MIDPOINT STATION
YARD LOAD CENTER
ENCLOSURE 72YLS06 (200A DP1/DC1) STRUCTURAL DETAIL
78250003.dwg 74 MIDPOINT STATION
YARD LOAD CENTER
ENCLOSURE 72YLS06 (200A DP1/DC1) STRUCTURAL DETAIL
78251001.dwg 74 MIDPOINT STATION DS1 & DS2 STRUCTURAL DETAIL
78293001.dwg 67 MIDPOINT STATION
500KY YARD LIGHT
POLE(MULTI TAB)
TRANSGARD BIRD LASER
POLE BOM & DETAILS
78293002.dwg 67 MIDPOINT STATION 500KV DEADEND LASER BOM & DETAILS
782930003.dwg 67 MIDPOINT STATION
500KV SERIES CAP YARD
WEST YARD LIGHTING CONTROL SCHEMATIC
78293005.dwg 67 MIDPOINT STATION UTILITY METALS LIGHT POLE YARD LIGHTING
78414001.dwg 71 MIDPOINT STATION
PLASTIBETON MODEL
2012 TRENCH W/LID DETAIL
SURFACE TRENCH
DETAIL
78258001RF.dwg 50 MIDPOINT STATION
C506 500KV GE SERIES
CAPACITOR THREE PHASE CAP LAYOUT
78258002RF.dwg 50 MIDPOINT STATION
C506 500KV GE SERIES
CAPACITOR SINGLE PHASE CAP LAYOUT
78258003RF.dwg 50 MIDPOINT STATION
506 500KV GE SERIES
CAPACITOR ELEVATION A CAP LAYOUT
78258004RF.dwg 50 MIDPOINT STATION
C506 500KV GE SERIES
CAPACITOR ELEVATION B & C CAP LAYOUT
78258005RF.dwg 50 MIDPOINT STATION
C506 500KV GE SERIES
CAPACITOR ELEVATION D CAP LAYOUT
Page 4 of 5
Internal Use Only
78258006RF.dwg 50 MIDPOINT STATION
500KV GE SERIES
CAPACITOR REACTOR ISOMETRIC CAP LAYOUT
78258007RF.dwg 50 MIDPOINT STATION
500KV GE SERIES
CAPACITOR CT RACK CAP LAYOUT
78258008RF.dwg 50 MIDPOINT STATION
500KV GE SERIES
CAPACITOR MOV ISOMETRIC CAP LAYOUT
78258009RF.dwg 50 MIDPOINT STATION
500KV GE SERIES
CAPACITOR
CAPACITOR STACK
GROUP CAP LAYOUT
78258010RF.dwg 50 MIDPOINT STATION
500KV GE SERIES
CAPACITOR BUS RUN CAP LAYOUT
78258011RF.dwg 50 MIDPOINT STATION
500KV GE SERIES
CAPACITOR FIBER COLUMNS CAP LAYOUT
78258012RF.dwg 50 MIDPOINT STATION
500KV GE SERIES
CAPACITOR STACK GROUP CAP LAYOUT
78258013RF.dwg 50 MIDPOINT STATION
500KV GE SERIES
CAPACITOR ISOMETRIC VIEW CAP LAYOUT
77744001RF.dwg 25 MIDPOINT STATION CONTOL BUILDING COVER SHEET
77744002RF.dwg 25 MIDPOINT STATION CONTROL BUILDING GENERAL STRUCTURAL NOTES
77744003RF.dwg 25 MIDPOINT STATION CONTROL BUILDING FOUNDATION PLAN
77744004RF.dwg 25 MIDPOINT STATION CONTROL BUILDING FOUNDATION DETAILS
777440005RF.dwg 25 MIDPOINT STATION CONTROL BUILDING FLOOR PLAN
77744006ARF.dwg 25 MIDPOINT STATION CONTROL BUILDING EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS
77744006BRF.dwg 25 MIDPOINT STATION CONTROL BUILDING EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS
77744007RF.dwg 25 MIDPOINT STATION CONTROL BUILDING ROOF PLAN
77744008RF.dwg 25 MIDPOINT STATION CONTROL BUILDING ROOF FRAMING PLAN
7774409RF.dwg 25 MIDPOINT STATION CONTROL BUILDING ROOF FRAMING DETAILS
77744010RF.dwg 25 MIDPOINT STATION CONTROL BUILDING BUILDING SECTIONS
77744011RF.dwg 25 MIDPOINT STATION CONTROL BUILDING WALL SECTIONS
77744012RF.dwg 25 MIDPOINT STATION CONTROL BUILDING DETAILS
77744013RF.dwg 25 MIDPOINT STATION CONTROL BUILDING CAST-IN-PLACE VAULT DETAILS
77744014RF.dwg 25 MIDPOINT STATION CONTROL BUILDING INTERIOR ELEVATIONS CONTROL ROOM
77744015RF.dwg 25 MIDPOINT STATION CONTROL BUILDING INTERIOR ELVATIONS BATTERY ROOM
77744016RF.dwg 25 MIDPOINT STATION CONTROL BUILDING MECHANICAL PLAN
77744017RF.dwg 25 MIDPOINT STATION CONTROL BUILDING
MECHANICAL
COMPLIANCE AND
VENTILATION
CALCULATION
Page 5 of 5
Internal Use Only
77744018RF.dwg 25 MIDPOINT STATION CONTROL BUILDING CABLE TRAY PLAN
77744019RF.dwg 25 MIDPOINT STATION CONTROL BUILDING CABLE RISER STRUCTURAL DETAILS
77744020RF.dwg 25 MIDPOINT STATION CONTROL BUILDING CABLE RISER DETAILS
77744021RF.dwg 25 MIDPOINT STATION CONTROL BUILDING ELECTRICAL PLAN
77744022RF.dwg 25 MIDPOINT STATION CONTROL BUILDING ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES AND DETAILS
77744023RF.dwg 25 MIDPOINT STATION CONTROL BUILDING ELECTRICAL ENERGY COMPLIANCE
77744024RF.dwg 25 MIDPOINT STATION CONTROL BUILDING EQUIPMENT PLAN

SUMMARY (2)
BOM (12)
REMOVAL INVENTORY (1)
ENGRAVING REQUEST (1)
ANCHOR BOLT DETAILS (4)
MFT (2)
Station Engineering and Design Summary STRUCTURAL
Page 1

STRUCTURAL DESIGN SUMMARY
4/17/23

Project Name: Replace C506 Capacitor Bank at MPSN
Budget ID: MPSN210001
Work Order: 27577662 & 27577670
Project Leader: Bracke
Structural Engineer: Swander
Structural Designer: Coggins

General Project Overview/Description of Structural Work:
This project involves replacing the existing 500kV series capacitor bank at the Midpoint station. The new
capacitor bank is supplied by GE and will be installed in the same location as the old bank. This project will also
install a new control building but will be installed by a different contractor.
The physical capacitor bank itself will be installed by one of GE’s contractors. This project will cover the
installation of foundations, grounding, and conduits for the new bank though. Further work is bulleted below.

 Remove the existing C506 capacitor bank, bus, and foundations.
 Remove three existing lattice bus supports and foundations.
o The three existing bus supports being removed will be reused in new locations for this project.
 Extend the Plastibeton “2012” cable trench to the new control building.
o New AC/DC load centers will also be installed off of this cable trench.
 Install new foundations for the new capacitor banks, bus supports, and ancillary equipment.
o Note rock will likely be encountered, minimum embedment into rock should be at least the
diameter of the pier.
 Reinstall three lattice bus supports in their new locations and install one new lattice bus support.
o Install new insulators on these bus supports
o Reconnect to the existing 5” Al. bus through the new bus supports.
 Extend the bus beyond the bus supports toward the new banks about 6’.
o Connect the new bus to the new capacitor bank terminals with bundled 2250 conductor.

Coordinated actions between Structural/Control Work:
 Coordinate installation of conduits between the Structural group’s Cable & Conduit plan and the Control
group’s conduit sketch diagram.

Coordinated actions associated with Transmission or Distribution Line installation:
 N/A

Station Engineering and Design Summary STRUCTURAL
Page 2

Out of Scope Items:
 Installation of the new capacitor banks and capacitor fencing will be under the scope of GE’s contractor.

Other Miscellaneous / Issues / Coordination / Etc.
 Coordinate the installation of the Kirk Key locks and Trans Guard laser units with the apparatus group.
 Coordinate the installation of the wire jumpers between the bypass in the new capacitor banks with
GE’s construction contractor.
 Install new lighting around the capacitor yard.
 Regravel areas of the yard disturbed by construction activities.

SPCC Plan
 This station does not have an SPCC Plan.

4/18/2023Idaho Power Company
BILL OF MATERIALS
27577662
A/STRUCT
MPSN
WO:
TYPE:
SUBSTATION:
MPSN21000102
CAT ITEMS
Item Cat Id QTY Filter MFT PART MANUF.CATALOG_DESC MR Need Date Notes
B&F
01 0000033173 4.00 B&F COUPLING, ELBOW, WAKA-90-CF, 5" SPS TO 90 DEG
WELDED ELBOW, ALUM, F/ EHV
HOMAC 08/11/202301681047EH-3385
02 0000044301 6.00 B&F TERMINAL, ALUM, BOLTED, 5" SPS PIPE TO 4", 4H FLAT,
AVP-CT-CF, F/ EHV
HOMAC 08/11/202301681047EH-1005
03 0000057440 12.00 B&F TERMINAL, ALUM, BOLTED, TWO CBL 2300 AAC - 2167 ACSR
TO 4" 4H FLAT, F/ EHV, AGL-2-CF
HOMAC 08/11/202301681047EH-1533-C
04 0000044299 4.00 B&F SUPPORT(S), BUS, AVXE-CF, 5" SPS PIPE TO 5" B.C.
INSULATOR, ALUM, BOLTED, F/ EHV
HOMAC 08/11/202301681047EH-1175
05 0000033142 2.00 B&F COUPLING, ALUM, WALB-CF, 5" SPS RUN TO TAP, WELDED, F/
EHV
HOMAC 08/11/202301681047EH-3170
06 0000049600 4.00 B&F INSULATOR, STATION POST, PORCELAIN 500KV 1800KV BIL,
EHS, 3 PC, 14" B.C. BOTTOM, 5" BC TOP
LAPPINSUL 08/11/202301681047314934-70
07 0000056290 6.00 B&F SPACER, CONDUCTOR, BOLTED, 12", EHV, F/2300 AAC, 2167
ACSR
HOMAC 08/11/202301681047EH-1387
08 0000003491 200.00 B&F CONDUCTOR, ALUM, 5" SPS BUS TUBULAR, SCH 40, 6063-T6
ALLOY, 30' LENGTH
AFLTELEC 08/11/202301681047500S40YT6B
09 0000056765 250.00 B&F CONDUCTOR, ALUM, 2250 AAC, 91-STR, SAGEBRUSHSOUTHWIRE 08/11/202301681047SAGEBRUSH
10 0000004036 24.00 B&F PAD, TERMINAL, 4" SQUARE SHIELD F/ ALL EHV BUS
TERMINALS
CPI 08/11/2023016810474040EHV
11 0000004041 2.00 B&F CONNECTOR, TEE, WAA-CF, 5" SPS RUN TO 5" SPS TAP,
WELDED, ALUM, F/ EHV
HOMAC 08/11/202301681047EH-3208
Page 1 of 12
27577662
A/STRUCT
MPSN
WO:
TYPE:
SUBSTATION:
MPSN21000102
Item Cat Id QTY Filter MFT PART MANUF.CATALOG_DESC MR Need Date Notes
C&C
01 0000057524 20.00 C&C TRENCH, POLYMER, CABLE SYSTEM, 2012 H-20, HIGH
DENSITY POLYMER CONCRETE WITH NO DIVIDER
OLDCENCSOL 07/14/202316715082012 H-20
02 0000005387 550.00 C&C CONDUIT, PVC, 3", SCH 40, 10', GRAY W/ 1 BELLED ENDCANTEX 08/11/202301681103A52DA12
03 0000005386 2,520.00 C&C CONDUIT, PVC, 2", SCH 40, 10', GRAY W/ 1 BELLED ENDCANTEX 08/11/202301681103A52CA12
04 0000005432 72.00 C&C BEND, PVC, 2", SCH 40, 90 DEG, 24" RADIUS, GRAY W/1
BELLED END
CANTEX 08/11/2023016811035133924
05 0000005433 29.00 C&C BEND, PVC, 3", SCH 40, 90 DEG, 24" RADIUS, GRAY W/1
BELLED END
CANTEX 08/11/2023016811035233837
06 0000004589 31.00 C&C LOCKNUT, RIGID, 2", STEEL, F/CONDUITBRIDGEPORT 08/11/202301681103106-S
07 0000005500 31.00 C&C ADAPTER, PVC, SCH 40, 2", MALE, TERMINAL ADAPTERS,
F/NONMETALLIC CONDUIT, GRAY
CANTEX 08/11/2023016811035140108
08 0000005489 31.00 C&C BUSHING, PROTECTIVE, 2", PLASTIC, INSULATING,
F/THREADED RIGID/IMC CONDUIT
BRIDGEPORT 08/11/202301681103326
09 0000004590 10.00 C&C LOCKNUT, RIGID, 3" LOCKNUT, F/CONDUITBRIDGEPORT 08/11/202301681103108-S
10 0000005501 10.00 C&C ADAPTER, PVC, SCH 40, 3", MALE, TERMINAL ADAPTERS,
F/NONMETALLIC CONDUIT, GRAY
CANTEX 08/11/2023016811035140110
11 0000005490 10.00 C&C BUSHING, PROTECTIVE, 3", PLASTIC, INSULATING,
F/THREADED RIGID/IMC CONDUIT
BRIDGEPORT 08/11/202301681103328
12 0000005419 10.00 C&C BEND, PVC, 2", SCH 40, 45 DEG, 36" RADIUS, GRAY W/1
BELLED END
CANTEX 08/11/2023016811035233778
13 0000005420 4.00 C&C BEND, PVC, 3", SCH 40, 45 DEG, 36" RADIUS, GRAY W/1
BELLED END
CANTEX 08/11/2023016811035233779
14 0000005388 20.00 C&C CONDUIT, PVC, 4", SCH 40, 10', GRAY W/ 1 BELLED ENDCANTEX 08/11/202301681103A52EA12
15 0000005438 4.00 C&C BEND, PVC, 4", SCH 40, 90 DEG, 16" STD RADIUS, GRAY W/1
BELLED END
CANTEX 08/11/2023016811035233832
16 0000005486 4.00 C&C BELL END, PVC, CONDUIT FITTING, F/4" SCH 40CARLON 08/11/202301681103E997N
17 0000004595 2.00 C&C BUSHING, REDUCING, 1" X 1/2", STEEL, F/RIGID CONDUIT OR
IMC, THREADED, FLUSH TYPE
BRIDGEPORT 08/11/2023016811031162
18 0000005491 2.00 C&C BUSHING, PROTECTIVE, 4", PLASTIC, INSULATING,
F/THREADED RIGID/IMC CONDUIT
BRIDGEPORT 08/11/202301681103330
19 0000005502 2.00 C&C ADAPTER, PVC, SCH 40, 4", MALE, TERMINAL ADAPTERS,
F/NONMETALLIC CONDUIT, GRAY
CANTEX 08/11/2023016811035140112
20 0000005484 20.00 C&C BELL END, PVC, CONDUIT FITTING, F/2" SCH 40CARLON 08/11/202301681103E997J
21 0000005485 20.00 C&C BELL END, PVC, CONDUIT FITTING, F/3" SCH 40CARLON 08/11/202301681103E997L
22 0000005421 2.00 C&C BEND, PVC, 4", SCH 40, 45 DEG, 36" RADIUS, GRAY W/1
BELLED END
CANTEX 08/11/2023016811035233777
Page 2 of 12
27577662
A/STRUCT
MPSN
WO:
TYPE:
SUBSTATION:
MPSN21000102
Item Cat Id QTY Filter MFT PART MANUF.CATALOG_DESC MR Need Date Notes
ENGRAVING
01 0000050714 1.00 ENGRAVING MFT, SHOP BUILT, E-SHOP BUILT, SPECIAL ORDER F/
PROJECT, CONTACT DESIGNER F/ DETAILS
IPCOESHOP 09/04/202301672664MFT CONTROL
Page 3 of 12
27577662
A/STRUCT
MPSN
WO:
TYPE:
SUBSTATION:
MPSN21000102
Item Cat Id QTY Filter MFT PART MANUF.CATALOG_DESC MR Need Date Notes
EQUIP.
01 0000048628 1.00 EQUIP.XFMR, DRY, 50KVA, 1PH, 240X480, 120/240,TYPE QL-TP, CU,
W/WEATHER PROOF KIT
GECO 06/29/202316490199T33C2673
03 0000055425 1.00 EQUIP.SWITCH, SAFETY, HVY DUTY, NO-FUSE, 3W, 3P, 600VAC,
200A, NEMA 3R
GECO 08/25/202301681048THN3364R
04 0000045602 2.00 EQUIP.SEAL, SHAFT, F/LTC STEP INDICATER SHAFT, LRT-200HVSUPPLY 08/25/2023016810485000-2011
05 0000002279 1.00 EQUIP.BOX, JUNCTION, 20"X20"X8", STEEL, W/BACK PANELRITTAL 08/25/202301681048WM202008
06 0000046238 1.00 EQUIP.SWITCH, SAFETY, HVY DUTY, FUSIBLE, 3W, 2P, 240VAC,
200A, NEMA 3R
GECO 08/25/202301681048TH3224R
Page 4 of 12
27577662
A/STRUCT
MPSN
WO:
TYPE:
SUBSTATION:
MPSN21000102
Item Cat Id QTY Filter MFT PART MANUF.CATALOG_DESC MR Need Date Notes
FND
01 0000055979 28.00 FND BOLT, THREADED, 3/4" X 12", THREADED STEEL ROD
ANCHOR, F/CONCRETE, HILTI HAS-E
HILTI 08/11/202301681296385434
02 0000060033 2.00 FND FOUNDATION, SUPPORT, PRECAST,4-1/2' X 4-1/2' X 2', 1'8" X
1'6" OPENING IN MIDDLE, LOAD CTR
IDAHPRECON 08/11/20230168129620-20050399
03 0000053796 8.00 FND BOLT, THREADED, HAS 5.8, 3/8" X 5-1/8",STEEL ANCHOR,HILTI
HIT-RE 5
HILTI 08/11/2023016812962197986
04 0000054700 8.00 FND ADHESIVE, ANCHORING, HYBRID, 500ML, INJECTABLE
MORTAR F/CONCRETE, HILTI HIT-HY 200-A
HILTI 08/11/2023016812962022792
05 0000019373 8.00 FND NUT, HEX, 3/8", USS-NC, GRADE 5, ZINC PLATEDFASTENAL 08/11/202316813881136106
06 0000014665 8.00 FND WASHER, FLAT, 3/8", USS, ZINC PLATEDFASTENAL 08/11/2023168138833008
07 0000053568 2.00 FND COVER, PLATE, 24"X36"X3/16" DIAMOND PLATE STEEL CVR
F/5809 PAD OPENING
IDAHPRECON 08/11/20231681388ZL5809/24X36
08 0000023153 12.00 FND BOLT, THREADED, 5/8"-11, REDI-ROD, USS, 3' LENGTHSINDUSHARDW 08/11/20231681388ATC10003
09 0000014667 12.00 FND WASHER, FLAT, 5/8", SAE, ZINC PLATEDFASTENAL 08/11/2023168138833090
10 0000025973 36.00 FND WASHER, FLAT, 3/4", SAE, ZINC PLATEDINDUSHARDW 08/11/20231681388FW8S12
11 0000014457 36.00 FND NUT, HEX, 3/4", GRADE 5, ZINC PLATEDFASTENAL 08/11/202316813881136316
12 0000037498 6.00 FND BOLT, EYE, 3/4" X 6", GALV, THREADED REGUALR NUT, 7200
LBS LOAD LIMIT
CROSBY 08/11/202316813881043597
13 0000049890 24.00 FND ADHESIVE, ANCHORING, INJECTABLE MORTOR HIT-RE 500SHILTI 08/11/20231681388241383
14 0000014458 12.00 FND NUT, HEX, 5/8"-11, SAE, GRADE 5, ZINC PLATEDFASTENAL 08/11/202316813881136314
Page 5 of 12
27577662
A/STRUCT
MPSN
WO:
TYPE:
SUBSTATION:
MPSN21000102
Item Cat Id QTY Filter MFT PART MANUF.CATALOG_DESC MR Need Date Notes
GND
01 0000044063 1,500.00 GND CONDUCTOR, CU, BARE 2/0 19-STR SOFT DRAWN CU CND,
1250' REELS
ANIXWIRCAB 08/11/2023016810981B-20219R-IPCO
02 0000003682 100.00 GND CARTRIDGE, SHOT, WELDING CHARGE #200ERICO 08/11/202301681098#200
03 0000003944 60.00 GND TERMINAL, CABLE, TO LUG OFFSET 1/8" BY 1" W/ 2H, NEMA
SPACING
ERICO 08/11/202301681098B102CEOL
04 0000014661 40.00 GND WASHER, FLAT, 1/2", USS, ZINC PLATEDFASTENAL 08/11/2023016810981133012
05 0000005095 40.00 GND BOLT, MACHINE, 1/2" X 4", GALV W/SQ HEAD & ONE SQ NUT
MACHINE BOLT
ALLIEBOLPRO 08/11/20230168109810037
06 0000003795 40.00 GND CONNECTOR, CU, GROUND 2/0-250 CABLE TO FLAT BARBURNDY 08/11/202301681098GB29
07 0000028811 650.00 GND CONDUCTOR, CU, BARE 250 KCMIL 37-STR SOFT DRAWN CU
CND 650' REEL P/MATL 6-202
ANIXWIRCAB 08/11/2023016810981B-25037-IPCO
08 0000041107 30.00 GND CARTRIDGE, SHOT, WELDING CHARGE #250ERICO 08/11/202301681098#250
09 0000003678 50.00 GND CARTRIDGE, SHOT, WELDING CHARGE #90ERICO 08/11/202301681098#90
10 0000003677 30.00 GND CARTRIDGE, SHOT, WELDING CHARGE #65ERICO 08/11/202301681098#65
Page 6 of 12
27577662
A/STRUCT
MPSN
WO:
TYPE:
SUBSTATION:
MPSN21000102
Item Cat Id QTY Filter MFT PART MANUF.CATALOG_DESC MR Need Date Notes
LASER
01 0000025540 420.00 LASER CONDUIT, IMC, 1", GALV STEEL, 10', THREADED, W/ 1
COUPLER ATTACHED
ALLIEDSTL 08/11/2023016810801" IMC
02 0000004583 10.00 LASER HUB, CONDUIT, 1", RIGID, SCREWTITE/RAINTIGHT, ZINC
PLATED
BRIDGEPORT 08/11/202301681080153DC
03 0000002279 6.00 LASER BOX, JUNCTION, 20"X20"X8", STEEL, W/BACK PANELRITTAL 08/11/202301681080WM202008
04 0000005794 130.00 LASER CHANNEL, SUPPORT, STRUT, SLOTTED, 1-5/8"H X 1-5/8"W,
#12, 10', METAL FRAMING
COOPBLINE 08/11/202301681080B22SHGALV120
05 0000029780 80.00 LASER CHANNEL, SUPPORT, STRUT, SLOTTED, 1-5/8"W X 13/16"H,
#14, 10', METAL FRAMING
COOPBLINE 08/11/202301681080B54SHGALV120
06 0000003853 30.00 LASER CONNECTOR, CU, TYPE VISE, XFMR CASE GRD #3 SOLID TO
4/0 STR BRONZE BODY, S.S. BOLT
HUBBPOWSYS 08/11/202301681080GC-209
07 0000003867 30.00 LASER CONNECTOR, SPLIT BOLT, CU, F/2/0 STRANDED CONDUCTORBLACKBURN 08/11/2023016810802B20
08 0000003944 8.00 LASER TERMINAL, CABLE, TO LUG OFFSET 1/8" BY 1" W/ 2H, NEMA
SPACING
ERICO 08/11/202301681080B102CEOL
09 0000044063 100.00 LASER CONDUCTOR, CU, BARE 2/0 19-STR SOFT DRAWN CU CND,
1250' REELS
ANIXWIRCAB 08/11/2023016810801B-20219R-IPCO
10 0000036275 2.00 LASER POLE, LD, 65', LD-1, STEEL POLE, SPECIFICATION BY
ENGINEER
MEYERIND 09/01/2023167160965' LD-1
11 0000047513 30.00 LASER CLAMP, GUIDE, DOWNLEAD CLAMP, F/ OPGW CABLE DIA
.501"-.600" F/ LATTICE TO .72
AFLTELEC 08/11/202301681080FDOA-B5B5B
12 0000022608 6.00 LASER BOX, JUNCTION, METAL, 6" X 6" X 4"HOFFMAN 08/11/202301681080A-6R64
13 0000003763 6.00 LASER CONNECTOR, STRAIGHT, 1/2" STRAIGHT CGB .375-.500 DIA
MALE CORD GRIP
CROUSE 08/11/202301681080CGB194
14 0000019232 70.00 LASER CAPSCREW, STEEL, 1/4"-20 X 1", USS-NC, GRADE 5, ZINC
PLATED
FASTENAL 08/11/202301681080110120304
15 0000056202 50.00 LASER CLAMP, STRUT, 1", 1-NUT, 1-BOLT, & 2-STRAPS, STEEL,
F/RIGID OR PIPE
COOPBLINE 08/11/202301681080B2010 ZN
16 0000016496 50.00 LASER NUT, SPRING, STRUT, 1/4", 1/4" THICKNESSCOOPBLINE 08/11/202301681080N224-1/4PLTD
Page 7 of 12
27577662
A/STRUCT
MPSN
WO:
TYPE:
SUBSTATION:
MPSN21000102
Item Cat Id QTY Filter MFT PART MANUF.CATALOG_DESC MR Need Date Notes
LIGHTS
01 0000058324 4.00 LIGHTS LUMINAIRE, LED, FLOOD LIGHT, EVOLVE, 70W, 9300LM,
4000K, 120-277V
GECO 08/11/202301681087EFM1010BB77740NAK2DKBZ
02 0000058326 4.00 LIGHTS POLE, ALUM, 25', ROUND TAPERED, F/LED FLOOD LIGHTGECO 08/11/202301681087ARTA252T6.0BSN
03 0000059812 4.00 LIGHTS FOUNDATION, SUPPORT, PRECAST CONCRETE, LIGHT POLE
BASE, 24"DIA X 6'H, W/ 3/4" BOLTS
IDAHPRECON 08/11/20230168108720-20030365
04 0000005432 4.00 LIGHTS BEND, PVC, 2", SCH 40, 90 DEG, 24" RADIUS, GRAY W/1
BELLED END
CANTEX 08/11/2023016810875133924
05 0000060225 4.00 LIGHTS REDUCER, PVC, 1-1/2" X 2", SCH 40, SWEDGE, MALE TO
MALE
CARLON 08/11/202301681087E952JH
06 0000003909 4.00 LIGHTS TERMINAL, LUG, CU 2/0 STR, 3/8" BOLT SIZE, 1H PADBURNDY 08/11/202301681087YA26-L
07 0000028809 80.00 LIGHTS CONDUCTOR, CU, BARE 2/0 19-STR SOFT DRAWN CU CND 61'
COIL P/MATL 6-202
ANIXWIRCAB 08/11/2023016810871B-20219-IPCO1 COILS
Page 8 of 12
27577662
A/STRUCT
MPSN
WO:
TYPE:
SUBSTATION:
MPSN21000102
Item Cat Id QTY Filter MFT PART MANUF.CATALOG_DESC MR Need Date Notes
STR
01 0000050715 1.00 STR SEE DRAWINGSMFT, SHOP BUILT, FAB-SHOP BUILT, SPECIAL ORDER F/
PROJECT,CONTACT DESIGNER F/ DETAILS
IPCOFAB 09/04/202301672663MFT STRUCTURAL
Page 9 of 12
27577662
A/STRUCT
MPSN
WO:
TYPE:
SUBSTATION:
MPSN21000102
NONCAT ITEMS
QTY MR UI Manufacturer Description CMD CMD Name Filter MFT NotesUnit PriceItem Need Date
EQUIP.
02 1.00 500KV GE SERIES CAPACITOR BANK EL CPT EQUIP.RILEY HAWKINS 0.00 09/04/2023
Page 10 of 12
27577662
A/STRUCT
MPSN
WO:
TYPE:
SUBSTATION:
MPSN21000102
QTY MR UI Manufacturer Description CMD CMD Name Filter MFT NotesUnit PriceItem Need Date
FND
15 120.00 1682469 EA PORTBOLMAN 1 1/4" X 30" ANCHOR BOLTS HA ANC FND PER QUOTE :207322 43.25 08/11/2023
16 240.00 EA PORTBOLMAN 1 1/4" HEX NUTS HA NUT FND COMES WITH ANCHOR BOLTS 0.00 08/11/2023
17 240.00 EA PORTBOLMAN 1 1/4" WASHERS HA WSH FND COMES WITH ANCHOR BOLTS 0.00 08/11/2023
18 16.00 1682469 EA PORTBOLMAN 1 1/2" X 38" ANCHOR BOLTS HA ANC FND PER QUOTE :207322 82.50 08/11/2023
19 16.00 1682469 EA PORTBOLMAN 1 1/2" HEX NUTS HA NUT FND PER QUOTE :207322 8.30 08/11/2023
20 16.00 1682469 EA PORTBOLMAN 1 1/2" WASHERS HA WSH FND PER QUOTE :207322 1.92 08/11/2023
Page 11 of 12
27577662
A/STRUCT
MPSN
WO:
TYPE:
SUBSTATION:
MPSN21000102
QTY MR UI Manufacturer Description CMD CMD Name Filter MFT NotesUnit PriceItem Need Date
LASER
28 6.00 TRANSGARD LASER LIGHT MODULE LASER RILEY HAWKINS 2,175.00 09/04/2023
29 6.00 TRANSGARD TRANSGARD DEFENCE SYSTEM LASER RILEY HAWKINS 14,795.00 09/04/2023
30 6.00 TRANSGARD SECTOR CHAIN MOUNT LASER RILEY HAWKINS 646.00 09/04/2023
31 1.00 TRANSGARD LASER MASTER DISCONNECT LASER RILEY HAWKINS 760.00 09/04/2023
32 1.00 TRANSGARD LASER PROGRAMMING LASER RILEY HAWKINS 4,660.00 09/04/2023
33 4.00 TRANSGARD MULTIPLE LASER PROGRAMMING LASER RILEY HAWKINS 938.00 09/04/2023
34 33.00 TRANSGARD OPTICL GEL DISCS LASER RILEY HAWKINS 960.00 09/04/2023
Page 12 of 12
STATION:WO:PAMELA COGGINS DATE:4/17/2023
ITEM DESCRIPTION & STYLE NO.QTY.DISPOSITION MOVED TO
JUNK RETURN OTHER PNL NO.STATION
IR STORES
1 3 X
2 X
3 X
4 X
5 KEEP FITTING FOR FUTURE
USE
DISPOSITION DEFINITIONS:
JUNK IR=Send to Investment Recovery (SALVAGE)
RETURN STORES=Used material, still in good condition to be used again on future projects or saved for a spare part.
OTHER=Send to Area Group or other specified party to be kept by them, but not in stock.
REMOVAL INVENTORY
27577662
C506 500KV CAPACITOR BANKS
BREAKERS FOR FUTURE USE
KEEP EXISTING FITTING FROM BYPASS
LISTED BY:
PROPERTY
UNIT
PANEL
NO.
CONDUCTOR & CONNECTIONS TO
EXISTING BYPASS BREAKERS
DATE
INSTALLED
MPSN210001
NOTES
FENCE AROUND THE CAPACITOR BANKS
ALL EXSITING C506K FOUNDATIONS

Internal Use Only
STRUCTURAL NAMEPLATE ENGRAVING REQUEST
NEED DATE: 8/11/2023
STATION: MPSN WO: 27577662 DESIGNER: PAMELA COGGINS MR: 1672664

STR NAMEPLATES
SIZE QTY FIRST LINE SIZE QTY FIRST LINE
G - VERTICAL 1.75" x 6.375" 1 A1 G - VERTICAL 1.75" x 6.375" 1 DS1
G - VERTICAL 1.75" x 6.375" 1 A2
G - VERTICAL 1.75" x 6.375" 3 C506
G - VERTICAL 1.75" x 6.375" 1 YAC2
N/A

H - HORIZONTAL 6.25" x 1.75" 1 A3 N/A

H - HORIZONTAL 6.25" x 1.75" 1 A4 N/A

H - HORIZONTAL 6.25" x 1.75" 1 A6 N/A

H - HORIZONTAL 6.25" x 1.75" 1 L1 N/A

G - VERTICAL 1.75" x 6.375" 1 L2 N/A

G - VERTICAL 1.75" x 6.375" 1 L3 N/A

G - VERTICAL 1.75" x 6.375" 1 L4 N/A

G - VERTICAL 1.75" x 6.375" 1 DP1 N/A

G - VERTICAL 1.75" x 6.375" 1 YDC1 N/A

G - VERTICAL 1.75" x 6.375" 1 DS2 N/A

G - VERTICAL 1.75" x 6.375" 1 L.S. XFRM N/A

APPROVED BYAPPROVED BY DATEDATE
Bill of Material Bill of Material (Line 1)(Line 1)
QTY.QTY.SIZESIZE LEN.LEN.GRADE / DESCRIPTIONGRADE / DESCRIPTION
120 1-1/4 30 ASTM F1554 Grade 36 hex head bolt
240 1-1/4 ASTM A563 Grade A hex nut
240 1-1/4 ASTM F436 Type 1 hardened washer
NotesNotes
(Hardware Shipped Loose)
Hex head bolt dimensions meet ASME B18.2.1
Hex nut dimensions meet ASME B18.2.2
Finish: Galvanized per ASTM F2329 and A153
Hardware is not provided assembled
Drawings are not to scale
xx
PROJECTPROJECT Pam Coggins
CUSTOMERCUSTOMER IDAHO POWER COMPANY
Portland Bolt & Manufacturing Co.Portland Bolt & Manufacturing Co.
3441 NW Guam St.
Portland, OR 97210
[p] 800.547.6758
[f] 503.227.4634
[e] sales@portlandbolt .com
[w] www.portlandbolt.com© PORTLAND BOLT 2023© PORTLAND BOLT 2023 PAGEPAGE 1 of 4 ORDERORDER QUOTEQUOTE 207322 BYBY AP DATEDATE 4/18/2023
PROVIDED BY PORTLAND BOLT
APPROVED BYAPPROVED BY DATEDATE
Bill of Material Bill of Material (Line 2)(Line 2)
QTY.QTY.SIZESIZE LEN.LEN.GRADE / DESCRIPTIONGRADE / DESCRIPTION
16 1-1/2 38 ASTM F1554 Grade 36 hex head bolt
NotesNotes
(Hardware Shipped Loose)
Hex head bolt dimensions meet ASME B18.2.1
Finish: Galvanized per ASTM F2329 and A153
Drawings are not to scale
xx
PROJECTPROJECT Pam Coggins
CUSTOMERCUSTOMER IDAHO POWER COMPANY
Portland Bolt & Manufacturing Co.Portland Bolt & Manufacturing Co.
3441 NW Guam St.
Portland, OR 97210
[p] 800.547.6758
[f] 503.227.4634
[e] sales@portlandbolt .com
[w] www.portlandbolt.com© PORTLAND BOLT 2023© PORTLAND BOLT 2023 PAGEPAGE 2 of 4 ORDERORDER QUOTEQUOTE 207322 BYBY AP DATEDATE 4/18/2023
PROVIDED BY PORTLAND BOLT
APPROVED BYAPPROVED BY DATEDATE
Bill of Material Bill of Material (Line 3)(Line 3)
QTY.QTY.SIZESIZE LEN.LEN.GRADE / DESCRIPTIONGRADE / DESCRIPTION
16 1-1/2 Grade 2 hex lock nut
NotesNotes
(Anco Lock Nut)
Finish: Galvanized per ASTM F2329 and A153
Drawings are not to scale
xx
PROJECTPROJECT Pam Coggins
CUSTOMERCUSTOMER IDAHO POWER COMPANY
Portland Bolt & Manufacturing Co.Portland Bolt & Manufacturing Co.
3441 NW Guam St.
Portland, OR 97210
[p] 800.547.6758
[f] 503.227.4634
[e] sales@portlandbolt .com
[w] www.portlandbolt.com© PORTLAND BOLT 2023© PORTLAND BOLT 2023 PAGEPAGE 3 of 4 ORDERORDER QUOTEQUOTE 207322 BYBY AP DATEDATE 4/18/2023
PROVIDED BY PORTLAND BOLT
APPROVED BYAPPROVED BY DATEDATE
Bill of Material Bill of Material (Line 4)(Line 4)
QTY.QTY.SIZESIZE LEN.LEN.GRADE / DESCRIPTIONGRADE / DESCRIPTION
16 1-1/2 ASTM F436 Type 1 hardened washer
NotesNotes
Finish: Galvanized per ASTM F2329 and A153
Drawings are not to scale
xx
PROJECTPROJECT Pam Coggins
CUSTOMERCUSTOMER IDAHO POWER COMPANY
Portland Bolt & Manufacturing Co.Portland Bolt & Manufacturing Co.
3441 NW Guam St.
Portland, OR 97210
[p] 800.547.6758
[f] 503.227.4634
[e] sales@portlandbolt .com
[w] www.portlandbolt.com© PORTLAND BOLT 2023© PORTLAND BOLT 2023 PAGEPAGE 4 of 4 ORDERORDER QUOTEQUOTE 207322 BYBY AP DATEDATE 4/18/2023
PROVIDED BY PORTLAND BOLT
PROJ. ID-MFT #
LOCATION CHQ4 EXT.2646 DATE 4/19/2023 MR#1672663
W.O. TASK 02 COST CTR.415 STATION CODE MPSN CONTROL PROJECT
STRUCTURAL PROJECT X
OTHER
RES.QTY PAINT DESCRIPTION OF MATERIAL NEED RESERVED FOR
DESC.COLOR DATE SHOP USE
MS 1 GA 08/11/23
MS 2 PC 08/11/23
MS 1 GA 08/11/23
MS 60 GA 08/11/23
MS------X----MACHINE SHOP AL----------ALUMINUM GA-----X---GALVANIZE Stores-Station Area Email
X PA------X---PAINT SHOP ST------X---STEEL PC-----X----POWDER COAT Steve Carpenter-M&E Hard Copy & Email
SEND COMPLETED MATERIAL TO:
FINISH MFT COPY DISTRIBUTION
NUMBER
21D-78250-1 THRU 3
21D-78251-1
61B-YARD LOAD CENTER ENCLOSURE 72YLS06
RESOURCE
DESIGNER
27577662
Pamela Coggins
MPSN210001-01S
REPLACE C506 SERIES CAPACITOR BANK
61A-500KV INSULATOR SUPPORT STEEL DETAIL 26'-0"
MECHANICAL MATERIAL FABRICATION TRANSMITTAL
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
PASSPORT W.O.
21D-48019-165
MPSN210001-01SMPSN210001-01SPROJ. ID-MFT #
DRAWING
Other -
Stores-Station Area - Tracy Ussery
21D-78444-2
61C-DISCONNECT DS1/DS2 SUPPORT STRUCTURAL DETAIL
61D-CAPACITOR FOUNDATION PLATE DETAIL #1
MATERIAL
ELECTRICAL MATERIAL FABRICATION TRANSMITTAL PROJ. ID-MFT #
DESIGNER LOCATION EXT.DATE MR#
W.O. TASK COST CTR.STATION CODE CONTROL PROJECT
STRUCT PROJECT
OTHER.......
QTY DRAWING PANEL DESCRIPTION OF MATERIAL NEED RESERVED FOR
NUMBER NUMBER DATE SHOP USE
Stores-Station Area Email
Scott Nydegger M&E Hard Copy & Email
PROJ. ID-MFT #
MFT COPY DISTRIBUTION
SEND COMPLETED MATERIAL TO:
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
PASSPORT W.O.
Stores-Station Area - Tracy Ussery
0
Other -
NOTES
STRUCTURAL CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
FOR
MIDPOINT STATION
REPLACE C506 SERIES CAPACITOR BANK
JEROME COUNTY, IDAHO
MPSN210001 W.O. #27577662 & 27577670
PROJECT SHT. NO. 0001
PROJECT SHT. NO. 0002
PROJECT SHT. NO. 0003
PROJECT SHT. NO. 0004
PROJECT SHT. NO. 0005
PROJECT SHT. NO. 0006
PROJECT SHT. NO. 0007
PROJECT SHT. NO. 0008
PROJECT SHT. NO. 0009
PROJECT SHT. NO. 0010
PROJECT SHT. NO. 0011
PROJECT SHT. NO. 0012
PROJECT SHT. NO. 0013
PROJECT SHT. NO. 0014
PROJECT SHT. NO. 0015
PROJECT SHT. NO. 0016
PROJECT SHT. NO. 0017
PROJECT SHT. NO. 0018
PROJECT SHT. NO. 0019
PROJECT SHT. NO. 0020
PROJECT SHT. NO. 0021
PROJECT SHT. NO. 0022
PROJECT SHT. NO. 0023
PROJECT SHT. NO. 0024
►
►
►
►
►
►
►►►►►►
►►►►►
►
►
►
►
►
61A & 61G
61F
(2 REQUIRED)
3/4"n x 30" GRADE
55 GALVANIZED BOLT
(4 REQ'D)
(2) 3/4" NUTS &
(2) WASHERS
PER BOLT
(8 TOTAL REQ'D OF EACH)
2'-0"n
n91
1 1/2" DIA CONDUIT
RACEWAYS
ON 7" DIA CONE
PLAN VIEW A
-
2" BOLT CIRCLE
NOTES:
Design Load:
Overburned Depth:
Concrete: 28 Day Compressive Strength =
4,500 PSI
Rebar: Grade 60 (ASTM A615)
Wire Mesh Equiv.: Grade 65 (ASTM A1064)
Section
24inx6 LightPole Base
Q ydty C Weight
0 0.55 2,240 lbs
DESCRIPTION
24" DIA x 6'-0" PRECAST LIGHT POLE
BASE
PROJECT
24" x 6' LIGHT POLE BASE
IDAHO POWER
IDAHO PRECAST
1389 Madison Ave.
Nampa, ID 83687
MODELED BY
chadj
DATE
11/30/2021
REV SHEET
1 1 of
CUSTOMER
VIEW A
6'
-
0
"
43
2'
-
6
"
3'
-
0
"
4"
BO
L
T
PR
O
J
E
C
T
I
O
N
3
8"=1'
3
4"=1'
18"=1'
14"=1'1
2"=1'1"=1'
A
B
C
D
E
Rev
0
Date Rev Description
1/17/23 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Drawn By
MF
Checked By
JH
© 2022 General Electric Company and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
This document is the confidential and proprietary information of General
Electric Company and/or its affiliates and may not be reproduced, transmitted,
stored, or copied in whole or in part, or used to furnish information to others,
without the prior written permission of General Electric Company and/or its
affiliates.
Scale 3/4"=1'-0"
Name
Drawn By
Checked
Approved
Customer Drawing No Size
D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Project No
23480
GE Drawing No
23480-M1XX-CV-002
9
Cont On
003
Rev
0
MF
JH
Customer
Standard
FDate
1/17/23
1/17/23
Drawing Title
1"
=
4
0
'
1"
=
2
0
'
1"
=
5
0
'
1"
=
1
0
'
1"
=
6
0
'
1"
=
3
0
'
►
►
►
►
►
►
►►►►►►
►►►►►
►
►
►
►
►
61B
59D
(60) REQUIRED
MFT #MPSN210001-01S
3
8"=1'
3
4"=1'
1
8"=1'
14"=1'1
2"=1'1"=1'
A
B
C
D
E
Rev
0
Date Rev Description
1/17/23 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Drawn By
MF
Checked By
JH
© 2022 General Electric Company and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
This document is the confidential and proprietary information of General
Electric Company and/or its affiliates and may not be reproduced, transmitted,
stored, or copied in whole or in part, or used to furnish information to others,
without the prior written permission of General Electric Company and/or its
affiliates.
Scale 3/4"=1'-0"
Name
Drawn By
Checked
Approved
Customer Drawing No Size
D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Project No
23480
GE Drawing No
23480-M1XX-CV-003
9
Cont On
--
Rev
0
MF
JH
Customer
Standard
FDate
1/17/23
1/17/23
Drawing Title
1"
=
4
0
'
1"
=
2
0
'
1"
=
5
0
'
1"
=
1
0
'
1"
=
6
0
'
1"
=
3
0
'
►
►
►
►
►
►
►►►►►►
►►►►►
►
►
►
►
►
61C,61D & 61E
PROJECT SHT. NO. 0031
PROJECT SHT. NO. 0032
(1) REQUIRED
MFT #MPSN210001-01S
YDC1, YDC2
YAC2 & DP1 (200A) (59B)
(2) REQUIRED
MFT #MPSN210001-01S
(2) REQUIRED
MFT #MPSN210001-01S
YDC1, YDC2
YAC2 & DP1 (200A) (59B)
(2) REQUIRED
MFT #MPSN210001-01S
YDC1, YDC2
YAC2 & DP1 (200A) (59B)
59C
(1) REQUIRED
MFT #MPSN210001-01S
PROJECT SHT. NO. 0038
PROJECT SHT. NO. 0039
PROJECT SHT. NO. 0040
hapco
Abingdon, Va.
►
►
►
►
►
►
►►►►►►
►►►►►
►
►
►
►
►
PROJECT SHT. NO. 0043
Rev Date Rev Description Drawn By Checked By
Rev Date Rev Description Drawn By Checked By
PROJECT SHT. NO. 0045
PROJECT SHT. NO. 0046
PROJECT SHT. NO. 0047
PROJECT SHT. NO. 0048
PROJECT SHT. NO. 0049
PROJECT SHT. NO. 0050
PROJECT SHT. NO. 0051
PROJECT SHT. NO. 0052
Rev Date Rev Description Drawn By Checked By
Rev Date Rev Description Drawn By Checked By
PROJECT SHT. NO. 0054
PROJECT SHT. NO. 0055
199 North Capitol Blvd.
Suite 602
Boise, Idaho 83702
Phone [phone]
Fax [phone]
[e-mail]
LICENSED
ARCHITECT
AR-1890
DAVID BLODGETT
STATE OF IDAHO
DIGITAL SIGNATURECONTROL BUILDING
SITE LOCATION
”

.
X
199 North Capitol Blvd.
Suite 602
Boise, Idaho 83702
Phone [phone]
Fax [phone]
[e-mail]
PH
O
N
E
:

(
2
0
8
)

8
5
5
-
5
0
8
2
ht
t
p
:

/
/
w
w
w
.
s
a
g
e
-
e
n
g
.
c
o
m
16
9
3

S
.

C
O
R
O
N
A
D
O

A
V
E
.

-

B
O
I
S
E
,

I
D

8
3
7
0
9
EN
G
I
N
E
E
R
I
N
G
1
199 North Capitol Blvd.
Suite 602
Boise, Idaho 83702
Phone [phone]
Fax [phone]
[e-mail]
NORTH
PH
O
N
E
:

(
2
0
8
)

8
5
5
-
5
0
8
2
ht
t
p
:

/
/
w
w
w
.
s
a
g
e
-
e
n
g
.
c
o
m
16
9
3

S
.

C
O
R
O
N
A
D
O

A
V
E
.

-

B
O
I
S
E
,

I
D

8
3
7
0
9
EN
G
I
N
E
E
R
I
N
G
1
6
1 2 3
4
5 6 7 8
9
199 North Capitol Blvd.
Suite 602
Boise, Idaho 83702
Phone [phone]
Fax [phone]
[e-mail]
PH
O
N
E
:

(
2
0
8
)

8
5
5
-
5
0
8
2
ht
t
p
:

/
/
w
w
w
.
s
a
g
e
-
e
n
g
.
c
o
m
16
9
3

S
.

C
O
R
O
N
A
D
O

A
V
E
.

-

B
O
I
S
E
,

I
D

8
3
7
0
9
EN
G
I
N
E
E
R
I
N
G
BATTERY
ROOM
CONTROL
ROOM
STORAGE
ROOM
1
199 North Capitol Blvd.
Suite 602
Boise, Idaho 83702
Phone [phone]
Fax [phone]
[e-mail]
LICENSED
ARCHITECT
AR-1890
DAVID BLODGETT
STATE OF IDAHO
DIGITAL SIGNATURE
1
2
199 North Capitol Blvd.
Suite 602
Boise, Idaho 83702
Phone [phone]
Fax [phone]
[e-mail]
LICENSED
ARCHITECT
AR-1890
DAVID BLODGETT
STATE OF IDAHO
DIGITAL SIGNATURE
1
2
199 North Capitol Blvd.
Suite 602
Boise, Idaho 83702
Phone [phone]
Fax [phone]
[e-mail]
LICENSED
ARCHITECT
AR-1890
DAVID BLODGETT
STATE OF IDAHO
DIGITAL SIGNATURE
1
199 North Capitol Blvd.
Suite 602
Boise, Idaho 83702
Phone [phone]
Fax [phone]
[e-mail]
LICENSED
ARCHITECT
AR-1890
DAVID BLODGETT
STATE OF IDAHO
DIGITAL SIGNATURE
1
199 North Capitol Blvd.
Suite 602
Boise, Idaho 83702
Phone [phone]
Fax [phone]
[e-mail]
NORTH
PH
O
N
E
:

(
2
0
8
)

8
5
5
-
5
0
8
2
ht
t
p
:

/
/
w
w
w
.
s
a
g
e
-
e
n
g
.
c
o
m
16
9
3

S
.

C
O
R
O
N
A
D
O

A
V
E
.

-

B
O
I
S
E
,

I
D

8
3
7
0
9
EN
G
I
N
E
E
R
I
N
G
1 2 3
4 5 6
199 North Capitol Blvd.
Suite 602
Boise, Idaho 83702
Phone [phone]
Fax [phone]
[e-mail]
PH
O
N
E
:

(
2
0
8
)

8
5
5
-
5
0
8
2
ht
t
p
:

/
/
w
w
w
.
s
a
g
e
-
e
n
g
.
c
o
m
16
9
3

S
.

C
O
R
O
N
A
D
O

A
V
E
.

-

B
O
I
S
E
,

I
D

8
3
7
0
9
EN
G
I
N
E
E
R
I
N
G
2
1
199 North Capitol Blvd.
Suite 602
Boise, Idaho 83702
Phone [phone]
Fax [phone]
[e-mail]
LICENSED
ARCHITECT
AR-1890
DAVID BLODGETT
STATE OF IDAHO
DIGITAL SIGNATURE
3
2 1 199 North Capitol Blvd.
Suite 602
Boise, Idaho 83702
Phone [phone]
Fax [phone]
[e-mail]
LICENSED
ARCHITECT
AR-1890
DAVID BLODGETT
STATE OF IDAHO
DIGITAL SIGNATURE
2
4
5
3
1
8
6
7
199 North Capitol Blvd.
Suite 602
Boise, Idaho 83702
Phone [phone]
Fax [phone]
[e-mail]
LICENSED
ARCHITECT
AR-1890
DAVID BLODGETT
STATE OF IDAHO
DIGITAL SIGNATURE
1
5
2
3
4
6
199 North Capitol Blvd.
Suite 602
Boise, Idaho 83702
Phone [phone]
Fax [phone]
[e-mail]
LICENSED
ARCHITECT
AR-1890
DAVID BLODGETT
STATE OF IDAHO
DIGITAL SIGNATURE
3 1
24
199 North Capitol Blvd.
Suite 602
Boise, Idaho 83702
Phone [phone]
Fax [phone]
[e-mail]
LICENSED
ARCHITECT
AR-1890
DAVID BLODGETT
STATE OF IDAHO
DIGITAL SIGNATURE
3 1
24
199 North Capitol Blvd.
Suite 602
Boise, Idaho 83702
Phone [phone]
Fax [phone]
[e-mail]
LICENSED
ARCHITECT
AR-1890
DAVID BLODGETT
STATE OF IDAHO
DIGITAL SIGNATURE
PROJECT SHT. NO. 0072
Pr
o
j
e
c
t
:
22
R
U
D
2
3
20
8
.
2
8
8
.
2
1
8
1
199 North Capitol Blvd.
Suite 602
Boise, Idaho 83702
Phone [phone]
Fax [phone]
[e-mail]
5
2
3
4
69
8
1
24
7 199 North Capitol Blvd.
Suite 602
Boise, Idaho 83702
Phone [phone]
Fax [phone]
[e-mail]
LICENSED
ARCHITECT
AR-1890
DAVID BLODGETT
STATE OF IDAHO
DIGITAL SIGNATURE
4
1
23
ALL SHEET STEEL TO
BE POWDER COATED
FINISH & ANSI 61
199 North Capitol Blvd.
Suite 602
Boise, Idaho 83702
Phone [phone]
Fax [phone]
[e-mail]
LICENSED
ARCHITECT
AR-1890
DAVID BLODGETT
STATE OF IDAHO
DIGITAL SIGNATURE
ALL SHEET STEEL
TO BE POWDER
COATED FINISH &
ANSI 61
199 North Capitol Blvd.
Suite 602
Boise, Idaho 83702
Phone [phone]
Fax [phone]
[e-mail]
LICENSED
ARCHITECT
AR-1890
DAVID BLODGETT
STATE OF IDAHO
DIGITAL SIGNATURE
STORAGE
ROOM
CONTROL
ROOM
BATTERY
ROOM
STORAGE
ROOM
CONTROL
ROOM
BATTERY
ROOM
1
Pr
o
j
e
c
t
:
22
R
U
D
2
3
20
8
.
2
8
8
.
2
1
8
1
199 North Capitol Blvd.
Suite 602
Boise, Idaho 83702
Phone [phone]
Fax [phone]
[e-mail]
2
12
Pr
o
j
e
c
t
:
22
R
U
D
2
3
20
8
.
2
8
8
.
2
1
8
1
199 North Capitol Blvd.
Suite 602
Boise, Idaho 83702
Phone [phone]
Fax [phone]
[e-mail]
Pr
o
j
e
c
t
:
22
R
U
D
2
3
20
8
.
2
8
8
.
2
1
8
1
199 North Capitol Blvd.
Suite 602
Boise, Idaho 83702
Phone [phone]
Fax [phone]
[e-mail]
1
199 North Capitol Blvd.
Suite 602
Boise, Idaho 83702
Phone [phone]
Fax [phone]
[e-mail]
LICENSED
ARCHITECT
AR-1890
DAVID BLODGETT
STATE OF IDAHO
DIGITAL SIGNATURE
Exhibit B - Table of Demarcation
Contractor will provide and include the following in their bid
Number Description of action
Responsible
party Notes:
1 Engineering and design drawings for Series Capacitor Bank, including
foundations.Contractor
2
Furnish, deliver, construct and commission one (1) 345kV, 3-phase, 60 Hz,
2100 Amp/phase series capacitor banks for outdoor use as described in this
specification.
Contractor
3
All bus work on platform, and bus or jumpers from the platform to the
existing bank bypass breakers. The Contractor will also be responsible for
jumpers from the bypass breakers to the yard bus.
Contractor
4
The Contractor will be responsible for connecting the series capacitor
platforms to the ground grid using Cadweld type LA, two-hole, tin plated
lug, per IPC Station Engineering Manual, section 04-111. IPC will provide
ground tails at the base of all foundations mounting points for this as per the
Contractors drawings.
Contractor
5
Install, splice and terminate all fiber optics from the MPSN Series Capacitor
Bank Control Building to the platform and associated existing Bypass
Circuit Breakers.
Contractor
6 Heavy lifting equipment for erecting the new banks is the responsibility of
the Contractor. Contractor
7 The Contractor will install conduit from cable trench up into their vendor
cabinets/equipment for the bypass circuit breakers. Contractor
8 The Contractor is responsible for installing the vendor supplied equipment
in the new MPSN Series Capacitor Bank Control Building.Contractor
9
The Contractor is responsible for installing and terminating all yard and
control cables that go between the new MPSN Series Capacitor Bank
Control Building and the platform, the existing bypass circuit breakers and
Contractor supplied control boxes in the yard. Cables to meet IPC
specifications. This should be to IPC color and function standards.
Contractor
10
The Contractor is responsible for installing and terminating all interconnect
cables between the Contractor's equipment in the new MPSN Series
Capacitor Bank Control building and IPC's panel(s) in the series capacitor
control building. The installation and termination of the control wiring from
the Contractor equipment for the series capacitor bank back to IPC's RTU
and SCADA equipment. The cables will be purchased and provided by IPC
to meet IPC specifications. This should be to IPC color and function
standards.
Contractor
11
Contractor will make all fiber splices on and between the series capacitor
platform and the vendors equipment in the new MPSN Series Capacitor
Bank Control building. The Contractor is responsible for the purchase of all
fiber and inner duct needed to accomplish this task.
Contractor
12
The Contractor will need to coordinate the switching of lines for line
outages with our dispatch to meet the deadlines and proper lead-time
notification. Since these lines are considered part of the NERC Bulk Electric
System, any line outage must be schedule 45 days before the 1st day of the
month of the outage. Dual clearances will be held by the Contractor and
IPC.
Contractor
13
All necessary power cables from Contractor equipment to the load centers
shall be purchased , installed and landed by the Contractor according to IPC
standards.
Contractor
14 Any additional wiring or fiber optic connections to the existing bypass
breakers is the responsibility of the Contractor Contractor
Contractor should NOT include the following in their bid as the work will be performed by IPC
Number Description of action
Responsible
party Notes:
1
Disassemble existing Capacitor Bank and relocate to specified area onsite. This
work includes removal of the Platform to the ground (platform, insulators). The
capacitors rack segments will need to be disabled into individual racks. Heavy
lifting equipment for disassembling the existing bank is the responsibility of the
Removal Contractor. The capacitor can removal from the racks and disposed of
offsite will be performed by the Capacitor Can Contractor. The platform and below
will be removed by the removal Contractor.
IPC contractor
2 IPC will provide Construction Power consisting of 1 phase 120/208V for
Contractor construction trailers along with local service power to the yard.IPC
3 Removal of existing bus from platform to air breaks IPC contractor
4 Removal of the capacitor cans from the racks and their disposal . All cans are Non-
PCB cans and will be shipped to IPCo Investment recovery for disposal.
Capacitor Can
Disposal
contractor
5 Removal of the old series capacitor platform and Lally column foundations. IPC Contractor
6 Recycle the old structures IPC contractor
7 Installation of all foundations for the bypass switch along with foundations for any
light poles IPC contractor
8 Removal of old fence, if needed and the building or modifying of any new fence
needed for the series capacitors banks or the yard in general
IPC Fence
contractor
9 IPC shall be responsible for the busing between the air breaks and the station bus
along with any changes to the station bus.IPC Contractor
10
All new cable trenches or conduits from the Main control building at MPSN and
the MPSN Series Capacitor Bank Building, including any changes to the local
service.
IPC contractor
11
The installation of the cam switches on the air breaks and the cabling from said
cam switches back to the control cubicles in the MPSN Series Capacitor Bank
Control Building.
IPC contractor
12 Changes to the yard lighting IPC
13
Design grounding plan and install station yard grounding, leaving tails at each
foundation for vendor to attach equipment to. IPC will also install ground mats
where required for switching.
IPC
or
IPC contractor
14 IPC will provide and install finish grade rock IPC contractor
15 IPC will provide new yard signs for the fence to meet IPCO specifications IPC contractor
16 IPC will provide a Geo Technical Report IPC
17 Static wire installation or modification as needed
IPC or
IPC contractor
18
Installation of all foundations for Contractor equipment , including the Series
Capacitor Platform, the Bypass Breaker, and any control wiring boxes supplied by
Contractor and any additional bus support foundations.
IPC or
IPC contractor
19 IPC will be responsible for building a new series Capacitor Control Building in the
north-west part of the 500kv yard.
IPC or
IPC contractor
199 North Capitol Blvd.
Suite 602
Boise, Idaho 83702
Phone [phone]
Fax [phone]
[e-mail]
LICENSED
ARCHITECT
AR-1890
DAVID BLODGETT
STATE OF IDAHO
DIGITAL SIGNATURECONTROL BUILDING
SITE LOCATION
”

.
X
199 North Capitol Blvd.
Suite 602
Boise, Idaho 83702
Phone [phone]
Fax [phone]
[e-mail]
PH
O
N
E
:

(
2
0
8
)

8
5
5
-
5
0
8
2
ht
t
p
:

/
/
w
w
w
.
s
a
g
e
-
e
n
g
.
c
o
m
16
9
3

S
.

C
O
R
O
N
A
D
O

A
V
E
.

-

B
O
I
S
E
,

I
D

8
3
7
0
9
EN
G
I
N
E
E
R
I
N
G
1
199 North Capitol Blvd.
Suite 602
Boise, Idaho 83702
Phone [phone]
Fax [phone]
[e-mail]
NORTH
PH
O
N
E
:

(
2
0
8
)

8
5
5
-
5
0
8
2
ht
t
p
:

/
/
w
w
w
.
s
a
g
e
-
e
n
g
.
c
o
m
16
9
3

S
.

C
O
R
O
N
A
D
O

A
V
E
.

-

B
O
I
S
E
,

I
D

8
3
7
0
9
EN
G
I
N
E
E
R
I
N
G
1
6
1 2 3
4
5 6 7 8
9
199 North Capitol Blvd.
Suite 602
Boise, Idaho 83702
Phone [phone]
Fax [phone]
[e-mail]
PH
O
N
E
:

(
2
0
8
)

8
5
5
-
5
0
8
2
ht
t
p
:

/
/
w
w
w
.
s
a
g
e
-
e
n
g
.
c
o
m
16
9
3

S
.

C
O
R
O
N
A
D
O

A
V
E
.

-

B
O
I
S
E
,

I
D

8
3
7
0
9
EN
G
I
N
E
E
R
I
N
G
BATTERY
ROOM
CONTROL
ROOM
STORAGE
ROOM
1
199 North Capitol Blvd.
Suite 602
Boise, Idaho 83702
Phone [phone]
Fax [phone]
[e-mail]
LICENSED
ARCHITECT
AR-1890
DAVID BLODGETT
STATE OF IDAHO
DIGITAL SIGNATURE
1
2
199 North Capitol Blvd.
Suite 602
Boise, Idaho 83702
Phone [phone]
Fax [phone]
[e-mail]
LICENSED
ARCHITECT
AR-1890
DAVID BLODGETT
STATE OF IDAHO
DIGITAL SIGNATURE
1
2
199 North Capitol Blvd.
Suite 602
Boise, Idaho 83702
Phone [phone]
Fax [phone]
[e-mail]
LICENSED
ARCHITECT
AR-1890
DAVID BLODGETT
STATE OF IDAHO
DIGITAL SIGNATURE
1
199 North Capitol Blvd.
Suite 602
Boise, Idaho 83702
Phone [phone]
Fax [phone]
[e-mail]
LICENSED
ARCHITECT
AR-1890
DAVID BLODGETT
STATE OF IDAHO
DIGITAL SIGNATURE
1
199 North Capitol Blvd.
Suite 602
Boise, Idaho 83702
Phone [phone]
Fax [phone]
[e-mail]
NORTH
PH
O
N
E
:

(
2
0
8
)

8
5
5
-
5
0
8
2
ht
t
p
:

/
/
w
w
w
.
s
a
g
e
-
e
n
g
.
c
o
m
16
9
3

S
.

C
O
R
O
N
A
D
O

A
V
E
.

-

B
O
I
S
E
,

I
D

8
3
7
0
9
EN
G
I
N
E
E
R
I
N
G
1 2 3
4 5 6
199 North Capitol Blvd.
Suite 602
Boise, Idaho 83702
Phone [phone]
Fax [phone]
[e-mail]
PH
O
N
E
:

(
2
0
8
)

8
5
5
-
5
0
8
2
ht
t
p
:

/
/
w
w
w
.
s
a
g
e
-
e
n
g
.
c
o
m
16
9
3

S
.

C
O
R
O
N
A
D
O

A
V
E
.

-

B
O
I
S
E
,

I
D

8
3
7
0
9
EN
G
I
N
E
E
R
I
N
G
2
1
199 North Capitol Blvd.
Suite 602
Boise, Idaho 83702
Phone [phone]
Fax [phone]
[e-mail]
LICENSED
ARCHITECT
AR-1890
DAVID BLODGETT
STATE OF IDAHO
DIGITAL SIGNATURE
3
2 1 199 North Capitol Blvd.
Suite 602
Boise, Idaho 83702
Phone [phone]
Fax [phone]
[e-mail]
LICENSED
ARCHITECT
AR-1890
DAVID BLODGETT
STATE OF IDAHO
DIGITAL SIGNATURE
2
4
5
3
1
8
6
7
199 North Capitol Blvd.
Suite 602
Boise, Idaho 83702
Phone [phone]
Fax [phone]
[e-mail]
LICENSED
ARCHITECT
AR-1890
DAVID BLODGETT
STATE OF IDAHO
DIGITAL SIGNATURE
1
5
2
3
4
6
199 North Capitol Blvd.
Suite 602
Boise, Idaho 83702
Phone [phone]
Fax [phone]
[e-mail]
LICENSED
ARCHITECT
AR-1890
DAVID BLODGETT
STATE OF IDAHO
DIGITAL SIGNATURE
3 1
24
199 North Capitol Blvd.
Suite 602
Boise, Idaho 83702
Phone [phone]
Fax [phone]
[e-mail]
LICENSED
ARCHITECT
AR-1890
DAVID BLODGETT
STATE OF IDAHO
DIGITAL SIGNATURE
3 1
24
199 North Capitol Blvd.
Suite 602
Boise, Idaho 83702
Phone [phone]
Fax [phone]
[e-mail]
LICENSED
ARCHITECT
AR-1890
DAVID BLODGETT
STATE OF IDAHO
DIGITAL SIGNATURE
Pr
o
j
e
c
t
:
22
R
U
D
2
3
20
8
.
2
8
8
.
2
1
8
1
199 North Capitol Blvd.
Suite 602
Boise, Idaho 83702
Phone [phone]
Fax [phone]
[e-mail]
5
2
3
4
69
8
1
24
7 199 North Capitol Blvd.
Suite 602
Boise, Idaho 83702
Phone [phone]
Fax [phone]
[e-mail]
LICENSED
ARCHITECT
AR-1890
DAVID BLODGETT
STATE OF IDAHO
DIGITAL SIGNATURE
4
1
23
ALL SHEET STEEL TO
BE POWDER COATED
FINISH & ANSI 61
199 North Capitol Blvd.
Suite 602
Boise, Idaho 83702
Phone [phone]
Fax [phone]
[e-mail]
LICENSED
ARCHITECT
AR-1890
DAVID BLODGETT
STATE OF IDAHO
DIGITAL SIGNATURE
ALL SHEET STEEL
TO BE POWDER
COATED FINISH &
ANSI 61
199 North Capitol Blvd.
Suite 602
Boise, Idaho 83702
Phone [phone]
Fax [phone]
[e-mail]
LICENSED
ARCHITECT
AR-1890
DAVID BLODGETT
STATE OF IDAHO
DIGITAL SIGNATURE
STORAGE
ROOM
CONTROL
ROOM
BATTERY
ROOM
STORAGE
ROOM
CONTROL
ROOM
BATTERY
ROOM
1
Pr
o
j
e
c
t
:
22
R
U
D
2
3
20
8
.
2
8
8
.
2
1
8
1
199 North Capitol Blvd.
Suite 602
Boise, Idaho 83702
Phone [phone]
Fax [phone]
[e-mail]
2
12
Pr
o
j
e
c
t
:
22
R
U
D
2
3
20
8
.
2
8
8
.
2
1
8
1
199 North Capitol Blvd.
Suite 602
Boise, Idaho 83702
Phone [phone]
Fax [phone]
[e-mail]
Pr
o
j
e
c
t
:
22
R
U
D
2
3
20
8
.
2
8
8
.
2
1
8
1
199 North Capitol Blvd.
Suite 602
Boise, Idaho 83702
Phone [phone]
Fax [phone]
[e-mail]
1
199 North Capitol Blvd.
Suite 602
Boise, Idaho 83702
Phone [phone]
Fax [phone]
[e-mail]
LICENSED
ARCHITECT
AR-1890
DAVID BLODGETT
STATE OF IDAHO
DIGITAL SIGNATURE

CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS

Midpoint Substation
CONTROL BUILDING

Idaho Power Company
1221 West Idaho Street
Boise, Idaho

JANUARY 19, 2023

Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023
TABLE OF CONTENTS Section 000001 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Pages
BIDDING REQUIREMENTS (BOUND SEPARATELY)
CONTRACT FORMS (BOUND SEPARATELY)
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT (BOUND SEPARATELY)
SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
011150 General Requirements for Idaho Power 1-13
Station Building Projects

DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE

033000 Cast-In-Place Concrete 1-8

DIVISION 4 - MASONRY

040620 Masonry Mortar 1-4
040700 Masonry Grout 1-2
042200 Concrete Unit Masonry 1-4

DIVISION 6 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

061000 Rough Carpentry 1-2
061733 Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses 1-2
066400 Plastic Paneling 1-3

DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

072100 Thermal Insulation 1-4
072500 Weather Barriers 1-2
074113 Metal Roof Panels 1-5
078413 Firestopping 1-5
079200 Joint Sealants 1-7

DIVISION 8 – OPENINGS

081113 Hollow Metal Doors & Frames 1-4
087100 Door Hardware 1-6

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES
092216 Non-Structural Metal Framing 1-6
092900 Gypsum Board 1-2
099113 Painting 1-3
099600 High Performance Coatings 1-4

DIVISION 10-14 (NOT USED)

Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023
TABLE OF CONTENTS Section 000001 2
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL
230000 General Provisions for HVAC Work 1-5
230593 Testing, Adjusting, Balancing for HVAC 1-3
233423 HVAC Power Ventilators 1-2
238113 Packaged Terminal Heat Pumps 1-5

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
260200 Common Work Results 1-5
260519 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors/Cables 1-5
260533 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 1-6
265100 Interior Lighting 1-1

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK

312000 Earth Moving 1-6

DRAWINGS (BOUND SEPARATELY)
APPENDIX (BOUND SEPARATELY)

Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR Section 011150
IDAHO POWER STATION BUILDINGS

1
SECTION 011150
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR IDAHO POWER STATION BUILDING PROJECTS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL
A. Specifications and Drawings included in these Contract Documents establish the
performance, quality requirements, location, and general arrangement of materials and
equipment, and establish the minimum standards for quality of workmanship and
appearance. Unless stated otherwise, all substation construction work shall meet or
exceed the requirements of these specifications.
B. Specification sections have not been divided into groups for the work of subcontractors or
various trades. Any questions concerning the applicability or interpretation of the
documents should be directed to the Owner.
C. Incidental work that is necessary or required to make each installation satisfactory and
operable for its intended purpose, even though it is not specifically included in the
Contract Documents, shall be performed as if it were described in the Specifications or
shown on the Drawings.
D. Work may involve construction in the presence of electrically energized facilities. The
Contractor shall be required to provide adequate protection and ensure that persons
performing work on this project follow proper precautions.

1.2 RESPONSIBILITIES
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the following:
1. Providing complete systems in accordance with the intent of these Contract
Documents.
2. Coordinating construction activities with the other contractors, if the Owner has
awarded separate contracts for the project.
3. Coordinating with the Owner to determine material delivery schedules and
Owner’s material acceptance testing schedule for all Owner -furnished
equipment.
4. Furnishing and installing all incidental items not actually shown or specified, but
which are required by good practice to provide complete and functional systems.
5. Unless otherwise indicated as the responsibility of another identified entity,
Contractor shall provide inspections, tests, and other quality-control services
specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents and required by authorities
having jurisdiction. Costs for these services are included in the Contract Sum.
6. Where individual Sections specifically indicate that certain inspections, tests, and
other quality-control services are the Contractor's responsibility, the Contractor
shall employ and pay a qualified independent testing agency to perform quality
inspection services. The independent testing agency shall be approved by the
Owner prior to performing work. Costs for these services are included in the
Contract Sum.
7. Where individual Sections specifically indicate that certain inspections, tests, and
other quality-control services are the Owner's responsibility, the Owner will
perform the services or will employ and pay a qualified independent agency to
perform those services.
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR Section 011150
IDAHO POWER STATION BUILDINGS

2
8. Providing additional testing where results of inspections, tests, or other quality -
control services prove unsatisfactory and indicate noncompliance with the
Contract Document requirements, regardless of whether the original test was
Contractor's responsibility.
9. The cost of retesting is the Contractor's responsibility where required tests
performed on original construction indicated noncompliance with Contract
Document requirements.
B. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Owner or the Owner’s agents in performing
required inspections, tests, startup, and commissioning, and provide reasonable auxiliary
services as requested. Notify the Owner sufficiently in advance of operations to permit
assignment of personnel. Required auxiliary services include, but are not limited to the
following:
1. Providing access to the Work.
2. Assisting the Owner during functional testing, startup, and commissioning.
3. Furnishing labor and facilities necessary to provide corrective measures during
commissioning or to facilitate inspections and tests.
4. Taking adequate quantities of representative samples of materials required for
testing or assisting the agency in taking appropriate samples.

1.3 INTERPRETATION OF DOCUMENTS AFTER CONTRACT AWARD
A. Bidding documents may be stamped “Preliminary”; however, the Contractor shall only
perform project work from Drawings stamped and signed by the architect. Any changes
between the Preliminary Drawings and the Construction Issue Drawings will be brought
to the Contractor’s attention at the preconstruction conference. The Contractor will be
allowed contract schedule or price modifications due to these drawing changes.
B. The Contractor shall report any errors or ambiguities in the Specifications and/or
Drawings to the Owner as soon as detected. The Owner shall interpret the intended
meaning of the Contract Documents and the Owner’s interpretation shall be final.
C. If any construction problem arises that is not covered by the Contract Documents, the
Owner shall be consulted immediately and shall render a decision on the problem.
Failure to notify the Owner shall preclude any change to the contract schedule or price.

1.4 CONSTRUCTION STAKING AND SURVEYING
A. Unless stated otherwise, construction staking and surveying will be performed by others
under separate contract. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner and
staking/surveying contractor as required for construction staking and surveying
information.
B. If construction staking and surveying is provided by the Owner :
1. It shall be limited to the reference points indicated on the Drawings and in the
Specifications. The Contractor shall establish all other reference points.
2. The Contractor shall preserve survey stakes established by the Owner unless the
Owner authorizes their removal. Any stakes destroyed or removed by the
Contractor’s agents, employees, or subcontractors without approval of the Owner
will be replaced by the Owner at the Contractor’s expense. Cost to the
Contractor for replacing stakes destroyed or removed as aforementioned shall
include actual labor cost incurred plus a reasonable charge for use of supplies
and equipment and shall be deducted from payments due the Contractor.
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR Section 011150
IDAHO POWER STATION BUILDINGS

3
Survey stakes destroyed or removed through no fault of the Contractor shall b e
replaced by the Owner at the Owner’s expense. The Owner shall correct any
errors or replace missing stakes as soon as possible after being notified by the
Contractor.
3. If it appears to the Contractor that any structure as staked is in error, the
Contractor shall notify the Owner immediately and no further work shall be
performed on the structure or structures in question until such difference or error
is resolved. If the Contractor proceeds without the Owner’s direction, all such
work shall be at the Contractor’s own risk.
4. The Owner shall furnish survey stakes to establish perpendicular north-south and
east-west baselines and at least one benchmark (elevation). All other layout
staking and elevations shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
C. If construction staking and surveying is provided by the Contractor:
1. The Owner will provide reference marks on the Drawings.
2. Location and elevation of benchmarks are shown on the Drawings.
3. Dimensions for lines and elevation for grades of structures, appurtenances, and
utilities are indicated on the Drawings, together with other pertinent information
required for laying out the work. If conditions vary from those indicated, notify the
Owner immediately, who will make minor adjustments required.
4. The Owner may perform checks to verify accuracy of Contractor’s layout work
and that completed work complies with the Contract Documents.
5. Any existing survey points or other control markers destroyed without proper
authorization will be replaced by the owner of the survey points or control
markers at the Contractor’s expense.
6. Contractor’s Responsibility:
e. Provide survey as required to layout facilities from reference points
shown on the Drawings.
f. Located and protect reference points prior to starting site preparation.
g. Check and establish exact location of existing facilities prior to
construction of new facilities and any connections thereto.
h. In the event of discrepancy in data or staking provided by the Owner, the
Contractor shall request clarification before proceeding with work.
i. Preserve and leave undisturbed control staking until Owner has
completed checks it deems necessary.
j. Maintain complete accurate log of survey work as it progresses. This
document will serve as a record document.
k. Provide competent employee(s), tools, stakes, and other equipment and
materials as Owner may require to check layout, survey, and
measurement work performed by others.
l. Cooperate with the Owner so that checking and measuring may be
accomplished with least interference to Contractor’s operation.

1.5 ABBREVIATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS
A. The Contract Documents contain references to various standard specifications, codes,
practices, and requirements for materials, workmanship, installation, inspections, and
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR Section 011150
IDAHO POWER STATION BUILDINGS

4
tests; which standards are published and issued by the organizations, societies, and
associations by abbreviation and name and number.
B. Work specified by reference to the published standard or specification of a government
agency, technical association, trade association, professional society or institute, testing
agency, or other organization shall meet the requirements or surpass the minimum
standards of quality for materials and workmanship established by that designated
standard or specification.
C. Where so specified, products or workmanship shall also meet or exceed the additional
prescriptive or performance requirements included within the Contract Documents to
establish a higher or more stringent standard of quality than that required by the
referenced standard.
D. Where two or more standards are specified to establish quality, the product and
workmanship shall meet or exceed the requirements of the most stringent.
E. Whenever the abbreviation is specified, it shall be understood to mean the full name of
the respective organization (and referenced specification, code, practice, rule, etc.) as
listed below:
1. ACI American Concrete Institute
2. AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
3. ANSI American National Standard Institute
4. ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers
5. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
6. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
7. AWS American Welding Society
8. BLM Bureau of Land Management
9. CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
10. EPA Environmental Protection Agency
11. FERC Federal Energy Regulatory Commission
12. FS Federal Specification
13. ICC International Code Council
14. ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association
15. IEEE Institute of Electronic and Electrical Engineers
16. NBS National Bureau of Standards
17. NEC National Electric Code
18. NECA National Electrical Contractors Association
19. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
20. NESC National Electrical Safety Code
21. NETA National Electrical Testing Association
22. NFPA National Fire Protection Association
23. OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Association
24. PCA Portland Cement Association
25. SAE Society of Automotive Engineers
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR Section 011150
IDAHO POWER STATION BUILDINGS

5
26. SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council
27. UL Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc.
28. USFS United States Forest Service
29. WCRSI Western Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
F. Any material, method, or procedure specified by reference to a specific standard or
specification shall comply with the requirements in the latest revision thereof and any
amendments or supplements thereto in effect on the date of these Contract Documents.
G. The code, specification, or standard referred to, except as modified in these
Specifications, shall have full force and effect as though printed in these Specifications.
Such specifications and standards are not furnished to bidders, since manufacturers and
trades involved are assumed to be familiar with their requirements. When the Contractor
needs copies of standards, they can be obtained directly from the publication source.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 COORDINATION AND SITE CONDITIONS
A. Refer to the General Conditions for provisions regarding site conditions.
B. Existing Electrical Service and Other Utilities:
1. Where the Contractor’s operations could cause damage or inconvenience to
existing structures, utilities, or services, the Contractor shall make all
arrangements necessary for the protection of those items. The Contractor shall
replace existing items removed or damaged during construction to their original
condition and to the satisfaction of the Owner, unless otherwise provided for in
the Contract Documents.
2. Contractor shall be solely and directly responsible to the Owner and the Owner’s
customers for damage, injury, expense, loss, inconvenience, delay, suits,
actions, or claims of any character brought because of unscheduled outages or
damage to other utilities which result from construction operations under this
Contract.
3. Neither the Owner nor its officers or agents shall be responsible to the Contractor
for damages as a result of Contractor’s failure to exercise care or protect utilities
encountered in the work.
4. In the event of interruption to power or other utility service as a result of
accidental damage due to construction operations, promptly notify the proper
authority. Cooperate with said authority in restoration as promptly as possible
and pay for repair. Prevent interruption of utility service unless granted by the
utility owner.
C. Field Relocation:
1. During construction, it is expected that minor relocations of existing or proposed
facilities may be necessary. The Contractor shall make such relocations only as
Directed by the Owner. If existing structures are encountered that preve nt
construction as shown, the Contractor shall notify the Owner before continuing
with the work so the Owner may make necessary field revisions.
D. Markers and Monuments:
1. The Contractor shall preserve and protect survey monuments and markers
throughout construction. If damage occurs or removal becomes necessary, the
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR Section 011150
IDAHO POWER STATION BUILDINGS

6
Contractor shall immediately notify the Owner and restore the monument or
marker to its original condition.
E. Salvage of Materials:
1. Unless otherwise indicated, all material required to be removed and salvaged
shall remain the property of the Owner and shall promptly be removed from the
site and delivered to Idaho Power’s Salvage Center located at 11900 Franklin
Road, Boise, Idaho.
F. Connecting to Existing Facilities:
G. Unless otherwise shown or specified, the Contractor shall determine methods of
connecting new work to existing facilities, and obtain the Owner’s review and acceptance
of such connections. Where necessary for connecting new work, the Contractor shall
determine the location, elevation, nature, materials, dimensions, and configuration of all
existing facilities.

3.2 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Structural and Operational Limitations: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a
manner that would change their load carrying capacity or load-deflection ration. Do not
cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in
reducing their capacity to perform as intended or would result in increased maintenance
or decreased operational life or safety.
B. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction elements exposed on the
exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would reduce aesthetic qualities or would
result in visual evidence of cutting and patching.
C. The Contractor shall remove and replace new construction not meeting these limitations
and requirements.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
A. In general, during the construction period, the Contractor shall have full use of the
premises for construction operations, including use of the site. The Contractor's use of
the premises is limited only by the Owner's right to perform work or to retain other
contractors on portions of the project.
B. The Contractor shall provide, operate, and maintain appropriate power, water, sewage,
telephone, and other temporary utilities as required by the General Conditions.
C. The Contractor shall review with the Owner any precautionary requirements regarding
the use of cellular phones in substation control buildings.
D. The Contractor shall construct temporary storage yards for storage of Owner -furnished
products or materials as required. Materials shall be stored on pallets or racks, off the
ground, and in a manner to allow ready access for inspection and inventory.
E. The Contractor shall erect a temporary security fence with gates and locks where
required. The Contractor shall also provide barricades as necessary to prevent
unauthorized entry to construction areas, both inside and outside of fenced area. Also
provide barricades to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from potential
damage. Locate barricades to enable access by facility operators and property owners.
F. Examination of Existing Facilities:
1. After the Contract is awarded and before the commencement of work, the
Contractor shall make a thorough examination of all existing buildings, structures,
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR Section 011150
IDAHO POWER STATION BUILDINGS

7
and other improvements in the vicinity of the work, as applicable, which might be
damaged during construction operations.
2. The Contractor shall prepare records in triplicate of all observations made by the
Contractor. The authorized representative of the Owner and the Contractor shall
sign each copy of every document.
G. Safety Requirements:
1. The Contractor shall take every precaution necessary for safety and be solely
and completely responsible for conditions of the jobsite, including the safety of all
persons and property during the contract period. This requirement shall apply
continuously and not be limited to normal working hours.
2. Safety provisions shall conform to the Federal and State Departments of Labor
Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA), and other applicable federal, state,
county, and local laws, ordinances, codes, and requirements set forth herein.
Where these are in conflict, the more stringent requirement shall apply.
3. The Contractor shall develop and maintain for the duration of the Contract, a
safety program as set forth in the General Conditions.
H. Traffic Safety and Access:
1. The Contractor shall comply with all rules and regula tions of the city, state, and
county authorities regarding closing or restricting the use of public streets or
highways. No public or private road shall be closed, except by written permission
of the proper authority. The Contractor shall assure the least possible
obstruction to traffic and normal commercial pursuits.
2. Where traffic will pass over backfilled trenches before they are paved, the
Contractor shall maintain the top of the trench to allow normal vehicular traffic to
pass over. The Contractor shall provide temporary access to driveways where
required. Cleanup operations shall follow immediately behind the backfilling
operation.
3. When flagmen and guards are required by regulation or when deemed necessary
for safety, the Contractor shall furnish them with approved orange wearing
apparel and other regulation traffic control devices.
I. Fire Prevention: The Contractor shall perform all work in a fire-safe manner. Furnish and
maintain on the site adequate firefighting equipment capable of extinguishing incipient
fires. Comply with applicable federal, local, and state fire prevention regulations.
J. Protection of Work and Property:
1. The Contractor shall employ such means and methods necessary to adequately
protect public and private property, and the property of the Owner against
damage. In the event of damage to such property, the Contractor shall
immediately restore the property to a condition equal to its original condition and
to the satisfaction of the Owner, and bear all costs thereof.
2. Protection of Existing Trees and Vegetation: The Contractor shall protect
existing trees and other vegetation indicated to remain in place against
unnecessary cutting, breaking or skinning of roots, skinning or bruising of
bark, smothering of trees by stockpiling construct ion materials or excavated
materials within drip line, excess foot or vehicular traffic, or parking of
vehicles within drip line. The Contractor shall provide temporary guards to
protect trees and vegetation to be left standing.
3. Salvable Improvements: The Contractor shall carefully remove items indicated to
be salvaged and store them on Idaho Power's premises where indicated or
directed.
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR Section 011150
IDAHO POWER STATION BUILDINGS

8
4. The Contractor shall not disturb portions of the site beyond the areas in which the
work is indicated.
5. The Contractor shall keep driveways and entrances serving the premises clear
and available to the Owner and to emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use
these areas for parking or storage of materials. The Contractor shall schedule
deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and
equipment on-site.
K. Finished Construction:
1. The Contractor shall assume responsibility for protecting finished construction
and shall repair and restore any and all damaged work to its original or better
condition.
2. When temporary facilities and utilities are no longer required, the Contractor
should notify the Owner of intent and schedule for their removal. The Contractor
shall remove temporary facilities and utilities from the site and leave the site in
such a condition as specified on the Drawings or as directed by the Owner.
L. Environmental Controls:
1. Excess excavated material not required or suitable for backfill, and other waste
material, shall be disposed of in licensed landfills or at other approv ed sites.
2. The Contractor shall maintain areas covered by the Contract and all affected
public properties free from accumulation of waste, debris, and rubbish caused by
construction operations. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean all spilled soil,
gravel, or other foreign material caused by the construction operations from all
streets and roads at the conclusion of each day’s operation.
3. The Contractor shall provide acceptable containers for collection and disposal of
waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Cleaning and disposal shall comply with
local ordinances and pollution control laws. Do not burn or bury rubbish or waste
materials on the project site. Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral
spirits, oil, or chemicals in storm or sanitary drains. Disposal of wastes into
streams or waterways is prohibited.
4. The Contractor shall minimize air pollution likely to occur from construction
operations by wetting down bare soils during windy periods, requiring proper
combustion emission control devices on construction vehicles and equipment,
and by shutdown of motorized equipment not in use. Trash burning will not be
permitted on the construction site.

3.4 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS
A. The Contractor shall provide backfill materials, rebar, cast-in-place concrete, elements of
the control building, chain link fences and gates, landscape, and sprinkler systems,
unless stated otherwise. The Owner will furnish all other materials and equipment for the
project, unless stated otherwise.
B. All Owner-furnished products will be listed on the Bill of Material or on the Drawings. The
Owner will also furnish products not listed on the Bill of Material that may have been
inadvertently left off. If the Owner requests products to be furnished by the Contractor
after award of the Contract, the Contractor will be reimbursed consistent with the
provisions of the General Conditions.
C. Subsequent to the Owner receiving equipment from the equipment manufacturer, the
Owner may perform in-house material acceptance testing prior to transfer to the
Contractor. The Contractor shall verify delivery and testing schedule of Owner-furnished
equipment by contacting the Owner before making final arrangements for, or committing
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR Section 011150
IDAHO POWER STATION BUILDINGS

9
resources to, the relocation, handling, protection, or installation of such products. The
Contractor shall include delivery and testing in the construction sequencing and
scheduling.
D. The Owner will provide necessary shop drawings, product data, installation manuals, and
operation and maintenance manuals for the Contractor’s use.
E. The Owner-furnished products shall be transferred to the Contractor at the Idaho Power
Company Boise Operations Center located at 10790 Franklin Road, Boise, Idaho, unless
noted otherwise. Prior to the transfer of Owner-furnished products to the Contractor, the
Contractor shall inspect the condition of each product and record in writing all products
transferred to the Contractor’s care for signature by the Owner. Damage to or loss of
equipment and materials shall be immediately reported to Owner.
F. If the Contractor determines the Owner-furnished items are damaged, defective, or
missing prior to transfer to the Contractor’s care, the Owner will arrange for repair or
replacement of such items, as required.
G. The Contractor shall familiarize himself wit h the Owner-furnished products to determine
any special equipment requirements or needs and include them in the bid. The
Contractor shall supply all labor, tools, construction equipment, and agents used for
transferring to the Contractor’s care, unloading , transporting, inspecting, storing,
handling, and installing Owner-furnished products.
H. The Contractor shall review shop drawings, product data, samples, and other product
instructions. Installation work shall conform to manufacturer’s recommended procedures,
instructions, and shop drawings. Contractor shall note and communicate with the Owner
any discrepancies or problems anticipated in use of the product.
I. The Contractor is responsible for protecting all Owner-furnished items from damage,
including damage from exposure to the elements. The Contractor shall include in the
insurance for the work sufficient coverage to protect the Owner against all losses to
Owner-furnished items while in the care of the Contractor and until final acceptance of
the work by the Owner. The Contractor shall repair or replace items damaged as a result
of his operations.
J. Use special care in removing, handling, storing, and reinstalling material and equipment
specifically indicated or specified to be reused in the work to assure proper function in the
completed work.
K. The Owner will furnish, if necessary, manufacturer’s representatives for assistance during
installation of specific Owner-furnished equipment.
L. Return all shop drawings, product data, installation manuals, operation and maintenance
manuals, and unused Owner-furnished material to the Owner at the Idaho Power
Company Boise Operations Center located at 10790 Franklin Road, Boise, Idaho.

3.5 SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall direct inquiries to the Owner regarding procedure, purpose, or
extent of any submittal.
B. At any time, the Owner may authorize changes to the procedures and requirements for
submittals, as required to accomplish specific purpose of each submittal.
C. The Contractor shall schedule and make all submissions in accordance with these
specifications and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the work or in the work of
other contractors.
D. The Contractor shall furnish the following submittals:
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR Section 011150
IDAHO POWER STATION BUILDINGS

10
1. Product and other material data as indicated in these construction specifications.
All material shall be sent to the architect for approval.
2. List of subcontractors, see GC-27.1.
3. Construction Schedule.
4. Construction phasing and schedule submittal for temporary shutdowns.
5. Information as required in the individual specification Sections (such as welder
certification, etc.)

3.6 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of
related construction activities to avoid delay.
B. Coordinate each submittal with purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related
activities that require sequential activity.
C. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the Work so
processing will not be delayed by the need to review submittals concurrently for
coordination. The Owner reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring
coordination with other submittals until all related submittals are received.
D. Processing: To avoid installation delays as a result of the time required to process
submittals, the Contractor shall allow 2 weeks for initial submittal review. Allow additional
time if the Owner must delay processing to permit coordination with subsequent
submittals. Allow 2 weeks for reprocessing each submittal. No extension of Contract
Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals to the Owner sufficiently
in advance of the Work to permit processing.
E. Substitutions: Substitute manufacturers shall only be approved with written au thorization
from the architect.

3.7 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Bar-Chart Schedule: The Contractor shall prepare a fully developed, horizontal bar -chart-
type, contractor's construction schedule and submit one week prior to the date
established for "Commencement of Work." The Contractor shall:
1. Provide a separate time bar for each significant construction activity and a
continuous vertical line to identify the first working day of each week. Use the
same breakdown of units of the Work as indicated in the Schedule of Values.
2. Coordinate the Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of
subcontracts, progress reports, payment requests, and other schedules.
3. Indicate completion in advance of the date established for Substantial
Completion. Indicate Substantial Completion on the schedule to allow time for
the Owner's procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.
4. Following Owner response to the initial submittal, make required adjustments
and print and distribute copies to the Owner and post at the job site. When
revisions are made, resubmit to the Owner and post in the same locations.
5. Revise the schedule after each meeting, event, or activity where revisions have
been recognized or made.

Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR Section 011150
IDAHO POWER STATION BUILDINGS

11
3.8 WORK QUALITY & QUALITY INSPECTIONS
A. All work shall be performed by skilled workers experienced in the work involved. All work
on this project shall be performed in accordance with the all applicable codes, drawings,
and specifications.
B. All work shall be erected and installed plumb, level, square, and true, or true to the
indicted angle, unless otherwise specified. All finished work shall be free of defects and
damage. Quality workmanship is of primary importance on this project.
C. Quality inspection services include inspections, tests, and related actions, including
reports performed by Contractor, by independent agencies, and by governing authorities.
These services do not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for compliance with
Contract Document requirements.
D. Specific quality inspection requirements for individual construction activities are specified
in the Sections that specify those activities. The Owner reserves the right to perform
quality inspections that are not listed in the Contract Documents.
E. Specified inspections, tests, and related actions do not limit the Contractor's quality
inspection procedures that facilitate compliance with Contract Document requirements.

3.9 FACILITY STARTUP
A. Contractor Facility Startup Responsibilities:
1. Providing access to the Work.
2. Perform functional tests in the presence of the Owner to demonstrate that the
installed equipment or system meets manufacturer’s installation and adjustment
requirements.
3. Be present during Owner’s performance testing, startup, and commissioning
activities to provide corrective measures.
B. Owner Facility Startup Responsibilities:
1. Witness each functional test.
2. Coordinate outages or other operations, if necessary, to facilitate Owner’s or
Contractor’s tests.
3. Provide testing equipment for system performance testing.
4. Performance testing to demonstrate and confirm that the equipment and/or
system meets the anticipated performance requirements.
5. Project commissioning.

3.10 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
A. Upon completion of construction, the Contractor shall commission the building, after
providing written notice to the Owner or as otherwise instructed by the Owner.
B. Final Cleanup of Facilities:
1. Prior to final inspection by the Owner and after all construction work is essent ially
complete, the Contractor shall thoroughly clean up all facilities.
2. Items to be cleaned include but are not limited to all work staging areas, material
storage areas, structures, access areas, control buildings, and all other sites and
facilities within and incidental to the construction.
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR Section 011150
IDAHO POWER STATION BUILDINGS

12
C. Requirements Preparatory to Final Inspection:
1. The Contractor shall notify the Owner to perform an inspection for the purpose of
determining the state of completion of the project. The Contractor shall notify the
Owner at least seven (7) working days in advance of the time this inspection is to
be performed. From the information gathered from this inspection the Owner will
prepare a punch list of work to be performed, corrected, or completed before the
project will be accepted. All work on the punch list shall be completed prior to the
final inspection.
2. All temporary facilities shall be removed from the site except those required for
the performance of work expected to appear on the punch list.
3. The job site and all applicable appurtenances and improvements shall be
cleaned up.
4. All operating instructions for equipment shall be properly mounted and posted as
specified or required.
5. All guarantees and warranties, along with required maintenance instructions and
manuals, shall be submitted to the Owner.
D. Final Inspection
1. After all requirements preparatory to the final inspection have been completed as
specified above, the Contractor shall notify the Owner to perform the final
inspection. Notice shall be given at least three (3) working days in advance of
the time the final inspection is to be performed.
2. The Contractor shall accompany the Owner on the final inspection tour, along
with any principal subcontractors the Owner may request to be present.
3. If the work has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and
no further corrective measures are required, the Owner may conditionally accept
the project based upon the Contractor’s assurance that the corrective measures
will be completed within the shortest time period.
4. If the work has not been substantially completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents and numerous or substantial corrective measures are still required,
the Owner will not accept the project as complete. Instead, a new punch list will
be prepared based on the information gathered from the final inspection, and the
Contractor shall be required to complete this work and then call for another final
inspection following the procedure outlined above.

3.11 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Quality Assurance:
1. Furnish a qualified and experienced person, whose duty and responsibility shall
be to maintain record drawings.
2. Contractor shall maintain record drawings on a daily basis for review by the
Owner’s representative.
3. Accuracy of Records:
a. Coordinate changes within record drawings, making legible and accurate
entries on each sheet of Drawings and other documents where such
entry is required to show change.
b. The purpose of project record drawings is to document factual
information regarding aspects of work, both concealed and visible, to
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR Section 011150
IDAHO POWER STATION BUILDINGS

13
enable future modifications of work to proceed without lengthy and
expensive site measurement, investigation, and examination.
4. Make entries within 24 hours after receipt of information that a change in work
has occurred. Do not cover or conceal work until required information is
recorded.
5. Failure to properly maintain, update, and submit record documents may result in
a reduction of the Contractor’s payment application, either partial or final.
B. General:
1. The Owner will provide the Contractor with two sets of Drawings to be used to
develop the record drawings. One set of Drawings will be stamped “Construction
Drawing” and the other set of Drawings will be stamped “Station Copy”. Upon
completion of the work, the Contractor shall provide the Owner with marked up
copies of both sets of drawings. These drawings shall accurately show all
changes made during construction.
C. Preservation:
1. Maintain documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order.
2. Make documents available at all times for observation by the Owner.
D. Making Entries on Drawings:
1. Use an erasable colored pencil (not ink or indelible pencil), clearly describing
changes by graphic line and note as required.
2. Any correction made by the Contractor will be made in green pencil to indicate
the change was made in the field rather than by the Owner.
3. Any notes that will assist the Owner to produce accurate as -built drawings shall
be added in orange or lead pencil.
E. Legibly mark to record actual changes made during construction, including, but not
limited to:
1. Depths of various elements of foundation in relation to finished grade data if not
shown or where depth differs from that shown.
2. Horizontal and vertical locations of existing and new facilities and appurtenances,
and underground structures, equipment, or work. Reference to at least two
measurements to permanent surface improvements.
3. Changes made by addendum and field orders, work change directives, change
orders, written amendments and Owner’s written interpretations and
clarifications.
F. The Contractor’s final payment and retainage (if withheld) will not be released until the
Owner receives and approves the marked up record drawings.

END OF SECTION

Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 033000

1
SECTION 033000
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. The Contractor shall construct foundations in accordance with all pertinent Drawings and
Specifications. The Contractor shall provide all anchor bolts and embedded material
specified herein.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement a nd
forming accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, waterstops, joint systems, curing
compounds, dry-shake finish materials, and others if requested by the Owner.
B. Submit laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix design test when requested
by the Owner.
C. Submit written reports to the Owner of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at
least 7 days prior to start of Work. Do not begin concrete production until the Owner has
reviewed proposed mix designs.
D. The Contractor shall submit batch tickets showing mix design proportioning to the owner.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following codes, specifications, and
standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified:
1. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for
Buildings."
2. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete."
3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) "Manual of Standard Practice."
B. Concrete Testing Service: The Owner may engage the services of a testing agency to
perform material evaluation tests. The Contractor, at the Contractor’s expense, shall
retest materials that do not comply with these Specifications.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FORMS FOR EXPOSED FINISH CONCRETE

A. Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood faced, or other acceptable panel-type materials to
provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces.

2.2 FORM RELEASE AGENT

A. Provide commercial formulation form release agent with a maximum of 350 g/L volatile
organic compounds (VOCs) that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete
surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 033000

2

2.3 FORM TIES

A. Factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or snap-off metal form ties designed to
prevent form deflection and to prevent spalling of concrete upon removal. Provide units
that will leave no metal closer than 1-1/2 inches to the plane of the exposed concrete
surface. Provide ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1 inch in
diameter in the concrete surface.

2.4 REINFORCING BARS

A. Deformed bars of sizes showed conforming to ASTM A 615 Grade 60.
B. Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, plain, cold-drawn steel.
C. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, welded steel wire fabric.
D. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 497.
E. Supports for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing,
supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire f abric in place. Use wire bar-
type supports complying with CRSI specifications.
1. For slabs-on-grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where
base material will not support chair legs.
2. For exposed-to-view concrete surfaces where legs of supports are in contact with
forms, provide supports with legs that are protected by plastic (CRSI, Class 1) or
stainless steel (CRSI, Class 2).

2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type II. Use one brand of cement throughout project
unless otherwise acceptable to The Owner.
B. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Type F.
C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33 and as specified. Provide aggregates from a
single source for exposed concrete. For exposed exterior surfaces, do not use fine or
coarse aggregates that contain substances that cause spalling.
D. Water: Potable containing less than 500 ppm of chlorides.
E. Admixtures:
1. Provide concrete admixtures that contain no more than 0.1 percent chloride ions.
All admixtures used in the concrete mix shall be from the same manufacturer.
2. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be
compatible with other required admixtures.
3. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.
4. High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F or Type G.
5. Water-Reducing, Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E.
6. Water-Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.
F. Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: Liquid-type membrane forming curing
compound complying with ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A. Moisture loss not more than
0.55 kg/sq. m when applied at 200 sq. ft./gal.
G. Water-Based Acrylic Membrane Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class B.
H. Evaporation Control: Monomolecular film-forming compound applied to exposed concrete
slab surfaces for temporary protection from rapid moisture loss.
I. Bonding Agent: Polyvinyl acetate or acrylic base.

2.6 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGNING MIXES
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 033000

3

A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory trial
batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301. For the trial batch method,
use an independent testing agency acceptable to the Owner for preparing and reporting
proposed mix designs.
B. Provide 4,000 psi, 28-day compressive strength for all concrete.
C. Proportions:
1. Water-cement ratio 0.45 maximum by weight for all 3,000-psi concrete.
D. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at
point of placement having total air content of 5.0 percent with a tolerance of plus or minus
1 percent.
E. Minimum cement content shall be 540 pounds per cubic yard of 1-inch maximum size
aggregate. Increase cement content or combined cement plus fly ash content, as
required to meet strength requirements.
F. Slump range: 3 to 4 1/2 inches.
G. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by the
Contractor when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or
other circumstances warrant, as accepted by the Owner. Laboratory test data for revised
mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by the Owner before
using in work.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 FORMS

A. General: Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to support vertical,
lateral, static, and dynamic loads that might be applied until concrete structure can
support such loads. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of
correct size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position. Maintain formwork construction
tolerances and surface irregularities complying with the following ACI 347 limits:
1. Provide Class A smooth formed finish for concrete surfaces exposed to view.
Tolerance is 1/8-inch for gradual and abrupt irregularities.
2. Provide Class C rough-formed finish for other formed concrete surfaces.
Tolerance is 1/2-inch for gradual and abrupt irregularities.
3. Bottom of forms shall extend a minimum of six inches below final grade.
4. Maximum deviation of a single foundation from a location shown on the drawings
shall not exceed ½- inch.
5. Maximum deviation of distance center-to-center of piers for two-legged structures
shall not exceed ½- inch.
B. Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shown and to obtain accurate
alignment, location, grades, level, and plumb work in finished structures.
C. Provide 3/4-inch chamfer on exposed corners and edges as indicated, using wood,
metal, PVC, or rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight
edge joints.

3.2 PLACING REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for
"Placing Reinforcing Bars," for details and methods of reinforcement placement and
supports and as specified.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials that
reduce or destroy bond with concrete.
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 033000

4
C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate
and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as
approved by the Owner.
D. Place reinforcement to maintain minimum coverage as indicated for concrete protection.
Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position
during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete,
not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
E. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least
one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent
continuous laps in either direction.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS

A. Construction Joints: Construction joints shall not be permitted unless shown on the
Drawings or specifically approved by the Owner.
B. Where a construction joint is to be made, the surface of the concrete shall be cleaned
and latent and standing water removed.
C. Construction joints not indicated on the design drawings shall be so made and located as
not to impair the strength of the structure.
D. Provide keys in joints as indicated, including dowels across joints when indicated.

3.4 ANCHOR BOLTS AND EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Concrete shall not be placed until after the Owner has inspected the anchor bolts and
embedded items.
B. Anchor bolts shall be accurately positioned. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to
accurately set the bolts initially and to maintain the required position until after the
concrete has set.
C. Prior to setting, the threads on the upper end of each anchor bolt shall be protected to
prevent the adherence of concrete. When installed, the bolts shall be clean and the
portions to be embedded in concrete shall be free of oil or othe r detrimental substances
that would adversely affect the bond between the bolts and concrete. Anchor bolts shall
be in position and at the specified projection height prior to the pouring of concrete.
D. The Contractor shall remove concrete adhering to the portions of anchor bolts extending
above finished concrete grade during concrete finish and cleanup. Remove concrete at
the finish grade line that would prevent base plates on the legs of station structures from
seating fully on the finished concrete elevation.
E. Any foundation that does not satisfy the specified requirements for line and grade will be
rejected. No payment will be made for any such defective work until the Contractor has
completed, to the satisfaction of the Owner, the necessary corrective work. The
Contractor shall bear the full expense of all such corrective work.
F. Forms for Slabs: Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to
achieve required elevations and contours in finished surfaces. Provide and sec ure units
to support screed strips using strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspection by the Owner is to be performed. The
inspection is to occur after completion of the formwork, installation of reinforcing steel,
and items to be embedded or cast in place. Notify other trades whose work is connected
to, combined with, or influenced by concrete work. Allow reasonable time for other trades
to complete work that must be completed before concrete is placed.
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 033000

5
B. General: Comply with ACI 304, "Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing
Concrete," and as specified.
C. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be
placed on concrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause seams or planes of weakness.
If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified.
Deposit concrete to avoid segregation at its final location.
D. Place concrete in such a manner that no dirt or foreign material becomes mixed with the
concrete.
E. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than
24 inches and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement
consists of several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid
cold joints.
1. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented
by hand spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for
consolidation of concrete complying with ACI 309.
2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw
vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible
effectiveness of the machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer
and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower
layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit duration of
vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of
reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mix to segregate.
F. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous
operation, within limits of construction joints, until completing placement of a panel or
section.
1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so that concrete is thoroughly
worked around reinforcement, other embedded items and into corners.
2. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull
floats to smooth surface free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces
prior to beginning finishing operations.
3. Maintain reinforcing in proper position on chairs during concrete placement.

3.6 COLD-WEATHER PLACEMENT

A. General:
1. Comply with provisions of ACI 306 and as follows. Protect concrete work from
physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing
actions, or low temperatures.
2. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 degrees F,
uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture
temperature of not less than 50 degrees F and not more than 80 degrees F at
point of placement.
3. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place
concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
4. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents
or chemical accelerators unless otherwise accepted in mix designs.
5. Curing and Protection:
a. The newly placed concrete shall be so housed and heated that the air
surrounding the concrete can be maintained at a temperature above
50°F for five (5) days or 70°F for three (3) days after placing. Insulation
of the forms may be used for cold weather protection provided the
methods used and the portion of the structure to be so protected are
approved by the Owner.
b. The maximum temperatures within the enclosure will be limited to 100°F
when the heat is supplied by means of salamanders, stoves, or forced
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 033000

6
hot air. This type of heating will be permitted only when adequate
provisions are taken to protect the concrete surface from dehydration
and calciumation by covering the exposed surfaces with plastic sheets or
a “Crete Cure” such as manufactured by the Jahn Company. At no time
shall heat be concentrated directly on the concrete.
c. When heat is applied, the ambient air temperature shall increase at a
rate not to exceed 40°F per hour until a maximum temperature not to
exceed 100°F is reached. Maximum temperature shall be held
reasonably uniform until the concrete has reached the desired strength.
In discontinuing the heat, the ambient air temperature shall be decreased
at a rate not to exceed 40°F per hour until a temperature has been
reached about 20°F above the temperature of the air to which the
concrete will be immediately exposed. The concrete shall be protected
from temperatures below freezing for six (6) days after casting.
d. The measures set forth above are the minimum required to assure that
the concrete will not be damaged by freezing and cold weather after the
protection is removed.

3.7 HOT-WEATHER PLACEMENT

A. When hot weather conditions exist that would impair quality and strength of concrete,
place concrete complying with ACI 305 and as specified.
1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of
placement to below 90 degrees F. Mixing water may be chilled or chopped ice
may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is
calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete
is the Contractor's option.
2. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that
steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before
embedding in concrete.
3. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete.
Keep subgrade moisture uniform without puddles or dry areas.
4. Use water-reducing retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low
humidity, or other adverse placing conditions, as acceptable to Owner.

3.8 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Class A Smooth-Formed Finish: Provide a smooth-formed finish on formed concrete
surfaces exposed to view. Permitted irregularities are 1/8-inch for gradual and abrupt.
B. Class C Rough-Formed Finish: Provide a rough-formed finish on formed concrete
surfaces not exposed to view. This is the concrete surface having texture imparted by
form-facing material used, with tie holes and defective areas repaired, patched, and fin
and other projections exceeding 1/4 inch in height rubbed down or chipped off. Permitted
irregularities are 1/2-inch for gradual and abrupt.

3.9 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES

A. Trowel Finish: Apply a trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces exposed to view an d slab
surfaces to be covered with flooring. Use a bull float, power -driven trowel, and final hand-
troweling operation, to provide a final surface free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and
appearance, and finish surfaces to tolerances of F(F) 20 (floor flatness) and F(L) 17 (floor
levelness) measured according to ASTM E 1155.
B. Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply a nonslip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps,
and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 033000

7

3.10 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION

A. Do not set structures or equipment on new concrete foundations until the concrete has
cured for (7) days. Protect freshly placed concrete before and during finishing from
premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Apply an evaporation-control
material according to manufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating, but
before power floating and troweling. All exposed concrete shall be properly cured for
seven (7) days by the moist curing method using wetted burlap, Kraft paper or
polyethylene sheets to prevent evaporation or by spray application of a liquid membrane-
forming compound conforming to ASTM Designation C309, Type 1. The membrane shall
be applied according to the manufacturer’s recommendations. Surface defects shall be
filled prior to application of membrane curing compound. All concrete surfaces on which
curing compound have been applied shall be adequately protected for the duration of the
curing period from any cause which would disrupt the continuity of the curing membrane.
No curing compound shall be used on surfaces requiring subsequent bonding.

3.11 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar
immediately after removing forms, when acceptable to Owner. After form removal all
fins, small projections or other irregularities shall be removed by tooling.
B. Metal form ties extending from the face of exposed concrete shall be cut off at least
three-fourths (3/4) inch deep in the concrete immediately after removal of forms. Holes
shall be filled with a cement-sand mortar approximately the same color as the adjoining
concrete. The mortar shall be mixed and placed as dry as possible and finished flush with
the adjoining surface.
C. Honeycombed areas shall be removed and patched with grout. The grout shall consist of
one (1) part Portland Cement, two (2) parts fine sand (passing a No. 16 sieve), and water
sufficient to attain a creamy consistency. The area shall be dampened before grout is
brushed on. Shallow patches shall be filled with stiff mortar and finished. Deep patches
shall be of formed concrete doweled to the hardened concrete as required by the Owner.
D. Repairing Monolithic Slabs Surfaces: Test slab surfaces for smoothness, flatness or
slope where specified and verify surface tolerances. Correct low and high areas as
specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness
by using a template having the required slope.
1. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding after concrete has cured at
least 14 days.
2. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during or immediately after completing
surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching
mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary
underlayment compounds may be used when acceptable to Owner.
3. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1
inch in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Place,
compact, and finish patch material to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure
in same manner as adjacent concrete.

3.12 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. The Owner may employ a testing agency to perform tests and to submit test reports.
Sampling and testing for quality control during concrete placement may include slump, air
content, concrete temperature, and compressive strength tests. The Owner shall
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 033000

8
determine the frequency and number of tests to be performed. Strength level of concrete
will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three consecutive strength test
results equal or exceed specified compressive strength and no individual strength test
result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.
B. Additional Tests: The testing agency will mak e additional tests of in-place concrete when
test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been
attained in the structure, as directed by The Owner. Testing agency may conduct tests to
determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by
other methods as directed. The Contractor shall pay the cost for additional tests for
concrete that has been determined to be unsatisfactory.

END OF SECTION
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

MASONRY MORTAR Section 040620 1
SECTION 040620
MASONRY MORTAR

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Mortar for masonry specified in other Sections.
B. Masonry grout for masonry cores.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 04070 - Masonry Grout.
B. Section 04220 - Concrete Masonry Units.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Concrete Institute (ACI):
1. ACI 530.1-11 - Specification for Masonry Structures.
B. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. ASTM C 91 - Standard Specification for Masonry Cement.
2. ASTM C 143 - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete.
3. ASTM C 144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
4. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
5. ASTM C 207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.
6. ASTM C 260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
7. ASTM C 270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry.
8. ASTM C 404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout.
9. ASTM C 476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry.
10. ASTM C 595 - Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements.
11. ASTM C 618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan
for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete.
12. ASTM C 780 - Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of
Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Masonry.
13. ASTM C 897 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Job-Mixed Portland Cement Based
Plaster.
14. ASTM C 926 - Standard Specification for Application of Portland Cement Based Plaster.
15. ASTM C 979 - Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete.
16. ASTM C 989 - Standard Specification for Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag for Use in
Concrete and Mortars.
17. ASTM C 1019 - Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout.
18. ASTM C 1072 - Standard Test Method for Measurement of Masonry Flexural Bond Strength.
19. ASTM C 1093 - Standard Practice for Accreditation of Testing Agencies for Unit Masonry.
20. ASTM C 1157 - Standard Performance Specification for Hydraulic Cement.
21. ASTM C 1314 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms.
22. ASTM C 1329 - Standard Specification for Mortar Cement.
23. ASTM C 1384 - Standard Specification for Admixtures for Masonry Mortars.
24. ASTM E 329 - Specification for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing
and/or Inspection of Materials used in Construction.
25. ASTM E 514 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration and Leakage Through Masonry.
C. International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council (IMIAC):
1. IMIAC - International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council (IMIAC): Recommended Practices
and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction.
2. IMIAC - International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council (IMIAC): Recommended Practices
and Guide Specifications for Hot Weather Masonry Construction.
D. National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA):
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

MASONRY MORTAR Section 040620 2
1. NCMA TEK Bulletin #8-2A - Removal of Stains from Concrete Masonry.
2. NCMA TEK Bulletin #8-3A - Control and Removal of Efflorescence.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Design and Performance Requirements: Provide mortar mixes that have been selected,
manufactured, mixed and installed to comply with the following:
1. ASTM C 270.
2. ASTM C780.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data.
C. Samples: Submit selection and verification samples of colored mortar.
D. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals:
1. Submit manufacturer's certificates that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
2. Submit test results prepared by a qualified independent testing laboratory.
E. Installer shall warrant that only mortar containing integral water-repellent mortar admixture at the
manufacturer's recommended addition rate has been placed in exterior walls.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm specializing in manufacture of masonry installation materials,
including mortars, with a minimum of 10 years experience.
B. Quality Assurance/Control Testing: Test Reports prepared by a qualified independent labo ratory
indicating compliance with the following performance requirements:
1. Testing Standard: Mortar samples tested in accordance with ASTM C 270.
2. Testing Standard: Mortar samples tested in accordance with ASTM C 780.
C. Pre-Installation Meeting: At least three weeks prior to commencing masonry work conduct a meeting
at the project site to discuss contract requirements and job conditions; require the attendance of
masonry contractor, and installers of related materials; notify Architect in advance of meeting.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Storage and Protection: Cementitious materials shall be stored off the ground, under cover and shall
be kept dry.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Maintain environmental conditions and protect work during and after installation to comply with
referenced standards and manufacturer's printed recommendations.
1. Cold Weather Requirements: In accordance with "Recommended Practices and Guide
Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction" by IMIAC.
2. Hot Weather Requirements: "Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Hot
Weather Masonry Construction" by IMIAC.
B. Do not build or apply mortar products on frozen substrates.
1. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions.
C. Vent temporary heaters to exterior to prevent damage to masonry work from carbon dioxide build-up.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: SPEC MIX®, Inc., ; Email: request info ([e-mail]); Web:
www.specmix.com
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

MASONRY MORTAR Section 040620 3
B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600.
C. Obtain products from a single manufacturer.

2.2 MORTAR

A. Portland Cement, Lime Mortar: SPEC MIX Portland Cement Lime & Sand Masonry Mortar is a dry
pre-blended mortar mix containing Portland cement, hydrated lime and dried masonry sand
formulated for superior bond, water retention and board life.

1. Mortar Type: S.
2. Applicable Standards: ASTM C 91, ASTM C 144, ASTM C 150, ASTM C 207, ASTM C 270,
ASTM C 387, ASTM C 476, ASTM C 595, ASTM C 780, ASTM C 1329, ACI 530.1, IMIAC.

B. Water: Clean and free from deleterious acids, alkalis, and organic matter.
C. Admixtures: Complying with ASTM 1384.
D. Mortar shall have a minimum compressive strength of 1500 psi.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to receive masonry work and conditions under which masonry will be installed.
B. Do not proceed with masonry work until surfaces and conditions comply with requirements indicated
in referenced masonry installation standard and manufacturer's printed instructions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Mixing: As recommended by manufacturer.
B. Retempering:
1. Retemper mortar by adding additional mixing water only to replace water lost due to
evaporation.
2. Do not retemper colored mortars.
3. Discard mortar 2.5 hours after initial mixing.
C. Installation of mortar and grout shall be as specified under each of the following Sections and in
accordance with ACI/ASCE-530.1:
1. Section 04070 - Masonry Grout.
2. Section 04220 - Concrete Masonry Units.
D. Colored Mortar: Consistency of appearance shall be maintained throughout the project.
E. Protection: Cover the top of unfinished masonry work to protect it from the weather and to prevent
accumulation of water in the cores of the masonry units.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Comply with cleaning procedures and recommendations of the manufacturers of both the cleaning
solution and the unit masonry.
1. Utilize the same approved cleaning procedure as used on the sample panel or mock-up.
B. Remove efflorescence from masonry wall exposed in the finished work in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendation and NCMA TEK Bulletin #8-3A.
C. Remove dirt or stains from masonry walls exposed in the finished work in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations and NCMA TEK Bulletin #8-2A/
D. Comply with applicable environmental laws and restrictions.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed work from damage due to subsequent construction activity on the site.

Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

MASONRY MORTAR Section 040620 4

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Tests:
1. Frequency: As determined by the Architect based upon total time for construction of masonry
with not less than two tests per each level of masonry construction, foundation to roof or
floors.
2. Testing Laboratory: Independent of the Owner, Architect and Contractor; the testing
laboratory, in addition to meeting requirements of ASTM E-329, and must be an approved
laboratory competent to perform cement physical testing. All tests must be performed in strict
accordance with the applicable ASTM standard.
3. Distribution of Results of Tests: Within 24 hours of results of tests, copies of the results shall
be submitted to the Architect, Contractor, masonry contractor, and the grout supplier if
applicable.
B. Mortar Testing:
1. Testing per ASTM C 780 when the property specification is specified.
2. When the proportion specification is specified, field quality control shall be performed by
inspection only.
3. For determining hardened mortar properties, prepare three test specimens for each test age
and property. A strength test shall be the average of the strengths of the specimens at the
age specified.
4. Specimens shall be tested at 7 and 28 days.
5. In case of dispute, the mortar proportions must be tested in accordance with the property
specification of ASTM C 270.
C. Grout Testing:
1. Testing per ASTM C 1019.
2. Three test specimens shall constitute one sample. A strength test shall be the average of the
strengths of the specimen tested at the age specified.
3. Specimens shall be tested at 7 and 28 days.
4. The compression strength will be considered satisfactory if the average of three consecutive
tests of the grout is equal to or greater than the specified strength and no individual strength
test falls below the specified strength by more than 500 psi.

END OF SECTION
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

MASONRY GROUT Section 040700 1
SECTION 040700
MASONRY GROUT

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Grout for filling cores in masonry specified in other sections.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 04062 – Masonry Mortar
B. Section 04220 – Concrete Masonry
1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C 143 - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete.
B. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
C. ASTM C 404 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Grout.
D. ASTM C 476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry.
E. ASTM C 595 - Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cement.
F. ASTM C 618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan f or
Use as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete.
G. ASTM C 1019 - Standard Method of Sampling and Testing Grout.
H. ASTM C 1157 - Standard Performance for Hydraulic Cement.
I. NCMA TR-88 - Hot & Cold Weather Masonry Construction Manual.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01115.3.5.
B. [Quikrete ]: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Mixing and preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installation methods.
C. Test Reports:
1. Submit certified test reports showing that the cementitious components of the grout mix
comply with the specified requirements.
2. Submit certified test report showing that the grout complies with the specified requirements.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver grout mix to site in sealed bags. Identify each bag with material name and type.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Quikrete Companies (The), Email: request info ([e-mail]);
Web: www.quikrete.com
B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600.
2.2 GROUT
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

MASONRY GROUT Section 040700 2

A. Grout: Comply with ASTM C 476, with minimum compressive strength of 2,000 psi when tested in
accordance with ASTM C 1019 at slump of 8 to 10 inches as measured by ASTM C 143 .
B. Grout Mix: Factory blended hydraulic cement based product containing aggregate and portland
cement, blended cement, or a mixture of portland cement and fly ash proportioned to produce grout
complying with ASTM C 476 for the specified type of grout; Quikrete packaged Coarse Core Fill
Grout and Fine Core Fill Grout.
1. Portland Cement or Blended Cement: ASTM C 150 Types I, IA, II, IIA, III or IIIA.
2. Portland Cement or Blended Cement: ASTM C 595 Types IS, IS (MS), IS-A, IS-A(MS), IP, or
IP-A.
3. Portland Cement or Blended Cement: ASTM C 1157 Types GU, HE, MS, or HS.
4. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618.
5. Aggregate: ASTM C 404.
6. Coarse Grout: Adjust aggregate proportions to provide evenly graded mix which will be easily
pumped, with coarse aggregate content no greater than maximum specified in the proportion
specifications of ASTM C 476.
C. Water: Clean and free from deleterious acids, alkalies, and organic matter.
2.3 MIXING

A. Mixing Procedure: Add factory pre-blended dry materials to water in mortar mixer and mix for at
least 5 minutes.
B. Re-tempering: Do not re-temper grout; discard grout that cannot be easily pumped or poured.
C. Cold Weather: Follow National Concrete Masonry Association recommendations for cold weather
construction.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION

A. See Section 04220 – Concrete Masonry.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner will arrange for field testing.
B. Contractor shall arrange and pay for field testing by an acceptable testing agency.
C. Field Testing: In accordance with ASTM C 1019.

END OF SECTION

Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

CONCRETE MASONRY Section 042200 1

SECTION 042200
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Standard concrete masonry units.
B. CBIS Korfil Hi-R specialty insulating concrete masonry units.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 04062 - Masonry Mortar.
B. Section 04070 - Masonry Grout.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Concrete Institute (ACI):
1. ACI 530.1-11 - Specification for Masonry Structures.
B. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. ASTM C 33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
2. ASTM C90-11b - Standard Specification for Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units.
3. ASTM C140 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and
Related Units.
4. ASTM C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
5. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
6. ASTM C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.
7. ASTM C 270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry.
8. ASTM C 404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout.
9. ASTM C 476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry.
10. ASTM E 72 - Standard Methods for Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building
Construction.
11. ASTM E 119 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
12. ASTM E 514-74 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration and Leakage Through
Masonry, extended to 72 hours.
C. International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council (IMIAC):
1. IMIAC - International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council (IMIAC): Recommended Practices
and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction.
2. IMIAC - International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council (IMIAC): Recommended Practices
and Guide Specifications for Hot Weather Masonry Construction.
D. National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA):
1. NCMA TEK Bulletin #3-1C – All-Weather Concrete Masonry Construction
2. NCMA TEK Bulletin #8-2A - Removal of Stains from Concrete Masonry.
3. NCMA TEK Bulletin #8-3A - Control and Removal of Efflorescence.
4. NCMA TEK Bulletin #10-1 - Design of Concrete Masonry for Crack Control.
5. NCMA TEK Bulletin #19-2 - Details for Building Dry Concrete Masonry Walls.
6. NCMA TEK Bulletin #19-4 -Flashing Concrete Masonry.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01115.3.5.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data for each type of masonry unit, accessory and other
manufactured products.
C. Compliance: Certifications that each type of product and material complies with specified
requirements.
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

CONCRETE MASONRY Section 042200 2

D. Color Selection: For initial selection submit:
1. Unit masonry samples showing full extent of colors and textures available for each type of
exposed unit masonry required.
E. Samples: For verification purposes submit:
1. Samples for each type of exposed masonry unit specified, including full range of color and
texture to be expected in completed work.
F. Submit warranties in accordance with Section 01700.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver masonry materials to Project in undamaged condition.
B. Store and handle materials to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture , freezing,
contaminants, corrosion or other causes.
C. Store cementitious materials off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location.
D. Store and protect aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained.
E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent deterioration by corrosion and
accumulation of dirt.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Maintain environmental conditions and protect work during and after installation to comply with
referenced standards and manufacturer's printed recommendations.
1. Cold Weather Requirements: In accordance with "Recommended Practices and Guide
Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction" by IMIAC.
2. Hot Weather Requirements: "Recommended Practices and Guide Specificatio ns for Hot
Weather Masonry Construction" by IMIAC.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Basalite Concrete Products, LLC
1. Basalite Boise, 1300 East Franklin Road, Meridian, ID 83642 Tel: [phone].
B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600.
C. Obtain products from a single manufacturer.

2.2 MASONRY UNITS

A. Standard Concrete Masonry Units:
1. Product: Basalite Precision Concrete Masonry Units.
2. Applicable Standards: ASTM C 90-11b, Normal Weight.
3. Face: Smooth uniform texture.
4. Size: As indicated on Drawings.
5. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line.
6. Shapes: Provide special shapes where required for lintels, jambs, corners, sash, control joints,
headers, bonding and other special conditions.

B. CBIS Korfil Hi-R specialty insulating concrete masonry units.

2.3 MASONRY CELL INSULATION

A. Inserts: CBIS/Korfil Inserts.
1. Korfil U-Shaped Inserts: Individually molded U-shaped polystyrene inserts designed to fit
standard two core masonry units of 6, 8, 10, and 12-inch widths for single wythe and cavity
wall construction; density range 0.90 to 1.14 lbs. per cubic foot. Inserted in block prior to
delivery to site.
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

CONCRETE MASONRY Section 042200 3

2. Applicable Standards: ASTM C90-08B, ASTM C 578
3. Thermal Resistance (R) at 75 Degrees F: 3.92.
4. Icon Universal Insulation Inserts: Molded polystyrene inserts designed to compress in core of
all sizes of masonry units; density range 0.90 to 1.14 lbs. per cubic foot. Inserted in block prior
to delivery to site.
5. Applicable Standards: ASTM C90-08B, ASTM C 578.
6. Thermal Resistance (R) at 75 Degrees F: 3.8.
7. Korfil Hi-R Wall System: Molded polystyrene inserts assembled in specially formed concrete
block prior to delivery to site; density 1.3 lbs. per cubic foot.
8. Applicable Standards: ASTM C90-08B, ASTM C 578, Type X.
9. Thermal Resistance (R) at 75 Degrees F: 5.0.

B. Perlite/Vermiculite (Consult local manufacturers/Suppliers

2.4 JOINT REINFORCEMENT, TIES AND ANCHORS

A. Manufacturers:
1. Dur-O-Wal, Inc.
B. General: Comply with requirements indicated below for basic materials, as well as requirements for
each form of joint reinforcement, tie, and anchor for size and other characteristics.
C. Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel Wire: Uncoated wire in accordance with ASTM A 82, with zinc coating
applied after prefabrication into units in accordance with ASTM A 123, 1.5 oz. per sq. ft. (0.46 kg/sq.
m) of wire surface.
D. Joint Reinforcement: Welded-wire units prefabricated with deformed continuous side rods and plain
cross rods into straight lengths of not less than 10 feet (3 m), with prefabricated corner and tee units.
1. Width: Approximately 2 inches (51 mm) less than nominal width of walls and partitions,
providing mortar cover of not less than 5/8 inch (16 mm) on joint faces exposed t o exterior and
1/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere.
2. Wire Size, Side Rods: 9 gauge, 0.15 inches (4 mm).
3. Wire Size, Cross Rods: 9 gauge, 0.15 inches (4 mm).
4. Wire Size, Two-Piece Adjustable: 9 gauge (6 mm) diameter in exterior walls.
5. Single-Wythe Configuration: Truss design, continuous diagonal cross rods spaced not more
than 16 inches (406 mm) on center.
6. Multi-Wythe Configuration, Non-Aligned Bed Joints in Cavity or Composite Masonry Walls:
a. Adjustable wall tie pintle section fitting into eye section of rectangu lar box-type cross
ties spaced not more than 16 inches (406 mm) on center.
b. Truss type units with side rods spaced for embedment within each face shell of back -up
wythe, ties extended to within 1 inch (25 mm) (25 mm) of exterior face of facing wythe.
E. Flexible Anchors, Masonry to Structural Framework: Two-piece anchors permitting vertical or
horizontal differential movement between wall and framework parallel to, but resisting tension and
compression forces perpendicular to, plane of wall.
1. Anchorage to Steel Framework: Manufacturer's standard anchors with crimped 1/4 inch (6
mm) diameter wire anchor section for welding to steel 3/16", triangular-shaped wire tie section
sized to extend within 1 inch (25 mm) (25 mm) of exterior face of facing wythe.
F. Unit Type Masonry Inserts in Concrete: Cast iron or malleable iron inserts of type and size indicated.
G. Dovetail Slots: Dovetail slots with filler strips, of slot size indicated; 22 -gage sheet metal.
H. Anchor Bolts: Steel bolts with hex nuts and flat washers, complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A, hot
dip galvanized complying with ASTM A 153, Class C; sizes and configurations indicated.
I. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed steel, ASTM A 615, Grade 60 for bars No. 3 to No. 18.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Non-Metallic Expansion Joint Strips: Premolded, flexible cellular neoprene rubber filler strips,
complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade RE41E1, capable of compression up to 35 percent; width and
thickness indicated.

Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

CONCRETE MASONRY Section 042200 4

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Installation of concrete masonry units shall be as specified under the following Section and in
accordance with ACI/ASCE-530.1-11:

3.2 CLEANING

A. Comply with applicable environmental laws and restrictions.
B. Comply with cleaning procedures and recommendations of the manufacturers of both the cleaning
solution and the unit masonry.
1. Utilize the same approved cleaning procedure as used on the mock -up.
C. Remove efflorescence from masonry wall exposed in the finished work in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendation and NCMA TEK Bulletin #8-3A.
D. Remove dirt or stains from masonry walls exposed in the finished work in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations and NCMA TEK Bulletin #8-2A.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protection: During installation, cover the top of unfinished masonry work to protect it from the
weather and to prevent accumulation of water in the cores of the masonry units.
B. Protect installed work from damage due to subsequent construction activity on the site.

END OF SECTION
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

ROUGH CARPENTRY Section 061000 1
SECTION 061000
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1. SCOPE OF WORK
A. This work includes the complete furnishing and installation of all rough carpentry as shown on the drawings. B. Related Sections Section 061733 Manufactured Trusses
Section 072500 Weather Barriers
Section 074113 Metal Roof Panels
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers, which
have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver,
handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Lumber Standards and Grade Stamps: DOC PS 20, American Softwood Lumber Standard and
inspection agency grade stamps.
C. Construction Panel Standards: DOC PS 1, U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial
Plywood; APA PRP-108.
D. Wood Framing Standards:
As shown on drawings.
E. Preservative Treatment: AWPA C2 for lumber and AWPA C9 for plywood; waterborne pressure
treatment. Provide for wood in contact with soil, concrete, masonry, and roofing, flashing, damp-
proofing and waterproofing.
F. Fire-Retardant Treatment: AWPA C20 for lumber and AWPA C27 for plywood; noncorrosive type.
Provide at building interior where required by code.

PART 2 MATERIAL

2.1 SHEATHING
A. Each panel shall be identified with the appropriate trademark of the American Plywood Association (APA), and shall meet the requirements of the latest edition of the U. S. Product Standard PS1 or one of the APA's Performance Standards. B. Roof sheathing shall be 3/4" sheathing, APA Rated Structural 1 as shown on the drawings.
2.2 PLYWOOD FASTENERS
A. Plywood edges shall be fastened by 10d common nails at 6" o.c. B. Plywood field shall be fastened by 10d commons nails at 12" o.c .
2.3 NAILERS

A. All wood in contact with concrete shall be construction grade REDWOOD, or treated lumber with dimensions as shown on drawings. All nailers on roof structure shall be select DOUG-Fir.

2.4 PLATES

A. All plate material shall be construction grade redwood or treated lumber, dimensions as shown on drawings.
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

ROUGH CARPENTRY Section 061000 2

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry and that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. B. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. C. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as required for accurat e fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to allow attachment of other construction. D. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber and plywood. E. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. CABO NER-272 for power-driven staples, P-nails, and allied fasteners. 2. Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer. 3. “Recommended Nailing Schedule” of referenced framing standard and with AFPA’s
“National Design Specifications for Wood Construction”. 4. “Table 304.9.1 Nailing Schedule” of the 2006 IBC. 5. “Table 2305.2 Fastening Schedule” of the BOCA National Building Code. 6. “Table 1705.1 Fastening Schedule” of the Standard Building Code. F. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish work. Select fasteners of size the will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; pre-drill as required. G. Use hot-dip galvanized or stainless steel nails where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity. H. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes with wood filler.

END OF SECTION
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES Section 061733 1
SECTION 061733
SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

This work includes the complete furnishing and installation of all metal plate -connected wood trusses as
shown on the drawings, herein specified and necessary to complete the work.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1. Installer qualification: Engage an experienced installer who has completed wood truss installation
similar in material, design, and extent indicated for this project and with a record of successful in-
service performance.
2. Comply with applicable requirements and recommendations of the following publications:
ANSI/TP1 1, “National Design Standard for Metal-Plate Connected Wood Truss Construction,”

TPI HIB “Commentary and Recommendations for Handling Installing & Bracing Metal-Plate
Connected Wood Trusses.”

TPI DSB “Recommended Design Specifications for Temporary Bracing of Metal -Plate
Connected Wood Trusses.”

1.3 SUBMITTALS

1. Submit manufacturer’s drawings showing manufacturers truss layout, and engineered drawings for
individual trusses.

PART 2 MATERIAL

2.1 TRIANGULAR-PITCHED ROOF TRUSSES

1. Fabrication
a. The trusses shall be manufactured in an approved plant for fabrication.

2. Identification
a. Provide lumber with each piece factory marked with grade stamp of inspection agency
evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade,
species, moisture content at time of surfacing and milling.
3. Design

a. The truss shall be sized and detailed to fit the dimensions and loads indicated on the
drawings. All designs shall be in accordance with allowable values and section properties
assigned and approved by the building code.

b. Design Loads: Top Chord 40 lb. Snow load (psf) OR (JURISDITCTION
MIN)
15 lb. Dead load (psf)
Bottom Chord 20 lb. Dead Load (psf)
20 lb. Live Load (plf)

c. Deflection: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of span to total load.
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES Section 061733 2

d. Loading for trusses shall include 20 psf dead load and 20 plf live, bottom chord loading.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Do not install wood trusses until supporting construction is in place and is braced and secured.
Before installing, splice trusses delivered to Project site in more than one piece.
Hoist trusses in place by lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required, exercising care
not to damage truss members of joints by out of plane bending or other causes.
Install and brace trusses according to recommendations of TPI and as indicated.
Install trusses plumb, square, and true in location before permanently fastening and as follows:

Truss Spacing 24” o/c.

Anchor trusses securely at all bearing points using metal framing anchors as shown on the drawings.
Install fasteners through each fastener hole in metal framing anchor according to manufacturer’s
fastening schedules and written instructions.
Install and fasten permanent bracing during truss erection and before construction loads are applied.
Anchor ends of permanent bracing where term inating at walls or beams. Install wood trusses within
tolerances of
ANSI/TPI 1.

Do not cut or remove truss members.

END OF SECTION

Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

PLASTIC PANELING Section 066400 1

SECTION 066400
PLASTIC PANELING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Prefinished FRP (Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic) wall panels for decorative and/or
sanitary environments.

1.2 QUALIFICATIONS

A. All materials unless otherwise indicated are to be Marlite® Brand.

1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. Building should be fully enclosed prior to installation with sufficient heat (70°) and
ventilation consistent with good working conditions for finish work.

1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS

A. Materials are to be factory packaged on strong pallets. All materials are to be stored lying
flat, under cover and protected from the elements. Panels should be allowed to acclimate
to room temperature (70°) for 48 hours prior to installation.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. All products shall be warranted to be free from defects
for a period of 30 days after delivery.

PART 2 MATERIALS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Marlite FRP panels shall be as provided by Marlite, 202 Harger Street, Dover, OH
44622, [phone]

2.2 MATERIALS

A. All Sanitary wall panels shall be:
1. Marlite® Brand FRP.
2. Marlite® Brand Symmetrix with Sani-Coat sealer.
3. C 100-G66 White 6”x6”

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. All trim specified shall be extruded aluminum or extruded rigid PVC. Specifier to select
one (or more) trim profiles(s).
1. Extruded PVC Trim Profiles for .090” thick panels.
a. M 350 Inside Corner
b. M 360 Outside Corner
c. M 365 Division
d. M 370 Edge

2.4 TRIM FINISH
A. Factory finish colors are available to coordinate with Marlite FRP & Symmetrix colorways.
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

PLASTIC PANELING Section 066400 2

1. Extruded PVC to be color-thru.
2. Extruded Aluminum to be Bright Anodized.
3. Outside Corner Guard
a. F 560 Stainless Steel
4. Outside Corner Guard Finish
a. Stainless Steel

B. All PVC Base Molding shall be a Rigid extruded PVC with integral color.

1. Base Profiles for .090” thick panels
a. M 612 FRP Base Molding
b. M 651 Inside Corner
c. M 660 Outside Corner
d. M 620 LH End Cap
e. M 625 RH End Cap
2. Base Finish
a. P 200 Black
b. P 203 Quarry Red

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Open cartons and carefully inspect all panels.
B. Contact Marlite with questions or problems

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Panels must be applied over a smooth, solid, flat, clean subwall such as
drywall or plywood.

3.3 CONDITIONING

A. Panels should be opened and allowed to acclimate for 48 hours prior to installation.
Room temperature should be approximately 70° F.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Install all panels in strict accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
1. All moldings must provide for a minimum 1/8 inch expansion joint to insure
proper installation.
2. C-551 Marlite FRP Adhesive is available in 3 ½ gallon cans. A water -
resistant, non-flammable adhesive, C-551 meets ASTM Specification C557.
3. C-375 Marlite Construction Adhesive is available 3 ½ gallon cans. A strong,
flexible, water-resistant, solvent based adhesive formulated for fast, easy
application, C-375 meets ASTM Specification C557.

3.5 SEALANT

A. Marlite® Brand MS-250 Clear Silicone Sealant
B. Marlite® Brand MS-251 White Silicone Sealant
C. Marlite® Brand Color Match Sealant, Colors available to coordinate with Marlite Artizan
colorways. Specifier to choose.

3.6 MAINTENANCE
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

PLASTIC PANELING Section 066400 3

A. Wipe down using a damp cloth and mild soap solution or cleaner.
Refer to manufacturer's specific cleaning recommendations Do not use abrasive
cleaners.

END OF SECTION

Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

THERMAL INSULATION Section 072100

1
SECTION 072100
THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Thermal insulation in masonry walls, roofs, foundation walls.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 033000 – Cast-In-Place Concrete
B. Section 042200 – Concrete Unit Masonry
C. Section 072500 – Weather Barriers

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C578 – Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation.
B. ASTM C 423 - Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption
Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method; 2000.
C. ASTM C 518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by
Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 1998.
D. ASTM C 612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation;
2000a.
E. ASTM C 665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light
Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 1998.
F. ASTM C 764 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Loose-Fill Thermal Insulation; 1999.
G. ASTM C 1136-12 Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for
Thermal Insulation.
H. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials; 2000a.
I. ASTM E 96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2000.
J. ASTM E 136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at
750 Degrees C; 1999.
K. NAIMA - Recommendations for Installation in Residential and Other Light-Frame
Construction - Fiber Glass Building Insulation; North American Insulation Manufacturers
Association; 1999.
L. NAIMA - Recommendations for Installation in Residential and Other Light-Frame
Construction - Fiber Glass Loose Fill Insulation; North American Insulation Manufacturers
Association; 1997.
M. TAPPI T 803 - Puncture Resistance of Container Board; TAPPI; 1999.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 011150.3.5.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature describing the products to be used, showing
compliance with specified requirements; include installation instructions.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Protect insulation from physical damage and from becoming wet, soiled, or covered with ice
or snow. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage and pr otection
during installation.
B. Label insulation packages to include material name, production date and/or product code.

Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

THERMAL INSULATION Section 072100

2
PART 2 MATERIALS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Per Application.
B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section
011150, paragraph 3.6-E.

2.2 BATT INSULATION

A. Kraft Faced Batt Insulation: Glass fiber thermal insulation complying with ASTM C 665,
Type II, Class C; insulation exclusive of facing non-combustible when tested in accordance
with ASTM E 136; extra wide stapling flanges.
1. R-value as indicated when tested in accordance with ASTM C 518.
2. 12“(305 mm) Thickness: R-value of 38.
3. Size: Maximum sizes available, to avoid jointing to greatest extent possible.
4. Width for Wood Framing Application: Maximum of 1“(25 mm) less than framing center
to center dimension.
5. Vapor Retarder Perm Rating: Maximum 1.0 perms (57 ng/Pa s sq m)) when tested in
accordance with ASTM E 96.
6. VOC Emission: Low VOC emission certified by Green Guard Environmental Institute.
B. Accessory Materials and Fasteners: Provide all materials required for complete and proper
installation of insulation, whether specified or not.
C. Separate Vapor Retarders: As specified in Section 07 2500.

2.3 MASONRY INSULATION

A. Scope
All masonry walls as shown on the drawings.
B. Materials
Masonry wall insulation material shall conform to ASTM C516-08, Specification for
Vermiculite Loose Fill, Insulation.
Zonolite Insulation.
Alternates by approval of Owner and Architect only.
C. Installation
Masonry insulation shall be specially treated, water repellent, free flowing vermiculite, for
insulating masonry walls.

2.3 RIGID INSULATION
A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and minimum compressive
strength indicated below, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75
and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.
1. Type VI, Min.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this section will be installed.
B. Verify that adjacent materials are dry and ready to receive insulation.
C. Verify mechanical and electrical services within walls have been tested and inspected.
D. Notify Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to performanc e of work in this section.
E. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION - BATTS, BLANKETS, AND BOARDS
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

THERMAL INSULATION Section 072100

3

A. Install in accordance with NAIMA "Recommendations for Installation in Residential and
Other Light-Frame Construction - Fiber Glass Building Insulation" and manufacturer's
instructions.
B. Surface Application: Apply insulation directly to surface with appropriate spindle or prong-
type anchors.
1. Fasten anchors to steel surfaces by welding the pin to metal or by using pre-attached
heads and welded through the insulation.
2. Fasten anchors to other substrates with adhesive. Follow manufacturer's
recommendations for surface preparation and adhesive pattern.
3. Impale insulation on anchor and secure with washer.
4. Select pin lengths to ensure tight fit. Protect pin tips where subject to human contact.
5. See manufacturer's diagram for impaling pin pattern.
C. Surface Application: Apply insulation with adhesive. Follow adhesive manufacturer's
recommendations for surface preparation and adhesive pattern.
D. Between Furring Strips, Hat-Channels, and Z-Shaped Furring: Install insulation between
furring members; use fastening system recommended by furring strip manufacturer.
E. Between Metal Studs, Rafters, and Joists: Friction fit insulation between framing members
after cover material has been installed on one side of the cavity.
1. Unfaced Insulation: In applications without a cover material and where framing depth
is larger than insulation thickness, use wire or metal straps to hold insulation in place.
2. Wall Heights over 8 Feet (2440 mm) and Ceilings: Provide supplementary support to
hold insulation in place until finish surface is applied.
F. Between Wood Studs, Rafters, and Joists:
1. Unfaced Insulation: Friction fit insulation between framing members after cover
material has been installed on one side of cavity. In applications without a cover
material, use wire or metal straps to hold insulation in place.
G. Maintain vapor retarder integrity by tightly abutting adjacent insulation.
H. Repair punctures or tears in vapor retarder facing by taping. Follow tape manufacturer's
application recommendations.
I. Do not leave kraft or standard foil facings exposed.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect insulation from damage and from becoming wet before, during and after installation.

END OF SECTION

Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

WEATHER BARRIERS Section 072500

1
SECTION 072500
WEATHER BARRIERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY OF WORK

A. Work under this section includes the installation of self-adhering sheet membrane as a
steep roof underlayment. The contractor shall install vapor barrier in accordance to all
pertinent Drawings, Specifications and Manufacturer’s directions.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 061000 Rough Carpentry
B. Section 074113 Metal Roof Panels

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. All submittals shall be in accordance with section 011150.3.5.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Self-adhesive membrane roofing underlayment shall be
manufactured and marketed by W. R. Grace & Co. Conn., Grace Construction Products,
Cambridge, MA or a firm with a minimum of 25 years of experience in the production and
sales of self-adhered membrane roofing underlayments.

1.5 DELIVER, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. The membrane and accessory products must be handled properly. Read all product
labels and Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for proper handling and disposal. Deliver
all materials in manufacturer’s unopened packages and store all material under cover. Do
not double stack palletized material.

PART 2 MATERIAL

2.1 MANUFACTURERS MATERIAL

A. Roof deck shall be treated with self-adhering membrane of rubberized asphalt bonded to
polyethylene sheeting, Grace Ice & Water Shield, as manufactured by W. R. Grace &
Company.

PART 3 INSTALLATION

3.1 MEMBRANE APPLICATION

A. Grace Ice & Water Shield must be placed directly on a structural deck, never directly
to old roofing materials. Suitable deck materials are plywood, wood composition,
wood plank, metal concrete, or gypsum sheathing. Decks shall have no voids or
unsupported areas. Remove any dust, dirt, loose nails or other protrusions.
B. Apply Grace Ice & Water Shield only in fair weather when air, surface and material
temperatures are 40 deg. F. or above. Surfacing material temperature must also be
at 40 deg F. or higher.
C. For full roof coverage, Grace Ice & Water Shield may be applied from full rolls if
convenient or cut into 10 to 15 foot lengths and reroll. Peel back 1 to 2 feet of release
paper, align the membrane on the lower edge of the roof and place down the first 1 to
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

WEATHER BARRIERS Section 072500

2
2 feet. Pull the release paper under the membrane and continue to peel it from the
membrane. Press or roll the membrane in place to assure full adherence to the deck.
End laps must be at least 6”, side laps must be at least 3 1/2”.

END OF SECTION

Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

METAL ROOF PANELS Section 074113

1
SECTION 074113
METAL ROOF PANELS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. The contractor shall install all metal roofing, soffit and fascia panels, and wall panels in
accordance with all Drawings and Specifications.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 061000 Rough Carpentry
B. Section 079200 Joint Sealants

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Design Requirements:
1. Vertical loads: Roof panel system, including structural support system, to withstand
loads imposed by roof panel system, including structural support system, and lives
loading of the more severe of the following two conditions:
a. 50 pounds per square foot (244-kg/sq. m), uniformly distributed.
b. 200-pound (90 kg) concentrated load, distributed over a 1-foot square (0.092
sq. m) footprint, applied at mid-point of maximum span.
2. Snow loads: Roof panel system, including structural support system, to withstand
snow loads in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction;
imposed snow load is to be added to specified vertical loads when designing roof
panel system.
3. Wind uplift: Roofing panel system, including panels, clips, and fasteners to meet
requirements of UL Class 90 for indicated exposure.
4. Expansion/Contraction: Roof panel system to include provision for structural and
thermal movement without loss of water resistance integrity.
5. Ventilation: Roof ventilator array to deliver minimum of three- (3) air changes per
hour.

B. Performance Requirements:
1. Color change of fluorocarbon paints finish, when tested in accordance with ASTM D
2244: Maximum 5 NBS units.
2. Chalking of fluorocarbon paint finish, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4214:
Minimum rating 8.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 011150.3.5.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer’s descriptive literature for roof panel system, including each
specified component.

C. Shop Drawings:
1. Roof Plans: Dimensioned drawings indicating the following:
a. Layout of roof panels; include fastener locations.
b. Locations of roof ventilators, penetrations through roof.
c. Locations of trim and other sheet metal items.

2. Details: Dimensioned drawings indicating the following:
a. Profile of each type trim and other sheet metal item.
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

METAL ROOF PANELS Section 074113

2
b. Interface of roof panel system with adjacent construction.
c. Illustration of each type fastener.

D. Selection Samples: Two sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of
available colors and finishes.

E. Verification Samples: One sample, minimum size 3 inches square, of each selected color
and finish, representing actual color and finish of products to be installed.

F. Quality Assurance Submittals:
1. Certificates:
a. Contractor's certification that:
1) Manufacturer of roof panel system meets specified qualifications.
2) Installer of roof panel system meets specified qualifications.
b. Manufacturer's certification that installer is approved.

2. Manufacturer's instructions: Printed installation instructions for each roof panel system
component, including product storage requirements.

G. Closeout Submittals: Warranty documents specified in WARRANTY Article of PART 1 of this
section.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Qualifications:
1. Manufacturer: Minimum ten (10) years documented experience producing roof panel
systems similar to that specified in this section, and member of Metal Roofing
Systems Association, Inc.
2. Installer: Minimum five (5) years documented experience installing roof panel
systems similar to that specified in this section, authorized by roof panel system
manufacturer, and having installation personnel whose training and qualifications are
authorized by roof panel system manufacturer.

B. Pre-Installation Meetings:
1. Convene at job site seven (7) calendar days prior to scheduled beginning of
construction activities of this section to review requirements of this section.
2. Require attendance by representatives of the following:
c. Installer of this section.
d. Other entities directly affecting, or affected by, construction activities of this
section.
3. Notify Architect four (4) calendar days in advance of scheduled meeting date.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store products of this section in manufacturer's unopened packaging until installation.

B. Maintain storage area conditions for products of this section in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions until installation.

1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: When construction schedule permits, take field measurements of
areas to receive roof panel system; indicate measurements on submitted shop drawings,
noting discrepancies.

Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

METAL ROOF PANELS Section 074113

3

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty:
1. Contractor shall warrant roof panel system, as installed, to be in accord with the
Contract Documents and free from leaks, faults, and defects in materials and
installation for a period of twenty (20) years.

2. Have warranty countersigned by representative of roofing system manufacturer and
by installer of the work of this section.

B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer’s warranties against defects in products as follows:
1. Failure of roof panel due to rupture, structural failure, or perforation: twenty (20) years.
2. Fluorocarbon paint finish: twenty-five (25) years against blistering, peeling, cracking,
flaking, checking, or chipping; : twenty (20) years against color change in excess of 5
NBS units when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2244, or chalking rating less than
8 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4214.
3. Water leakage: : twenty (20) years, liability limited to contract sum of installed system;
includes structural framing, roof panels, flashings, curbs, interior gutters.

PART 2 MATERIAL

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. MBCI Ultra-dek 24 Roof Panels
2. Berridge Cee-Lock Roof Panels
3. MBCI ‘M’ Panel Wall Panels
4. Berridge Vee-Panel/Vented Vee-Panel Soffit Panels
5. ABC LokSeam (Signature 200) Roof Panels

B. Requests for substitution will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section
011150.3.6.E.

C. Unless otherwise specified for an individual product or material, obtain all products specified
in this section from the same manufacturer.

2.2 COMPONENTS

A. Roof Panels:
1. Material: Galvalume(R) steel sheet aluminum-zinc alloy-coated, conforming to ASTM A
792/ASTM 792M, Structural Quality (SQ), Grade 33 (230), Coating Designation AZ55
(AZ 165), 24 gage minimum sheet thickness.

2. Profile: Factory-formed standing seam pan with flush horizontal and vertical surfaces,
having integral male/female interlocking side seams with continuous factory -applied
non-hardening sealant, for mechanical crimping of seams at installation; site -formed
panels, or panel configurations requiring battens or other supplemental closure devices,
not acceptable.

3. Finishes:
a. Interior face: Factory-applied corrosion-resistant wash coat, 0.20 mil (0.005 mm) dry
film thickness (DFT).
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

METAL ROOF PANELS Section 074113

4
b. Exterior face: Factory-applied fluorocarbon paint coating containing minimum 70%
KYNAR(R) resins by volume, 1.0 mil (0.025 mm) dry film thickness (DFT), color
selected from manufacturer’s standard colors.

1. Roof panel color to be “Polar White” MBCI
2. Panel color to be “Shasta White” Berridge
3. Roof Panel color to be “Snow White” ABC

B. Panel Clips: Type requiring no penetration of roof panels to secure panels to structure; self -
centering to allow 1-inch movement each way 2-inch total movement capability.

C. Roof Ventilators: ‘Ridge’ type.

D. Roof Jacks: EPDM seal with aluminum sealing base ring; for roof openings 12 inches (304
mm) diameter, maximum.

E. Trim and Gutters:
1. Manufacturer's standard trim profiles for indicated project conditions; formed of steel
sheet conforming to ASTM A 570, A 570M, 24 gage minimum sheet thickness, with
factory-applied fluorocarbon paint coating containing minimum 70% KYNAR(R) resins
by volume, 1.0 mil (0.025 mm) dry film thickness (DFT), color selected from
manufacturer's standard colors.

2. Trim includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Fascia.
b. Closures.
c. Panel terminations.
d. Perimeter and termination flashings.
e. Gutters and downspouts.
f. Soffit.

F. Factory-Finished Metal Sheet:
1. Steel sheet conforming to ASTM A 570/A 570M, 24 gage minimum sheet thickness,
with factory-applied fluorocarbon paint coating containing minimum 70% KYNAR(R)
resins by volume, 1.0 mil (0.025 mm) dry film thickness (DFT), color selected from
manufacturer's standard colors.
2. Obtain from roof panel manufacturer for site-forming of indicated sheet metal items
that are not manufacturer's standard trim profiles.

G. Joint Sealants: Specified in manufacturer's instructions for indicated use, supplied by roof
panel manufacturer.

H. Fasteners:
1. For structural framing: Non-corroding fasteners of types specified by roof panel system
manufacturer for indicated substrates.
2. For metal trim and roof penetration devices: Non-corroding die-cast head steel screws,
aluminum-zinc alloy-coated, with weather-sealing washers.

I. Protective Primer: Corrosion-inhibitive primer, which prevents electrolytic action between
adjacent dissimilar metals, type recommended by roof panel manufacturer.

2.3 FABRICATION

Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

METAL ROOF PANELS Section 074113

5
A. Fabricate indicated site-formed metal items from factory-finished metal sheet to roof panel
manufacturer's specifications for factory-formed trim in accordance with Architect-accepted
shop drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions:
1. Existing substrate is ready to receive roof panel system.
2. Existing structure is capable of accepting specified loads.
3. Roof penetrations are completed.
4. Existing rain drainage system is capable of accepting anticipated water volume, if rain
drainage system is to be connected to existing piping.

B. Installer's Examination:
1. Have installer of this section examine conditions under which construction activities of
this section are to be performed, then submit written notification if such conditions are
unacceptable.
2. Transmit two copies of installer's report to Architect within 24 hours of receipt.
3. Beginning construction activities of this section before unacceptable conditions have
been corrected is prohibited.
4. Beginning construction activities of this section indicates installer's acceptance of
conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Remove loose debris from roof surface before beginning construction
activities of this section.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install roof panel system components in accordance with Architect -accepted shop drawings,
manufacturer's instructions, and as follows:
1. Support system: In accordance with maximum tolerances specified in AISI reference.
2. Roof panels: Install in correct alignment with structural framing.
3. Rain drainage components: Install with correct slope for rain drainage.
4. Trim: Install level; lap end joints minimum two (2) inches; apply joint sealant to
concealed joint surfaces.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Remove strippable coating from panels and trim, when provided, and perform dry wipe -down
cleaning of panels as installed.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage by subsequent construction activities.
B. Replace products having damage other than minor finish scratches.
C. Repair minor finish scratches in accordance with panel manufacturer's recommendations;
replace panels which cannot be repaired to Architect's acceptance.

END OF SECTION
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

FIRESTOPPING Section 078413 1

SECTION 078413
FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division-1 Specification Section, apply to work specified in this section.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Firestopping: Material or combination of materials used to retain integrity of fire-rated
construction by maintaining an effective barrier against the spread of flame, smoke, and hot
gases through penetrations in, or construction joints between, fire rated wall and floor
assemblies.

1.3 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK OF THIS SECTION

Only tested firestop systems shall be used in specific locations as follows:

A. Penetrations for the passage of duct, cable, cable tray, conduit, piping, electrical busways
and raceways through fire-rated vertical barriers (walls and partitions), horizontal barriers
(floor/ceiling assemblies), and vertical service shaft walls and partitions.

1.4 RELATED WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS

A. Coordinate work of this section with work of other sections as required to properly execute
the work and as necessary to maintain satisfactory progress of the work of other sections,
including:

1. Section 079200 - Joint Sealers
2. Section 042200 – Concrete Unit Masonry
3. Section 092900 - Gypsum Wallboard
4. Section 260200 – Common Work Results

1.5 REFERENCES

A. Test Requirements: ASTM E 814, "Standard Method of Fire Tests of Through Penetration
Fire Stops"
B. Test Requirements: UL 1479, “Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops”
C. Test Requirements: UL 2079, “Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems”
D. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) of Northbrook, IL publishes tested systems in their "FIRE
RESISTANCE DIRECTORY" that is updated annually.

1. UL Fire Resistance Directory:
a. Firestop Devices (XHJI)
b. Fire Resistance Ratings (BXUV)
c. Through-Penetration Firestop Systems (XHEZ Standard 1479 – Fire Tests
of Penetration Firestops)
d. Fill, Voids, or Cavity Material (XHHW)
e. Forming Materials (XHKU)
f. Joint Systems (XHBN)
g. Perimeter Fire Containment Systems (XHDG)
2. Alternate Systems: “Omega Point Laboratories Directory” (updated annually).

Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

FIRESTOPPING Section 078413 2

E. Test Requirements: ASTM E 1966, “Standard Test Method for Fire Resistive Joint
Systems”
F. Test Requirements: ASTM E 2307 – 15b, “Standard Test Method for Determining Fire
Resistance of Perimeter Fire Barrier Systems Using Intermediate-Scale, Multi-story Test
Apparatus”
G. Inspection Requirements: ASTM E 2174 – 14b, “Standard Practice for On-site Inspection
of Installed Fire Stops”
H. ASTM E 84 – 15b, “Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials”
I. International Firestop Council Guidelines for Evaluating Firestop Systems Engineering
Judgments
J. Building code: IBC 2012
K. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code
L. NFPA 70 - National Electric Code

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. A manufacturer's direct representative (not distributor or agent) to be on-site during initial
installation of firestop systems to train appropriate contractor personnel in proper selection
and installation procedures. This will be done per manufacturer's written recommendations
published in their literature and drawing details.
B. Firestop System installation must meet requirements of ASTM E 814, UL 1479 or UL 2079
tested assemblies that provide a fire rating equal to that of construction being penetrated.
C. Proposed firestop materials and methods shall conform to applicable governing codes
having local jurisdiction.
D. Firestop Systems do not reestablish the structural integrity of load bearing
partitions/assemblies, or support live loads and traffic. Installer shall consult the structural
engineer prior to penetrating any load bearing assembly.
E. For those firestop applications that exist for which no UL tested system is available through
a manufacturer, an engineering judgment derived from similar UL system designs or other
tests will be submitted to local authorities having jurisdiction for their review and approval
prior to installation. Engineering judgment drawings must follow requirements set forth by
the International Firestop Council.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data for each material
including the composition and limitations, documentation of UL firestop systems to be used
and manufacturer's installation instructions to comply with Section 1300.
B. Manufacturer's engineering judgment identification number and drawing details when no
UL system is available for an application. Engineering judgment must include both project
name and contractor’s name who will install firestop system as described in drawing.
C. Submit material safety data sheets provided with product delivered to job-site.

1.8 INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS

A. Engage an experienced Installer who is certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by the
firestopping manufacturer as having been provided the necessary training to install
manufacturer’s products per specified requirements. A supplier’s willingness to sell its
firestopping products to the Contractor or to an Installer engaged by the Contractor does
not in itself confer qualification on the buyer.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials undamaged in manufacturer's clearly labeled, unopened containers,
identified with brand, type, and UL label where applicable.
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

FIRESTOPPING Section 078413 3

B. Coordinate delivery of materials with scheduled installation date to allow minimum storage
time at job-site.
C. Store materials under cover and protect from weather and damage in compliance with
manufacturer's requirements, including temperature restrictions.
D. Comply with recommended procedures, precautions or remedies described in material
safety data sheets as applicable.
E. Do not use damaged or expired materials.

1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Do not use materials that contain flammable solvents.
B. Schedule installation of firestopping after completion of penetrating item installation but
prior to covering or concealing of openings.

C. Verify existing conditions and substrates before starting work. Correct unsatisfactory
conditions before proceeding.
D. Weather conditions: Do not proceed with installation of firestop materials when
temperatures exceed the manufacturer's recommended limitations for installation printed on
product label and product data sheet.
E. During installation, provide masking and drop cloths to prevent firestopping materials from
contaminating any adjacent surfaces.

PART 2 MATERIAL

2.1 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL

A. Provide firestopping composed of components that are compatible with each other, the
substrates forming openings, and the items, if any, penetrating the firestopping under
conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the firestopping manufacturer
based on testing and field experience.
B. Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to install fill material.
Use only components specified by the firestopping manufacturer and approved by the
qualified testing agency for the designated fire-resistance-rated systems.
C. Firestopping Materials are either “cast-in-place” (integral with concrete placement) or “post
installed.” Provide cast-in-place firestop devices prior to concrete placement.

2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with through penetration firestop systems (XHEZ), joint systems
(XHBN), and perimeter firestop systems (XHDG) listed in Volume 2 of the UL Fire
Resistance Directory; provide products of the following manufacturers as identified below:

1. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, Oklahoma
800-879-8000/www.us.hilti.com
2. Provide products from the above acceptable manufacturer; no substitutions will be
accepted.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Use only firestop products that have been UL 1479, ASTM E 814 or UL 2079 tested for
specific fire-rated construction conditions conforming to construction assembly type,
penetrating item type, annular space requirements, and fire-rating involved for each
separate instance.
B. Materials used for large openings and complex penetrations made to accommodate cable
trays and bundles, multiple steel and copper pipes, electrical busways in raceways, the
following products are acceptable:
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

FIRESTOPPING Section 078413 4

1. Hilti CP 637 Firestop Mortar
1. Hilti FS 657 FIRE BLOCK
2. Hilti CP 620 Fire Foam
3. Hilti CP 675T Firestop Board
C. Non curing, re-penetrable materials used for large size/complex penetrations made to
accommodate cable trays and bundles, multiple steel and copper pipes, electrical busways
in raceways, the following products are acceptable:

1. Hilti FS 657 FIRE BLOCK
2. Hilti CP 675T Firestop Board

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be
performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion.

1. Verify penetrations are properly sized and in suitable condition for application of
materials.
2. Surfaces to which firestop materials will be applied shall be free of dirt, grease, oil,
rust, laitance, release agents, water repellents, and any other substances that may
affect proper adhesion.
3. Provide masking and temporary covering to prevent soiling of adjacent surfaces by
firestopping materials.
4. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and humidity
conditions before, during and after installation of firestopping.
3. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate location and proper selection of cast-in-place Firestop Devices with trade
responsible for the work. Ensure device is installed before placement of concrete.
B. Responsible trades to provide adequate spacing of field run pipes to allow for installation of
cast-in-place firestop devices without interferences.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Regulatory Requirements: Install firestop materials in accordance with UL Fire Resistance
Directory or Omega Point Laboratories Directory.
B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation of
through-penetration and construction joint materials.

1. Seal all holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an air and water resistant
seal.
2. Consult with mechanical engineer, project manager, and damper manufacturer
prior to installation of UL firestop systems that might hamper the performance of
fire dampers as it pertains to duct work.
3. Protect materials from damage on surfaces subjected to traffic.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Examine sealed penetration areas to ensure proper installation before concealing or
enclosing areas.
B. Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by applicable code authorities.
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

FIRESTOPPING Section 078413 5

C. Inspection of through-penetration firestopping shall be performed in accordance with ASTM
E 2174, “Standard Practice for On-Site Inspection of Installed Fire Stops” or other
recognized standard.
D. Perform under this section patching and repairing of firestopping caused by cutting or
penetrating of existing firestop systems already installed by other trades.

3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Remove equipment, materials and debris, leaving area in undamaged, clean condition.
B. Clean all surfaces adjacent to sealed holes and joints to be free of excess firestop materials
and soiling as work progresses.

END OF SECTION

Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

JOINT SEALANTS Section 079200

1
SECTION 079200
JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Provide elastomeric joint sealants, joint backer materials , and accessories
needed to ensure a complete and durable weather tight seal at all locations indicated.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 011150.3.5.
B. Product data for each joint sealant product, as noted below:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Shop Drawings or catalog illustrations in sufficient detail to show installation and interface
of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent trades.
4. Manufacturer's current recommended installation procedures which, when reviewed by
Architect, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures
used on the Work.
5. Written documentation of applicator's qualifications, including reference projects of similar
scope and complexity, with current phone contacts of architects and owners for
verification.
6. Certification from sealant manufacturers that their products are suitable for the use
indicated and comply with specification requirements.
7. Report from sealant applicator summarizing results of pre-construction field adhesion
testing.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed
for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Applicator qualifications:
1. Applicator shall have at least three years of experience in installing materials of types
specified and shall have successfully completed at least three projects of similar scope
and complexity.
2. Applicator shall designate a single individual as project foreman who shall be on site at all
times during installation.
C. Single source responsibility for joint sealants:
1. Obtain joint sealants from single manufacturer for each different product required to
ensure compatibility.
2. Manufacturer shall instruct applicator in procedures for intersecting sealants.
D. Perform work in accord with ASTM C-1193 guidelines except where more stringent
requirements are indicated or specified.
E. Pre-construction compatibility and adhesion testing:
1. Submit to joint sealant manufacturer samples of actual materials that will contact or affect
their joint sealants in the Work for compatibility and adhesion testing.
2. This testing will not be required where sealant manufacturer is able to furnish data
acceptable to Architect based on previous testing for adhesion and compatibility to
materials matching those of the Work.
F. Pre-construction field adhesion testing:
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

JOINT SEALANTS Section 079200

2
1. In jobsite field samples prior to general installation, conduct field-tests for adhesion of
joint sealants to actual joint substrates using proposed joint preparation methods
recommended by manufacturer.
2. Conduct tests for each type of sealant and substrate.
3. Locate field-test joints where inconspicuous or as approved by Architect.
a. Include areas typical of those requiring removal of existing sealants and utilize
methods proposed for sealant removal that have been pre-approved by Architect.
4. Test method: Use manufacturer's standard field adhesion test methods and methods
proposed for joint preparation to verify proper priming and joint preparation techniques
required to obtain optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrate.
5. Evaluate and report results of field adhesion testing.
6. Do not use joint preparation methods or sealants that produce less than satisfactory
adhesion to joint substrates during testing.
G. Standard of acceptance:
1. Joints installed during pre-construction field adhesion testing that are accepted by
Architect shall be retained as standard of acceptability and incorporated into Work of that
area during general installation.
2. At least one such standard of minimum five (5) feet in length shall be established for each
type of sealant and substrate.
H. Schedule applications of waterproofing, water repellents and preservative finishes after
sealant installation unless sealant manufacturer approves otherwise in writing. Ensure that
installed sealant is allowed to cure sufficiently prior to subsequent applications.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver the materials to the job site in the manufacturer's unopened containers with all labels
intact and legible at time of use.
B. Store materials in accord with manufacturer's recommendations with proper precautions to
ensure fitness of material when installed.
C. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 011150.

1.5 SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS

A. General:
1. Provide joints properly dimensioned to receive the approved sealant system.
2. Provide joint surfaces that are clean, dry, sound and free of voids, deformations,
protrusions and contaminants which may inhibit application or performance of the joint
sealant.
3. Where expansion joints having preformed joint fillers are scheduled to be sealed, provide
a reservoir to accept the sealant such as by a molded breakaway joint cap or a
removable block out.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Deliver to the Architect signed copies of the following written warranties against adhesive and
cohesive failure of the sealant and against infiltration of water and air through the sealed joint
for a period of 3 years from date of completion.
1. Manufacturer's standard warranty covering sealant materials, which is five (5) years from
the date of substantial completion.
2. Applicator's standard warranty covering workmanship, which is two (2) years from the
date of substantial completion.

Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

JOINT SEALANTS Section 079200

3
PART 2 MATERIAL

2.1 GENERAL

A. Acceptable manufacturer: Tremco Incorporated [phone] Tremco, Inc., Commercial
Sealants and Waterproofing Division, An RPM Company, Beachwood, OH; [phone];
email: [e-mail]; www.tremcosealants.com.
B. Compatibility:
1. Provide joint sealants, joint fillers and accessory joint materials that are compatible with
one another and with joint substrates under project conditions.
2. Install joint sealants, joint fillers and related joint materials that are non-staining to visible
joint surfaces and surrounding substrate surfaces.
C. Provide colors selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard color range.

2.2 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS

A. Sealant Type A:
1. For exterior joints in vertical surfaces and non-traffic horizontal surfaces such as, but not
limited to:
a. Control and expansion joints in cast-in-place concrete.
b. Joints between architectural precast concrete units.
c. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry.
d. Butt joints between metal panels.
e. Joints between marble or granite.
f. Joints between different materials listed above.
g. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors, windows,
storefronts, louvers and similar openings.
h. Control and expansion joints in ceiling and overhead surf aces.
2. Provide single-component or multi-component, low-modulus, non-sag sealant; comply
with ASTM C920, Type S or M, Grade NS, Class 25.
3. Acceptable sealants:
a. Urethanes
1. Single Component
i. Vulkem 921
ii. Dymonic
iii. Tremflex 25 LS
iv. Vulkem 116
v. Vulkem 911
vi. Vulkem 931
2. Multi Component
i. Dymeric 511
ii. Dymeric 240
iii. Vulkem 227
iv. Vulkem 922
b. Silicones
1. Single Component
i. Spectrem 1
ii. Spectrem 2
III. Spectrem 3

B. Sealant Type B:
1. For interior joints in vertical surfaces and non-traffic horizontal surfaces such as, but not
limited to:
a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.
b. Perimeter joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior openings.
c. Joints on precast beams and planks.
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

JOINT SEALANTS Section 079200

4
d. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors,
windows, storefronts, louvers, elevator entrances and similar openings.
e. Trim or finish joints subject to movement.
3. Acceptable sealants:
a. Single Component
i. Dymonic
ii. Vulkem 116
iii. Vulkem 921
iv. Tremflex 25 LS
v. Vulkem 911
vi. Vulkem 931
b. Multi Component
i. Dymeric 511
ii. Vulkem 922
iii. Vulkem 227
c. Silicone
i. Spectrem 1
ii. Spectrem 2
iii. Tremsil 600
iv. Proglaze
v. Spectrem 3
d. Other
i. Tremflex 834
C. Sealant Type C:
1. For exterior and interior joints in horizontal and sloped traffic surfaces such as, but not
limited to:
a. Control, expansion and isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete.
b. Control, expansion and isolation joints in structural precast concrete units.
c. Joints between architectural precast concrete paving units.
d. Tile control and expansion joints.
e. Joints between different materials listed above.
2. Provide single-component or multi-component polyurethane sealant having a Shore A
hardness of not less than 25 or more than 50 and plus-or-minus 25 percent joint
movement capability; comply with ASTM C920, Type S or M, Grade P or NS, Class 25.
3. Acceptable sealants:
a. THC-900/901
b. Vulkem 245
c. Tremflex 834
d. Vulkem 45 SSL
e. Vulkem 227
E. Sealant Type D:
1. For interior joints in vertical and horizontal surfaces requiring pick-resistant security
sealant such as, but not limited to:
a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.
b. Perimeter joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior openings.
c. Perimeter joints between concrete surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows
and elevator entrances.
d. Trim or finish joints subject to minimal movement.
2. Provide a single-component or multi-component, non-sag polyurethane sealant having a
Shore A hardness of 55.
3. Acceptable sealants:
a. Vulkem 617
F. Sealant Type E:
1. For exterior and interior joints in vertical and horizontal surfaces of potable water storage
areas.
2. Provide single-component or multi-component polyurethane sealant certified by National
Sanitation Foundation as conforming to the requirements of NSF Standard 61-Drinking
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

JOINT SEALANTS Section 079200

5
Water System Components-Health Effects; comply with ASTM C920, Type S or M,
Grade P or NS, Class 25; select color from the NSF listing.
3. Acceptable sealants:
a. Single Component
i. Vulkem 45 SSL
ii. Vulkem 921
iii. Dymonic
b. Multi Component
i. Vulkem 245
G. Sealant Type F:
1. For interior joints in vertical and horizontal surfaces where incidental food contact may
occur.
2. Provide single component or multi-component sealant complying United States
Department of Agriculture (USDA) guidelines for incidental food contact with the cured
sealant; comply with ASTM C920, Type S or M, Grade P or NS, Class 25; select color
from listing of those approved.
3. Acceptable Sealants:
a. Polyurethanes
1. Vulkem 116
2. Vulkem 921
3. Dymonic
4. Tremflex 25 LS
5. Vulkem 911
6. Vulkem 931
b. Silicones
1. Proglaze
2. Spectrem 1
3. Tremsil 600
4. Spectrem 2
5. Spectrem 3
I. Sealant Type G:
1. For exterior joints in horizontal concrete surfaces such as airport runways, refueling
aprons, highways and other areas subject to fuel spillage.
2. Provide multi-component, self-leveling, jet-fuel resistant polyurethane sealant meeting
Federal Specification SS-S-200E, Type H.
3. Acceptable sealant:
a. Vulkem 202
J. Sealant Type H:
1. For exterior vertical joints in Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems.
2. Provide a single-component or multi-component sealant; comply with ASTM C920, Type
S or M, Grade NS, Class 25, comply with EIMA 300.01.
3. Acceptable products:
a. Polyurethanes
1. Dymeric 511
2. Dymeric
3. Vulkem 922
b. Silicones
1. Spectrem 1
2. Spectrem 3
K. Sealant Type I:
1. For interior or exterior joints in vertical surfaces between laps in fabrications of sheet
metal.
2. Acceptable products:
a. TremPro JS-773
b. Tremco Butyl Sealant
c. Tremco Acoustical/Curtainwall Sealant
L. Sealant Type J:
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

JOINT SEALANTS Section 079200

6
1. For exterior vertical joints under metal thresholds and saddles or as a bedding sealant for
sheet metal flashing and frames of metal or wood.
2. Acceptable products:
a. Polyurethanes
1. Vulkem 116
2. Dymonic
3. Vulkem 921
4. Tremflex 25 LS
5. Vulkem 931
6. Vulkem 911
b. Silicones
1. Spectrem 2
2. Proglaze
3. Spectrem 3
c. Other
1. JS-773
2. Tremco Butyl Sealant
3. Tremco Acoustical/Curtainwall Sealant

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Joint cleaner: Cleaner as recommended by sealant manufacturer for substrates indicated.
B. Joint primer: As recommended by sealant manufacturer for substrates, conditions and
exposures indicated.
C. Bond breaker: Polyethylene tape or other adhesive faced tape as recommended by sealant
manufacturer to prevent sealant contact where it would be detrimental to sealant performance.
D. Joint backer: ASTM C 1330, Type B, non-absorbent, bi-cellular material with surface skin, or
Type O, open-cell polyurethane, as recommended approved in writing by joint sealant
manufacturer for joint applications indicated.
E. Masking tape: Non-staining, non-absorbent tape product compatible with joint sealants and
adjacent joint surfaces that is suitable for masking.

2.4 OTHER MATERIALS

A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor and approved by the sealant manufacturer as
compatible, subject to review of the Architect.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS

A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the work
of those trades for interface with the work of this Section.
B. Applicator shall examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be
performed.
1. Verify conformance with manufacturer's requirements.
2. Report unsatisfactory conditions in writing to the Architect.
3. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare surfaces to receive sealants in accord with sealant manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations except where more stringent requirements are indicated.
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

JOINT SEALANTS Section 079200

7
B. Thoroughly clean joint surfaces using cleaners approved by sealant manufacturer whether
primers are required or not.
1. Remove all traces of previous sealant and joint backer by mechanical methods, such as
by cutting, grinding and wire brushing, in manner not damaging to surrounding surfaces.
2. Remove paints from joint surfaces except for permanent, protective coatings tested and
approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer.
3. Remove wax, oil, grease, dirt film residues, temporary protective coatings and other
residues by wiping with cleaner recommended for that purpose. Use clean, white, lint-
free cloths and change cloths frequently.
4. Remove dust by blowing clean with oil-free, compressed air.
C. Provide joint backer material uniformly to depth required by sealant manufacturer for proper
joint design using a blunt instrument.
1. Fit securely by compressing backer material 25 percent to 50 percent so no displacement
occurs during tooling.
2. Avoid stretching or twisting joint backer.
D. Provide bond-breaker where indicated or recommended by sealant manufacturer, adhering
strictly to the manufacturers installation requirements.
E. Prime joint substrates where required.
1. Use and apply primer according to sealant manufacturers recommendations.
2. Confine primers to sealant bond surfaces; do not allow spillage or migration onto
adjoining surfaces.
F. Taping:
1. Use masking tape where required to prevent sealant or primer contact with adjoining
surfaces that would be permanently stained or otherwise damaged by such contact or the
cleaning methods required for removal.
2. Apply tape so as not to shift readily and remove tape immediately after tooling without
disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Provide the approved sealant system where shown on the Drawings, and in strict accord ance
with the manufacturer's recommendations as approved by the Architect.
B. Install sealants immediately after joint preparation.
C. Mix and apply multi-component sealants in accordance with manufacturer's printed
instructions.
D. Install sealants to fill joints completely from the back, without voids or entrapped air, using
proven techniques, proper nozzles and sufficient force that result in sealants directly
contacting and fully wetting joint surfaces.
E. Install sealants to uniform cross-sectional shapes with depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
F. Tool sealants in manner that forces sealant against back of joint, ensures firm, full contact at
joint interfaces and leaves a finish that is smooth, uniform and free of ridges, wrinkles, sags,
air pockets and embedded impurities.
1. Dry tooling is preferred; tooling liquids that are non-staining, non-damaging to adjacent
surfaces and approved by sealant manufacturer may be used if necessary when care is
taken to ensure that the liquid does not contact joint surfaces before the sealant.
2. Provide concave tooled joints unless otherwise indicated to provide flush tooling or
recessed tooling.
3. Provide recessed tooled joints where the outer face of substrate is irregular.
G. Remove sealant from adjacent surfaces in accord with sealant and substrate manufacturer
recommendations as work progresses.
H. Protect joint sealants from contact with contaminating substances and from damages. Cut
out, remove and replace contaminated or damaged sealants, immediately, so that they are
without contamination or damage at time of substantial completion.

END OF SECTION

Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

HOLLOW METAL DOORS & FRAMES Section 081113

1
SECTION 081113
HOLLOW METAL DOORS & FRAMES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY OF WORK
Work under this section comprises of furnishing and installing hollow metal frames for doors,
windows and hollow metal doors and panels.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 087100 Door Hardware
B. Section 099113 Painting

1.3 REFERENCES SPECIFIED in this section subject to compliance as directed:

A. UL 10B -93, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
B. ASTM-A366-95A - Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold-Rolled, Commercial Quality.
C. ASTM-A568-95 -Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled
and Cold-Rolled.
D. ASTM-A 569-91A - Specification for Steel, Carbon, (0.15 Maximum Percent), Hot-Rolled Sheet
and Strip Commercial Quality.
E. ASTM-A924-95 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic coated by the Hot-Dip Process.
F. ASTM-A620- Specifications for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Drawing Quality, Special Killed, Cold Rolled
(for embossed panels).
G. ANSI A250.8-1998/SDI100 - Recommended specifications for standard steel doors and frames.
H. SDI-105-92 - Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames.
I. ANSI/SDI A250.6 - 1997 - Hardware on Steel Doors (reinforcement-application).
J. NFPA-80-1995 - Standard for Fire Doors and Windows.
K. NFPA-101-1994 - Life Safety Code.
L. ANSI-A250.4-1994 Test Procedure and acceptance criteria for physical endurance, steel doors
and frames.
M. ANSI-A224.1-1990 Test Procedure and acceptance criteria for prime painted steel surfaces for
steel doors and frames.
N. N.F.P.A. 105-93 Smoke and draft control assemblies.
O. U.L. - 1784-90 Air leakage test of door assemblies.
P. ASTM E283- 91 Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Indicate door and frame elevations and sections, materials, gages and
finishes,fabrication and erection details, locations of finish hardware by dimension and
locations/details of all openings and louvers. Do not proceed with any fabrication until all details
are approved.
B. Certification of Compliance: Submit any information necessary to indicate compliance to these
specifications.
C. Submit samples as necessary.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Certification of label construction: For components exceeding Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
(UL)- furnish inspection certificate stating that component construction conforms to UL rating
requirements only if Architect is aware of such a limitation and has allowed the non -labeled unit.
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

HOLLOW METAL DOORS & FRAMES Section 081113

2
B. Hollow metal supplier shall be a qualified direct distributor of products to be furnished. In addition
the distributor shall have in their regular employment an A.H.C./C.D.C. or person of equivalent
experience who will be available at reasonable times to consult with the Architect/Contractor
and/or Owner regarding any matters affecting the total door and frame openings.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard wrapped, crated, palletized or otherwise protected during
transit and site storage.
B. Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage.Minor damages may be repaired provided
refinished items are equal in all respects to new work and accepted by the Architect. Otherwise
remove and replace damaged items.
C. Store doors and frames at the building site in a dry, secure place.
1. Place units on minimum 4 inches (101.6 mm) high wood blocking.
2. Avoid use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters which could create a humidity chamber.
3. If cardboard wrapper/packaging on door becomes wet, remove packaging materials
immediately.
4. Provide 1/4 inch (6.3 mm) spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation.

1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Deliver all doors and frames to the jobsite in a timely manner so not to delay progress of other
trades.
B. Issue purchase orders to frame, door and other hardware suppliers early so not to interfere with
normal quoted delivery of materials.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Hollow metal doors and frames shall be supplied with a one (1) year warranty against defects in
materials and workmanship.
B. Warranty to commence with substantial completion of the job.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS (providing the products supplied comply with this
specification)

A. Republic Builders Products Corp., McKenzie, Tn.
B. CURRIES Co., Mason City, Iowa

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Steel requirements, all doors and frames to be manufactured of commercial quality, stretcher
leveled flatness, cold rolled steel per ASTM-A-366 and A-568 general requirements or
galvanealed to 'A-60' minimum coating weight standard per ASTM-A924. Internal reinforcing may
be manufactured of hot rolled pickled and oiled steel per ASTM-A569.
B. Coating Materials, primer, Use manufacturer's standard rust inhibiting primer conforming to AN SI-
A-224.1-1990.
C Core Materials

1. Nonlabeled doors or labeled doors, polystyrene foam core, self-extinguishing, non-toxic in
case of fire.
2. Fire labeled doors with temperature rise rating to have a mineral fiber core sufficient to
obtain a 250 degree F (121 C) temperature rating.

Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

HOLLOW METAL DOORS & FRAMES Section 081113

3
2.3 FABRICATION

A. General

1. Fabricate all doors and frames in accordance with ANSI A250.8-1998/SDI-100 except
where more stringent requirements are specified.
2. Prepare doors to receive finish hardware per approved schedule. Include all thru-bolting
holes as required per hardware template. not include unnecessary cutouts in door faces not
required hardware template.
3. Supply only doors and frames manufactured by one (1) of the acceptable manufacturers
listed in this specification.

B. Doors

1. Classification: SDI Level 2 - Model 1
2. Face sheets: Minimum of 18 ga.(1.2 mm) cold rolled steel for interior and exterior.
3. Seams allowed only on edges of doors.
4. Vertical lock edges beveled 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) in 2 inches (50.8 mm).
5. Top and bottom channels
a. Not less than 16 ga.(1.4) - flush or inverted
b. Welded to the face sheets.
c. Close tops of outswinging exterior doors flush by the addition of steel top channel
fillers necessary.
6. Astragals: Where called for to be flat security type or 'Z' as called for in drawings or
specifications.
7. All doors conform to ANSI-A250.4-1994 Level 'A' criteria and be tested to 1,000,000
operating cycles and 23 twist tests. Certification of Level 'A' doors is to be submitted with
approval drawings by the distributor. Do not bid or supply any type or gage of door not
having been tested and passed this criteria.

C. Frames

1. Construction: 16 ga.(1.4 mm) cold rolled steel at interior locations, 14 gage (1.9 mm)
galvanized at exterior locations.
2. Provide temporary shipping bars to help protect from damage during transit and handling.
3. Temporary shipping bars to be removed before setting frames.
4. All welds on frames, transoms and sidelites to be flush with neatly mitred or butted
material cuts.

D. Frame Anchors

1. Wall anchors for frame attachment to masonry construction:
Masonry anchors, adjustable, flat, corrugated or perforated 'T' shaped anchors with leg
not less than 2 inches(50 mm) wide by 10 inches (254 mm) long or masonry "wire" type
not less than 3/16 inch (5 mm) diameter.
2. All frame jamb anchors to be provided; one each jamb per 30
inches (762 mm)of frame height or fraction thereof.
3. Floor anchors: Angle clip type
a. 16 ga.(1.4 mm) minimum.
b. To receive 2 fasteners per jamb.
c. Welded to the bottom of each jamb.
4. In place masonry or concrete:
a. 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) countersunk flat head stove bolt and expansion shields.
b. Weld pipe spacers or other type of spacers per manufacturer's standard
design in back of frame soffit to protect frame profile during tightening of bolts
and anchors.
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

HOLLOW METAL DOORS & FRAMES Section 081113

4
5. Head struts: For frames not anchored to masonry or concrete construction provide ceiling
struts spot welded to jambs each side extending to building structure where called for on
schedule.

E. Preparation For Hardware

1. Reinforcement: Reinforce components for hardware installation in accordance with ANSI
A250.6-1997.
a. All lock and closer reinforcements to be "box" or "channel" type.
b. All hinge and lock reinforcing on doors is to be channel type, continuous from top
to bottom of door, welded to face sheets.
2. Punch single leaf frames to receive three (3) silencers. Double leaf frames to receive
one silencer per leaf at head.
3. Factory prepared hardware locations to be in accordance with "Recommended locations
for Builders' Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames", as adopted by The Steel
Door Institute.
4. Supply welded in mortar guards at all hardware cutouts in frames built into masonry or
grouted in full.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 SETTING FRAMES

A Set all frames in accordance with SDI 105-92.
B. Set welded frames in position prior to beginning partition work. Brace frames until permanent
anchors are set.
C. Set anchors for frames as work progresses. Install anchors at hinge and strike levels.
D. Use temporary setting spreaders at all locations. Use intermediate spreaders to assure proper
door clearances and header braces for grouted frames.
E. Install frames in prepared openings in concrete and masonry walls using countersunk bolts and
expansion sheilds.
F. Install all fire rated frames in accordance with requirements of NFPA-80-1995.

3. 2 DOOR INSTALLATION

A. Install hollow metal doors in frames using hardware specified in Section 08710 Finish Hardware.
B. Clearances at edge of doors
1. Between door and frame at head and jambs: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).
2. At meeting edges pairs of doors and at mullions: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).
3. At transom panels, without transom bars: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).
4. At sills without thresholds: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm) maximum above finish floor.
5. At sills with thresholds: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) above threshold.

3. 3 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING

A. Remove dirt and excess sealants, mortar or glazing compounds from exposed surfaces.
B. Adjust moving parts for smooth operation. Use shims if necessary to allow for proper closing.
C. Fill all dents, holes, etc. with metal filler and sand smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces -
Reprime/paint to match finish.

END OF SECTION
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

DOOR HARDWARE Section 087100 1

SECTION 087100
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Finish hardware for doors as specified and as listed in "Hardware Groups" and required by actual
conditions.
2. Include screws, special screws, bolts, special bolts, expansion shields, and other devices for proper
application of hardware.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 081113 - Hollow Metal Doors & Frames
1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide items, articles, materials, operations and methods listed, mentioned or scheduled herein or on
drawings, in quantities as required to complete project. Provide hardware that functions properly. Prior
to furnishing hardware, advise Architect of items that will not operate properly, are improper for
conditions, or will not remain permanently anchored.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Hardware Schedule: Submit 5 copies of hardware schedule in vertical format as illustrated by the
Sequence of Format for the Hardware Schedule as published by the Door and Hardware Institute.
Schedules, which do not comply, will be returned for correction before checking. Hardware schedule
shall clearly indicate architect's hardware group and manufacturer of each item proposed. The
schedule shall be reviewed prior to submission by a certified Architect ural Hardware Consultant, who
shall affix his or her seal attesting to the completeness and correctness of the schedule.
1. Provide 2 copies of illustrations from manufacturer’s catalogs and data in brochure form.
2. Check specified hardware for suitability and adaptability to details and surrounding conditions.
Indicate unsuitable or incompatible items and proposed substitutions in hardware schedule.
3. Provide listing of manufacturer's template numbers for each item of hardware in hardware
schedule.
4. Furnish other Contractors and Subcontractors concerned with copies of final approved hardware
schedule. Submit necessary templates and schedules as soon as possible to hollow metal, wood
door, and aluminum door fabricators in accordance with schedule they require for fa brication.
5. Samples: Lever design or finish sample: Provide 3 samples if requested by architect.

B. Installation Instructions: Provide manufacturer's written installation and adjustment instructions for finish
hardware. Send installation instructions to site with hardware.
C. Templates: Submit templates and "reviewed Hardware Schedule" to door and frame supplier and
others as applicable to enable proper and accurate sizing and locations of cutouts and reinforcing.
D. Contract Closeout Submittals: Comply with Section 011150, paragraph3.10 including specific
requirements indicated.
1. Operating and maintenance manuals: Submit 3 sets containing the following:
a. Complete information in care, maintenance, and adjustment, and data on repair and
replacement parts, and information on preservation of finishes.
b. Catalog pages for each product installed.
c. Name, address, and phone number of local representative for each manufacturer.
d. Parts list for each product.
2. Copy of final approved hardware schedule, edited to reflect "As installed".
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

DOOR HARDWARE Section 087100 2

a. One complete set of special tools required for maintenance and adjustment of hardware,
including changing of cylinders.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Obtain each type of hardware (ie. latch and locksets, hinges, closers) from single
manufacturer, although several may be indicated as offering products complying with requirements.
B. Supplier: Recognized architectural finish hardware supplier, with warehousing facilities, who has been
providing hardware for period of not less than 3 years. The supplier shall be, or employ, a certified
Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC), who is registered in the continuing education program as
administered by the Door and Hardware Institute. The hardware schedule shall be prepared and
signed by a certified AHC.
C. Installer: Firm with 3 years experience in installation of similar hardware to that required for this project,
including specific requirements indicated.
D. Regulatory Label Requirements: Provide nationally recognized testing agency label or stamp on
hardware for labeled openings. Where UL requirements conflict with drawings or specifications,
hardware conforming to UL requirements shall be provided. Conflicts and proposed substitutions shall
be clearly indicated in hardware schedule.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver hardware to jobsite in manufacturer's original packaging, marked to correspond with approved
hardware schedule. Do not deliver hardware until suitable locked storage space is available. Check
hardware against reviewed hardware schedule. Store hardware to protect against loss, theft or
damage.
B. Deliver hardware requiring installation during fabrication of hollow metal doors prepaid to manufacturer.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Guarantee workmanship and material provided against defective manufacture. Repa ir or replace
defective workmanship and material appearing within period of one year after Substantial Completion.
B. Provide ten year factory warranty on door closer body against defects in material and workmanship
from date of occupancy of Project.
C. Replace shortages and incorrect items with correct material at no additional cost to Owner.
D. At completion of project, qualified factory representative shall inspect closer installations. After this
inspection, letter shall be sent to Architect reporting on conditi ons, verifying that closers have been
properly installed and adjusted.
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.1 BUTTS AND HINGES
A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Types:
Type McKinney
Type 1 T4A3795
Type 2 TA2714
Type 3 TA2314
Type 4 T4A3786
Type 5 T4A3386

Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

DOOR HARDWARE Section 087100 3

B. Application:
1. Exterior doors Type 3 x NRP
2. Interior doors Type 2
C. Size:

1. 1-3/4 inch Doors 4-1/2 inch by 4-1/2 inch

D. Quantity:
1. 2 - hinges per leaf for openings through 60 inches high.
2. 1 - additional hinge per leaf for each additional 30 inches in height or fraction thereof.
3. 4 - Dutch doors up to 90 inches in height.
E. Drill 5/32 inch hole and use No. 12, 1-1/4 inch steel threaded to the head wood screws for hinges on
wood doors.
2.2 LOCKSETS – MORTISE
A. Acceptable Manufacturer and Series:
Manufacturer Series
BEST 45H 7 AB 16 H 626

B. Provide lock functions specified in Hardware Groups, with following provisions:
1. Cylinders: Manufacturer’s high security removable core 6-pin, meeting the requirements of UL437.
2. Backsets: 2-3/4 inches.
3. Strikes: Provide wrought boxes and strikes with proper lip length to protect trim but not to project
more than 1/8 inch beyond trim, frame or inactive leaf. Where required, provide open back strike
and protected to allow practical and secure operation.
2.3 LOCKSETS – CYLINDRICAL
A. Acceptable Manufacturer and Series:
Manufacturer Series
BEST 7KC 0 L 16 H STK 626

1. Cylinders: Manufacturer’s high security removable core 6-pin, meeting the requirements of UL437.
2. Backsets: 2-3/4 inches.
3. Strikes: Provide wrought boxes and strikes with proper lip length to protect trim but not to project
more than 1/8 inch beyond trim, frame or inactive leaf. Where required, provide open back strike
and protected to allow prac tical and secure operation.
2.4 KEYING
A. Master key: Idaho Power Co. shall supply final key cylinder core for project.
2.5 DOOR CLOSERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Types of Exposed Closers:
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

DOOR HARDWARE Section 087100 4

Sargent Norton Yale
351-H-EN 7500/PR7500 4400/PR4400

B. Provide non-sized closers, adjustable to meet maximum opening force requirements of ADA.
C. Provide drop plates, brackets, or adapters for arms as required to suit details.
D. Mount closers on room side of corridor doors, inside of exterior doors, and stair side of stai rway doors.
E. Provide back-check for closers.
F. Provide hold-open arms where indicated.
G. Provide closers for doors as noted in Hardware Groups and, in addition, provide closers for labeled
doors whether or not specifically noted in group.
H. Provide closers meeting the requirements of UBC 7-2 and UL 10C positive pressure tests.
2.6 AUTOMATIC OPERATORS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

Sargent
2600 Series

B. Provide low energy automatic operators as specified in hardware groups. Provide complete with drop
plates, brackets, or adapters for arms as required to suit details.
C. Operators shall meet the requirements of ANSI/BHMA A156.19, 1997.
D. Provide wall-mounted actuator switches by the same manufacturer as the operator. Actuators shall be
weather-resistant type at exterior applications.
2.7 THRESHOLDS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Pemko, Reese Enterprises, and National Guard Products.

Pemko Reese National Guard
171A S205A 425 Alum

B. Where thresholds are specified in hardware groups, provide 171A thresholds unless detailed otherwise.
1. Refer to drawings for special details. Provide accessories, shims and fasteners.
2. Where thresholds occur at openings with one or more mullions, they shall be cut for the mullions
and extended continuously for the entire opening.
2.8 WEATHERSTRIPPING
A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Product:
Pemko Reese National Guard
Sweeps 315CN 323A 200N
Jambs 303AV

B. Where weather-stripping is specified in hardware groups, provide 303AV unless detailed otherwise.
1. Provide self-tapping fasteners for weather-stripping being applied to hollow metal frames.
C. Where sweeps are specified in hardware groups, provide 315CN unless detailed otherwise.
D. Where rain drips are specified in hardware groups, provide 346C x full frame width, unless detailed
otherwise.
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

DOOR HARDWARE Section 087100 5

2.9 GASKETING
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Pemko, Reese Enterprises, and National Guard Products. Refer to
drawings for special details. Provide accessories, shims and fasteners.

Pemko Reese National Guard
PK55D 797B 2525

B. Where smoke gasket is specified in hardware groups, provide PK55D, unless detailed otherwise.
C. Provide gaskets for 20-minute doors and doors designated for smoke and draft control.
D. Where frame applied intumescent seals are required by the manufacturer, provide gaskets that comply
with UBC 7-2 and UL 10C positive pressure tests.
2.10 FASTENERS
A. Including, but not limited to, wood or machine screws, bolts, bolts, nuts, anchors, etc. of proper type,
material, and finish required for installation of hardware.
B. Use Phillip’s head for exposed screws. Do not use aluminum screws to attach hardware.
C. Provide self-tapping (TEC) screws for attachment of sweeps and stop-applied weather-stripping.
2.11 TYPICAL FINISHES AND MATERIALS
A. Finishes, unless otherwise specified:
1. Butts: Exterior Doors
a. US32D (BHMA 630) on Stainless Steel
2. Butts: Interior Doors
a. US26D (BHMA 626) on Steel
3. Continuous Hinges:
a. US28 (BHMA 628) on Aluminum
4. Flush Bolts:
a. US26D (BHMA 626) on Brass or Bronze
5. Exit Devices:
a. US32D (BHMA 630) on Stainless Steel
6. Locks and Latches:
a. US26D (BHMA 626) on Brass or Bronze
7. Push Plates, Pulls and Push Bars:
a. US32D (BHMA 630) on Stainless Steel
8. Coordinators:
a. USP (BHMA 600) on Steel
9. Kick Plates, Armor Plates, and Edge Guards:
a. US32D (BHMA 630) on Stainless Steel
10. Overhead Stops and Holders:
a. US26D (BHMA 626) on Brass or Bronze
11. Closers: Surface mounted.
a. Sprayed Aluminum Lacquer.
12. Latch Protectors:
a. US32D (BHMA 630) on Stainless Steel
13. Miscellaneous Hardware:
a. US26D (BHMA 626) on Brass or Bronze
PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors, frames, and related items for conditions that would prevent the proper application of
finish hardware. Do not proceed until defects are corrected.
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

DOOR HARDWARE Section 087100 6

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install finish hardware in accordance with reviewed hardware schedule and manufacturer's printed
instructions. Pre-fit hardware before finish is applied, remove and reinstall after finish is completed.
Install hardware so that parts operate smoothly, close tightly and do not rattle.
B. Installation of hardware shall comply with NFPA 80 and NFPA 101 requirements.
C. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment to substra te as
necessary for proper installation and operation.
D. Drill and countersink units which are not factory-prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and
anchors in accordance with industry standards.
E. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-rubber or poly-isobutylene mastic sealant, forming
tight seal between threshold and surface to which set. Securely and permanently anchor thresholds,
using countersunk non-ferrous screws to match color of thresholds (stainless steel screws at aluminum
thresholds).
F. Lead Protection: Lead wrap hardware penetrating lead-lined doors. Levers and roses to be lead lined.
Apply kick and armor plates, with 3M adhesive #1357; as recommended by 3M Co., on lead-lined
doors.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. After installation has been completed, provide services of qualified hardware consultant to check
Project to determine proper application of finish hardware according to schedule. Also check operation
and adjustment of hardware items.
B. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. At final completion, hardware shall be left clean and free from disfigurement. Make final adjustment to
door closers and other items of hardware. Where hardware is found defective repair or replace or
otherwise correct as directed.
B. Adjust door closers to meet opening force requirements of Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards.
C. Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to acceptance or
occupancy of space or area, return to work during week prior to acceptance or occupancy, and make
final check and adjustment of hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as
necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors.
D. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of door hardware and hardware
finishes.
E. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Provide for proper protection of items of hardware until Owner accepts Project as complete.
3.6 HARDWARE GROUPS
A. The following schedule of hardware groups shall be considered a guide only, and the supplier is
cautioned to refer to general conditions, special conditions, and the preamble to this section. It shall be
the hardware supplier's responsibility to furnish all required hardware.
B. Refer to the door schedule for hardware group required at each door opening. Ignore hardware groups
not used on the door schedule.

END OF SECTION

Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

DOOR HARDWARE Section 087100 7

Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING Section 092216 1

SECTION 092216
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawing and general provision of the Contract, including General and Supplementary conditions
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior partitions.
2. Suspension systems for interior ceilings and soffits.
3. Grid suspension systems for gypsum board ceilings.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Studs and Runners: Provide documentation that framing members' code compliance is
verified by independent third party testing to meet the following standards: IBC, ASTM C
645, and AISI S200.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-
load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to th ose tested in
assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.
B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical
to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to
ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
C. Horizontal Deflection: For wall assemblies, limited to 1/240 of the wall height based on
horizontal loading of 5 lbf/sq. ft.
2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one -half of
preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.
B. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING Section 092216 2

1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653 or hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated.
C. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.
1. Steel Studs and Runners:
a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Super
Stud Building Products, Inc.or comparable product by one of the following:
1) Phillips Manufacturing Co.
2) Steel Network, Inc. (The).
3) Telling Industries.
b. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings or 0.0179 inch.
c. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Embossed Steel Studs and Runners:
a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Super
Stud Building Products, Inc. or comparable product by one of the following:

1) ClarkDietrich Building Systems.
2) MarinoWARE.
3) Phillips Manufacturing Co.
4) Steel Network, Inc. (The).
5) Telling Industries.
b. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings or 0.0147 inch.
c. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
D. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide[ one of] the following:
1. Clip System: Clips designed for use in head-of-wall deflection conditions that provide a
positive attachment of studs to runners while allowing 1-1/2-inch minimum vertical
movement.
a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Super
Stud Building Products, Inc. or comparable product by one of the following:
1) ClarkDietrich Building Systems.
2) Fire Trak Corp.
3) Steel Network, Inc. (The).
2. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch deep flanges in
thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner
and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide lateral
bracing.
3. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch deep flanges
in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer runner
sized to friction fit inside runner.
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING Section 092216 3

4. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes
applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in
thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Super
Stud Building Products, Inc. or comparable product by one of the following:
1) Blazeframe Industries.
2) ClarkDietrich Building Systems.
3) MBA Building Supplies.
4) Metal-Lite.
5) Steel Network, Inc. (The).
6) Telling Industries.
E. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with
movement of structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated;
in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Blazeframe Industries.
b. Fire Trak Corp.
c. Metal-Lite.
d. Perfect Wall, Inc.
e. Steel Network, Inc. (The).
F. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Super Stud
Building Products, Inc.; <Insert product name or designation> or comparable product by
one of the following:
a. MRI Steel Framing, LLC.
2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings or 0.0179 inch.
G. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.0538-inch minimum base-metal thickness, with minimum
1/2-inch wide flanges.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Super Stud
Building Products, Inc.; <Insert product name or designation> or comparable product by
one of the following:
a. MRI Steel Framing, LLC.
2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
3. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches thick, galvanized steel.
H. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Super Stud
Building Products, Inc. or comparable product by one of the following:
a. MRI Steel Framing, LLC.
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING Section 092216 4

2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings or 0.0179 inch.
3. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
I. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound
transmission.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Super Stud
Building Products, Inc.; or comparable product by one of the following:
a. MRI Steel Framing, LLC.
2. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.
J. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-
incHhwide flanges.
1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge-type steel sheet with minimum uncoated-
steel thickness of 0.0329 inch.
3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 12 GA. diameter wire.
K. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall attachment
flange of 7/8 inch, minimum uncoated-metal thickness of 0.0179 inch, and depth required to fit
insulation thickness indicated.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Super Stud
Building Products, Inc.; or comparable product by one of the following:
a. MRI Steel Framing, LLC.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal
frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other
conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of
overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building
structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and
that hangers will develop their full strength.
1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in
advance of time needed for coordination and construction.
B. Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials:
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING Section 092216 5

1. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling
runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. Where
offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure
not more than 24 inches o.c.
2. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary
for installation of non-load-bearing steel framing. Do not reduce thickness of fire -resistive
materials below that are required for fire-resistance ratings indicated. Protect adjacent
fire-resistive materials from damage.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.
1. Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 841 that apply to
framing installation.
2. Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 1063
that apply to framing installation.
3. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 844 that
apply to framing installation.
4. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to
framing installation.
B. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, with connections securely
fastened.
C. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim,
grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.
D. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.
E. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing
members. Frame both sides of joints independently.
3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than
spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
1. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches o.c.
B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior
walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.
D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural
supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to
terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts th at penetrate partitions above
ceiling.
1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to
produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished
assemblies.
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING Section 092216 6

2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install
runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb s tuds.
a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.
b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch
clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished
assembly.
c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of
overhead structure.
3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as
required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of
openings to match framing required above door heads.
4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated
assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to
underside of solid structure.
a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire -resistance-
rated assembly indicated.
5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.
6. Curved Partitions:
a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs.
b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along
arcs. On straight lengths of no fewer than two studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6
inches o.c.
E. Direct Furring:
1. Screw to wood framing.
2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment,
or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.
F. Z-Shaped Furring Members:
1. Erect insulation, specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation," vertically and hold in
place with Z-shaped furring members spaced 24 inches o.c.
2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with
concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners
spaced 24 inches o.c.
3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange
extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw -attach short flange of furring
channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more
than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit.
G. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than
1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

END OF SECTION
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

GYPSUM BOARD Section 092900 1
SECTION 092900
GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental
Conditions and Division 1, Specification Sections, apply to this section.
B. Work in other sections
1. Section 092213 – Non-Structural Metal Framing
2. Section 099113 - Painting
C. Material
1. All material, unless otherwise indicated, shall be manufactured by United States
Gypsum Company, and shall be installed in accordance with its current printed
directions.
2. All materials shall be delivered in their original unopened packages and stored in
an enclosed shelter providing protection from damage and exposure to the
elements. Damaged or deteriorated materials shall be removed from the
premises.
3. In cold weather and during gypsum joint finishing, temperatures within the
building shall be maintained within the range of 55 to 70 degrees F. Adequate
ventilation shall be provided to carry off excess moisture.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1. GYPSUM PANELS
A. Lengths as long as practical to minimize number of joints. ‘Sheetrock Brand’ Type X.
B. Thickness: 5/8” or as shown on the drawings.

2.2. FASTENERS
A. Fasteners shall be USG Supertite® type W, 1 1/4” long drywall screws.
2.3. JOINT TREATMENT
A. USG Joint Compound (Taping, Topping, all-purpose).

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1. GYPSUM PANELS
A. Position all ends and edges of all gypsum panels over framing members, except when
joints are at right angles to framing members as in perpendicular application or when end
joints are back blocked.
B. Apply gypsum panels first to the ceiling, then to the walls. Extend ceiling board into
corners and make firm contact with top plate. To minimize end joints, use panels of
maximum practical lengths. Fit ends and edges closely, but not forced together.
C. Attach panels to supports by power driven USG screws. Space fasteners not less than
3/8” from edges and ends of panels and drive as recommended for specified fastening
method. Drive fasteners in field of panels first, working toward ends and edges. Hold
panel in firm contact with framing while driving fasteners. Drive fastener heads slightly
below surface of gypsum panels in a uniform dimple without breaking face paper.
D. Cut end, edges and scribe or make cutouts within field of panels in a workman like
manner.
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

GYPSUM BOARD Section 092900 2
E. Install trim at all internal and external angles formed by the intersection of either panel
surfaces or other surfaces. Apply corner bead to all vertical or horizontal external corners
in accordance with manufacturer’s directions.

3.2. FASTENERS
A. USG Power Driven Screws:
1. Power-drive with an electric screwdriver so screw heads provide a slight
depression below surface of gypsum panels without breaking face paper. Do not
drive screws closer than 3/8” from edges and ends of gypsum panels.

3.3. JOINT TREATMENT
A. Mix joint compound in strict accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Apply taping, embedding or ready mixed Plus-3 compound in a thin uniform layer to all
joints and angles to be reinforced. Immediately apply Sheetrock Joint Tape centered
over joint and seated into compound. Sufficient compound- approx. 1/64” to 1/32”- must
remain under tape to provide proper bound. Follow immediately with a thin skim coat to
embed tape, but not to function as a second coat. Fold and embed tape properly in all
interior angles to provide a true angle. The tape or embedding coat must be thoroughly
dry prior to application of second coat. (Exception: Durabond Joint Compounds need
only have hardened prior to application of next coat.)
C. Apply second coat of joint compound over embedding coat, filling panel taper flush with
surface; cover tape and feather out at least 2” beyond the first coat. On joints with no
taper, cover the tape and feather at least 4” on either side of tape. Allow second coat to
thoroughly dry prior to application of finish coat. (Exception: Durabond Joint Compounds
need only have hardened prior to application of next coat.
D. Spread finish coat evenly and extend at least 2” beyond second coat on all joints and
feather to a smooth uniform finish. Over tapered edges, do not allow finished joint to
protrude beyond plane of surface. Apply a finish coat to cover tape and taping compound
at all tapered angles and provide a true angle. Where necessary, sand lightly between
coats and following the final application of compound.

END OF SECTION

Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

PAINTING Section 099113 1

SECTION 099113
PAINTING
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1. SUMMARY
The contractor shall install all paint in accordance to all pertinent Drawing and Specifications.

1.2. GENERAL A. Use products specified in this section to finish all surfaces exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated, including but not limited to the following: 1. Interior wall and ceiling surfaces. 2. Opening frames and trim. 3. Exterior concrete and concrete masonry. B. Do not paint the following: 1. Items specified or provided with factory finish. 2. Equipment nameplates, fire rating labels, and operating parts of equipment. C. Materials and products having factory-applied primer are not considered factory finished. D. For paint systems, see Schedules at end of Section. E. For colors, see Owner
1.3. RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 092900– Gypsum Board B. Section 042200 – Concrete Unit Masonry
1.4. SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of the General Requirements. B. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer's descriptive literature for coating materials and coating application accessories. C. Selection Samples: 1. For each finish coating specified, two sets of color chips representing manufacturers full range of available colors and finishes. D. Verification Samples: 1. Two samples, minimum size 6 inches (152 mm) square, representing actual color and finish of each finish coating type, color, and finish to be applied. 2. Manufacturer's printed application instructions for each product, including product storage requirements and surface preparation requirements.
1.5. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products of this section in manufacturer's unopened packaging until installation. B. Establish and maintain storage area conditions for products of this section in accordance with manufacturer's instructions until installation. C. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction over project.
PART 2 MATERIAL
2.1. MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Sherwin Williams Paint
B. Unless otherwise specified for an individual product or material, supply all products specified in this section from the same manufacturer.
2.2. MATERIALS A. Paints and Coatings - General: 1. Acceptable products: Indicated in Schedules at the end of this section.
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

PAINTING Section 099113 2

2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide factory-mixed coatings. When required, mix coatings to correct consistency in accordance with manufacturer's instructions before application. Do not dilute or thin coatings, except as instructed. 3. Do not add additives, except as instructed or recommended by coating manufacturer. 4. For opaque finishes, tint each coat, including primer coat an d intermediate coats, one-half shade lighter than succeeding coat, with final finish coat as base color. 5. Supply each coating material in quantity required for this section from a single production run. 6. Colors: (1) Exterior Block Walls – Sherwin Williams SW7661 “Reflection” (a) Satin finish (2) Doors – Sherwin Williams SW7664 “Steely Gray” (a) Semi-gloss finish (3) Interior Block Walls – Sherwin Williams SW7006 “Extra White” (a) Semi-gloss finish B. Coating Application Accessories: Specified in this section or in coating manufacturer's application instructions, including but not limited to thinners, sealers, primers, cleaning agents, etching agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials, and clean -up materials.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1. EXAMINATION A. Immediately prior to coating application, ensure that surfaces to receive coatings are dry. B. Ensure that moisture-retaining substrates to receive coatings have moisture content within tolerances allowed by coating manufacturer, using m oisture measurement techniques recommended by coating manufacturer. C. Immediately prior to coating application, examine surfaces to receive coatings for surface imperfections and for contaminants which could impair performance or appearance of coatings, including but not limited to, loose primer, rust, scale, oil, grease, mildew, algae, or fungus, stains or marks, cracks, indentations, or abrasions. D. Correct the above conditions and other conditions that could impair performance or appearance of coatings in accordance with specified surface preparation procedures before proceeding with coating application.
3.2. PREPARATION A. Do not start work until surfaces to be finished are in proper condition to produce finished surfaces of uniform, satisfactory appearance. B. Stains and Marks: Remove completely, if possible, using materials and methods recommended by coating manufacturer; seal stains and marks which cannot be completely removed with Fuller-O'Brien PRIMX primer, shellac, or other coating acceptable to paint manufacturer any marks or defects that might bleed through paint finishes. C. Remove or protect hardware, electrical plates, mechanical grilles and louvers, lighting fixture trim, and other items not indicated to receive coatings which are adjacent to surfaces to receive coatings. D. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of trisodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow substrate to thoroughly dry. E. Existing painted surfaces: Remove loose and peeling paint. Degloss surface if recommended by manufacturer. Sand smooth. Clean entire surface prior to painting. F. Aluminum Surfaces: Remove surface contamination by steam or high-pressure water. Remove oxidation by acid etching and solvent washing. Apply specified primer as soon as cleaned surfaces are dry. G. Concrete and Masonry Surfaces: Remove dirt, stains, loose mortar, scale, salts, alkalies, and other contaminants. Remove oils and grease with solution of trisodium phosphate; rinse with clean water and allow to dry. Allow concrete and mortar to cure a minimum of 28 days before priming. H. Plaster and Drywall: Plaster should be allowed to cure for at least 28 days before painting. Remove plaster nibs and other protrusions by scraping. Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex patching compound, then sand smooth patches to match adjacent surfaces. I. Wood and Metal Doors: Seal top and bottom edges with specified primer.
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

PAINTING Section 099113 3

J. Uncoated steel and iron surfaces: Remove grease, rust, scale, and dust from steel and iron surfaces in accordance with Solvent Cleaning SSPC-SP1. Where heavy coatings of scale or contaminants are evident, clean in accordance with Hand Tool Cleaning SSPC -SP2 or other approved SSPC-SP method as needed. K. Shop Primed steel surfaces: Remove loose primer and dust. Sand and feather edges to smooth surface. Clean areas with solvent and spot prime bare metal surfaces with Fuller O'Brien BLOX-RUST All-Purpose Metal Primer or a primer recommended by manufacturer.
3.3. APPLICATION A. Apply each coat to uniform coating thickness in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, not exceeding manufacturer's specified maximum spread rate for indicated surface; thins, brush marks, roller marks, orange-peel, or other application imperfections are not permitted. B. Allow manufacturer's specified drying time, and ensure correct coating adhesion, for each coat before applying next coat. C. Remove dust and other foreign materials from substrate immediately prior to applying each coat.
3.4. SCHEDULE - EXTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS
A. Cinder Block, Concrete Block, Lightweight Block:
1. Flat latex premium finish: a. One coat MASONRY FILLER b. One coat EXTERIOR PREMIUM PRIMER. c. Two coats PREMIUM FLAT LATEX.

3.5. SCHEDULE - INTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS
A. Plaster, Poured Concrete, Precast Concrete, Common Brick; Walls and Ceilings:
1. Flat premium latex: a. One coat INTERIOR PREMIUM LATEX PRIMER. b. Two coats INTERIOR PREMIUM FLAT.
B. Concrete Block Walls:
1. Dry areas: a. One coat MASONRY FILLER b. One coat INTERIOR PREMIUM LATEX PRIMER. c. Two coats INTERIOR PREMIUM SATIN.
C. Gypsum Board - Walls and Ceilings:
1. Flat premium latex: a. One coat INTERIOR PREMIUM LATEX PRIMER. b. Two coats INTERIOR PREMIUM SATIN.
D. Door and Frames
1. Two coats Alkyd-Enamel Satin Finish
END OF SECTION

Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS Section 099600 1

SECTION 099600
HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Epoxy Coatings.
B. Concrete Sealer
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 033000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Preparation of concrete wall assemblies to receive
finishes.
1.3 REFERENCS
A. MPI (APL) - Master Painters Institute.
B. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for
Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Coatings are available in a wide range of sheens or glosses, as measured by a gloss meter
from a 60 degree angle from vertical, as a percentage of the amount of light that is reflected. The
following terms are used to describe the gloss of our products.
1. Flat - Less than 5 Percent.
2. Matte - 0 - 10 Percent.
3. Eggshell - 10 - 25 Percent.
4. Satin - 20 - 35 Percent.
5. Semi-Gloss - 35 - 70 Percent.
6. Gloss - 70 - 85 Percent.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 011150.3.5 D.
B. Product Data: Provide a complete list of all products to be used, with the following information
for each:
1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category.
2. Cross-reference to specified paint system(s) that the product is to be used in; include
description of each system.
C. Samples: Submit three paper samples, 5 inches by 7 inches (127mm x 178mm) in size,
illustrating selected colors for each color and system selected with specified coats cascaded.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures.
E. Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of painted and coated
surfaces.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: All primary products specified in this section will be supplied by
a single manufacturer with a minimum of ten (10) years experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: All products listed in this section are to be installed by a single installer
with a minimum of five (5) years demonstrated experience in installing products of the same type and
scope as specified.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS Section 099600 2

B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based
materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Disposal:
1. Never pour leftover coating down any sink or drain. Use up material on the job or seal can
and store safely for future use.
2. Do not incinerate closed containers.
3. For specific disposal or recycle guidelines, contact the local waste management agency or
district. Recycle whenever possible.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits
recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental
conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. At project closeout, provide to the Owner or owner's representative an executed copy of the
Manufacturer's standard form outlining the terms and conditions of and any exclusions to their
Limited Warranty against Manufacturing Defect.
1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. At project closeout, supply the Owner or owner's representative one gallon of each product for
touch-up purposes.
B. At project closeout, provide the color mixture name and code to the Owner or owner's
representative for accurate future color matching.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Benjamin Moore & Co., which is located at: 101 Paragon Dr ;
Montvale, NJ 07645; Toll Free Tel: [phone]; Tel: [phone]; Fax: [phone]; Email:
request info; Web: www.benjaminmoore.com
B. Acceptable Manufacturer: Laticrete, which is located at One Laticrete Park North, Bethany, CT
05624; Toll Free Tel: [phone]; or 203-393-0010. Web: www.laticrete.com
C. Acceptable Manufacturer: Sherwin Williams Macropoxy 646, Fast Cure Epoxy (for epoxy
coatings).
D. Acceptable Manufacturer: Foundation Armor (for concrete block sealer) S2000 or L3000.
E. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section
011150.3.6.
2.2 MATERIALS - GENERAL
A. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content:
1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following:
a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for
Architectural Coatings.
b. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59,
Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water
added at project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Compatibility: Provide materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates
indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufactur er based on
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS Section 099600 3

testing and field experience.
2.3 MIXING AND TINTING
A. Except where specifically noted in this section, all paint shall be ready -mixed and pre-tinted.
Agitate coatings prior to and during application to ensure uniform color, gloss, and consistency.
B. Thinner addition shall not exceed manufacturer's printed recommendations. Do not use
kerosene or other organic solvents to thin water-based coatings.
C. Where coatings are to be sprayed, thin according to manufacturer's current guidelines.
2.4 CONCRETE AND MASONRY SURFACES
A. Primers and Surface Preparation:

1. Material: Super Spec HP Concrete Pretreatment and Etch P85.
2. Material: Super Spec HP 100% Solids Epoxy Floor Coating P40.
3. Material: Sherwin Williams Macropoxy 646 Fast Cure Epoxy, for use on CMU walls.
4. Material: Laticrete L & M Lumiseal Plus, for sealing concrete floor.
5. Coats: Two (2) Coats.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. Ensure that surfaces to receive paint are dry immediately prior to application.
C. Ensure that moisture-retaining substrates to receive paint have moisture content within
tolerances allowed by coating manufacturer. Where exceeding the following values, promptly notify
Architect and obtain direction before beginning work.
1. Concrete and Masonry: 13 percent. Allow new concrete to cure a minimum of 28 days.
2. Concrete Slab-On-Grade: Perform calcium chloride test over 24 hour period or other
acceptable test to manufacturer. Verify acceptable moisture transmission and pH levels.
D. Examine surfaces to receive coatings for surface imperfections and contaminants that could
impair performance or appearance of coatings, including but not limited to, loose primer, rust, scale,
oil, grease, mildew, algae, or fungus, stains or marks, cracks, indentations, or abrasions.
E. Correct conditions that could impair performance or appearance of coatings in accordance
with specified surface preparation procedures before proceeding with coating application.
3.2 PREPARATION - GENERAL
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to coating application.
B. Do not start work until surfaces to be finished are in proper condition to produce finished
surfaces of uniform, satisfactory appearance.
C. Stains and Marks: Remove completely, if possible, using materials and methods
recommended by coating manufacturer; cover stains and marks which cannot be completely
removed with isolating primer or sealer recommended by coating manufacturer to prevent bleed-
through.
D. Remove Mildew, Algae, and Fungus using materials and methods recommended by coating
manufacturer.
E. Remove dust and loose particulate matter from surfaces to receive coatings immediately prior
to coating application.
F. Remove or protect adjacent hardware, electrical equipment plates, mechanical grilles and
louvers, lighting fixture trim, and other items not indicated to receive coatings.
G. Move or protect equipment and fixtures adjacent to surfaces indicated to receive coatings to
allow application of coatings.
H. Protect adjacent surfaces not indicated to receive coatings.
I. Prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for specified coatings and
indicated materials, using only methods and materials recommended by coating manufacturer.
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS Section 099600 4

3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Concrete Floors: Remove contaminants which could impair coating performance or
appearance. Verify moisture transmission and alkaline -acid balance recommended by coating
manufacturer; mechanically abrade surface to achieve 80-100 grit medium-sandpaper texture.
3.4 APPLICATION - GENERAL
A. Apply each coat to uniform coating thickness in accordance with manufacturer's instructions,
not exceeding manufacturer's specified maximum spread rate for indicated surface; thins, brush
marks, roller marks, orange-peel, or other application imperfections are not permitted.
B. Allow manufacturer's specified drying time, and ensure correct coating adhesion, for each
coat before applying next coat.
C. Inspect each coat before applying next coat; touch-up surface imperfections with coating
material, feathering, and sanding if required; touch-up areas to achieve flat, uniform surface without
surface defects visible from 5 feet (1.5 m).
D. Remove dust and other foreign materials from substrate immediately prior to applying each
coat.
E. Where application abuts other materials or other coating color, terminate coating with a clean
sharp termination line without coating overlap.
F. Where color changes occur between adjoining spaces, through framed openings that are of
same color as adjoining surfaces, change color at outside stop corner nearest to face of closed door.
G. Re-prepare and re-coat unsatisfactory finishes; refinish entire area to corners or other natural
terminations.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean excess coating materials, and coating materials deposited on surfaces not indicated to
receive coatings, as construction activities of this section progress; do not allow to dry.
B. Re-install hardware, electrical equipment plates, mechanical grilles and louvers, lighting fixture
trim, and other items that have been removed to protect from contact with coatings.
C. Reconnect equipment adjacent to surfaces indicated to receive coatings.
D. Relocate to original position equipment and fixtures that have been moved to allow application
of coatings.
E. Remove protective materials.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect completed coating applications from damage by subsequent construction activities.
B. Repair to Architect's acceptance coatings damaged by subsequent construction activities.
Where repairs cannot be made to Architect's acceptance, re-apply finish coating to nearest adjacent
change of surface plane, in both horizontal and vertical directions.

Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS Section 099600 5

END OF SECTION
Midpoint Station Control Building
January 2023
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR HVAC WORK Section 230000 1
SECTION 230000
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR HVAC WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Description of system:
1. Special mechanical requirements.
B. Drawings use and interpretation:
1. Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate general arrangement of systems and equipment, except
when specifically dimensioned or detailed.
2. For exact locations of building elements, refer to dimensioned architectural/structural drawings.
3. Field measurements take precedence over dimensioned drawings.
4. Piping and ductwork plans are intended to indicate size, capacity, approximate location, direction
and general relationship of one work phase to another, but not exact detail or arrangement.
5. Field verify locations and arrangement of existing systems and equipment.
C. Installation of systems and equipment:
1. Installation is subject to clarification as indicated in field coordination drawings.
a. Generally, lay out piping requiring gravity drainage first; then lay out large pipe mains, ductwork
and electrical conduit.
b. This procedure is intended to promote orderly installation, but not to establish trade prec edence.
c. Dimensions indicated are limiting dimensions.
d. Do not use equipment exceeding dimensions indicated on detail drawings or arrangements that
reduce required clearances or exceed specified maximum dimensions.
e. In mechanical equipment room corridors and aisle ways, maintain clear head room between
floor and underside of ducts, pipes, and equipment to allow for future replacing of equipment
and major components (e.g., coils, fans, heat exchangers, pumps).
D. Description of systems: Provide materials resulting, upon completion, in functioning systems in
compliance with performance requirements specified, and modifications resulting from reviewed Shop
and Field Coordination Drawings.
E. High altitude operation:
1. Capacity of equipment is indicated at actual operating conditions, unless otherwise noted.
2. Size equipment to perform at 2867 FT elevation.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with following codes:
1. State and city building, plumbing and mechanical codes.
2. American Gas Association.
3. National Electrical Code.
4. National Fire Protection Association.
5. Authorities having jurisdiction.
1.3 PROTECTION
A. Provide covering and shielding for equipment provided to protect from damage.
B. Repair, restore and replace damaged items.
C. Protect nameplates on motors, pumps and similar equipment.
D. Keep dirt and debris out of pipes and ducts by capping or plugging open ends.
1. Keep plug or cap in place until final connections are made.
1.4 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Cause as little interference or interruption of existing utilities and services as possible.
1. Schedule work which will cause interference or interruption in advance with Owner, Construction
Manager, Architect, authorities having jurisdiction, and affected contractors.
B. Keep roads clear of materials and debris.
Midpoint Station Control Building
January 2023
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR HVAC WORK Section 230000 2
C. Examine Contract Documents to determine how other work will affect execution of mechanical work.
D. Examine site and become familiar with existing local conditions affecting work.
E. Determine and verify locations of existing utilities on or near site.
F. Make arrangements for and pay for necessary permits, licenses, and inspections.
G. Record drawings:
1. Keep a complete set of mechanical drawings in job site office for indicating actual installation of
mechanical systems and equipment.
2. Use this set of drawings for no other purpose.
3. Where material, equipment, or system components are installed differently from that indicated,
indicate such differences clearly and neatly.
4. At project completion, submit record set of drawings in accordance with Division 01.
H. Operation and maintenance data: See Division 01.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Motors:
a. Base:
1) Reliance Electric.
b. Optional:
1) Baldor.
2) Century Electronics; E-Plus.
3) General Electric; Energy Saver.
4) Westinghouse Motor.
2. Shaft grounding ring for motors:
a. Base:
1) Aegis.
3. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Division 00.
B. Use only prime quality, new materials, apparatus and equipment.
2.2 EQUIPMENT GUARDS
A. Equipment guards:
1. Use suitable structural frames with minimum 12 GA, 3/4 IN galvanized mesh, or expanded metal
mesh.
2. Attach to equipment by removable clips and bolts with wing nuts, or other approved connectors.
3. At belts, provide opening for measuring RPMs.
4. Provide at belts, couplings, moving machinery and equipment in accordance with OSHA.
5. Design for easy access to belts and other items requiring replacement.
2.3 MOTORS AND CONTROLS
A. Motors:
1. Provide motors indicated in Mechanical Specification Divisions.
2. Motors shall be ball or roller bearing type, premium efficiency type, and have starting and running
characteristics consistent with torque and speed requirements of driven machine.
3. Motor efficiency:
a. NEMA Standard MG-1, part 31.
b. Indicate full load efficiency on each nameplate.
4. Use motors rated in accordance with NEMA performance standards to carry full nameplate load
continuously at maximum temperature rise of 40 deg C above ambient with service factor of 1.15.
5. Motor powers as scheduled.
6. Do not allow power requirements of driven machine to exceed nominal nameplate rating of motor
furnished.
7. Do not include service factor when selecting motor power.
8. Provide for items which require electric drive.
Midpoint Station Control Building
January 2023
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR HVAC WORK Section 230000 3
B. Motor controls and wiring for controls:
1. Provide complete installation of controls and wiring for controls for Mechanical Specification
Divisions packaged/pre-wired equipment.
a. Include line voltage controls, low voltage controls, control switches, starters, disconnects,
conduit, and wiring.
b. Locate disconnects on outside of equipment enclosures or guards.
2. Starters, disconnects, conduit, and wiring furnished under Mechanical Specification Divisions shall
comply with applicable Electrical Specification Divisions.
3. Where equipment is specified with packaged/pre-wired controls, but is furnished instead with
loosely shipped components that require field wiring, coordinate complete installation and assume
costs.
2.4 PENETRATIONS
A. Maintain fire and smoke ratings where mechanical items penetrate fire and fire/smoke rated building
elements.
2.5 STRUCTURAL STEEL FOR SUPPORTS
A. Structural steel for supports: ASTM-A36.
1. Galvanize members installed in fan plenums or areas of high humidity or condensation, and outside.
2. Furnish other members with shop coat of rust inhibiting primer.
3. Shop fabricate for field assembly using bolts.
4. Minimize field welding.
5. Retouch primer after field welding.
6. Unless support is otherwise indicated where weight of equipment exceeds 400 LBS, submit
engineering design and calculations signed and seal by an engineer licensed in the state in which
the project is located.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. When changes in location of work are required, obtain approval of Architect before making change.
1. Make changes at no extra cost.
B. Provide necessary offsets and crossovers in piping and ductwork, whether indicated or not.
C. Install piping and ductwork parallel to walls and vertically plumb.
D. Do not change indicated sizes without approval of Architect.
E. Electrical equipment:
1. Install no ductwork or piping above panelboards, switchboards, motor control centers, or motor
control panels.
3.2 LOCATING SERVICEABLE DEVICES
A. Install devices that may require adjustment, service, or maintenance in normally accessible locations, or
provide flush-mounted access doors.
1. Arrange piping, conduit, ducts, and related work to facilitate maintenance.
2. Relocate items which interfere with access.
3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Where it is necessary to disturb work of other sections, perform or pay for cutting, fitting, repairing,
patching and finishing of work to permit installation of mechanical work.
B. Avoid cutting, where possible, by setting sleeves or frames, and by requesting openings in advance.
1. Coordinate locations with work of other sections.
C. Before cutting of structural elements, obtain written approval of Structural Engineer.
1. Use only approved methods.
2. Neatly cut holes as approved by structural engineer to admit work.
3. Do not weaken walls or floors; locate holes in concrete to avoid structural members.
D. Locate openings and sleeves to permit neat installation of piping, ductwork and equipment.
Midpoint Station Control Building
January 2023
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR HVAC WORK Section 230000 4
E. Do not remove or damage fireproofing materials.
1. Install hangers, inserts, supports, and anchors prior to installation of fireproofing.
2. Repair or replace fireproofing removed or damaged, at no extra cost.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT
A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as specified.
B. Provide necessary anchoring devices and supports.
1. Use structural supports suitable for equipment, or as indicated.
2. Check loadings and dimensions of equipment with shop drawings.
3. Do not cut building structural members.
4. Provide equipment supports even though not detailed on architectural and structural drawings.
C. Verify that equipment will fit support layouts indicated.
1. Where substitute equipment is used, revise indicated supports to fit.
D. Arrange for necessary openings to allow entry of equipment.
1. Where equipment cannot be installed as structure is being erected, provide and arrange for building
in of boxes, sleeves or other devices to allow later installation.
E. Provide concrete foundations (isolation pads) or housekeeping pads for mechanical equipment as
follows unless indicated otherwise:
1. Install 4 IN high concrete housekeeping pads. Outside dimension of pad shall be at least 4 IN larger
in all directions than base of equipment or 9 IN from center of anchor, whichever is greater.
2. Use 3,000 PSI concrete.
3. Reinforce with No.13 bars, 12 IN OC each way, with short No. 13 dowels into floor at 24 IN OC
each way.
4. Chamfer top edges 3/4 IN.
5. Make faces smooth.
6. Set anchor bolts for equipment.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform indicated tests to demonstrate workmanship, operation, and performance.
1. Conduct tests in presence of Architect and, if required, inspectors of agencies having jurisdiction.
2. Arrange date of tests in advance with Architect, manufacturer and installer.
3. Give inspectors minimum of 24 hours notice.
4. Furnish or arrange for use of electrical energy, water or gas required for tests.
5. Furnish materials required for test.
B. Repair or replace equipment and systems found inoperative or defective and retest.
1. If equipment or system fails retest, replace it with products conforming to Contract Documents.
2. Continue remedial measures and retests until satisfactory results are obtained.
C. Test equipment and systems for each item, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer.
1. Tests specified in Section 230593, Testing and Balancing need not be duplicated under other
sections.
3.6 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Inspect equipment and put in satisfactory working order.
B. Clean exposed and concealed items:
1. Clean air surfaces of coils, fans (including fan wheels and motors), air handler plenums and air filter
frames.
2. Clean debris including dirt and sand out of ductwork.
3.7 PUTTING SYSTEMS IN OPERATION - START UP
A. Prior to substantial completion and building occupancy, at time agreed to by Owner and Architect, put
systems into satisfactory operation.
1. At first heating or cooling season following substantial completion, put systems not yet operated
under their seasonal loads into satisfactory operation.
B. Operate systems in satisfactory working order for period of 10 working days.
1. After the 10 days, clean debris including dirt and sand out of ductwork.
Midpoint Station Control Building
January 2023
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR HVAC WORK Section 230000 5
END OF SECTION

Midpoint Station Control Building
January 2023

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Section 230593 1
SECTION 230593
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Test, balance and adjust following mechanical systems:
1. Air distribution systems.
2. Heating and cooling coils.
3. Temperature Controls:
a. Assist Temperature Controls installer with calibration of air side control components.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Agency qualifications: Independent test and balance agency, member of Associated Air Balance
Council (AABC), or National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB).
1. Work supervised by a certified Testing and Balancing Engineer.
2. Indicate at least 5 successfully completed projects of similar size and scope.
B. Testing and balancing standards: AABC or NEBB standards and procedures.
1.3 RESPONSIBILITIES OF TESTING AND BALANCING (TAB) AGENCY
A. Review contract document ductwork drawings before bid and advise contractor as to the number and
size of additional branch main volume dampers required to facilitate balancing.
B. Review contractor ductwork installation drawings before fabrication and advise where additional volume
dampers are required to facilitate balancing.
C. Schedule work with trades involved.
D. Check, adjust, and balance system com ponents to obtain optimum conditions for function and operation
of system.
E. Evaluate operation of systems and advise installer of necessary adjustments and corrective measures.
F. Prepare and submit test reports.
1.4 RESPONSIBILITIES OF MECHANICAL INSTALLER
A. Start up system and keep in correct operation during balancing operations.
B. Provide necessary adjustments and corrections to systems as directed by Testing and Balancing
Agency.
C. Maintain accessibility to test locations and devices requiring adjustment.
D. Provide additional sets of pulleys and belts as required by Testing and Balancing Agency.
E. Provide a complete set of approved mechanical-equipment shop drawings to Testing and Balancing
Agency.
F. Provide a complete set of "As-built" drawings to Testing and Balancing Agency.
1.5 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Balance at time directed by Architect.
1. If balancing is not done during peak cooling season demonstrate satisfactory balancing during next
peak cooling season.
B. Keep dust, dirt and debris to an absolute minimum and reinstall removed ceiling tiles to their original
positions at end of each day.
1.6 CORRECTIVE WORK
A. Provide extended warranty of 90 days, after completion of test and balance work, during which time
Architect may, at Architect’s discretion, request recheck or resetting of equipment or system which is not
performing satisfactorily. Provide technicians to assist as required in making such tests.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Project information:
1. Within 60 days of award of contract submit a complete Submission Report including:
Midpoint Station Control Building
January 2023

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Section 230593 2
a. A company resume listing its personnel and project experience in air and hydronic balancing.
b. An inventory and calibration data of instruments and devices in possession of balancing agency
whether or not they will be used on this project.
c. A working agenda that includes procedures for testing and balancing each air and water flow
system.
d. Test and Balance Report Forms and Field Data Sheets that will appear in final report, with
design data already filled in.
e. A written, system-by-system description of measurements, test locations and procedures that
will be employed during test and balance.
B. Contract closeout information:
1. Final test and balance report(s):
a. Use forms similar to AABC or NEBB latest editions.
b. Report(s) signed by TAB Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 JOB SITE INSPECTIONS
A. Job site inspections:
1. During construction inspect installation of piping, sheet metal work, temperature controls, flow
meters, pressure taps, strainers and other components of HVAC system as specified in contract
documents.
2. Note any deficiencies and submit them, in writing, to Architect.
a. Include these inspection reports in final TAB report.
2.2 FINAL TEST AND BALANCE REPORT
A. Using field data, test forms and procedures outlined in Submission Report, perform and record
measurements, and complete final TAB report including:
1. Preface:
a. A general discussion of system including any abnormalities and problems encountered.
2. Instrumentation list:
a. List of instruments including type, model, manufacturer, serial number and calibration date.
3. System identification:
a. On each Test and Balance Report Form, number and/ or letter air terminal units, zones, supply,
return and exhaust openings and traverse points to correspond to numbers and letters on Field
Data Sheets.
4. Air handling equipment:
a. Manufacturer, model number, and serial number.
b. Design and manufacturer related data.
c. Total actual air flow rate by traverse if practical; if not practical, sum of outlets may be used, or a
combination of each of these procedures.
1) For specific systems, such as ones with diversity, see AABC National Standards.
d. Suction and discharge static pressure of each fan, as applicable.
e. Outside air and return air total air flow rate.
f. Actual operating current, voltage, and brake power of each fan motor.
g. Final RPM of each fan.
h. Fan and motor sheave manufacturer, model, size, number of grooves and center distance.
i. Belt size and quantity.
j. Static pressure controls final operation set points.
5. Heating and cooling coils:
a. Manufacturer.
b. Design and manufacturer's related data.
c. Rated and actual static air pressure drops across each coil.
d. Wet bulb and dry bulb temperatures entering and leaving each cooling coil.
e. Dry bulb temperatures entering and leaving each heating coil.
6. Air terminal units, diffusers, registers and grilles:
a. Adjust air terminal units to deliver design maximum and minimum air -flow conditions.
b. Flow rate at each air outlet (diffuser).
Midpoint Station Control Building
January 2023

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Section 230593 3
c. Flow rate at each return and exhaust air inlet (register or grille).
7. Room Pressure relationships.
a. Maintain pressure relationships in rooms that are either positive (supply greater than return/
exhaust) or negative (supply less than return/exhaust).
b. In the final test and balance report, indicate that these pressure relationships were maintained.
B. Units of measure:
1. Flow rates:
a. Air: CFM.
2. Temperatures: degF.
3. Power: HP.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Accurately calibrate and maintain test instruments in good working order.
1. If requested, conduct tests of instruments in presence of Engineer.
B. If requested, conduct balancing tests in presence of Engineer.
C. Do not begin balancing until system(s) have been substantially completed and are in good working
order to permit preliminary measurements of total air volumes and system pressures.
D. Proceed with final balancing and adjustments when systems are 95 to 100 percent complete.
E. Record inspections, tests and adjustments.
3.2 AIR BALANCING METHODS
A. Balance each air system that is served by air filters, using artificial static loading of system, to
demonstrate, test and obtain system design pressure drop data.
1. Provide dirty filter pressure drop conditions on system.
2. Do not use high efficiency filters (75 percent and above) in testing and balancing.
3. Static pressure losses may be simulated by using wood or sheet steel blanking plates in high
efficiency filter racks and housings.
4. Do not install blanking plates within 2 FT of low efficiency filter unit or rack.
3.3 AIR BALANCE TESTING PROCEDURE
A. Perform tests and balance system in accordance with approved Submission Report.
B. Take readings of airflow stations if installed or make pitot tube traverse of main supply, return and
exhaust air ducts.
1. Obtain flow rates at fans at both maximum and minimum outside air operation.
C. Test and adjust each diffuser, grille, and register served by an air terminal unit to within 10 percent of
design requirements.
D. In cooperation with HVAC Controls installer, set automatically operated dampers to operate as
indicated.
1. Check controls for proper calibration and list controls requiring adjustment.
3.4 OPERATING TEST
A. After systems are balanced, conduct operating test of not less than 8 hours duration to demonstrate to
satisfaction of Architect that system(s) comply with requirements of plans and specifications, and that
equipment and controls are functioning properly.
END OF SECTION

Midpoint Station Control Building
January 2023

HVAC POWER VENTILATORS Section 233423 1
SECTION 233423
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Description of system:
1. Ventilators.
B. Abbreviations:
1. AMCA: Air Movement and Control Association.
2. ADC: Air Diffusion Council.
3. ASHRAE: American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards:
1. ADC Standard 1062R2, Air Diffusing Equipment Test Code.
2. AMCA Standard 210, Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating.
3. AMCA Standard 204, Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans.
4. ASHRAE Standard 70, Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets.
5. NFPA-90A, Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
6. ABMA : American Bearing Manufacturers Association.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data:
1. Performance data.
2. Physical dimensions.
3. Fan curves.
4. Sound data.
B. Contract closeout information:
1. Operating and maintenance data.
2. Owner instruction report.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Fans (General):
a. Base:
1) Members of AMCA.
2. Ventilators:
a. Base: Cook, Loren.
b. Optional:
1) Carnes.
2) Acme Engineering and Manufacturing.
3) Cook, Loren.
4) PennBarry.
5) Greenheck.
3. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Division 00.
B. Fans - General:
1. Performance ratings: Based on laboratory tests conducted in accordance with latest edition of
ASHRAE/AMCA Standard Test Codes.
2. UL 705 listed.
3. Capacity and ratings: As indicated.
4. Arrangement and drive: As indicated.
Midpoint Station Control Building
January 2023

HVAC POWER VENTILATORS Section 233423 2
5. Fan wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced per AMCA Standard 204.
6. Finish:
a. Steel fan components: Finished with paint system exceeding 1000 hour salt sp ray under ASTM
B117 test method, minimum 2 mil thick.
b. Aluminum, galvanized, and stainless steel fan components: Unfinished.
C. Motors and control:
1. Provide TEFC motor for outdoor installations exposed to weather.
2. For direct drive fans, provide TEFC motors when motor is located in the airstream.
2.2 VENTILATORS
A. Ventilators:
1. Centrifugal, direct or belt driven as scheduled, mounted type as scheduled
2. Capacity: As scheduled.
3. Housing: Extruded or heavy gauge sheet aluminum mounted on rigid support structure.
a. Hooded dome type.
4. Motor and drive
a. Provide overload protection.
b. Isolate each fan motor and drive from enclosure with internal vibration isolators.
c. Resiliently mounted motors may be used for direct drive fans.
5. Fan wheel: Backward inclined, dynamically and statically balanced.
6. Bearings:
a. Bearings shall be fixed to the fan shaft using concentric mounting locking collars. Set screws
will not be allowed.
b. Self aligning, extra heavy duty type, ball or roller bearings with regreasable lubrication.
c. Select for minimum average bearing life L-50 rating of 200 000 hours operation at maximum
cataloged operating speed.
7. Provide 1/2 IN mesh birdscreen on outlet.
8. Provide factory wired NEMA 1 disconnect under cover.
9. Provide factory wired, solid state speed controller, on direct drive 120 volt, single phase fans.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as specified.
3.2 FAN DYNAMIC BALANCING
A. Experienced, trained mechanics from factory shall dynamically balance centrifugal fans . Balancing shall
include the following:
1. Inspection of fans to determine if damage has occurred during storage or installation and coordinate
repair of damages.
2. Inspection of fan drives including bearing and motor mounts.
3. Inspection of tensioning of drive belts on adjustable and fixed pitch sheaves.
4. X-Y dynamic vibration plot on each fan resulting in a properly balanced installation within factory
specifications, performed after system has been balanced and final fixed pitch drive sheaves
installed.
END OF SECTION

Midpoint Station Control Building
January 2023

PACKAGED TERMINAL HEAT PUMPS Section 238113 1
SECTION 238113
PACKAGED TERMINAL HEAT PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes packaged terminal air conditioners and their accessories and controls, in the
following configurations:
1. Through the wall.
2. Heat-pump unit.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and
accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details, including seismic bracing, for wall penetrations.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For packaged terminal air conditioners to inc lude in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of packaged terminal
air conditioners and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Divis ion 1 Section "Product
Requirements."
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended
use.
C. Energy-Efficiency Ratio: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, "Energy
Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."
D. Coefficient of Performance: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, "Energy
Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of packaged terminal air conditioners and wall construction with other
construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them.
Midpoint Station Control Building
January 2023

PACKAGED TERMINAL HEAT PUMPS Section 238113 2
1.6 WARRANTY
A. The Bard product specified shall be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of 5 -
years for compressor, and for a period of 5-years for all parts. Warranty period shall start from date of
installation as stated on warranty card; or from date o f shipment if no warranty card is returned to Bard
Manufacturing. Equipment must be used under normal conditions and warranty is subject to Bard
Manufacturing’s standard limited warranty statement.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Refer to schedules for approved manufacturers.
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Cabinet: Construction shall be a single, enclosed, weatherproof casing constructed of 20 -gauge
galvanized steel. Unit base is constructed of 16 -gauge galvanized steel. Each exterior casing panel to
be bonderized and finished with baked-on exterior polyester enamel paint prior to assembly. The
baked-on cured paint finish shall pass the industry rub test with a minimum of 72 rubs MEK (Methyl
Ethyl Ketone) or standard rub test of a minimum of 100 rubs using Tolulene. Cooling section shall be
fully insulated with 1-inch fiberglass to prevent sweating and to muffle sounds. Openings shall be
provided for power connections. Access openings appropriate for outside structure to all fan motors
and compressor for making repairs and for removing internal components without removing unit from
its permanent installation. A separate service door provides access for changing filters. Fresh air
intake and outdoor coil shall be protected from intrusions by a sturdy met al grating with less than 1/4
inch openings. Coordinate color with architect.
B. Drain Pan: Drain pan shall be constructed of 20-gauge galvanized steel, bonderized and finished with
baked-on exterior polyester enamel paint.
C. Mounting Brackets: Full-length side mounting brackets shall be an integral part of the cabinet. Bottom
mounting bracket shall be provided.
D. Refrigeration System: All models shall use a high efficiency 2 stage scroll compressor with step
capacity providing 2 stages of control in cooling and heating. Single stage heating capacity via the
compressor is not acceptable. Compressor shall be designed with R -410A non-ozone depleting
refrigerant in compliance with Montreal Protocol 2010 EPA requirements. The compressor shall be
covered by a 5-year parts warranty. The refrigeration circuit shall be equipped with factory installed
high and low pressure controls, and liquid line filter dryer. The refrigeration control shall be factory
installed. Compressor shall be attached to a double isolated floating mounting system and include a
sound blanket and discharge muffler.
E. Condenser Fan Motor: The condenser fan, motor and shroud shall be of slide out configuration for easy
access.
F. Indoor Fan Blower: The indoor blower motor shall be high efficiency ECM motor. It shall include soft
start and shall be self-adjusting to provide proper airflow at varying static pressure. Blower wheels shall
be curve blades.
G. Electrical Components: Electrical components are easily accessible for routine inspection and
maintenance through front service panels. Circuit breaker is standard on all 208/230-volt models and
rotary disconnect standard on all 460-volt models. Circuit breaker/rotary disconnect access is through
Midpoint Station Control Building
January 2023

PACKAGED TERMINAL HEAT PUMPS Section 238113 3
lockable access panel. Phase rotation monitors shall be installed on all 3-phase units to prevent
reverse rotation.
H. Control Circuit: The internal control circuit shall consist of a current limiting 24VAC type 50VA
transformer (75VA on hot-gas reheat dehumidification models----See 6.0). The defrost circuit shall
consist of a solid-state electronic heat pump control. A 30-minute timer shall inflate a defrost cycle if
the outdoor coil temperature indicates the possibility of an iced condition. The thermistor sensor,
speed-up terminal for service, and a ten-minute defrost override shall be standard on the electronic
heat pump control. To prevent rapid compressor short cycling, a five-minute time delay circuit shall be
factory installed. A low-pressure bypass shall be factory installed to prevent nuisance tripping during
low temperature start-up.
I. Electric Heat: The heat pump shall have a factory installed electric resistance heater available that is
designed specifically for application in the T Series heat pump. Heater shall include automatic limit
safety controls.
J. Commercial Room Ventilation: The built-in commercial room ventilator is internally mounted and
allows outside ventilation air, up to 50% of the total air flow rating of the unit, to be introduced through
the air inlet openings. It includes a built-in exhaust air damper. The CRV can be controlled by indoor
blower operation or field controlled based on room occupancy using CO2 controller. Unit complies with
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 62.1 Ventilation for Acceptable Air Quality.
2.3 CONTROLS
A. Control Module: Remote-mounted adjustable thermostat with heat anticipator, off-heat-auto-cool
switch, and high-low fan switch.
B. Low Ambient Control: Low ambient control for cooling operation to 0 degrees.
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Sound-Power Level Ratings: Factory test to comply with ARI 270, "Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary
Equipment."
B. Unit Performance Ratings: Factory test to comply with ARI 310/380, "Packaged Terminal Air-
Conditioners and Heat Pumps."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install units level and plumb, maintaining manufacturer's recommended clearances and tolerances.
B. Install wall sleeves in finished wall assembly; seal and weatherproof.
C. Install wall sleeves to withstand, without damage to equipment and structure, seismic forces required
by building code.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Electrical System Connections: Comply with applicable requirement s in Division 16 Sections for power
wiring, switches, and motor controls.
Midpoint Station Control Building
January 2023

PACKAGED TERMINAL HEAT PUMPS Section 238113 4
B. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening
values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and
UL 486B.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps.
2. After installing packaged terminal air conditioners and after electrical circuitry has been
energized, test for compliance with requirements.
3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor
rotation and unit operation.
4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
B. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above.
3.4 STARTUP SERVICE
A. After installation, verify the following:
1. Unit is level on base and is flashed in exterior wall.
2. Unit casing has no visible damage.
3. Compressor, air-cooled condenser coil, and fans have no visible damage.
4. Labels are clearly visible.
5. Controls are connected and operable.
6. Shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps are removed.
7. Filters are installed and clean.
8. Drain pan and drain line are installed correctly.
B. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufac turer's submittal and installation
requirements in Division 16 Sections.
C. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions, including the
following:
1. Lubricate bearings on fan.
2. Check fan-wheel rotation for correct direction without vibration and binding.
D. After startup service and performance test, change filters.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust initial temperature set points.
B. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide
on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to
site outside normal occupancy hours for this purpose, without additional cost.
Midpoint Station Control Building
January 2023

PACKAGED TERMINAL HEAT PUMPS Section 238113 5
END OF SECTION
Midpoint Station Control Building
January 2023

COMMON WORK RESULTS Section 260200 1
SECTION 260200
COMMON WORK RESULTS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1. SUMMARY
A. This section covers requirements for installation of materials specified herein and as shown on
the Drawings.
B. The Contractor shall provide all materials associated with lighting, receptacle, heating/ventilating
branch circuits, smoke detection/fire alarm system, and conduit systems for intruder door alarm in
the control building. The Owner will provide all other materials, unless noted otherwise.
Materials specified herein are for informational purposes. Refer to Section 01115, GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS FOR SUBSTATION PROJECTS.
1.2. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. UL Compliance: Materials manufactured with the scope of Underwriters Laboratories shall
conform to UL Standards and have an applied UL listing mark.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1. OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES
A. Sheet Steel: One-piece drawn type, zinc or cadmium plated.
B. Cast Metal:
1. Box: Malleable iron.
2. Cover: Gasketed, weatherproof, malleable iron, with stainless steel screws.
3. Hubs: Threaded.
4. Lugs: Cast mounting.
5. Manufacturer: Crouse-Hinds; Type FS or FD.
2.2. JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES
A. Outlet Boxes Used as Junction or Pull Box: As specified under OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES.
B. Ceiling Outlet: Minimum 4-inch octagonal sheet steel device box, unless otherwise required for
install fixture.
C. Switch and Receptacle: Minim 2-inch by 4-inch device box.
D. Large Sheet Steel Box: NEMA 250, Type 1.
1. Box: Code-gauge, galvanized steel.
2. Cover: Full access, screw type.
3. Machine Screws: Corrosion resistant.
2.3. WIRING DEVICES
A. AC Light Switches:
1. NEMA WD 1 and FS W -S-896E.
2. Specification grade, totally enclosed, ac type, with quiet tumbler switches and screw
terminals.
3. Capable of controlling 100 percent tungsten filament and fluorescent lamp loads.
4. Configuration and Rating: Single pole, 20 amps, 120/277 volts.
B. DC Light Switches:
1. NEMA WD 1 and FS W -S-896E.
2. Specification grade, totally enclosed, ac type, with quiet tumbler switches and screw
terminals.
3. Capable of controlling 100 percent tungsten filament and fluorescent lamp loads.
4. Configuration and Rating: Two-pole, 20 amps, 120/277 volts
C. Receptacle, Duplex:
1. NEMA WD 1 and FS W -C-596.
Midpoint Station Control Building
January 2023

COMMON WORK RESULTS Section 260200 2
2. Specification grade, two-pole, three-wire grounding type with screw type wire terminals
suitable for No. 10 AWG.
3. Rating: 125 volts, NEMA WD 1, Configuration 5-20R, 20 amps.
D. Receptacle, Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter: Duplex, specification grade, tripping at 5 mA.
1. Rating: 125 volts, NEMA WD 1, Configuration 5-20R, 20 amps, capable of interrupting
5,000 amps without damage.
2.4. DEVICE PLATES
A. General: Sectional type plates not permitted.
B. Cast Metal:
1. Material: Malleable ferrous metal, with gaskets.
2. Screw: Oval-head stainless steel.
C. Weatherproof:
1. For Receptacles: Gasketed cast metal or stainless steel, with individual cap over each
receptacle opening.
2. For Switches: Gasketed, cast metal incorporating external operator for internal switch.
2.5. NONFUSED SWITCH, INDIVIDUAL, 0 TO 600 VOLTS
A. NEMA KS 1
B. Quick-make, quick-break, motor rated, load-break, heavy-duty (HD) type with external markings
clearly indicating ON/OFF positions.
C. Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70, 75 degrees C.
D. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1 or 3R as shown on the Drawings.
2.6. LIGHTING AND POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARD (DC AND AC)
A. NEMA PB 1, NFPA 70, and UL 67.
B. Panelboards and Circuit Breakers: Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70, 75
degrees C ampacity.
C. Short-Circuit Current Equipment Rating: Fully rated
D. Rating:
1. AC Panelboard: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical at 120/240 volts.
2. DC Panelboard: 10,000 amperes dc at 125 volts.
E. Cabinet:
1. Indoor: NEMA, type 1, general use.
2. Outdoor: NEMA, type 3R, rainproof.
F. Bus Bar: Copper full sized throughout length.
G. Neutral: Insulated rated same as phase bus bars with at least one terminal screw for each circuit.
H. Circuit Breakers: Molded case, bolt on, thermal-magnetic meeting NEMA AB 1 and UL 489.
2.7. SUPPORT AND FRAMING CHANNELS
A. Material: Rolled, mild strip steel, 12-gauge, ASTM A570, Grade 33 as manufactured by Unistrut.
B. Finish: Rust-inhibiting acrylic painted for interior use. Galvanized for exterior use.
C. Inserts: Continuous.
D. Beam Clamps: Gray cast iron.

2.8. BATTERY RACK AND BATTERY CONTAINMENT
A. Battery Rack:
1. Single Tier.
2. Maximum 2-Step.
3. Seismically Braced.
4. Maximum acceptable height from floor to top of battery to be 50 inches.
5. Steel Frame with ANSI 61 gray FR acid-resistant powder coating. Furnish complete with
all necessary steel frames, fittings, rails and braces, plastic insulating channels, plastic
spacer and hardware. Provide earthquake-rated hardware.
6. Each rack shall have a ground-loop connection point and a lead-plated ground terminal
lug.
B. Battery Containment:
Midpoint Station Control Building
January 2023

COMMON WORK RESULTS Section 260200 3
1. Battery Spill Containment shall be UL listed under Categories VXMB, VXMB2, and
VXMB7.
2. Perimeter of spill containment barriers shall be (4)four inches high modular rails to enable
access to battery racks or stacks.
3. Barriers shall be made of ½ inch by 4 inch acid resistant poly propylene.
4. Barrier walls shall have interlocking corner and junctions to allow for the removal of
single-wall section.
5. Barriers shall come complete with all hardware for assembly.
6. Containment area shall have a liquid-tight spill containment liner consisting of a minimum
thickness of 60-mil shall protect the flooring within the containment area. The liner shall
have 4-inch high walls with factory-formed corners on the interior of the barrier walls.
Liner to meet Class 1 Fire Rating as defined by NFPA 101 and meet standards per
ASTM D751-95.
7. Battery Acid neutralization and absorption pillow shall be UL Recognized under UL
category VXMB2 and FM Approved measuring a minimum of 12”x12” in size. A
combination of battery electrolyte neutralization and absorption pillows shall be provided
to fill the spill containment area and be capable of neutralizing a spill of 3 percent of the
capacity of the larges cell to a pH level between 7.0 and 9.0. Battery electrolyte
neutralization and absorption pillows shall be individually tagged with a unique serial
number for traceability and have a UL Recognized logo on the tag. Pillows exposed to
any electrolyte shall produce an obvious color change. All neutralization and absorption
pillow materials shall meet Class 1 fire rating as defined by NFPA 101. End of use
recycling or disposal program shall be available from manufacturer.
8. A battery electrolyte spill cleanup and disposal kit shall be provided in each battery room
to allow for electrolyte cleanup in event of a spill. Kit to include:
a. 5-gallon D.O.T. container
b. 5 pounds of electrolyte neutralizer
c. 3-neutralizing pads
d. Absorbent wipes
e. Hazmat disposal bag
f. pH test kit
g. acid resistant gloves
h. rubber boots
i. headgear and face shield
j. goggles
k. Tyvek body
l. Coveralls
m. Emergency response guidebook
9. Aisle matting shall be provided and made of an insulating material meeting ASTM D178
Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Matting. It shall have a dielectric strength of
15,000 volts minimum, run the length of the battery rack and be a minimum of 32.5
inches wide.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1. OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES
A. Install suitable for conditions encountered at each outlet or device in wiring or raceway system,
sized to meet NFPA 70 requirements.
B. Size:
1. Depth: Minimum 2 inches, unless otherwise required by structural conditions. Box
extension not permitted.
2. Ceiling Outlet: Minimum 4-inch octagonal sheet steel device box, unless otherwise
required for install fixture.
3. Switch and Receptacle: Minim 2-inch by 4-inch device box.
C. Locations:
1. Unless specifically dimensioned, locations are approximate.
Midpoint Station Control Building
January 2023

COMMON WORK RESULTS Section 260200 4
2. To avoid interference with other equipment and structural features, relocate outlets as
directed by the Owner.
3. Light Switch: Install on strike side of door, or where indicated on plans.
4. Light Fixture: Install in symmetrical pattern according to room layout unless otherwise
shown.
D. Mounting Height:
1. General:
a. Measured to centerline of box.
b. Where specified heights do not suit building construction or finish, mount as
directed by the Owner.
2. Light Switch: 48 inches above floor.
3. Thermostat: 54 inches above floor.
4. Convenience Receptacle: 18 inches above floor.
E. Install level and plumb.
F. Support boxes independently of conduit by attachment to building structure or structural member.
G. Fasten boxes directly with wood screws on wood, bolts and expansion shields on concrete or
brick, toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, and machine screws threaded int o steelwork.
H. Threaded studs driven in by powder charge and provided with lock washers and nuts are
acceptable in lieu of expansion shields.
I. Install separate junction boxes for flush or recessed lighting fixtures where required by fixture
terminal temperature.
J. Open no more knockouts in sheet steel device boxes than are required; seal unused openings.
K. Box Type:
L. Exterior Locations: Cast Metal.
M. Interior Locations:
1. Exposed Raceways: Cast Metal.
2. Concealed Raceways: Sheet steel.
3. Lighting Circuits, Ceiling: Sheet steel.
3.2. JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES
A. Install where shown and where necessary to terminate, tap-off, or redirect multiple conduit runs.
B. Install pull boxes where necessary in raceway system to facilitate conductor installation.
C. Label each pull and junction box with the associated branch circuit or feeder contained within the
box.
D. Use outlet boxes as junction and pull boxes wherever possible and allowed by applicable codes.
E. Installed boxes shall be accessible.
F. Do not install on finished surfaces.
G. Install plumb and level.
H. Support boxes independently of conduit by attachment to building structure or structural member.
I. Fasten boxes directly with wood screws on wood, bolts and expansion shields on concrete or
brick, toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, and machine screws threaded into steelwork.
J. Threaded studs driven in by powder charge and provided with lock washers and nuts are
acceptable in lieu of expansion shields.
K. At or Below Grade: Install boxes for below grade conduit flush with finished grade.
L. Location/Type:
1. Indoor: NEMA 250, Type 1.
2. Outdoor: NEMA 250, Type 4.
3. Underground: Concrete.
3.3. WIRING DEVICES
A. Switches:
1. Install switch operation in vertical position.
2. Install single-pole, two-way switches such that toggle is in up position when switch is on.
B. Receptacles:
1. Install with grounding slot down.
2. Ground receptacles to boxes with grounding wire only.
C. Weatherproof Switches and Receptacles:
1. Install in cast metal box.
Midpoint Station Control Building
January 2023

COMMON WORK RESULTS Section 260200 5
2. Install such that hinge for protective cover is above receptacle opening.
3.4. DEVICE PLATES
A. Securely fasten to wiring device; ensure a tight fit to the box.
B. Plate shall not extend beyond sides of box unless plates have no sharp corners or edges.
C. Install with alignment tolerance to box of 1/16 inch.
D. Types:
1. Interior: Cast Metal.
2. Exterior: Weatherproof.
3.5. LIGHTING AND POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARD
A. Install securely, plumb, in-line and square with walls.
B. Install top of cabinet 6 feet above floor unless otherwise shown.
C. Provide typewritten circuit directory for each panelboard.
3.6. SUPPORT AND CHANNEL FRAMING
A. Furnish rust inhibiting acrylic paint; paint cut ends prior to installation.
B. Install where required for mounting and supporting electrical equipment and raceway systems.

END OF SECTION
Midpoint Station Control Building
January 2023

LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Section 260519 1
SECTION 260519
LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1. SUMMARY
A. This Section includes wires and cables and associated connectors, splices, and terminations for
all wiring systems.
B. Work shall include placement of cable in cable tray and conduit systems, splicing where
necessary, terminating conductors, labeling, and coiling and taping of spare conductors, cable
tying, and testing.
C. The Contractor shall provide all conductors, accessories, and materials associated with lighting,
receptacle, and heating/ventilating branch circuits in the control building. The Owner will provide
all other conductors, accessories, and materials, unless specified otherwise. Refer to S ection
01115, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SUBSTATION.
D. Conductors typically used by the Owner are specified herein. Refer to the Bill of Materials for a
complete listing of conductor types and accessories.
1.2. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Materials manufactured within scope of Underwriters Laboratories shall conform to UL Standards
and have an applied UL listing mark.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.3. COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of cables with other installations.
B. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated, as required to suit field conditions and as
approved by the Owner.
1.4. ELECTRICAL TESTING
A. Unless specified otherwise, the Contractor shall be responsible for all visual and mechanical
inspections of conductors and cables. The Owner will perform all insulation resistance tests.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1. CONDUCTORS 600 VOLTS AND BELOW
A. Control Building Branch Circuit Wire:
1. Conform to applicable requirements of NEMA WC 3, WC 5, and WC 7.
2. Conductor Material: Copper.
3. Stranding: Solid conductor for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded conductor for larger
than No. 10 AWG.
4. Insulation: Type THHN/THWN.
5. Minimum Size: No. 14 AWG.
6. Application: Control building lighting and receptacle wiring.
2.2. GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A. Equipment: Stranded copper with green, Type THHN/THWN insulation. Provide a separate
ground wire for all feeders and branch circuits.
2.3. ACCESSORIES FOR CONDUCTORS 600 VOLTS AND BELOW
A. Tape:
1. General Purpose, Flame-Retardant: 7-mil, vinyl plastic, Scotch Brand 33, rated for 90
degrees C minimum, meeting requirements of UL 510.
2. Flame Retardant, Cold and Weather Resistant: 8.5 mil, vinyl plastic, Scotch Brand 88.
3. Arc and Fireproofing:
a. 30-mil, elastomer.
b. Manufacturers and Products:
(1) 3M No. 7700 with 3M No. 27 glass cloth tapebinder.
B. Identification Devices:
1. Marker Plate: 1-inch diameter round fiber tag stamped with cable prefix and number.
C. Connectors and Terminations:
Midpoint Station Control Building
January 2023

LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Section 260519 2
1. Nylon, self-insulated crimp connectors.
2. Self-insulated, freespring wire connector (wire nuts).
a. UL Standard 486C
b. Plated steel, square wire springs.
3. Self-insulated, setscrew wire connector.
a. Two piece compression type with set screw in brass barrel.
b. Insulated by insulator cap screwed over brass barrel.
D. Cable Lugs:
1. In accordance with NEMA CC1.
2. Rated 600 volts of same material as conductor metal.
3. Insulated, ring-tongue, compression lugs:
a. Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70, 75 degrees C ampacity.
4. Uninsulated crimp connectors and terminators:
a. Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70, 75 degrees C ampacity.
5. Uninsulated, bolted, two-way connectors and terminators.
E. Cable Ties:
1. Plastic ties shall be Thomas & Betts utilizing metal stop tabs (TY5242M or equal). Proper
tools will be used to cut off the tag ends leaving no sharp edges.
2. Wax string shall be #12 cord, waxed linen lacing.
F. Heat Shrinkable Insulation:
1. Thermally stabilized cross-linked polyolefin.
2. Manufacturer and Product: Thomas & Betts; SHRINK-KON.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1. GENERAL
A. Install conductors as shown and as specified in the Bill of Materials and the Cable List.
B. Do not exceed cable manufacturer’s recommendations for maximum pulling tensions and
minimum bending radii. Where pulling compound is used, use only UL listed compound
compatible with the cable outer jacket and with the raceway involved.
C. Conductors Rated Above 600 Volts: The Contractor shall be responsible for providing the proper
cable pulling equipment and tension dynamometer. The Contractor shall monitor the conductor
pulling eye position and pulling tension and record the maximum pulling tensions required for the
installation of all conductors. Prepare a written report of the maximum pulling tension data for
each pull for submission to the Owner. Include cable reel numbers associated with each pull,
cable manufacturer information, and cable manufacturing date with the written r eport.
D. Tighten screws and terminal bolts in accordance with UL 486A for copper conductors.
E. Cable Lugs: Provide with correct number of holes, bolt size, and center -to-center spacing as
required by equipment terminals.
F. Cap all spare conductors with UL listed end caps.
3.2. TRANSFER AND INSPECTION OF MATERIALS
A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
1. When obtaining materials and equipment the Contractor is required to complete an
inventory for compliance with drawings, equipment list, and specifications as specified in
Section 01115, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SUBSTATION PROJECTS.
2. Contractor shall carefully inspect all cable for visible defects. The outside of each cable
reel shall be carefully inspected and protruding nails, fastenings, or other objects that
might damage the cable shall be removed. A thorough visual inspection for flaws,
breaks, or abrasions in the cable sheath shall be made as the cable leaves the reel and
the pulling speed shall be slow enough to permit this inspection. Damage to the sheath
or flash of the cable shall be sufficient cause for rejecting the cable. Instances of damage
shall be promptly brought to the attention of Owner. Cable damaged in any way during
installation shall be replaced by and at the expense of the Contractor.
B. Contractor shall familiarize himself with cable manufacturer’s recommendations for storage,
maximum pulling tensions, minimum bending radii, and other installation requirements.
3.3. STORAGE OF MATERIALS
Midpoint Station Control Building
January 2023

LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Section 260519 3
A. All materials and equipment shall be stored so as to protect them from deterioration or damage.
Any material damage incurred during on-site storage shall be replaced at the expense of the
Contractor.
B. Cable reels shall be stored and handled in a manner that will prevent physical damage to the
cable. Cable reels shall be stored on a hard surface to prevent contact between cable insulation
and the earth due to sinking of the reel. Prevent impact damage between reels by aligning reels
flange to flange or by using guards across flanges. During storage, the ends of all cable shall be
protected with UL listed end caps.
C. If the cable is outdoors and a substantial time delay is expected before terminating, cover both
ends of the cable with tape to eliminate the hazards of dirt, moisture, and inadvertent electrical
connection.
3.4. CONDUCTOR COLOR CODING
A. All Systems: Equipment grounding, green.
B. Local Service - Direct Current DC
Function Color
Positive black
Negative white
C. Local Service and Branch Circuits- Alternating Current AC
Function Color
X black
Y red
Z green
N white
-
3.5. PREPARATION FOR CONDUCTOR PLACEMENT
A. Immediately prior to the placement of each cable or cable group, the raceway route to be followed
shall be inspected and ascertained to be complete in installation and free of all materials
detrimental to the cable or its placement. No wire or cable shall be installed in a conduit unless it
is free of all foreign material.
B. Ream, remove burrs, and clear interior of installed conduit before pulling wires or cables.
C. Concrete-Encased Raceway Installation: Prior to installation of conductors, pull through each
raceway a mandrel approximately ¼-inch smaller than raceway inside diameter.
D. Both ends of each cable shall be made waterproof and properly tagged with weather -resistant
tags.
E. If the raceway appears inadequate to accommodate the assigned cable(s) notify the Owner.
Work shall discontinue on the questionable route until advised as to how to proceed.
F. All cable prior to installation shall be carefully checked for proper size and length before being
pulled into conduits, cable trench, or tray in order to minimize pulling stresses and need for
splices. Cable pulled into the wrong conduit or duct or cut too short to rack, train, and splice as
specified herein shall be removed and replaced by and at the expense of the C ontractor.
3.6. CONDUCTOR INSTALLATION
A. Reuse existing conductor where called for in the drawings. The same testing requirements apply
as described herein.
B. Conductor shall not be handled when the temperature is below the minimum installation
temperature recommended by the manufacturer. If conductor heating is required prior to
installation, the conductor shall be stored in a heated building in accordance with manufacturer
recommendation for at least 24 hours. Conductor shall be installed same day it is removed from
heated storage.
1. Conductor In Conduit
a. All conductors assigned to a particular duct or conduit shall be grouped and
pulled in simultaneously using cable grips and Owner provided lubricants as
necessary. Lubricants shall be applied liberally and continuously during the pull.
Any conductor installed in such a manner that the conductor jacket receives cuts
or abrasions shall be removed and replaced at Contractor’s expense.
Midpoint Station Control Building
January 2023

LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Section 260519 4
b. The pulling tension of any conductor shall not exceed the maximum tension
recommended by the conductor manufacturer. If any excessive strain develops,
the pulling operation shall be stopped at once and the difficulty determined and
corrected.
c. To avoid insulation damage from excessive sidewall pressure at bends, the
pulling tension at the bend shall not exceed the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
2. Conductor In Trench Or Tray
a. When pulling through open trench, a person is required to assist at corners to
avoid conductor damage.
3.7. CONDUCTORS 600 VOLTS AND BELOW
A. Install 10 AWG or 12 AWG conductors for branch circuit wiring in lighting and receptacle circuits.
B. Connections and Terminations:
1. Install wire nuts only on solid conductors.
2. Install nylon self-insulated crimp connectors and terminators for control and power
conductors No. 6 AWG and smaller.
3. Install uninsulated crimp connectors and terminators for control and power circuit
conductors No. 4 AWG through No. 2/0 AWG.
4. Install uninsulated, bolted, two-way connectors and terminators for power circuit
conductors No. 4/0 AWG and larger.
5. Tape insulate all uninsulated connections.
6. Place no more than one conductor in any single-barrel pressure connections.
7. Compression Lugs:
a. Lugs are to be used with NatVar tubing placed as a sleeve over the crimp.
b. Attach with a tool specifically designed for purpose.
c. Tools shall provide complete and accurate crimp. The crimper shall have guides
to prevent overcrimping.
d. Provide an insulation crimp properly crimped to the conductor insulation.
C. Do not use soldered mechanical joints.
D. Splices and Terminations.
1. Indoors: Use general purpose, flame retardant tape.
2. Outdoors: Use flame retardant, cold-and weather-resistant tape.
E. Equipment Cabinets, Panels, and Control Panels:
1. Remove surplus wires, bridle and secure.
2. Where conductors pass through openings or over edges in metal, remove burrs, chamfer
edges, and install bushings and protective strips of insulating material to protect the
conductors.
F. Extra Conductor Length: For conductors to be connected by others, install minimum 6 feet of
extra conductor in freestanding panels and minimum 2 feet in other assemblies.
3.8. SPLICES
A. Do not splice unless specifically indicated or approved by the Owner.
B. Splices shall be avoided wherever possible but shall, if required, be prepared and insulated in a
manner equal to that on the conductor as specified by the manufacturer. All splices shall be
readily available for inspection.
C. A splice should never be present at the emergence of a conductor or wire from a conduit. If a
splice is required at this point the conductor should be pulled such that th e splice does not
interfere with the entering or exiting of conductors.
3.9. CABLE TIES
A. Bundling: Where single conductors and cables in handholes, vaults, cable troughs, cable trays,
and other indicated locations are not wrapped together by some other means, bu ndle conductors
from each conduit throughout their exposed length with cable ties placed at intervals not
exceeding 12 inches on center.
B. Cable Tray Installation:
1. Install wire and cable parallel and straight in tray.
2. Bundle, in groups, all wire and cable of same voltage having a common routing and
destination; use cable ties, at maximum intervals of 3 feet.
Midpoint Station Control Building
January 2023

LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Section 260519 5
3. Clamp cable bundles prior to making end termination connections.
4. Fasten wires, cables, and bundles to tray with nylon cable straps at the following
maximum intervals:
a. Horizontal Runs: 20 feet.
b. Vertical Runs: 5 feet.
C. Where conductors must pass from the cable trench/tray to instrument panels, they shall be
bundled in the trench/tray so they can pass as one group.
D. Plastic Ties
1. Use plastic ties to secure cable in a previously wired panel where plastic has
predominantly been used.
2. Plastic ties should be used exclusively to secure cable in outdoor gear and where there is
outdoor exposure to prevent damage due to rodents and weather conditions.
3. Flush cutoff of tag ends is required to prevent sharp edges.
E. Wax String
1. Waxed, flax 12 cord is used in cable tray where a cable crosses a rung perpendicularly.
The cable is secured to the tray rung with a saddle knot that allows it to continue straight
and does not pull in any direction.
2. Use waxed flax 12 cord to secure cable in a previously wired panel where string has
predominantly been used.
3.10. CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION
A. Cables and wires in the same circuit or grouping shall be identified as indicated in the Cable List.
The circuit number shall be fastened to each cable or wire grouping at both ends. Individual
wires are not labeled.
B. Tags supplied by Owner shall be used for cable tagging. The cable number shall be legibly
printed with black permanent marker over the white surface. The opposite side should display a
date stamp.
1. The tag should be attached with a cable tie at a location that it can be readily viewed.
2. The tag should be tied as the cable exits the cable tray, directly before the cables are
broken out into individual wires. Where this is not feasible, the tag is to be attached to
the first wire placed.
3. A tag should never be present at the emergence of a cable from a conduit to prevent
interference with the entering or exiting of future cables.
END OF SECTION
Midpoint Station Control Building
January 2023

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Section 260533 1
SECTION 260533
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Contractor shall be responsible for installing all materials and accessories necessary to install a
complete substation control building raceway system.
B. The Owner will provide all raceway materials unless noted otherwise. Materials specified herein
are for informational purposes.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1. CONDUIT
A. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit (RGS): Hot-dip galvanized with chromated protective layer
meeting the requirements of ANSI C80.1 and UL6.
B. Electric Metallic Tubing (EMT): Hot-dip galvanized with chromated and lacquered protective layer.
C. PVC Schedule 40 Conduit: Conduit shall meet the requirements of NEMA TC2 and UL 651.
Conduit shall be UL listed for concrete encasement, underground direct burial, concealed or
direct sunlight exposure, and 90 degrees C insulated conductors.
D. Flexible Metal, Liquid-Tight Conduit: Conduit shall be UL 360 listed for 105 degrees C insulated
conductors. Material shall be galvanized steel with an extruded PVC jacket.
E. Flexible Metal, Nonliquid-Tight Conduit: Conduit shall be galvanized steel meeting the
requirements of UL 1.
2.2. FITTINGS
A. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit:
1. General:
a. Meet requirements of UL 514 B.
b. Type: Threaded, galvanized.
2. Bushings:
a. Metal insulated throat bushings with integral plastic bushings rated for 150
degrees C.
b. Manufacturers:
(1) Thomas & Betts; Type BIM.
(2) O.Z Gedney; Type HB.
3. Grounding Bushing:
a. Malleable iron with integral insulated throat rated for 150 degrees C, with
solderless lugs.
b. Manufacturers:
(1) Appleton; Series GIB.
(2) O.Z. Gedney; Type HBLG.
4. Conduit Hub:
a. Malleable iron hubs with insulated throat.
b. Manufacturers:
(1) O.Z. Gedney; Series CH.
(2) Thomas & Betts; Series 370
5. Conduit Bodies:
a. Malleable iron, sized as required by NFPA 70.
b. Manufacturers:
(1) Appleton; Form 35 threaded Unilets.
(2) Crouse-Hinds; Form 7 or 8 threaded condulets.
(3) Killark; Series O Electrolets.
6. Couplings: As supplied by conduit manufacturer.
7. Expansion Fitting Manufacturers:
a. Deflection/Expansion Movement:
(1) Crouse Hinds; Type XD.
Midpoint Station Control Building
January 2023

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Section 260533 2
b. Expansion Movement Only:
(1) Crouse Hinds; Type XJ.
B. Cable Sealing Fittings:
1. To form watertight nonslip cord or cable connection to conduit.
2. For conductors with OD of ½-inch or less use a neoprene bushing at connector entry.
3. Manufacturers:
a. Crouse Hinds; CGBS.
b. Appleton; CG-S.
C. Electric Metallic Tubing:
1. Meet requirements of UL 514B.
2. Type: Steel body and locknuts with steel or malleable iron compression nuts.
3. Compression Ring: Stainless steel.
4. Connector and Coupling Manufacturer: Crouse-Hinds Type CPR.
D. PVC Conduit: PVC, slip-on meeting requirements of NEMA TC-3.
E. Flexible Metal, Liquid-Tight Conduit:
1. Metal insulated throat connectors with integral nylon or plastic bushing rated for 105
degrees C.
2. Insulated throat and sealing O-rings.
3. Long design type extending outside of box or other device at least 2 inches.
4. Manufacturer: T&B; Series 5300.
F. Flexible Metal, Nonliquid-Tight Conduit:
1. Meet requirements of UL 514 B.
2. Body: Galvanized Steel.
3. Throat: Nylon insulated.
4. 1-1/4-inch conduit and smaller: One screw body.
5. 1-1/2-inch conduit and larger: Two-screw body.
6. Manufacturer: Appleton, Series 7400.
2.3. WIREWAYS
A. Meet requirements of UL 870.
B. Type: Steel-enclosed, with removable, screw type cover.
C. Rating: Indoor or outdoor as required.
D. Finish: Gray, baked enamel.
E. Manufacturers: B-Line Systems, Inc.
2.4. CABLE TRAYS
A. Meet requirements of NEMA VE 1.
B. Type: Ladder, of welded construction.
C. Material: Copper-free aluminum alloy 6063-T6 finish.
D. Dimensions: As shown on the Drawings.
E. Fittings of same cross-sectional tray area and hardware of same material as cable tray.
F. Tray Grounding: Conform to NFPA 70 and NEMA VE 1.
G. Expansion Joints: NEMA VE 1 for 25 degrees F maximum temperature variation.
H. Cable tray shall have no sharp edges, burrs, or weld projections.
I. Manufacturers: B-Line Systems, Inc.
2.5. MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES
A. Manholes and handholes shall be as shown on the drawings and listed in the Bill of Materials.
B. Cable Racks:
1. Arms and Insulators: Adjustable, of sufficient number to accommodate cables for each
raceway entering or leaving manhole, including spares.
2. Wall Attachment:
a. Adjustable inserts in concrete walls. Bolts or embedded studs not permitted.
b. Insert Spacing: Maximum 3-foot on center entire inside perimeter of manhole.
Midpoint Station Control Building
January 2023

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Section 260533 3
c. Arrange so that spare raceway ends are clear for future cable installation.
2.6. MISCELLANEOUS
A. Auxiliary Gutters: Meet the requirements of Article 374 of the NEC.
B. Cable Trenches: As shown on the Drawings.
C. Duct Bank Spacers:
1. Type: Non-metallic, interlocking, for multiple conduit sizes.
2. Suitable for all types of conduit.
3. Manufacturer: Underground Device, Inc.; Type WUNPEECE.
D. Raceway Coating:
1. Material: Bitumastic or plastic tape coating.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Koppers bitumastic; No. 505.
b. Scotchwrap; No. 51, plastic tape.
E. Wraparound Duct Band:
1. Material: Heat-shrinkable, cross-linked polyolefin, precoated with hot melt adhesive.
2. Manufacturer: Raychem; Type TWDB.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1. GENERAL
A. All raceways shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner and shall comply with the NEC.
B. All material and equipment shall be stored appropriately to protect from deteriorating effects of
the elements. Touch-up paint shall be provided as required.
C. Crushed or deformed raceways not permitted.
D. Maintain raceway entirely free of obstructions and moisture.
E. Immediately after installation, plug or cap raceway ends with watertight and dust-tight seals until
time for pulling conductors.
F. Avoid moisture traps where possible. When unavoidable in exposed conduit runs, provide
junction box and drain fitting at conduit low point.
G. Conduit runs shall follow the route identified on the Drawings.
H. Underground runs shall be as direct as possible, using the least number of bends as is practical.
Contact the Owner if a conflict arises with any given underground conduit route.
I. Group raceways installed in same area.
J. Follow structural surface contours when installing exposed raceways. Avoid obstruction of
passageways.
K. Run exposed raceways parallel or perpendicular to walls, structural members, or intersections of
vertical planes.
L. Install watertight fittings in outdoor, underground, or wet locations.
M. Paint threads, before assembly of fittings, of galvanized conduit installed in exposed or damp
locations with zinc-rich paint or liquid galvanizing compound.
N. All metal conduits to be reamed, burrs removed, and cleaned before installation of conductors,
wire, or cable.
O. Do not install raceways in concrete equipment pads or foundations.
P. Install concealed and buried raceways so that they emerge at right angles to surface and have no
curved portion exposed.
Q. Conduit, conduit fittings and conduit boxes to be embedded in concrete shall be held securely in
position with nonmetallic support while the concrete is being placed.
3.2. CONDUIT APPLICATION
A. Diameter:
1. Light and Receptacle Circuits Inside Control Building: Minimum ½-inch.
2. All Other Circuits: Minimum 1-inch.
B. Exterior Exposed: Rigid galvanized steel, electric metallic tubing, or PVC schedule 40.
C. Interior Exposed in Control Building: Electric metallic tubing.
D. Interior Concealed (Not Embedded in Concrete): Electric metallic tubing.
E. Aboveground, Embedded in Concrete: PVC schedule 40.
F. Direct Earth Burial (non-traffic areas): PVC schedule 40.
G. Concrete-Encased Raceways: PVC schedule 40.
H. Under Slabs-On-Grade: PVC schedule 40.
Midpoint Station Control Building
January 2023

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Section 260533 4
3.3. CONNECTIONS
A. For motors, transformers, and other equipment where flexible connection is required to minimize
vibration: Flexible metal, liquid-tight conduit.
B. Lighting Fixtures in Dry Areas: Flexible metal, nonliquid-tight conduit.
C. Outdoor Areas Exposed to Moisture: Flexible metal, liquid-tight conduit.
D. Transition from Underground to Exposed: PVC Schedule 40 conduit.
E. Transition from Concrete Encased or T hrough Concrete Slab: Rigid galvanized steel conduit.
F. Under Equipment Mounting Pads: Rigid galvanized steel conduit.
G. Exterior Light Pole Foundations: PVC Schedule 40 conduit.
3.4. PENETRATIONS
A. Make at right angles, unless otherwise shown.
B. Notching or penetration of structural members, including footings and beams, not permitted.
C. Apply single layer of wraparound duct band to all metallic conduit protruding through concrete
slabs to a point 2 inches above and 2 inches below concrete surface.
D. Concrete Walls and Floors: Provide nonshrink grout dry-pack, or use watertight seal device.
E. Entering Structures:
1. General: Seal raceway at the first box or outlet with oakum or expandable plastic
compound to prevent the entrance of gases or liquids from one area to another.
2. Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Equipment:
a. Penetrate equipment in area established by manufacturer.
b. Terminate conduit with flexible metal conduit at junction box or condulet attached
to exterior surface of equipment prior to penetrating equipment.
3. Nonwaterproofed Wall or Floor:
a. Provide Schedule 40 galvanized pipe sleeve, or watertight entrance seal device.
b. Fill space between raceway and sleeve with an expandable plastic compound, or
an oakum and lead joint, on each side.
4. Handholes and Manholes:
a. Metallic Raceways: Provide insulated grounding bushings.
b. Nonmetallic Raceways: Provide bell ends flush with wall.
c. Install such that raceways enter as near as possible to one end of wall, unless
otherwise shown.
3.5. SUPPORT
A. Support from structural members only, at intervals not exceeding NFPA 70 (NEC) requirements,
and in any case not exceeding 8 feet. Do not support from piping or other raceways.
B. Multiple Adjacent Raceways: Provide ceiling trapeze consisting of ½-inch all-thread bolts and
Unistrut.
C. Provide and attach wall brackets, strap hangers, or ceiling trapeze as follows:
1. Wood: Wood screws.
2. Hollow Masonry Units: Toggle bolts.
3. Concrete: Expansion shields, or threaded studs driven in by powder charge, with lock
washers and nuts.
4. Steelwork: Machine screws.
5. Hardware Type: Galvanized.
D. Nails or wooden plugs inserted in concrete or masonry for attaching raceway not permitted. Do
not weld raceways or pipe straps to steel structures. Do not use wire in lieu of straps or hangers.
3.6. BENDS
A. A run of conduit, embedded or exposed, shall not contain more than the equivalent of four (4)
quarter-bends (360°total) between pull points, e.g., conduit bodies and boxes. Pull boxes shall be
installed, if required, to limit any run of conduit to (4) quarter bends (360° total).
B. Make bends and offsets of longest practical radius.
C. Install with symmetrical bends or cast metal fittings.
D. Avoid field-made bends and offsets, but where necessary, make with acceptable hickey or
bending machine. Do not heat metal raceways to facilitate bending.
E. Make bends in parallel or banked runs from same center or centerline with same radius so that
bends are parallel.
Midpoint Station Control Building
January 2023

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Section 260533 5
F. Factory elbows may be installed in parallel or banked raceways if there is change in plane of run,
and raceways are same size.
G. PVC Conduit:
1. Bends less than 45 degrees: Provide factory-made elbows.
2. Use manufacturer’s recommended method for forming smaller bends.
3. All bends 45 degrees or greater, including riser elbows: Provide RGS elbows.
H. Flexible Conduit: Do not make bends that exceed allowable bending radius of cable to be
installed or that significantly restricts conduit flexibility.
3.7. EXPANSION/DEFLECTION FITTINGS
A. Provide on all raceways at all structural expansion joints, and in long tangential runs.
B. Provide expansion/deflection joints for 50 degrees F maximum temperature variation.
C. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
3.8. PVC CONDUIT
A. Solvent Welding:
1. Provide manufacturer recommended solvent; apply to all joints.
2. Install such that joint is watertight.
B. Adapters:
1. PVC to Metallic Fittings: PVC terminal type.
2. PVC to Rigid Metal Conduit: PVC female adapter.
C. Belled-End Conduit: Bevel the unbelled end of the joint prior to joining.
3.9. WIREWAYS
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Locate with cover on accessible vertical face of wireway, unless otherwise shown.
3.10. CABLE TRAYS
A. Install in accordance with Application Information Section of NEMA VE 1.
B. Install such that joints are not made at support brackets.
C. Install horizontal section support brackets between support point and quarter point of tray span.
D. Provide ceiling trapeze for all horizontal tray. Ceiling trapeze shall consist of ½-inch all-thread
bolts and Unistrut framing.
E. Install support within 2 feet on each side of expansion joints and within 2 feet of fittin g extremity.
F. Install horizontal tray level, plumb, straight, and true to line or grade within a tolerance of 1/8 -inch
in 10 feet and within a cumulative maximum of ½-inch.
G. Install vertical tray plumb within a tolerance of 1/8-inch in 10 feet.
H. Install without exposed raw edges.
I. Provide grounding per NFPA 70.
3.11. TERMINATION AT ENCLOSURES
A. Cast Metal Enclosure: Provide manufacturer’s pre-molded insulating sleeve inside metallic
conduit terminating in threaded hubs.
B. Sheet Metal Boxes, Cabinets, and Enclosures:
1. Rigid Galvanized Conduit:
a. Provide one lock nut each on inside and outside of enclosure.
b. Install insulated bushing on ends of conduit where grounding is not required.
c. Provide insulated throat when conduit terminates in sheet metal boxes having
threaded hubs.
d. Sealing locknuts to be used on outside of NEMA 3R and NEMA 12 enclosures.
2. Electric Metallic Tubing: Provide gland (raintight) compression, insulated connectors.
3. Flexible Metal Conduit: Provide two screw type, insulated, malleable iron connectors.
4. PVC Schedule 40 Conduit: Provide PVC terminal adapter with lock nut.
3.12. UNDERGROUND RACEWAYS
A. Install the conduit(s) below the station ground grid with a minimum of 1 inch of sand between
cables both vertically and horizontally and as shown on the Drawings. If not spe cified on the
Drawings, low voltage power and control cable raceways shall be buried a minimum of 24 inches,
medium voltage power cable raceways shall be installed a minimum of 42 inches and concrete
encased raceways shall be installed a minimum depth of 30 inches.
B. Conduit trench bottom shall be smooth and filled with 3 inches of sand to provide bedding for the
Midpoint Station Control Building
January 2023

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Section 260533 6
raceways.
C. The first 3 inches of backfill above the pipe zone shall be sand or soil free of materials that would
damage or be corrosive to the conduit.
D. Grade: Maintain minimum grade of 3 inches in 100 feet, either from one manhole, handhole, or
pullbox to the next, or from a high point between them, depending on surface contour.
E. Make routing changes as necessary to avoid obstructions or conflicts.
F. Couplings: In multiple conduit runs, stagger so that couplings in adjacent runs are not in same
transverse line.
G. Support conduit so as to prevent bending or displacement during backfilling or concrete
placement.
H. Installation with Other Piping Systems:
1. Crossings: Maintain minimum 12-inch vertical separation.
2. Parallel Runs: Maintain minimum 12-inch separation.
I. Metallic Raceway Coating: Apply wherever rigid galvanized steel raceways are installed
underground. Along entire length, coat with raceway coating or apply tape with one-half tape
width overlap to obtain two complete layers.
3.13. MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES
A. Install manholes and handholes where shown on the Drawings. Provided excavation, shoring,
bracing, backfilling, and grading as required.
B. Do not install until final raceway grading has been determined.
C. Install such that raceways enter at nearly right angles and as near as possible to one end of wall,
unless otherwise shown.
D. Grounding: As shown on the Drawing.
3.14. CABLE TRENCHES
A. Install cable trenches where shown on the Drawings. Provide excavation, bracing, backfilling,
and grading as required.
B. Trench bottom shall be smooth and filled with 3 inches of sand to provide bedding for the cables.
C. Grounding: As shown on the Drawings.
3.15. EMPTY RACEWAYS
A. Provide permanent, removable cap over each end.
B. Provide PVC plug with pull-tab for underground raceways with end bells.
C. Provide nylon pull cord.
3.16. PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK
A. Protect products form effects of moisture, corrosion, and physical damage during construction.
B. Provide and maintain manufactured watertight and dust-tight seals over all conduit openings
during construction.
C. Touch up painted conduit threads after assembly to cover nicks or scars.

END OF SECTION
Midpoint Station Control Building
January 2023

INTERIOR LIGHTING Section 265100 1
SECTION 265100
INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1. SUMMARY
A. This Section covers the work necessary for the installation of lighting systems complete.
B. Unless noted otherwise, all luminaries and accessories to be installed in or on the Control
Building shall be furnished by the Contractor.
C. All other luminaries and accessories shall be furnished by the Owner, unless noted otherwise.
1.2. UL COMPLIANCE
A. Materials manufactured within the scope of Underwriters Laboratories shall conform to UL
Standards and have an applied UL listing mark.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1. LUMINAIRES
A. Specific requirements relative to execution of work of this section are located on the Drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1. LUMINAIRES
A. General:
1. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
2. Provide proper hangers, pendants, and canopies as necessary for complete installation,
and meeting specified seismic requirements.
3. Provide additional ceiling bracing, hanger supports, and other structural reinforcements to
building required to safely mount.
4. Install plumb and level.
5. Mounting heights shown for wall mounted or pendant mounted luminaries are measured
from bottom of luminaire to finished floor or finished grade, whichever is applicable.
B. Control Building:
1. Install symmetrically where possible.
2. Locate luminaries to avoid either conflict with other building systems or blockage of
luminaire light output.
3. Junction boxes:
a. Locate minimum 1 foot from luminaire.
b. In concealed locations, install junction boxes to be accessible by removing
luminaire.
4. Wiring and Conduit:
a. Provide wiring of temperature rating required by luminaire.
b. Provide flexible steel conduit.
3.2. CLEANING FOLLOWING CONSTRUCTION
A. Remove all labels and other markings, except UL listing mark.
B. Wipe luminaries inside and out to remove construction dust.
C. Clean luminaire plastic lenses with antistatic cleaners only.
D. Touch up all painted surfaces of luminaries and supports with matching paint ordered from
manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

EARTH MOVING Section 312000 1
SECTION 321000
EARTH MOVING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1. SUMMARY
The work required under this section consists of all excavating, trenching, filling, grading,
surfacing and other related items necessary to complete the station earthwork as indicated
on the Station Drawings and/or as specified herein and generally listed as follows:
A. Preparation and clearing of site.
B. Grading of site.
C. Construction and/or installation of culverts and other drainage structures and drainage
ditches.
D. Surfacing of station area.
E. Maintenance of all benchmarks, monuments, or other reference points and replace as
directed if disturbed or destroyed.
F. Unless indicated otherwise, all required materials shall be furnished and installed by the
Contractor. All costs related to acquiring and transporting material are to be paid by the
Contractor.
G. Before proceeding with work on any portion of the station, the Contractor shall request,
and the Owner shall issue notification in writing, that the property involved is available for
clearing or construction purposes. Should the Contractor proceed without such
notification, it shall be liable for any claims for damage to property that may arise, and
such procedure shall be entirely at its own risk and expense.
1.2. DEFINITIONS
A. Access Roads: That part of the road outside the fenced enclosure of the substation and
extending to the designated public thoroughfare.
B. Station Area: That part of the site in the fenced enclosure, plus the immediate adjacent
area surrounding the fenced enclosure as specified or indicated on the Drawings.
C. Relative Compaction: Ratio, in percent, of the as-compacted field dry density to the
laboratory maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D 698. Corrections for oversize
material may be applied to either the as-compacted field dry density or the maximum dry
density, as determined by the Owner.
D. Optimum Moisture Content: Determined by the ASTM standard specified to determine
the maximum dry density for relative compaction. Field moisture content shall be
determined on the basis of the fraction passing the 3/4 -inch sieve.
E. Relative Density: As defined by ASTM D 4253 and D 4254.
F. Prepared Ground Surface: The ground surface after clearing, grubbing, stripping,
excavation, and scarification and/or compaction.
G. Completed Course: A course or layer that is ready for the next layer or next phase of the
work.
H. Well-Graded: A mixture of particle sizes that has no specific concentration or lack thereof
of one or more sizes. Well-graded does not define any numerical value that must be
placed on the coefficient of uniformity, coefficient of curvature, or other specific grain size
distribution parameters. Well-graded is used to define a material type that, when
compacted, produces a strong and relatively incompressible s oil mass free from
detrimental voids.
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

EARTH MOVING Section 312000 2
I. Influence Area: Area within the planes sloped downward and outward at an angle of 60
degrees from the horizontal form (a) 1 foot outside the outermost edge at the base of
foundations or slabs; or (b) 1 foot outside the outermost edge at the surface or roadways
or shoulder; or (c) 0.5 foot outside the exterior edge at the spring line of pipes and
culverts.
J. Unclassified Excavation: The nature of materials to be encountered has not been
identified or described herein.
K. Borrow: Material excavated on the site or taken from designated borrow areas on or near
the site.
L. Selected Backfill Material: Materials available onsite that the Owner determines to be
suitable for a specified use.
M. Imported Material: Materials obtained from sources off the site.
N. Structural Fill: Fill materials as required under structures, paving, etc.
O. Embankment: Fill materials required to raise the existing grade in areas other than under
structures.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1. MATERIALS
A. General:
1. All backfill and fill material shall be free of roots or other organic matter, refuse,
ashes, cinders, frozen earth, or other unsuitable material. Material containing
more than 10 percent of gravel, stones, or shale particles is unacceptable. In
addition, material containing stones greater than 4 inches in the longest
dimension, particularly in areas where foundations or piers are to be installed is
unacceptable. Imported earth fill shall be similar to the site material and meet the
same requirements.
2. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall be responsible for finding a
source for all earth fill materials. Contractor is responsible for removal of excess
fill material following excavation and backfilling.
B. Soil Materials:
1. Topsoil: Topsoil shall be friable clay loam surface soil found in a depth of not
less than 4 inches. Satisfactory topsoil shall be reasonably free of subsoil, clay
lumps, stones, and other objects over 2 inches in diameter, and without weeds,
roots, and other objectionable material.
2. Pit Run: Material generally described as “Pit Run” conforming to ASTM D 2487
soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM; free of rock or gravel
larger than 4 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation
and other deleterious matter.
3. 3/4” Minus Roadmix: Crushed gravel conforming to ASTM D 2487 soil
classification group GW with 100 percent passing a 3/4” sieve and not more than
8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve, and shall be free of excess moisture, debris,
waste, frozen materials, vegetation and other deleterious matter.
4. Unsatisfactory Soil Materials: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GC, SC,
ML, MH, CL, CH, OL, OH, and PT.
5. Bedding Material: Clean sand with 100 percent passing a 1 inch sieve and not
more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

EARTH MOVING Section 312000 3
6. Drainage Fill: Washed, evenly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or
uncrushed gravel, ASTM D 448, coarse aggregate grading size 57, with 100
percent passing a 1-1/2 inch sieve and not more than 5 percent passing a No. 8
sieve.
7. Filtering Material: Evenly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel or crushed
stone and natural sand, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2 inch sieve and 0 to 5
percent passing a No. 50 sieve.
8. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a
dense state.
9. Finish Grade Crushed Rock: Crushed quarry rock, conforming to the following
gradation:
Sieve Size Percent Passing by Weight
1” 100
3/4” 80-90
1/2" 35-45
3/8” 15-20
No.4 0-5
No.8 0-5
C. Drainage Structures
1. Galvanized steel culverts and concrete drainage structures shall be installed as
shown on the drawings. All galvanized steel culvert pipes shall meet the
requirements of AASHTO M-36, and have at each end a prefabricated, flared
end section of the same gauge and quality. Concrete shall conform to the
specifications listed in the concrete section of these Specifications.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1. SITE PREPARATION
A. Snow Removal:
1. Snow removal shall be the Contractor's responsibility. The Contractor shall
perform snow removal promptly and efficiently by means of suitable equipment
whenever necessary for safety, or as may be directed by the Owner.
B. General:
1. The site shall be cleared of rocks, boulders, trees, stumps, brush, shrubs, grass,
and other vegetation, improvements, or obstructions, as required, to permit
installation of new construction. Remove similar items elsewhere on site or
premises as specifically indicated.
2. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful
manner where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction.
C. Topsoil:
1. Strip topsoil to a depth of 4 inches or to such greater depth as may be necessary
to remove roots of grass and other vegetation. Sod and turf stripped from the
site, if suitable, may be used on slopes and shoulders of embankments as part of
the reseeding work as approved by the Owner.
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

EARTH MOVING Section 312000 4
2. Stockpile topsoil in storage piles in areas indicated or directed. Construct
storage piles to provide free drainage of surface water. Cover storage piles, if
required, to prevent wind erosion.
D. Clearing and Grubbing:
1. All tree stumps within the fenced enclosures, including roots that are over two (2)
inches in diameter, shall be completely removed. In other areas stumps and
roots over 2 inches in diameter shall be removed to a depth of not less than
twelve (12) inches.
2. Stones and boulders 6 inches or greater in the longest dimension shall be
removed to a depth of 6 inches below finished subgrade in fill areas, on the
access road, and in the fenced enclosure.
3. Blasting will be permitted only when prior approval is obtained from the Owner.
Such approval shall not relieve the Contractor of any liability resulting from injury,
loss of life, or damage to property.
4. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil
material, unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. Place fill material in
horizontal layers not exceeding 6 inches loose depth, and thoroughly compact
each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.
5. The Contractor shall be responsible for disposal of all debris, resulting from site
preparation operations including trees, brush, roots, and sod stripping.
3.2. EXCAVATION
A. Excavation shall be performed by any recognized method of good practice to complete
the job in the most expeditious manner. The Contractor shall take precautions to ensure
no damage is done to existing facilities or equipment or to other work.
B. All excavation is considered unclassified regardless of the nature of the material.
Excavation shall include all materials found within the designated limits for excavation.
C. Excavate to lines, grades, and dimensions shown and as necessary to accomplish work.
Shape, trim, and finish cut slopes to conform with dimensions, lines, grades, and
elevations shown, with proper allowance and in conformance with notes on the Drawings
specifying final excavation cross section.
D. Excavate width adequately to permit efficient erection and removal of forms.
E. In existing substations or where existing ground grids and underground circuits are
present, excavation shall be by hand from a depth of 6 inches above to a depth of 6
inches below circuit and ground grid elevation. The Contractor may proceed with
machine excavations at all other depths where space and access permit.
F. Trim to neat lines where details call for concrete to be deposited against earth.
G. Restore bottom of excavation to proper elevation with approved compacted fill as
specified in areas over excavated.
H. Excavate by hand in areas where space and access will not permit use of machines.
I. Notify the Owner immediately if suitable load bearing material is not encountered at the
depth indicated on the Drawings. Proceed as instructed by the Owner.
J. Load bearing surfaces shall be moistened with water and mechanically tamped firm and
uniform to a density of 95 percent as determined by AASHTO Y 99. Compaction material
shall be placed in layers not exceeding 6 inches in depth after compaction.
K. Grading around excavations shall be controlled to prevent surface water from flowing into
excavated areas. Draining or pumping, as necessary, shall be required to continually
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

EARTH MOVING Section 312000 5
maintain excavated areas free of water or mud from any source, and this material shall
be discharged to approved drains or channels.
L. Waste materials shall be disposed of as specified in the General Requirements.
M. Notify the Owner immediately if rock is encountered that was not indicated in the Geo -
Technical report.
3.3. TRENCHING
A. Trenching and bedding for conduit and grounding materials shall be as shown on t he
Drawings.
B. Trenching should be performed with a suitable trenching machine, backhoe, or by hand,
exercising care not to damage existing underground installations.
C. Circuit routing shall be as shown on the Drawings unless conditions encountered are
such that changes are necessary to accomplish the work. In such case the Owner shall
be notified promptly and the Contractor shall determine the nature and extent of the
difficulty. The Owner shall determine whether rerouting or other changes are necessary.
D. The trench widths specified are minimum and should be increased, as necessary, to
obtain the required depths in loose soils. The maximum width at the top of the trench will
not be limited, except where excess width of excavation would cause damage to adjacent
structures or property.
E. Where trenches are intended for more than one conductor or conduit, particular care
must be taken to provide for extra depth and width to allow for soil falling in to the trench.
F. All trenches shall follow straight lines where possible.
G. The trenches shall be dug so that the bottom has a smooth grade. Large rocks, stones
and gravel in excess of one (1) inch shall be removed from the bottom of the trench.
H. Construction shall be arranged so that trenches will be left open for the s hortest practical
time in order to avoid creating a hazard and to minimize the likelihood of trench collapse
due to other construction activity, rain, accumulation of water in the trench, etc. Safety
and traffic barriers shall be installed in accordance with local requirements.
3.4. SUBGRADE
A. After proper compaction, the graded area shall be shaped and fine-graded as shown on
the Drawings. The accumulation of loose material incidental to fine grading shall be
incorporated into the subgrade by means of pneumatic tire roller or other suitable
available means of compaction
B. Cut and fill with earth fill and/or pit run as required to construct subgrades that will
produce the finish grade elevations (+/- 0.10 ft.) shown on the Drawings with special
attention to proper drainage.
C. Subgrade materials rendered unsuitable by excessive watering shall be removed a nd
replaced with approved material.
3.5. BACKFILL AND FILL
A. Backfill and fill material shall be as indicated on the Drawings. After footings, concrete
work, and cable conduits are in place, the Contractor shall place backfill as specified
herein.
B. All backfill and fill shall be compacted unless otherwise in 6” lifts or less to obtain at least
95% of maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D1557, Modified Proctor
Compaction Test.
C. Debris, sod, roots, snow, ice, or frozen earth shall not be placed as fill. Fill s hall not be
placed on a frozen surface.
Midpoint Control Building
January 19, 2023

EARTH MOVING Section 312000 6
D. Remove all unsuitable material and replace with approved fill material, and perform all
wetting, drying, and shaping required to prepare a suitable subgrade. Compact subgrade
to obtain the specified density.
E. Undisturbed subgrade in cuts shall be compacted unless the Owner determines that
compaction is not necessary.
F. Backfill against concrete work only after concrete has attained 70 percent design
strength.
G. Concrete Encased Duct Banks: When the backfill above the concrete must be
compacted, the concrete shall cure for 3 days before backfilling. When compaction of the
backfill is not required, backfill may be placed 24 hours after pouring concrete.
H. Perform backfilling simultaneously on all sides of walled structures and only after
construction of the structure is complete.
I. Embankment areas shall be constructed in uniform lifts or layers not exceeding 7 inches
of loose fill and laid parallel to the finished surface.
J. Avoid the use of heavy equipment adjacent to structures or concrete work.
K. Any on-site borrow areas shall be graded to drain and shall present a neat appearance,
as directed by the Engineer.
L. The Contractor shall pay for all compaction testing. One compaction test shall normally
be taken per 30,000 square feet, or less, for every two feet of fill.
3.6. SUBSTATION SURFACING:
A. After the site grading and substation construction is complete, place a 3-inch layer of 3/4”
minus washed rock over the subgrade to form an insulating layer as part of the substation
grounding system. The finish grade layer shall not be compacted.
B. The Contractor at his expense shall repair any damage to the surfacing due to the
Contractor’s actions.
3.7. DRAINAGE STRUCTURES
A. All pipes shall be evenly bedded throughout its entire length, not partially resting on rock
or earth embankment. The flow-line gradient and elevation shall be in line with that of the
natural drainage course insofar as possible.
B. Backfill shall be thoroughly compacted in layers not exceeding 6 inches.
C. Backfill shall be compacted under the pipe haunches to a width of one pipe diameter on
each side of the pipe and from the very bottom up to the top of the pipe, to the
satisfaction of the Owner.
3.8. SETTLEMENT
A. Any settlement noted in backfill, fill, or in structures built over the backfill or fill within the
1-year warranty period in accordance with the General Conditions will be considered to
be caused by improper compaction methods and shall be corrected at no cost to the
Owner. Structures damaged by settlement shall be restored to their original condition by
the Contractor at no cost to the Owner.

END OF SECTION

SPECIFICATION TO
FURNISH, CONSTRUCT and COMMISSION
a
525KV SERIES CAPACITOR BANK
at
MPSN
to
REPLACE C506

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.0 Project Description ..................................................................................................................................... 3 
2.0 Description of Existing Facilities ............................................................................................................... 3 
3.0 Site Conditions ........................................................................................................................................... 3 
4.0 General Requirements, Scope and Demarcation ........................................................................................ 3 
5.0 Technical Requirements ............................................................................................................................. 6 
6.0 Control and Operational Requirements .................................................................................................... 12 
7.0 Protection and Alarming Requirements ................................................................................................... 14 
8.0 Communications and Data Recording Requirements .............................................................................. 15 
9.0 Testing ...................................................................................................................................................... 15 
11.0 Line Outage Considerations ..................................................................................................................... 16 
12.0 References ................................................................................................................................................ 16 
Appendix A – Left Intentionally Blank ............................................................................................................... 17 
Appendix B - Annunciator Points ....................................................................................................................... 18 
Appendix C –System Model ............................................................................................................................... 19 
Appendix D – SCADA Monitor Points ............................................................................................................... 27 
Appendix E - Series Capacitor Bank Component Tests ...................................................................................... 29 

1/21/2022 SPECIFICATION TO
FURNISH, CONSTRUCT and COMMISSION
A 525KV SERIES CAPACITOR BANK
@ MPSN to REPLACE C506

Exhibit B to the PCA for Midpoint Page 3 of 29 Attachment 1

1.0 Project Description

Replace the existing C506 series capacitor bank at Idaho Power’s Midpoint (MPSN) Transmission Station with a new Series
Capacitor Bank. The vendor would need to furnish, construct, commission and provide training on, a 525KV, 3-phase, 60
Hz, 2750 amps/phase series capacitor bank for outdoor use as described in this specification consisting of 2 segments. The
bank shall provide approximately 75% (52 Ohms) line reactance compensation for the roughly 130 miles of 525kV
transmission line between Idaho Power’s Midpoint and Hemingway (HMWY Transmission Stations. The details of the
scope are further refined below.

2.0 Description of Existing Facilities

The scope of this Project, MPSN210001, is to install a new 525kV series capacitor bank at the Midpoint Transmission
Station. It will replace the existing series capacitor bank that was installed in 1980. It is located on the 525kV Midpoint-
Hemingway 525kV transmission line. The new bank will be installed in the same physical location as the old bank utilizing
new foundations. The existing disconnect air-breaks, grounding airbreaks, bypass airbreak switch and the bypass circuit
breakers are fairly new and will need to be reused. The new series capacitor bank will be under the line for the capacitor
bank so there will be overhead constraints. Line outages will be provided. The foundations of the old bank will be removed,
and new foundations will have been constructed prior to the construction of the new series capacitor bank. See additional
documents released for additional existing facility information.
3.0 Site Conditions

The new series bank shall be designed to operate in accordance with the requirements of this specification under the
following site conditions:

 The approximate elevation of the Midpoint site is 3900 feet.
 The design ambient temperature shall be -30C to +40C.
 The bank shall be designed for 1/4" ice with a 4psf wind at 15F in accordance with NESC section 250C for a
medium loading area.
 There are no site-specific chemical, damaging fumes or vapors, explosive gasses or salt spray exposure
considerations.
 The bank shall be designed to meet IBC seismic site class D requirements.
 The equipment will be subject to windblown dust.
 The equipment may be subject to wind gusts as high as 100 mph.
 The capacitor bank will be less than 750ft from the control building.

4.0 General Requirements, Scope and Demarcation

4.1 The series capacitor bank with all associated capacitors, control and protection equipment shall be designed,
manufactured, and tested in accordance with the latest applicable ANSI, IEEE and NEMA standards that cover
series capacitors in power systems.
4.2 The series capacitor bank shall be delivered complete with all capacitors, elevating structures, buswork, support
insulators and columns, bank and bus interconnections, specified control and protection equipment, and all
interconnecting control and protection cabling on the platform and to ground control centers, to make a complete
bank assembly. The existing ABB bypass circuit Breakers (LTB E1 Bypass, 1HSB435416-11 42) will be reused.
No bypass breakers are to be furnished by vendor.
4.3 The series capacitor bank shall utilize a protective system, which includes metal oxide varistors (plus operating
spare MOV's), bypass breakers and capacitor discharge current damping reactors. A Triggered spark gap is
optional if needed but is not preferred. Bidder shall indicate the number of spare MOV’s that will be provided per
phase and what percentage of the total MOV’s supplied this number represents. The bank shall be designed for a
nominal current of 2750 amps/phase.
1/21/2022 SPECIFICATION TO
FURNISH, CONSTRUCT and COMMISSION
A 525KV SERIES CAPACITOR BANK
@ MPSN to REPLACE C506

Exhibit B to the PCA for Midpoint Page 4 of 29 Attachment 1

4.4 The bank shall be self-cooled, open-rack construction, suitable for continuous operation under the specified
operating conditions.
4.5 The design of the bank shall utilize either fuseless or internally fused capacitor cans.
4.6 Platform access for maintenance shall be provided via a permanently mounted and grounded push-up ladder.
Decking shall be provided over the entire platform to allow personnel access to all equipment on the platform from
the ladder access point. All walkways shall be at least 3 feet wide. Handrails and kick-plates shall be provided
around the perimeter of the platform for personnel safety. Handrails, access gate, and kick-plates shall also be
provided around floor openings/access holes. Railings where the ladders access the platform shall be removable or
replaced with a chain. The ability to add Kirk key locks to each ladder must be provided.
4.7 Non-ceramic insulators are acceptable.
4.8 All painted surfaces, capacitor cans and station post insulators shall be ANSI 70 gray or equivalent IEC paint color.
Paint life shall equal expected Bank life.
4.9 The supplier shall furnish one complete set of tools, wrenches or equipment that is required for assembling,
dismantling, repairing, field testing or maintenance of the equipment.
4.10 Each bank design shall be as low profile as practical.
4.11 The platforms need to be designed so that the bus enters one end of the platform and exits the other end of each
platform. Refer to attachments of the RFB for layout drawings.
4.12 All 120VAC outlets in the vendor supplied control cabinets shall be of the standard United States 120v outlet plug.
4.13 The bank shall have bird guarding that is supplied by the vendor on all capacitor bushings and on any other
bushing that may be vulnerable to bird strikes. Also, all interconnecting wire should be insulated.
4.14 All relays in control cabinets shall be labeled with their function by the vendor.
4.15 Capacitor Racks and all associated busing shall be designed such that all capacitor cans may be removed from the
racks without the removal of any busing or wiring, except the wiring of that said capacitor can.
4.16 Platform shall be designed to meet IEEE 693.
4.17 Platform size can be no wider than 30 feet. Length can be as much as 90 feet.
4.18 Ground conductor shall be bolted to structures by means of a Cadweld Type LA, two-hole, tin plated lug.
4.19 Vendor can use either welded or bolted fitting for their bus work. There should be a 4-hole NEMA pad for IPC to
connect to.
4.20 A one-day safety meeting will be required for all employees working onsite on the project. A class date/time will
be coordinated once RFB is awarded.
4.21 Foundations to be designed to have a minimum distance of 6” above ground and shall be designed to meet IEEE
693 and ACI 318.
4.22 The Vendor shall include qualified supervision during installation, commissioning and training. It shall include an
onsite training course aimed at maintenance people, technicians and system operators. Content shall include a
complete description of operation of the bank, bank inspection, recommended maintenance and testing. Idaho
Power to determine whether training was completed to our satisfaction or whether additional training is required.
Additional training shall be at no cost to Idaho Power, and shall be coordinated through representative listed herein.
4.23 The warranty period shall be for a minimum of 5 years from the in-service date of the series capacitor bank. All
design and manufacturing defects detected during any factory, installation or subsequent field tests shall be
1/21/2022 SPECIFICATION TO
FURNISH, CONSTRUCT and COMMISSION
A 525KV SERIES CAPACITOR BANK
@ MPSN to REPLACE C506

Exhibit B to the PCA for Midpoint Page 5 of 29 Attachment 1

corrected by the manufacturer to the satisfaction of Idaho Power at no additional cost to Idaho Power. The Vendor
shall undertake to remedy any defect in the delivered service and software resulting from faulty design, materials,
or workmanship.
4.24 The Vendor shall supply baseline documentation to meet NERC CIP-010-1 & NERC CIP-007-5 standards
4.24.1 Software and Software version
4.24.2 Description of Ports & Services
4.25 Three (3) sets of Final hard copy drawings & documentation and a complete set of electronic documents.
4.26 One (1) set of spare parts based on the scope of supply.
4.27 The software delivered shall be the most up to date version at the time of Factory Acceptance Testing. The delivery
of software updates or software patches are not included in the scope of the work.

4.28 The Vendor can assume that the existing auxiliary services are sufficient and can be re-used. Upgrade of auxiliary
AC/DC supplies are not included in the scope and shall be handled by IPC if they are necessary. The Vendor shall
supply AC and DC load requirements of the new equipment so that IPC may determine if the local AC and DC
supply is adequate.
4.29 Idaho Power estimates the total “Outage Period” to be twelve (12) weeks with approximately three (3) weeks
dedicated for demolition and removal of the old bank and its foundations. Three (3) weeks for the installation and
curing of the new foundations. Three (3) weeks for the installation of the new series capacitor bank and three (3)
weeks for the commissioning and training.
4.30 The Vendor shall supply space requirements for vendor supplied control equipment that will reside within the
Control Building.
4.31 Vendor will perform a Factory Acceptance Test (FAT) of the control system. Factory Acceptance Test dates will
be made available to IPC at least 60 days before the start of the FAT. Travel and expenses are not included in the
price. The equipment supplied will substitute the existing equipment with identical and in some cases, improved
functionality.
4.32 The Vendor shall not be held responsible or liable for delays attributed to the dismantling of the old series capacitor
bank performed by IPC.
4.33 The Vendor is not responsible for the SC building and existing heat and air-condition systems. If required, IPC is
responsible for any changes to the building or on the heat and air- condition systems.
4.34 Civil work and civil design is not included in the Vendors scope of works. The vendor will be required to submit
foundation drawings and requirements that agree with IPC Geotech reports.
4.35 If applicable, Local, state, and/or federal licenses and permits are the responsibility of IPC.
4.36 Lockout/Tag Out is the responsibility of IPC and the Vendor
4.37 IPC will ensure the Vendor & the Vendors sub-contractors have access to site during the planned upgrade.
4.38 IPC will be responsible for receiving of shipments and arrange temporary storage until equipment is installed.
4.39 IPC will be responsible for review and approval of designs.
4.40 IPC will be responsible for storage of Spare Parts.
4.41 The Vendor can also bid other options that they feel IPC might be interested in considering.
1/21/2022 SPECIFICATION TO
FURNISH, CONSTRUCT and COMMISSION
A 525KV SERIES CAPACITOR BANK
@ MPSN to REPLACE C506

Exhibit B to the PCA for Midpoint Page 6 of 29 Attachment 1

4.42 All fiber supplied by the vendor shall be dual-mode and non-armored.

5.0 Technical Requirements

Bank design requirements to be considered in the design, assembly and testing of each bank:

5.1 Voltage Requirements:
Nominal System Voltage 525kV
Normal System Operating Voltage 498.75kV-551.25kV
Basic Impulse Insulation Level (BIL) 1550kV, crest min. (See Note 9)
60Hz Withstand, Dry 610kV, rms (See Note 9)
60Hz Withstand, Wet 525kV, rms (See Note 9)

5.2 Clearances Requirements:
Minimum Phase-to-Phase, Metal-to-Metal distance: 9’-11” (Note 13, 14)
Minimum Phase-to-Ground Distance: 8’-8” (Note 13, 14)
Low Bus Height above top of Foundations: 20’- 0” (Note 12, 15)
High Bus Height above top of Foundations: 32’-0” (Note 12, 15)
Minimum Vertical Clearance from Live parts to Grade: 18’- 10” (Note 12, 14)
Minimum Horizontal Clearance from Live parts to Grade: 13’- 4” (Note 12, 14)
Minimum Overhead Conductor Clearance above roads: 24’-3” (Note 14)

5.3 System Requirements:
MPSN-HMWY Line Length/Reactance Without Bank 130 miles/69.3
MPSN- HMWY Line Compensation 75%
Nominal Series Capacitor Reactance 52
Nominal Reactive Power 1179.8 MVAr total
30-Minute Emergency (135%) Series Reactive Power 2150.1 MVAr total
Nominal single-Phase Current 2750 Amps
30-Minute Emergency (135%) Current 3713 Amps
Number of Segments 2
Method of Grounding Solidly Grounded
SSR Requirements No . (See Note 11)
Total Back-up Fault Clearing Time 10-10.5 cycles
Minimum reclosing delay for adjacent lines @HMWY-SMLK 40 cycles (See Note 3 and 7)

1/21/2022 SPECIFICATION TO
FURNISH, CONSTRUCT and COMMISSION
A 525KV SERIES CAPACITOR BANK
@ MPSN to REPLACE C506

Exhibit B to the PCA for Midpoint Page 7 of 29 Attachment 1

5.4 Bank Inserted

External Faults (Existing System):
Max. Phase Fault Current & Duration 8.12 kA, 10.5 cycles (See Note 10)
Max. Single Line to Ground Fault Current & Duration 7.38 kA, 10.5 cycles (See Note 10)

External Faults (Post B2H System):
Max. Phase Fault Current & Duration 8.29 kA, 10.5 cycles (See Note 10)
Max. Single Line to Ground Fault Current & Duration 7.44 kA, 10.5 cycles (See Note 10)

External Faults (Post B2H and Gateway System):
Max. Phase Fault Current & Duration 8.12 kA, 10.5 cycles (See Note 10)
Max. Single Line to Ground Fault Current & Duration 7.38 kA, 10.5 cycles (See Note 10)

5.5 Bank Fully Bypassed
Internal Faults (Existing System):
Max. Phase Fault Current & Duration 6.04 kA, 3.5 cycles
Max. Single Line to Ground Fault Current & Duration 6.12 kA, 3.5 cycles

Internal Faults (Post B2H System):
Max. Phase Fault Current & Duration 7.54 kA, 3.5 cycles
Max. Single Line to Ground Fault Current & Duration 8.36 kA, 3.5 cycles

Internal Faults (Post B2H and Gateway System):
Max. Phase Fault Current & Duration 10.26 kA, 3.5 cycles
Max. Single Line to Ground Fault Current & Duration 11.05 kA, 3.5 cycles

External Faults (Existing System):
Max. Phase Fault Current & Duration 8.12 kA, 10.5 cycles (See Note 10)
Max. Single Line to Ground Fault Current & Duration 7.38 kA, 10.5 cycles (See Note 10)

External Faults (Post B2H System):
Max. Phase Fault Current & Duration 8.12 kA, 10.5 cycles (See Note 10)
Max. Single Line to Ground Fault Current & Duration 7.38 kA, 10.5 cycles (See Note 10)

External Faults (Post B2H and Gateway System):
Max. Phase Fault Current & Duration 8.12 kA, 10.5 cycles (See Note 10)
Max. Single Line to Ground Fault Current & Duration 7.38 kA, 10.5 cycles (See Note 10)

5.6 Bank Half Bypassed

External Faults (Existing System):
Max. Phase Fault Current & Duration 8.12 kA, 10.5 cycles (See Note 10)
Max. Single Line to Ground Fault Current & Duration 7.38 kA, 10.5 cycles (See Note 10)

External Faults (Post B2H System):
Max. Phase Fault Current & Duration 8.65 kA, 10.5 cycles (See Note 10)
Max. Single Line to Ground Fault Current & Duration 7.38 kA, 10.5 cycles (See Note 10)

External Faults (Post B2H and Gateway System):
Max. Phase Fault Current & Duration 8.12 kA, 10.5 cycles (See Note 10)
Max. Single Line to Ground Fault Current & Duration 7.38 kA, 10.5 cycles (See Note 10)

Note: For more short circuit and modeling information including system diagrams please see Appendix C.

1/21/2022 SPECIFICATION TO
FURNISH, CONSTRUCT and COMMISSION
A 525KV SERIES CAPACITOR BANK
@ MPSN to REPLACE C506

Exhibit B to the PCA for Midpoint Page 8 of 29 Attachment 1

Internal Faults (Existing System, Bank Bypassed) @550kV
Fault Current Measured at MPSN C506
L-N
(kA)
L-L
(kA)
3PH
(kA)
MPSN C506 Close-In Fault (Location 1) 6.12 5.15 6.04
50% of MPSN- HMWY Line Fault (Location 2) 2.61 2.99 3.55
HMWY-MPSN Close-In Fault (Location 3) 1.72 2.08 2.47
Table 1. Internal Fault Current, Bank Bypassed, Existing System

Internal Faults (Post B2H System, Bank Bypassed) @550kV
Fault Current Measured at MPSN C506
L-N
(kA)
L-L
(kA)
3PH
(kA)
MPSN C506 Close-In Fault (Location 1) 8.36 6.48 7.54
50% of MPSN- HMWY Line Fault (Location 2) 3.06 3.53 4.00
HMWY-MPSN Close-In Fault (Location 3) 2.25 2.42 2.71
Table 2. Internal Fault Current, Bank Bypassed, Post B2H System

Internal Faults (Post B2H & Gateway System, Bank Bypassed)
@550kV
Fault Current Measured at MPSN C506
L-N
(kA)
L-L
(kA)
3PH
(kA)
MPSN C506 Close-In Fault (Location 1) 11.05 8.83 10.26
50% of MPSN- HMWY Line Fault (Location 2) 2.90 3.14 3.62
HMWY-MPSN Close-In Fault (Location 3) 1.02 0.90 1.04
Table 3. Internal Fault Current, Bank Bypassed, Post B2H & Gateway System

External Faults (Existing System, Bank Inserted) @550kV
Fault Current Measured at MPSN C506
L-N
(kA)
L-L
(kA)
3PH
(kA)
HMWY 500 Bus (Location 4) 2.73 3.99 4.61
Burns – SMLK Close-In Fault (Location 5) 1.47 4.13 4.78
HMWY 230 Bus (Location 6) 1.90 2.13 2.51
MPSN 500 Bus (Location 7) 2.91 3.76 4.36
MPSN 345 Bus (Location 8) 2.44 2.83 3.29
Table 4. External Faults, Bank Inserted, Existing System

External Faults (Existing System, Bank Bypassed) @550kV
Fault Current Measured at MPSN C506
L-N
(kA)
L-L
(kA)
3PH
(kA)
HMWY 500 Bus (Location 4) 1.72 2.08 2.47
Burns – SMLK Close-In Fault (Location 5) 0.96 2.13 2.55
HMWY 230 Bus (Location 6) 1.25 1.26 1.51
MPSN 500 Bus (Location 7) 1.78 2.05 2.40
MPSN 345 Bus (Location 8) 1.58 1.73 2.02
Table 5. External Faults, Bank Bypassed, Existing System

External Faults (Post B2H System, Bank Inserted) @550kV
Fault Current Measured at MPSN C506
L-N
(kA)
L-L
(kA)
3PH
(kA)
HMWY 500 Bus (Location 4) 3.92 4.76 5.46
Burns – SMLK Close-In Fault (Location 5) 2.09 4.60 5.23
HMWY 230 Bus (Location 6) 2.88 3.42 3.89
MPSN 500 Bus (Location 7) 3.29 3.63 4.21
MPSN 345 Bus (Location 8) 3.21 3.51 4.08
HMWY-LHRN Close-In Fault (Location 9) 7.44 7.15 8.29
Table 6. External Faults, Bank Inserted, Post B2H System
1/21/2022 SPECIFICATION TO
FURNISH, CONSTRUCT and COMMISSION
A 525KV SERIES CAPACITOR BANK
@ MPSN to REPLACE C506

Exhibit B to the PCA for Midpoint Page 9 of 29 Attachment 1

External Faults (Post B2H System, Bank Bypassed) @550kV
Fault Current Measured at MPSN C506
L-N
(kA)
L-L
(kA)
3PH
(kA)
HMWY 500 Bus (Location 4) 2.25 2.42 2.71
Burns – SMLK Close-In Fault (Location 5) 1.31 2.31 2.56
HMWY 230 Bus (Location 6) 1.84 2.07 2.35
MPSN 500 Bus (Location 7) 2.40 2.71 3.17
MPSN 345 Bus (Location 8) 2.32 2.82 2.52
HMWY-LHRN Close-In Fault (Location 9) 5.95 6.82 8.18
Table 7. External Faults, Bank Bypassed, Post B2H System

External Faults (Post B2H System & Gateway, Bank Inserted)
@550kV
Fault Current Measured at MPSN C506
L-N
(kA)
L-L
(kA)
3PH
(kA)
HMWY 500 Bus (Location 4) 2.61 2.97 3.40
Burns – SMLK Close-In Fault (Location 5) 1.14 2.88 3.30
HMWY 230 Bus (Location 6) 1.66 1.80 2.03
MPSN 500 Bus (Location 7) 1.81 1.96 2.28
MPSN 345 Bus (Location 8) 1.61 1.69 1.98
HMWY-LHRN Close-In Fault (Location 9) 4.57 2.81 3.24
MPSN -HMWY #2 Close-In Fault (Location 10) 3.38 3.41 3.85
CDHL 500 Bus (Location 11) 0.58 0.98 1.11
CDHL – PPLS Close-In Fault (Location 12) 1.78 1.46 1.68
Table 8. External Faults, Bank Inserted, Post B2H & Gateway System

External Faults (Post B2H System & Gateway, Bank Bypassed)
@550kV
Fault Current Measured at MPSN C506
L-N
(kA)
L-L
(kA)
3PH
(kA)
HMWY 500 Bus (Location 4) 1.02 0.90 1.04
Burns – SMLK Close-In Fault (Location 5) 0. 41 0.87 1.00
HMWY 230 Bus (Location 6) 0.64 0.56 0.64
MPSN 500 Bus (Location 7) 0.68 0.63 0.75
MPSN 345 Bus (Location 8) 0.59 0.54 0.75
HMWY-LHRN Close-In Fault (Location 9) 2.47 0.93 1.07
MPSN -HMWY #2 Close-In Fault (Location 10) 1.61 1.59 1.81
CDHL 500 Bus (Location 11) 0.18 0.31 0.36
CDHL – PPLS Close-In Fault (Location 12) 0.57 0.46 0.53
Table 9. External Faults, Bank Bypassed, Post B2H & Gateway System

1/21/2022 SPECIFICATION TO
FURNISH, CONSTRUCT and COMMISSION
A 525KV SERIES CAPACITOR BANK
@ MPSN to REPLACE C506

Exhibit B to the PCA for Midpoint Page 10 of 29 Attachment 1

Breaker Failure Scenarios @550kV
Fault Current Measured at MPSN C506
L-N
(kA)
L-L
(kA)
3PH
(kA)
A. HMWY 500 (Location 4), MPSN-HMWY #2 and CDHL-HMWY open 4.38 5.67 6.54
B. HMWY-LGHN 500 (Location 9), MPSN-HMWY #2 and CDHL-HMWY open 7.38 7.03 8.12
C. MPSN-HMWY #2 Close-In Fault (Location 10), HMWY open 2.40 2.93 3.24
D. MPSN 500, HMWY-MPSN#2 and CDHL-MPSN open 3.36 3.76 4.38
E. MPSN 345, HMWY-MPSN#2 and CDHL-MPSN open 3.00 3.20 3.74
Table 10. External Fault Current-Breaker Failure/ Unsuccessful Auto Reclosing, Bank Inserted

External Faults (Existing System, Half Bank Bypassed)
@550kV
Fault Current Measured at MPSN C506
L-N
(kA)
L-L
(kA)
3PH
(kA)
HMWY 500 Bus (Location 4) 2.10 2.76 3.23
Burns – SMLK Close-In Fault (Location 5) 1.16 2.83 3.33
HMWY 230 Bus (Location 6) 1.50 1.56 1.89
MPSN 500 Bus (Location 7) 2.21 2.65 3.12
MPSN 345 Bus (Location 8) 1.92 2.14 2.51
Table 11. External Faults, Half Bank Bypassed, Existing System

External Faults (Post B2H System, Half Bank Bypassed)
@550kV
Fault Current Measured at MPSN C506
L-N
(kA)
L-L
(kA)
3PH
(kA)
HMWY 500 Bus (Location 4) 2.85 3.17 3.63
Burns – SMLK Close-In Fault (Location 5) 1.61 3.05 3.45
HMWY 230 Bus (Location 6) 2.27 2.56 2.91
MPSN 500 Bus (Location 7) 2.87 3.26 3.79
MPSN 345 Bus (Location 8) 2.78 3.26 3.79
HMWY-LHRN Close-In Fault (Location 9) 6.97 7.21 8.65
Table 12. External Faults, Half Bank Bypassed, Post B2H System

External Faults (Post B2H System & Gateway, Half Bank
Bypassed) @550kV
Fault Current Measured at MPSN C506
L-N
(kA)
L-L
(kA)
3PH
(kA)
HMWY 500 Bus (Location 4) 1.42 1.38 1.59
Burns – SMLK Close-In Fault (Location 5) 0.59 1.35 1.54
HMWY 230 Bus (Location 6) 0.90 0.85 0.97
MPSN 500 Bus (Location 7) 0.97 0.96 1.13
MPSN 345 Bus (Location 8) 0.84 0.84 0.98
HMWY-LHRN Close-In Fault (Location 9) 3.05 1.40 1.61
MPSN-HMWY #2 Close-In Fault (Location 10) 2.20 2.16 2.45
CDHL 500 Bus (Location 11) 0.28 0.48 0.54
CDHL – PPLS Close-In Fault (Location 12) 0.86 0.40 0.69
Table 13. External Faults, Half Bank Bypassed, Post B2H & Gateway System

1/21/2022 SPECIFICATION TO
FURNISH, CONSTRUCT and COMMISSION
A 525KV SERIES CAPACITOR BANK
@ MPSN to REPLACE C506

Exhibit B to the PCA for Midpoint Page 11 of 29 Attachment 1

Notes:
1. Table 1 to Table 9 list the internal and external fault locations in this study.
2. Table 7 list the external faults with unsuccessful auto reclosing or breaker failure backup clearing considered in this study.
3. For the Breaker Failure Scenarios listed in Table 7:

Relay Pickup Time = 1.0-1.5 cycles
Breaker Failure Delay = 7 cycles
Breaker Operating Time = 2 cycles
Total Backup clearing Time = 10-10.5 cycles

4. 500kV lines have single pole tripping and reclosing for single line to ground faults. One reclose attempt is allowed before
trip to three phase lockout. Single pole tripping and reclosing is not attempted following multi-phase faults.
5. 230kV and 345kV system has three pole tripping and reclosing for all faults except three phase faults. One reclose attempt is
allowed before trip to lockout.
6: 135% of the Rated Maximum Continuous Load Current.
7: One reclose attempt is allowed before trip to lockout. Reclosing is not attempted following three phase faults. 3.5 cycle trip,
50 Cycle Open interval, 3.5 Cycle trip (MPSN-HMWY). 3.5 cycle trip, 40 Cycle Open interval, 3.5 Cycle trip (HMWY-
SMLK)
8: Left Blank
9: As per IEEE Standard 824-1994 Table-4.
10: The Max. Phase and L-N Fault Current includes outages and Breaker Failure Fault duty.
11: There are no expected SSR issues.
12: NESC Table 124-1
13: IEEE C37.32-1996, Table 5 of the American National Standard for “High-Voltage Air Disconnect Switches, Interrupter
switches, Fault Initiating switches, ground switches, bus supports and Accessories”.
14: IPCO’s SEM 11-031-01 Table 1
15: IPCO’s SEM 11-031-01 Table 3
16: IEEE P1726

1/21/2022 SPECIFICATION TO
FURNISH, CONSTRUCT and COMMISSION
A 525KV SERIES CAPACITOR BANK
@ MPSN to REPLACE C506

Exhibit B to the PCA for Midpoint Page 12 of 29 Attachment 1

6.0 Control and Operational Requirements

6.1 The bank shall have the ability to bypass each segment and insert each segment individually and together
by local or remote manual or automatic signal.
6.2 The bank shall be designed to operate with both segments inserted or with only one segment inserted.
The MOVs shall be sized to allow either segment to be bypassed during normal operation.
6.3 Inputs shall be made available to accept an external signal from the Borah West and Midpoint-
Hemingway-Summer Lake RAS to bypass this series capacitor bank. The RAS input should bypass both
segments of the bank but not lockout the series capacitor requiring local reset. Following a bypass from
the RAS the system operator needs to have the capability via SCADA to insert the bank manually.
6.4 The bank’s isolating airbreaks, grounding airbreaks and the bypass airbreak switches along with the
bypass circuit breakers shall be re-used and will be supplied by Idaho Power. The airbreaks are gang-
operated, and their sequence of operation shall be key-interlocked with the operation of the bank. The A1
interlock of the KIRK key-interlock system shall be provided by bidder and shall be located in the
control cubicle as specified by Idaho Power. Idaho Power will supply the vendor the Kirk Key number
that will be utilized. The operation of the bypass switch will be permitted only after the bypass breaker
has been placed in the proper position. The operation of the isolating switches will be permitted only
after the bypass switch has been placed in the proper position. Separate capacitor manual grounding
switches shall be key interlocked with the isolating switches to ground both sides of the bank after all
isolating switches have been opened.
6.5 Sufficient room shall be left on the platform for additional MOV’s if they are needed when the fault
current potential increases.

6.6 MOV temperature modeling shall utilize an ambient air temperature sensor so that the most efficient re-
insertion times can be realized.

6.7 The bank shall be designed so as not to bypass during an external fault, at maximum ambient
temperature unless the stated external L-L or L-N fault currents in Section 6 is exceeded. External 500kV
transmission lines have single phase tripping with one reclosing attempt for single phase to ground faults.
Note: See Appendix C for additional requirements.

6.8 On an internal single line to ground fault the line protection scheme issues single pole tripping and one
reclosing attempt before three-phase lock out. The protection scheme issues three pole trips with no
reclosing for all other faults involving more than one phase.

6.9 When the line is detected open, the bank shall be automatically bypassed. After 10 seconds, it shall be
automatically re-inserted if the following conditions are true: the line is sensed as closed and it was not in
the bypassed state at the time the line was detected open. If the line is still open after 10 seconds, or the
bank was bypassed at the time the line opened, the bank shall not automatically re-insert. No alarm shall
be indicated, and SCADA re-insertion is allowed once the line is energized again and all protection
functions are clear.

6.10 Bank control interlocks and permissives shall not preclude the manual operation of the bypass breaker
during periods of bank maintenance.

6.11 Bank control shall utilize a self-monitoring industrial grade computer-based or PLC-based system. The
manual control shall utilize a Human Machine Interface (HMI). IPC will provide a manual switch to be
interfaced with vendor control system.

1/21/2022 SPECIFICATION TO
FURNISH, CONSTRUCT and COMMISSION
A 525KV SERIES CAPACITOR BANK
@ MPSN to REPLACE C506

Exhibit B to the PCA for Midpoint Page 13 of 29 Attachment 1

6.12 The system shall have the ability to add or delete users form all devices and networks. Idaho Power shall
be furnished with all information needed to add or subtract said users and to change all passwords. This
is needed to comply with all NERC CIP regulations.

6.13 A Local/Remote switch shall be supplied on the control system cabinets to facilitate the operation of the
bank locally that shall prohibit/block SCADA operation of the series capacitor bank.

6.14 IPCO shall supply space requirements for vendor supplied control equipment within the Control
Building.

6.15 Idaho Power shall supply AC and DC load requirements of their equipment.

6.16 Auxiliary power available to control building and equipment will be 125 VDC, 120/240 VAC single
phase.

6.17 Means shall be incorporated into design of each platform such that temporary grounding leads may be
attached.

1/21/2022 SPECIFICATION TO
FURNISH, CONSTRUCT and COMMISSION
A 525KV SERIES CAPACITOR BANK
@ MPSN to REPLACE C506

Exhibit B to the PCA for Midpoint Page 14 of 29 Attachment 1

7.0 Protection and Alarming Requirements
7.1 Bank protection shall utilize a self-monitoring, fully redundant computer-based or PLC-based system,
with an individual HMI per bank.
7.2 The bank shall utilize a redundant two-protection-system design. If a problem develops involving one of
the two protection systems, an alarm will be sent, and the second protection system shall take over
automatically. If the failure occurs when the other system is not in service, the bypass breaker shall be
closed and locked out.
7.3 The bank protection shall provide, but not be limited to, the protection functions per phase as described in
this section.
7.3.1 Capacitor Bank Unbalance Protection: The capacitor bank unbalance protection shall provide at
least three (3) operation levels settings (that shall be determined by Idaho Power) with
independent time delays. The levels are alarming for minor cans over-voltage and bypass to
lockout for can voltages exceeding 110% of rated can voltage.
7.3.2 Flashover to Platform Protection: The flashover to platform protection shall be current based,
measuring the current between the main components on the platform and the platform itself.
Operation shall cause a bypass to lockout condition and phase indication.
7.3.3 Bypass Gap Protection: The bypass gap protection shall be a current based system with time
delay to monitor the current in the gap. In the case of a prolonged gap arcing, the capacitor shall
be bypassed to lockout with phase indication.
7.3.4 Bypass Breaker Failure Protection (during a control operation): The bypass breaker failure
protection shall provide for both failure to bypass (close) and failure to insert (trip). After the
expected operating time of the breaker expires, a failure to bypass (close) shall result in the
system only alarming. Failure to insert (trip) shall bypass (close) all three phases and result in
alarming.
7.3.5 Varistor Overload Protection: The varistor overload protection shall bypass, alarm, and lock out
for a varistor overload condition.
7.3.6 Varistor Failure Protection: The varistor failure protection shall be a current based system with
two setting levels, each having a time delay to detect abnormal levels through the varistors
continuously. Upon detection the bank shall be bypassed to lockout.
7.3.7 Sub-harmonic Protection: The sub-harmonic protection shall have a range of 5 to 35 Hz with an
adjustable setting of 3 to 20% of the rated capacitor current. Upon detection of sub-harmonic
oscillations an output shall be available for alarming and recording initiation.
7.3.8 Capacitor Bank Overload Protection: The capacitor bank overload protection shall bypass, alarm,
and lock out for a capacitor bank overload condition.
7.4 All platform protection equipment shall be housed in a weatherproof cabinet. Power for platform mounted
equipment shall come from a line current supply or line potential supply. No batteries will be permitted on
the platform.
7.5 Each bank shall utilize a fiber optic signal transmission system between ground control and the bank
platform with redundant fiber optic columns and signal conversion equipment on each phase. Fiber optic
cable problems or fiber optic interface problems shall be alarmed in the ground control station. Spare
fibers in each column shall be provided and quantity available indicated in the bid package. Supplier shall
provide all fiber optic cable required for entire installation.
7.6 Separate current transformer functions shall be provided for each phase for each protection system. CTs
shall function to provide condition information about, but not necessarily be limited to, capacitor current,
1/21/2022 SPECIFICATION TO
FURNISH, CONSTRUCT and COMMISSION
A 525KV SERIES CAPACITOR BANK
@ MPSN to REPLACE C506

Exhibit B to the PCA for Midpoint Page 15 of 29 Attachment 1

bypass breaker current, capacitor unbalance current, varistor current, gap current and platform fault
current.
7.7 The voltage-current characteristics of the columns of MOV disks must be carefully matched at the factory
to insure balanced current distribution among the columns.
7.8 Each bank shall be supplied with an ambient temperature sensor that feeds into the MOV protection
scheme.
7.9 The annunciator points shown on Appendix B shall be provided at the master station and available on the
GUI. Provisions shall also be made for parallel output contacts of annunciator points for remote indication
or auxiliary functions. Contacts shall be dry type rated for at least 10 amps at 130VDC.

8.0 Communications and Data Recording Requirements
8.1 The manufacturer shall supply digital fault recorder and sequence of events recorder capability for at least
those points shown on Appendix D. If these functions (DFR/SER) cannot be provided or does not meet
Idaho Power’s requirements then the manufacturer shall provide, at a minimum, access to the points as
shown in Appendix D. If required by Idaho Power the manufacturer shall supply the necessary equipment
to convert the signals listed in Appendix D to a traditional analog CT current signal.
8.2 The manufacturer shall supply a means for IPCo to install a remote connection to the DFR and SER data.
8.3 The preferred communications protocol for connection to the IPC SCADA system is DNP3.
8.4 The proposed PLC/Controlling System can be directly wired to for control and status update in case IPC
requires more direct control due to RAS.

9.0 Testing
9.1 The manufacturer shall be responsible for all design and production tests on the capacitor units, all bank
components, and the assembled bank to the extent possible to assure that the bank and components will
perform satisfactorily. These tests, both electrical and mechanical, shall be in accordance with the
requirements of the latest versions of applicable ANSI, IEEE and NEMA standards and this specification.
9.2 Component testing shall include, but not be limited to, that shown on Appendix E.
9.3 Certified test reports shall be supplied for each test performed and all equipment tested.
9.4 A list of anticipated factory/field acceptance tests with expected results-to-pass shall be provided with bid
package. This shall include a quality assurance procedure that ensures that all equipment is checked for
completeness and electrically tested for operability prior to being put into service.
9.5 The waiver of any test or the witnessing of any test by Idaho Power shall not constitute a release of the
manufacturer’s responsibility to fully meet the requirements of this specification.
9.6 Idaho Power representatives will, with sufficient notice, be allowed entry to the manufacturer’s facilities
to witness any stage of fabrication and any or all testing of the equipment being purchased under this
specification.

1/21/2022 SPECIFICATION TO
FURNISH, CONSTRUCT and COMMISSION
A 525KV SERIES CAPACITOR BANK
@ MPSN to REPLACE C506

Exhibit B to the PCA for Midpoint Page 16 of 29 Attachment 1

10.0 Line Outage Considerations

Idaho Power will take a one-week line outage at the beginning of the project to remove the existing Series Capacitor Bank
and its foundations. Once the new foundations have been poured and have cured there will be another one-week line outage
to raise the new platforms and populate the main equipment onto the platforms. At the end of commissioning there will be a
three-day line outage to connect the new bank and its bypass switch into the system if needed and to test the line trip
protection functionality.

11.0 References

 IEEE Std. 824-1994: IEEE Standard for Series Capacitors in Power Systems
 IEEE Std. 4-1978: IEEE Standard Techniques for High Voltage Testing
 IEEE Std. 100-1992: The New IEEE Standard Dictionary for Electrical and Electronics Terms
 NESC Table 124-1
 IEEE C37.32-1996: High-Voltage Air Disconnect Switches, Interrupter switches, Fault Initiating switches, ground
switches, bus supports and Accessories
 IPCO’s SEM 11-031-01 Table 1 & Table 3
 IEEE P1726
 IEEE 693
 ACI 318

1/21/2022 SPECIFICATION TO
FURNISH, CONSTRUCT and COMMISSION
A 525KV SERIES CAPACITOR BANK
@ MPSN to REPLACE C506

Exhibit B to the PCA for Midpoint Page 17 of 29 Attachment 1

Appendix A – Left Intentionally Blank

1/21/2022 SPECIFICATION TO
FURNISH, CONSTRUCT and COMMISSION
A 525KV SERIES CAPACITOR BANK
@ MPSN to REPLACE C506

Exhibit B to the PCA for Midpoint Page 18 of 29 Attachment 1

Appendix B - Annunciator Points
Series Capacitor Bank Annunciator Points

1. Capacitor Unbalance Alarm per Phase (set point #1).
2. Capacitor Unbalance Alarm per Phase (set point #2).
2. Capacitor Unbalance Trip per Phase.
3. Capacitor Over-current per Phase.
4. Varistor Conduction per Phase.
5. Varistor Over-temperature per Phase.
6. Varistor Failure per Phase.
7. Gap Conduction per Phase.
8. Prolonged Gap Conduction Per Phase.
9. Bypass Breaker Bypass Initiate Per Phase.
10. Bypass Breaker Trouble per Phase.
11. Bypass Breaker Failure per Phase.
12. Bypass Breaker Pole Disagreement.
13. Bypass Breaker Lockout.
14. Bypass Breaker Blocked Closed.
15. Bypass Breaker Low Pressure per Phase.
16. Platform Fault per Phase.
17. Fiber Optic Link Loss of Signal per Phase.
18. Auxiliary Power Failure.
19. Controller Failure.
20. Platform Flashover.

1/21/2022 SPECIFICATION TO
FURNISH, CONSTRUCT and COMMISSION
A 525KV SERIES CAPACITOR BANK
@ MPSN to REPLACE C506

Exhibit B to the PCA for Midpoint Page 19 of 29 Attachment 1

Appendix C –System Model

HMWY 230
HMWY 500
SMLK
BURNS
MPSN 
500
MPSN 
345
26 
ohm
26 
ohm
123
4
5
78
6

Figure C1. Existing System Model

HMWY 230
HMWY 500
SMLK
BURNS
MPSN 
500
MPSN 
345
26 
ohm
26 
ohm
Longhorn
123
4
5
6
7 8
9
Figure C2. Post B2H System Model

1/21/2022 SPECIFICATION TO
FURNISH, CONSTRUCT and COMMISSION
A 525KV SERIES CAPACITOR BANK
@ MPSN to REPLACE C506

Exhibit B to the PCA for Midpoint Page 20 of 29 Attachment 1

HMWY 230
HMWY 500
SMLK
BURNS
MPSN 
500
MPSN 
34526 
ohm
26 
ohm
Longhorn
CDHL 500
PPLS  500
PPLS
345
12
4
5
3
6
7
8
9
10
11 12

Figure C3. Post B2H & Gateway System Model

1/21/2022 SPECIFICATION TO
FURNISH, CONSTRUCT and COMMISSION
A 525KV SERIES CAPACITOR BANK
@ MPSN to REPLACE C506

Exhibit B to the PCA for Midpoint Page 21 of 29 Attachment 1

Table 1. Network Impedance Data (Shown on 100 MVA Base)
Zero Sequence Positive Sequence Negative Sequence
p.u. p.u. p.u.
R0 X0 B0 R1 X1 B1 R2 X2 B2
Existing System - - - - - - - - -
HMWY- MPSN #1 0.01570 0.10432 1.51755 0.00130 0.02596 2.60050 0.00130 0.02596 2.60050
HMWY – BURNS 0.01487 0.11481 1.49233 0.00129 0.02592 2.60076 0.00129 0.02592 2.60076
BURNS Cap Seg1 - -0.0134 - - -0.0134 - - -0.0134 -
BURNS Cap Seg2 - -0.0134 - - -0.0134 - - -0.0134 -
BURNS - SMLK 0.01288 0.09854 1.28489 0.00111 0.02215 2.21242 0.00111 0.02215 2.21242
MPSN 500/345 #1 Transformer Winding Information and Impedances Below
HMWY 500/230 Transformer Winding Information and Impedances Below
MPSN 345 Source ZS 0.001852 0.013269 - 0.001397 0.012408 - 0.001450 0.012446 -
HMWY 230 Source ZS 0.017134 0.088429 - 0.007224 0.097619 - 0.008285 0.098450 -
SMLK 500 Source ZS 0.007059 0.034058 - 0.000765 0.006529 - 0.000765 0.006529 -

Post B2H System - - - - - - - - -
HMWY – LGHN 0.02533 0.20914 3.96094 0.002460 0.062700 2.88188 0.002460 0.062700 2.88188
HMWY – LGHN
Cap Seg 1 - -0.008205 - - -0.008205 - - -0.008205 -
HMWY – LGHN
Cap Seg 2 - -0.008205 - - -0.008205 - - -0.008205 -
LGHN - HMWY
Cap Seg 1 - -0.008205 - - -0.008205 - - -0.008205 -
LGHN - HMWY
Cap Seg 2 - -0.008205 - - -0.008205 - - -0.008205 -
MPSN 500/345 #2 Transformer Winding Information and Impedances Below
MPSN 345 Source ZS 0.001043 0.007545 - 0.001397 0.012408 - 0.001450 0.012446 -
HMWY 230 Source ZS 0.002721 0.033324 - 0.007224 0.097619 - 0.008285 0.098450 -
SMLK 500 Source ZS 0.007064 0.034125 - 0.000765 0.006529 - 0.000765 0.006529 -
LGHN 500 Source ZS 0.000901 0.009714 - 0.000247 0.005468 - 0.000247 0.005468 -

B2H + Gateway
System - - - - - - - - -
MPSN-HMWY #2 0.00429 0.08316 7.64682 0.00143 0.02772 2.54894 0.00143 0.02772 2.54894
MPSN-HMWY #2
Cap Seg1 - -0.0104 - - -0.0104 - - -0.0104 -
MPSN-HMWY #2
Cap Seg2 - -0.0104 - - -0.0104 - - -0.0104 -
MPSN-CDHL 0.00114 0.02214 1.95210 0.000380 0.007380 0.650700 0.000380 0.007380 0.650700
CDHL-HMWY 0.00348 0.10530 8.88873 0.001160 0.035100 2.962910 0.001160 0.035100 2.962910
HMWY-CDHL
Cap Seg1 - -0.01316 - - -0.01316 - - -0.01316 -
HMWY-CDHL
Cap Seg2 - -0.01316 - - -0.01316 - - -0.01316 -
CDHL-PPLS 0.00258 0.07782 6.48816 0.00086 0.025940 2.16272 0.00086 0.025940 2.16272
CDHL-PPLS
Cap Seg1 - -0.009727 - - -0.009727 - - -0.009727 -
1/21/2022 SPECIFICATION TO
FURNISH, CONSTRUCT and COMMISSION
A 525KV SERIES CAPACITOR BANK
@ MPSN to REPLACE C506

Exhibit B to the PCA for Midpoint Page 22 of 29 Attachment 1

CDHL-PPLS
Cap Seg2 - -0.009727 - - -0.009727 - - -0.009727 -
PPLS 500/345 Transformer Winding Information and Impedances Below
MPSN 345 Source ZS 0.001016 0.007828 - 0.002610 0.022975 - 0.002748 0.023104 -
HMWY 230 Source ZS 0.002140 0.031983 - 0.007003 0.099003 - 0.008104 0.099890 -
SMLK 500 Source ZS 0.007019 0.034050 - 0.000765 0.006529 - 0.000765 0.006529 -
LGHN 500 Source ZS 0.000901 0.009714 - 0.000247 0.005468 - 0.000247 0.005468 -
PPLS 345 Source ZS 0.007826 0.023921 - 0.000996 0.010301 - 0.001069 0.010312 -

Transformers
HMWY 500/230/34.5 Autotransformer Winding H Winding X Winding Y
Winding Connections Wye Auto Wye Auto Delta
Winding Voltage Rating (kV) 525 230 34.5
Positive and Negative Sequence Impedance Data Zero Sequence Impedance Data
H-X H-Y X-Y H-X H-Y X-Y
Base MVA 600 120 120 600 120 120
Percent R @ Winding Base MVA 0.0757667% 0.119% 0.123333% 0.0757667% 0.119% 0.123333%
Percent X @ Winding Base MVA 6.18954% 8.48917% 6.8989% 6.18954% 8.48917% 6.8989%

MPSN1 500/345/34.5 #1Autotransformer
MPSN2 500/345/34.5 #2 Autotransformer
PPLS 500/345/34.5 Autotransformer
Winding H Winding X Winding Y
Winding Connections Wye Auto Wye Auto Delta
Winding Voltage Rating (kV) 500 345 34.5
Positive and Negative Sequence Impedance Data Zero Sequence Impedance Data
H-X H-Y X-Y H-X H-Y X-Y
Base MVA 750 107.625 107.625 750 107.625 107.625
Percent R @ Winding Base MVA 0.036314% 0.481912% 0.488418% 0.036314% 0.481912% 0.488418%
Percent X @ Winding Base MVA 5.37988% 4.63501% 3.67771% 5.37988% 4.63501% 3.67771%

1/21/2022 SPECIFICATION TO
FURNISH, CONSTRUCT and COMMISSION
A 525KV SERIES CAPACITOR BANK
@ MPSN to REPLACE C506

Exhibit B to the PCA for Midpoint Page 23 of 29 Attachment 1

Table 2. Existing System Model Transfer Impedance Data (Shown on 100 MVA Base)

Transfer Impedance Legend
XT1 MPSN506CAP-HMWY500
XT2 MPSN345-HMWY500
XT3 MPSN345-HMWY230
XT4 MPSN506CAP-MPSN345

Zero Sequence Positive Sequence Negative Sequence
p.u. p.u. p.u.
R0 X0 B0 R1 X1 B1 R2 X2 B2
XT1 -0.160992 1.1485386 0 infinite infinite 0 infinite infinite 0
XT2 0.0072581 -0.789141 0 infinite infinite 0 infinite infinite 0
XT3 11.357308 18.343569 0 0.0424495 0.1982724 0 0.0424495 0.1982724 0
XT4 -0.007258 0.7891406 0 infinite infinite 0 infinite infinite 0

1/21/2022 SPECIFICATION TO
FURNISH, CONSTRUCT and COMMISSION
A 525KV SERIES CAPACITOR BANK
@ MPSN to REPLACE C506

Exhibit B to the PCA for Midpoint Page 24 of 29 Attachment 1

Table 3. Post B2H System Model Transfer Impedance Data (Shown on 100 MVA Base)

Transfer Impedance Legend
XT1 MPSN506CAP-HMWY500
XT2 MPSN345-HMWY500
XT3 MPSN345-HMWY230
XT4 MPSN506CAP-MPSN345

Zero Sequence Positive Sequence Negative Sequence
p.u. p.u. p.u.
R0 X0 B0 R1 X1 B1 R2 X2 B2
XT1 -0.160992 1.1485386 0 infinite infinite 0 infinite infinite 0
XT2 0.0072581 -0.789141 0 infinite infinite 0 infinite infinite 0
XT3 11.357308 18.343569 0 0.0424495 0.1982724 0 0.0424495 0.1982724 0
XT4 -0.007258 0.7891406 0 infinite infinite 0 infinite infinite 0

1/21/2022 SPECIFICATION TO
FURNISH, CONSTRUCT and COMMISSION
A 525KV SERIES CAPACITOR BANK
@ MPSN to REPLACE C506

Exhibit B to the PCA for Midpoint Page 25 of 29 Attachment 1

Table 4. B2H+Gateway System Model Transfer Impedance Data (Shown on 100 MVA Base)

Transfer Impedance Legend
XT1 MPSN506CAP-HMWY500
XT2 MPSN345-HMWY500
XT3 MPSN#2CAP-HMWY500
XT4 PPLS345-HMWY230
XT5 MPSN345-HMWY230
XT6 PPLS345-MPSN345
XT7 MPSN506CAP-MPSN345
XT8 MPSN506CAP-MSPN#2CAP
XT9 MPSN#2CAP-MPSN345

Zero Sequence Positive Sequence Negative Sequence
p.u. p.u. p.u.
R0 X0 B0 R1 X1 B1 R2 X2 B2
XT1 -0.110001 0.4446815 0 infinite infinite 0 infinite infinite 0
XT2 0.0350350 -0.309816 0 infinite infinite 0 infinite infinite 0
XT3 -0.120687 0.3408515 0 infinite infinite 0 infinite infinite 0
XT4 5008.8110 3707.5400 0 1.3149000 4.0728717 0 1.3149000 4.0728717 0
XT5 11.302851 18.297794 0 0.0427957 0.2019857 0 0.0427957 0.2019857 0
XT6 0.1172588 0.1902978 0 0.0020111 0.0166375 0 0.0020111 0.0166375 0
XT7 -0.040884 0.7047718 0 infinite infinite 0 infinite infinite 0
XT8 0.2306882 -0.785533 0 infinite infinite 0 infinite infinite 0
XT9 -0.086436 0.5504985 0 infinite infinite 0 infinite infinite 0

1/21/2022 SPECIFICATION TO
FURNISH, CONSTRUCT and COMMISSION
A 525KV SERIES CAPACITOR BANK
@ MPSN to REPLACE C506

Exhibit B to the PCA for Midpoint Page 26 of 29 Attachment 1

Notes:
1. The MOV design must have sufficient energy rating to conduct during external faults without bypassing.
2. The bank is allowed to bypass for internal faults.
3. All impedances are in per unit on a 100 MVA base.
4. Station names:
HMWY = Hemingway
MPSN = Midpoint
SMLK = Summer Lake
LHRN = Longhorn
CDHL = Cedar Hill
PPLS = Populus

1/21/2022 SPECIFICATION TO
FURNISH, CONSTRUCT and COMMISSION
A 525KV SERIES CAPACITOR BANK
@ MPSN to REPLACE C506

Exhibit B to the PCA for Midpoint Page 27 of 29 Attachment 1

Appendix D – SCADA Monitor Points
Series Capacitor Bank Analog Monitor Points

ANALOG:

1. Phase A, total capacitor current
2. Phase A, total varistor current
3. Phase A, bypass gap current
4. Phase A, bypass breaker current
5. Phase A, total series capacitor current
6. Phase A, total capacitor unbalance current
7. Phase B, total capacitor current
8. Phase B, total varistor current
9. Phase B, bypass gap current
10. Phase B, bypass breaker current
11. Phase B, total series capacitor current
12. Phase B, total capacitor unbalance current
13. Phase C, total capacitor current
14. Phase C, total varistor current
15. Phase C, bypass gap current
16. Phase C, bypass breaker current
17. Phase C, total series capacitor current
18. Phase C, total capacitor unbalance current
1/21/2022 SPECIFICATION TO
FURNISH, CONSTRUCT and COMMISSION
A 525KV SERIES CAPACITOR BANK
@ MPSN to REPLACE C506

Exhibit B to the PCA for Midpoint Page 28 of 29 Attachment 1

Appendix D – SCADA Digital Monitor Points
(Continued)
Series Capacitor Bank Digital Monitor Points

DISCRETE (DIGITAL) SIGNALS:

1. Phase A, Bypass breaker status
2. Phase A, Arc Gap conduction
3. Phase A, Bypass breaker trip bus high
4. Phase A, Primary protective relay bypass (close)
5. Phase A, Backup protective relay bypass (close)
6. Phase A, Fiber optic cable failure
7. Phase A, Unbalance alarm level 1
8. Phase A, Unbalance alarm level 2
9. Phase A, Unbalance alarm and bypass (close)
10. Phase B, Bypass breaker status
11. Phase B, Arc Gap conduction
12. Phase B, Bypass breaker trip bus high
13. Phase B, Primary protective relay bypass (close)
14. Phase B, Backup protective relay bypass (close)
15. Phase B, Fiber optic cable failure
16. Phase B, Unbalance alarm level 1
17. Phase B, Unbalance alarm level 2
18. Phase B, Unbalance alarm and bypass (close)
19. Phase C, Bypass breaker status
20. Phase C, Arc Gap conduction
21. Phase C, Bypass breaker trip bus high
22. Phase C, Primary protective relay bypass (close)
23. Phase C, Backup protective relay bypass (close)
24. Phase C, Fiber optic cable failure
25. Phase C, Unbalance alarm level 1
26. Phase C, Unbalance alarm level 2
27. Phase C, Unbalance alarm and bypass (close)

1/21/2022 SPECIFICATION TO
FURNISH, CONSTRUCT and COMMISSION
A 525KV SERIES CAPACITOR BANK
@ MPSN to REPLACE C506

Exhibit B to the PCA for Midpoint Page 29 of 29 Attachment 1

Appendix E - Series Capacitor Bank Component Tests

Capacitor Cans:

Capacitance Measurement
Discharge Resistor Test
Loss Measurement

Varistor:

Energy Absorption Test
Current Sharing Verification
Protective Level Verification
Verification of Low Current Characteristics

Bypass Gap:

Fault Current and Recovery Voltage Tests
Gap Firing Tests

Bypass Breaker:

AC Hi-pot Test
Verify Breaker Opening (insertion) Speed
Verify Breaker Closing (bypass) Speed
Current Draw on All Coils and Motors
Main Contact Resistance (micro-ohms @ 100 amps)
Auxiliary Contact Resistance (micro-ohms @ 100 amps)
SF6 Gas System Operational Tests
Operation of All Mechanical Devices and Interlocks
Operation of All Electrical Devices and Interlocks

Control and Protection System

The correct operation of all control and protection functions of each complete control system shall be verified
and documented in accordance with paragraph 10.3 of the specification. This includes verification of all
current transformers and the fiber optic signal system.

EXHIBIT C ‐ SPECIAL CONDITIONS
2023 Midpoint Substation Replace C506 Series Capacitor Bank
  Special Conditions ECP 022 (02/2023) 
 Table of Contents 

Table of Contents 
SC‐1 IPC’S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE .....................................................................................1 
SC‐2 GENERAL SUMMARY OF SCOPE OF WORK .............................................................................1 
SC‐3 MILESTONES. ..........................................................................................................................2 
SC‐4 OUTAGE/SWITCHING SCHEDULING ........................................................................................3 
SC‐5 CLEARANCES ...........................................................................................................................3 
SC‐6 WORKING HOURS AND RESTRICTIONS ...................................................................................3 
SC‐7 CAMPS AND CONVENIENCES ..................................................................................................4 
SC‐8 UTILITIES .................................................................................................................................4 
SC‐9 ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE ............................................................................................4 
SC‐10 PERMITTING ...........................................................................................................................4 
SC‐11 MATERIALS TESTING ...............................................................................................................5 
SC‐12 OTHER PROJECT REQUIREMENTS ...........................................................................................5 
SC‐13 IPC FURNISHED MATERIALS ....................................................................................................6 
SC‐14 CONTRACTOR FURNISHED MATERIALS ..................................................................................7 
SC‐15 INVOICES .................................................................................................................................7 

EXHIBIT C ‐ SPECIAL CONDITIONS
2023 Midpoint Substation Replace C506 Series Capacitor Bank
 Special Conditions ECP 022 (02/2023) 
Page 1 of 7 
SC‐1 IPC’S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE 
A. The IPAR for the Project shall be Mike Bracke through Project completion unless IPC provides written
notice to Contractor designating another IPAR.
SC‐2 GENERAL SUMMARY OF SCOPE OF WORK 
A. Contractor’s general scope of Work includes, but is not limited to, the following:
Total Project Overview
The project is to replace the existing MPSN 500-kV Series Capacitor Bank, C506, with a new bank supplied and
installed by GE Grid Solutions, LLC. Contractor shall remove the existing C506 capacitor bank, perimeter fence,
foundations, and bus work and other items as shown in the removal drawings. Work also includes the
installation of new foundations for the C506 series capacitor banks, pole structures for bird mitigation
equipment, surface trench, conduit, and reconnection of bus once the new capacitor bank is installed and other
items as shown in the installation drawings. Coordination and demarcation of Work is critical to the success of
the project. Below is a detail listing, not inclusive, of the scope of work for this contract.
Remove and dispose the following:
1. Existing MPSN C506 series capacitor bank including bus connections back to the existing
lattice bus supports between the existing 541C & 541B air-breaks,
2. Existing conductor and connections back to the existing 506W & 506Z bypass breakers. Leave
bypass breakers in place as they will be reused,
3. Disassemble the existing C506 Series Capacitor Bank and relocate to specified area onsite to
prep for removal. This work includes removal of the Platform to the ground (platform,
insulators). The capacitors rack segments are to be disassembled into individual racks (2-rack
bundles), shunted, ready for transport and placed in the southeast corner of the station yard
awaiting pickup for disposal. IPC or another contractor will remove the capacitor cans from
the racks and dispose of capacitor cans and racks offsite. Contractor to dispose of everything
else.
4. All foundations that pertain to the exiting capacitor bank and the noted pole structure
foundations.
5. The three existing lattice bus supports and foundations
a. The three existing bus supports being removed will be reused in new locations for the
project,
6. Personnel fence around the capacitor banks.
7. Existing capacitor bank control house and the surface trench running east-west to the main
north-south surface trench,
8. Capacitor bank grounding (Do not remove grounding that does not interfere with the
construction of the project),
9. Existing conduits (in areas where conduit cannot be removed, label as "ABANDON IN PLACE"
on the return drawings),
10. Existing AC and DC power from 541C phases A, B, & C; 541B phases A, B, & C; and 541D phases
A, B, & C,
11. Existing Conductor from conduits,
EXHIBIT C ‐ SPECIAL CONDITIONS
2023 Midpoint Substation Replace C506 Series Capacitor Bank
 Special Conditions ECP 022 (02/2023) 
Page 2 of 7 
12. Other items as shown in the removal drawings within Exhibit B.
Install:
13. New foundations for the C506 series capacitor banks, bus supports, and ancillary equipment.
a. Note rock will likely be encountered, minimum embedment into rock should be at least
the diameter of the pier,
14. New grounding for connection to capacitor bank,
15. Install/route new conduits,
16. Extend the Plastibeton "2012" cable trench to the new control building.
a. Connect station ground to surface trench per drawings.
b. Install new AC/DC load centers off of this cable trench,
17. Install three lattice bus supports in their new locations and install one new lattice bus support.
a. Install new insulators on these bus supports.
b. Reconnect to the existing 5" aluminum bus supports.
i. Extend the bus beyond the bus supports toward the new banks about 6 feet.
c. Connect the new bus to the new capacitor bank terminals with bundled 2250 conductor,
18. Reconnect the bus to the new capacitor bank terminals,
19. Install new Kirk-key locks on the new capacitor bank fences and gates being installed by GE
subcontractor,
20. Install poles for the bird deterrent lasers,
21. Install bird deterrent lasers on the four dead-end structures and the new poles including
conduit and control wiring to the lasers,
22. Backfill and compact disturbed earth,
B. IPC or its agents will complete the following Work on this Project:
1. Perform Switching for Outages.
2. Test and Commissioning
3. Capacitor Can Disposal
4. Capacitor Bank Installation, including fence & gates around the bank
5. Capacitor Bank Control Building Installation
C. Contractor’s scope of Work is more fully set forth in Exhibit B and other Contract Documents.
SC‐3 MILESTONES.  
1. Milestone 1: Foundation and ancillary components ready for cap bank install. Complete,
foundations cured and ready for capacitor bank installation
EXHIBIT C ‐ SPECIAL CONDITIONS
2023 Midpoint Substation Replace C506 Series Capacitor Bank
 Special Conditions ECP 022 (02/2023) 
Page 3 of 7 
SC‐4 OUTAGE/SWITCHING SCHEDULING 
A. Substation Outages/Switching- IPC has reserved the pending outage window(s) listed below to complete
all applicable Work; Notwithstanding the foregoing, Contractor shall submit to Greg Habel [phone]
details of all Contractor switching requests: i) for all transmission Work, a minimum of 35 days prior to the
desired switching date; and ii) for all distribution Work, a minimum of 15 days prior to desired switching
date, to obtain the confirmed outage/switching window(s) for the Work. Failure by Contractor to notify in
accordance with these time periods may result in the unavailability of an outage and will be considered a
delay of the Work caused by Contractor.
1. HMWY-MPSN T-LINE: 09/11/2023 - 09/15/2023
2. MPSN C506 SERIES CAPACITOR BANK: 09/11/2023 - 01/24/2024
3. HMWY-MPSN T-LINE: 10/23/2023 - 10/27/2023
4. HMWY-MPSN T-LINE: 01/16/2024 - 01/18/2024
B. Temperature Constraints:
2. If the National Weather Service predicts the high temperature above 95° at the time switching
begins, or throughout the duration of the outage, IPC will not schedule or perform any planned
outages unless the outage is planned to be less than one hour in duration or unless agreed
upon by the IPAR; or
3. If the National Weather Service predicts the high temperature below 32° at the time switching
begins, or throughout the duration of the outage, IPC will not schedule or perform any planned
outages unless the outage is planned to be less than one hour in duration or unless agreed
upon by the IPAR.
C. Contractor shall notify IPC a minimum of 24-hours in advance of any cancellation of Work to be performed
during any planned outage scheduled pursuant to this Section SC-4.
D. Contractor shall use IPC’s radio communication system to communicate with IPC’s dispatchers, when
applicable.
SC‐5 CLEARANCES 
A. Contractor shall obtain a clearance in accordance with OSHA’s requirements for working clearances and
best utility work practices prior to commencing any applicable Work.
B. Contractor shall obtain all clearances as follows:
1. For distribution clearances (69kV and below), Contractor shall contact IPC Regional Dispatch
at 208-388-5175.
2. For transmission clearances (138kV and above), Contractor shall contact IPC System Dispatch
at 208-388-2861.
C. Contractor shall contact the applicable IPC Dispatch listed above to release Contractor’s clearance upon
completion of applicable clearance Work.
D. Contractor’s representative to whom the applicable clearance was issued shall be on site while all Work
under the clearance is being performed.
SC‐6 WORKING HOURS AND RESTRICTIONS  
A. Construction activities may occur Monday – Friday from sunrise to sunset. Work on Saturdays, Sundays,
and IPC-observed holidays requires pre-approval from the IPAR.
EXHIBIT C ‐ SPECIAL CONDITIONS
2023 Midpoint Substation Replace C506 Series Capacitor Bank
 Special Conditions ECP 022 (02/2023) 
Page 4 of 7 
B. Where night Work is approved, sufficient light shall be provided by the Contractor to safeguard the
workers and the public, and to allow adequate facilities for properly placing and inspecting the Work.
C. Work being performed during the months of May-October may require additional wildfire prevention
requirements. If such requirements are applicable to the Work, in IPC’s sole discretion, IPC will provide to
Contractor the most current version of IPC’s Wildlife Mitigation Plan and Supplemental Fire Mitigation
Terms prior to commencement of the Work. In all such cases, Contractor agrees to comply with all terms
and conditions set forth in these documents during performance of the Work under the Agreement.
SC‐7 CAMPS AND CONVENIENCES 
A. Unless otherwise approved in advance by IPC, neither the Contractor nor subcontractors or vendors will
be allowed to camp on-site. All housing shall be provided by the Contractor off-site.
SC‐8 UTILITIES 
A. IPC will arrange for the following services at the Work site:
1. None
Utilities required for the Project that are not listed above shall be Contractor’s responsibility.
SC‐9 ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE  
A. Contractor shall comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and regulations requiring
environmental and cultural protections necessary for completion of the Work.
B. IPC may include (as part of Exhibit B to the Agreement) an Environmental and Cultural Protections
Requirement Summary ("Summary"). If included, the Summary will contain a high-level overview of the
environmental and cultural protections required for the Work. The Summary is not exhaustive and in no
way, relieves the Contractor of its obligations to fully review and comply with all environmental
requirements and necessary permits (further discussed in SC-10 below).
C. In addition to the above requirements, during performance of the Work Contractor shall:
1. Ensure compliance with Best Management Practices (BMP) as required by the Storm Water
Pollution Prevention Permit (SWPPP). Contractor is responsible for procuring, installing and
maintaining BMP’s;
2. Maintain appropriate dust and air pollution abatement. Contractor is responsible for all costs
associated with the necessary abatement activities. Contractor’s failure to control dust and/or
air pollution may result in temporary suspension of the Work, for which additional time will
not be granted. The Party responsible for unloading materials shall be responsible for any
abatement needed at the storage yard(s) during the material delivery timeframe (if
applicable). Following the delivery of all material Contractor is responsible for dust abatement
at the material storage yard, if necessary.
3. Ensure mud and dirt are kept off of the roadways;
4. Properly maintain equipment to ensure construction noise is within federal, state, and local
laws, ordinances and regulations.
SC‐10 PERMITTING 
A. Pursuant to Section 25 of the General Conditions, IPC has secured or will secure the permit(s),
environmental and non-environmental, listed in Exhibit G to the Project Construction Agreement (“Exhibit
G Permits”). The Exhibit G Permits are or will become part of this Agreement and Contractor shall comply
with all requirements found therein.
EXHIBIT C ‐ SPECIAL CONDITIONS
2023 Midpoint Substation Replace C506 Series Capacitor Bank
 Special Conditions ECP 022 (02/2023) 
Page 5 of 7 
B. Permits required for the Project that are not listed in Exhibit G, including but not limited to traffic control
permits, shall be Contractor’s sole responsibility to secure.
C. With respect to traffic control necessary for completion of the Work, Contractor is responsible for: i)
securing all traffic control permits, ii) implementing all necessary traffic control; iii) maintaining traffic
control plans, and iv) ensuring implementation of all traffic control safety.
SC‐11 MATERIALS TESTING 
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for engaging and scheduling the services of a testing agency to perform
material tests. The Contractor shall require the testing agency or laboratory to send one copy of the test
reports to IPAR.
SC‐12 OTHER PROJECT REQUIREMENTS   
A. Contractor’s Authorized Representative shall have a working cellular and/or a mobile satellite phone or
other real-time communication method(s) for contacting IPC or emergency services at all times during the
Project.
B. Excess excavated materials, and all other types of construction debris may not be spoiled on-site.
Contractor must dispose all such material and debris off-site. Contractor is responsible for locating a
suitable site.
C. Vehicles and Equipment used in the Work: Contractor and Subcontractor vehicles and equipment used in
the performance of the Work on IPC premises shall be in good running order without leaks and drips of
fluids. All such Contractor and Subcontractor vehicles and equipment shall be maintained in accordance
with the law and/or manufacturer and service records available upon request by IPC personnel. IPC
reserves the right to inspect and reject Contractor and Subcontractor vehicles or equipment from entering
IPC property or the Work site if found leaking or non-conforming with applicable requirements.
Contractor, at its own expense, shall remove and replace any rejected vehicles or equipment with properly
running vehicles or equipment to continue performing the Work. In the event Contractor or Subcontractor
vehicles or equipment leak fluids at any IPC location, Contractor is responsible for all costs associated with
cleanup and restoration of the affected area. Contractor shall immediately stop the leak and secure a
method to remove the defective equipment from the IPC property or Work site. All Contractor and
Subcontractor motor vehicle operators shall have a current and valid CDL, medical card, and
endorsements, as required by law. Contractor shall promptly notify IPC of any spills.
D. Payment Schedule
1. Schedule of Values required (if required, attached as Exhibit F to Agreement)
E. Meetings
1. Pre-Construction. IPC may schedule and hold a pre-construction meeting approximately two
weeks prior to commencement of Work. The Contractor’s Authorized Representative,
assigned project foreman, and approved subcontractors must attend the pre-construction
meeting. In addition, the Contractor’s representative to whom any applicable Project
clearances are issued shall attend the pre-construction meeting.
2. Per Milestone. Contractor shall schedule and hold a meeting with the IPAR when Contractor
believes it has completed each Milestone. At this meeting, Contractor shall submit a Certificate
of Substantial Completion certifying completion of each Milestone achieved.
3. Substantial Completion. Contractor shall request a meeting with the IPAR when Contractor
deems Substantial Completion has occurred in accordance with Section GC-20.1 of the General
Conditions. At the meeting, Contractor shall certify/sign the Certificate of Substantial
Completion certifying that Contractor has achieved Substantial Completion of the Work.
EXHIBIT C ‐ SPECIAL CONDITIONS
2023 Midpoint Substation Replace C506 Series Capacitor Bank
 Special Conditions ECP 022 (02/2023) 
Page 6 of 7 
Attendance at the meeting to discuss Substantial Completion is mandatory for the Contractor’s
Authorized representative and the Project foreman.
4. Final Completion. Contractor shall request a meeting with the IPAR when Contractor deems
Final Completion has occurred in accordance with Section GC-21.2 of the General Conditions.
At this meeting, Contractor shall certify/sign the Notice of Final Completion. Attendance at the
meeting to discuss Final Completion is mandatory for the Contractor’s Authorized
Representative and the Project foreman.
F. Final as-built drawings shall be provided to the IPAR:
1. The final as-built drawings and all relevant Record Documents, shall be submitted to IPC at
the Final Completion meeting.
SC‐13 IPC FURNISHED MATERIALS 
A. IPC will supply the materials as provided in the Material Request/Bill of Materials list sections of the Design
Package, Drawings, and/or Technical Specifications, as applicable.
Contractor will receive all material at IPC Boise Operations Center located at 10790 Franklin Road, Boise,
ID. Contractor shall call(208) 388-2073 and select “Option 1”, a minimum of five days in advance, to
coordinate receipt of any material.
B. Contractor shall be responsible for unloading all IPC-furnished materials, unless otherwise identified.
C. Contractor shall inspect IPC-furnished materials upon arrival jointly with IPC. If any materials are in
damaged condition or if shortages are indicated by a comparison of the shipping invoices, or if Contractor
finds that the materials are not suitable for their intended use, IPC shall be promptly notified thereof in
writing.
D. All material not used must be returned in the same condition and manner as it was issued to the
appropriate IPC Stores facility within five business days of completion of the Work. Returns must be
scheduled with IPC’s Stores department at least two business days prior to delivery.
E. Contractor must follow all federal, state, and local rules, regulations, and ordinances associated with the
use of explosive and implosive materials including, but not limited, all rules, regulations, and ordinances
requiring Contractor to:
1. Provide a list of Contractor employee possessors approved by the Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco,
Firearms, and Explosives (ATF) to handle explosive/implosive materials and a copy of the
Contractors explosive license.
2. Use explosive/implosive materials for their intended use.
3. Adhere to the Table of Distances found in the ATF regulations.
4. Ensure project magazines are manufactured in accordance with ATF requirements for the type and
quantity of explosive/implosive being stored.
5. Maintain an accurate inventory at all times and conduct weekly inspections of the project magazine
while in use.
6. Notify the ATF and local authorities of the type, quantity, location, and type of storage unit being
used. Other notification requirements may apply and shall be adhered to by the Contractor.
7. Secure the project magazine, using ATF approved security devices including the appropriate number
of tumblers within security locks, to prevent unauthorized access or entry to explosive/implosive
materials/magazines.
8. Immediately report any unresolved discrepancies to the IPAR. Include the exact type and quantity of
explosive/implosive material creating the discrepancy.
9. When returning explosive/implosive materials to IPC, ensure all materials are in their undamaged
manufacturers’ packaging. If the manufacturers’ packaging is damaged and cannot be returned in the
same manner it was distributed, contact the IPAR for further assistance.
EXHIBIT C ‐ SPECIAL CONDITIONS
2023 Midpoint Substation Replace C506 Series Capacitor Bank
 Special Conditions ECP 022 (02/2023) 
Page 7 of 7 
10. Ensure Contractor personnel transporting explosives and implosives are qualified and possess the
proper credentials in accordance with all applicable Department of Transportation (DOT)
requirements, including, but not limited to the DOT hazmat transportation regulations and Federal
Motor Carrier Safety Administration requirements.
11. If explosive/implosive materials are picked up at an IPC location, coordinate the pickup 2 weeks
prior to the intended pick up date. When returning, notify IPC at [phone] within 4 business
days of the need to return the materials.
SC‐14 CONTRACTOR FURNISHED MATERIALS 
A. In accordance with GC-5.8 Contractor shall, at its expense, furnish all material and other miscellaneous
items that may be required to accomplish the Work unless otherwise specifically stated in the Contract
Documents. For the avoidance of doubt, Contractor shall supply concrete, reinforcing steel for concrete,
sand, gravel, bedding material as required for construction of the Project.

SC‐15 INVOICES 
A. Progress Payment(s) and Final Invoice shall be sent to:
Idaho Power Company
Attn: Mike Bracke
PO Box 70
Boise, ID 83707
Email: [e-mail]
(208) 388- 5085
B. An Application for Progress Payment shall include an itemized and detailed invoice and be in conformance
with the Schedule of Values, Progress Payment Schedule, and Schedule of Unit Prices, as applicable.
C. Contractor shall self-impose a five percent (5%) retainage on each Application for Progress Payment.
D. For progress payments, Contractor shall provide to IPC, with the invoice, an executed Conditional Waiver
& Release Upon Progress Payment form of Annex A in the amount of Contractor’s Application for Progress
Payment.
E. For final payment, Contractor shall provide to IPC, with the invoice, an executed Release and Waiver of
Liens Upon Final Payment form of Annex A.

END OF SPECIAL CONDITIONS

03590

Foundation Design Report

Midpoint Substation – Capacitor Banks
Jerome County, Idaho

Prepared for:
Idaho Power Company
September 17, 2021
Foundation Design Report
Midpoint Substation – Capacitor Banks

September 17, 2021

Page i
American Geotechnics
Table of Contents
FOUNDATION DESIGN REPORT ................................................................................................. 1
1.0 Introduction ......................................................................................................................... 1
2.0 Subsurface Exploration ...................................................................................................... 1
3.0 Subsurface Conditions ....................................................................................................... 2
4.0 Drilled Pier Design Recommendations .............................................................................. 3
5.0 Drilled Pier Foundation Construction Recommendations ................................................ 5
6.0 Shallow Foundation Design Recommendations ............................................................... 6
7.0 Shallow Foundation Construction Recommendations ..................................................... 7
8.0 Closure ................................................................................................................................. 8

Appendices
A Figure 1 – Vicinity Map
Figure 2 – Exploration Location Map
Site Photographs

B Logs of Exploration
Rock Core Photographs
Laboratory Test Results
Foundation Design Report
Midpoint Substation – Capacitor Banks

September 17, 2021

Page 1
American Geotechnics
FOUNDATION DESIGN REPORT
1.0 Introduction
This project includes replacing the existing capacitor banks, construction of a
small control building, and installation of various equipment founded on
shallow foundations or drilled piers in the 500kV yard of the Midpoint
Substation. The Substation is located on E 750 N in Jerome County, Idaho.
The 500kV yard is shown in Figure 2 in Appendix A.
The purpose of the investigation by American Geotechnics was to evaluate
the in-situ soil and rock properties and develop recommendations for
designing the foundations of the capacitor banks, a small control building
and various equipment.
2.0 Subsurface Exploration
Holt Services of Boise, Idaho performed the subsurface investigation in
August 2021. This included drilling five test borings (AG-1 through AG-5) to
explore the subsurface conditions. The borings were advanced in the vicinity
of the planned structures. Idaho Power provided the exploration locations,
and some of the locations were adjusted slightly in the field to accommodate
drill rig access. The table below summarizes the information on the borings
that were completed for this project.

Summary of Information on Borings
Boring
No. Structure Boring Depth
(ft)
Depth to Rock
(ft)
AG-1 Various Equipment 10 8.5
AG-2 Capacitor Bank & Various Equipment 3.5 2.5
AG-3 Capacitor Bank & Various Equipment 15 4.6
AG-4 Capacitor Bank & Various Equipment 10 5.0
AG-5 Capacitor Bank & Various Equipment 4.6 4.5

Foundation Design Report
Midpoint Substation – Capacitor Banks

September 17, 2021

Page 2
American Geotechnics
The drilling was performed with truck-mounted drill rig equipment using
hollow-stem augers for soil sampling. The soil samples were obtained using
a standard split-spoon sampler in general accordance with ASTM D1586.
HQ-3 cores were used to advance the borings where bedrock was
encountered in borings AG-3 and AG-4.
An American Geotechnics geotechnical engineer identified, described, and
classified the soil samples recovered in the field in general accordance with
ASTM D2488 classification procedures. Representative soil and rock core
samples were packaged and transported to the American Geotechnics
laboratory for testing.
Logs of the subsurface conditions were recorded at the time of the fieldwork
by an American Geotechnics geotechnical engineer and are presented in
Appendix B.
Field testing included Standard Penetration Tests (SPT) performed with an
automatic hammer in accordance with ASTM D1586 to determine the
relative density or stiffness of cohesive soils. The N-values at their
respective testing depths are shown on the boring logs in Appendix B.
Sections of rock core recovered from the HQ-3 core were measured for
percent recovery and Rock Quality Designation (RQD) in accordance with
ASTM D6032. The percent recovery and RQD values are shown on the boring
logs in Appendix B.
3.0 Subsurface Conditions
Based on the results of the subsurface exploration, the subsurface conditions
at the locations of the proposed structures can be generally described as
follows.
• Gravel Surface Course: Gravel surface course existed from the
ground surface to a depth of about 0.5 foot below ground surface
(BGS).
• Stiff Lean Clay (CL) was encountered below the gravel surface course
to depths ranging from 2.5 feet BGS at Boring AG-2 to 8.5 feet BGS
at Boring AG-1. The SPT N-values varied from 8 to 11 blows per foot
of penetration (bpf). Lab test results for lean clay indicated liquid
limit (LL) of 33, plastic index (PI) of 12 and moisture content of 19%.
Foundation Design Report
Midpoint Substation – Capacitor Banks

September 17, 2021

Page 3
American Geotechnics
• Loose to Medium Dense Silt with Sand existed below the gravel
surface course to depth of 4.5 feet BGS at Boring AG-3, 5.0 feet BGS
at Boring AG-4, and 4.5 feet BGS at Boring AG-5. The SPT N-values
varied from 4 to 21 blows per foot of penetration (bpf). Lab test
results for this soil indicated liquid limit (LL) of 24, plastic index (PI)
of 3 and moisture content of 16%. Pocket penetration indicated
compressive strength ranging from 0 to 1 tsf.
• Basalt bedrock was encountered at depths ranging from 2.5 BGS at
Boring AG-2 to 8.5 feet BGS at Boring AG-1. Recovery percentage at
AG-3 and AG-4 varied from 53% to 100%, and RQD varied from 53%
to 80%, indicated rock quality was fair to very good. Laboratory test
results indicate compressive strength ranges from 6,890 to 12,520
psi, indicated rock was medium hard to hard (R3 to R4).
Groundwater was not encountered to a depth of 15 feet BGS during the
investigation in August 2021.
4.0 Drilled Pier Design Recommendations
The design parameters recommended below are based on the assumption
that the drilled piers will be installed as recommended in this report.
The proposed structures at the Midpoint Substation can be founded on
drilled piers to resist lateral and vertical forces. The drilled piers should have
minimum diameter of 2 feet and minimum penetration of 10 feet.
The following tables present the recommended geotechnical input
parameters for designing the drilled piers.
Recommended soil parameters for determining drilled pier axial resistance
are in the below table.

Foundation Design Report
Midpoint Substation – Capacitor Banks

September 17, 2021

Page 4
American Geotechnics
Recommended Soil Parameters for Drilled Pier Axial Resistance
Soil Type Depth Range
(ft)
Allowable Unit Skin
Friction (psf)
Allowable Unit End
Bearing (psf)
Silt with Sand (ML), loose
to medium dense or
Lean Clay (CL), stiff
0 to 4.5* 0.13 (σv)** 2000
Bedrock 4.5 to 15 6000 N/A
*Average depth to bedrock between 5 borings.
**σv is effective overburden stress at mid-depth of drilled pier in the soil stratum.

Neglect the upper 2 feet of soil in calculating skin friction for axial resistance
of drilled piers. Neglect the end bearing in calculating the axial resistance of
drilled piers embedded in bedrock. For cast-in-place drilled piers, the
allowable uplift resistance of the foundation may be considered as a sum of
the foundation dead weight and the applicable skin friction.
Recommended geotechnical parameters for the MFAD program are in the
table below.
Recommended Input Parameters for MFAD
Parameter Layer 1 Layer 2
Bottom of Layer (ft) 4.5 15
Stratum Description
(ASTM D2488 Soil
Classification), Consistency
Silt with Sand (ML), loose to
medium dense or Lean Clay (CL),
stiff
Basalt
Bedrock
Moist Unit Weight (pcf) 110 150
SPT N-value (Average) 10* N/A
Effective Friction Angle (deg)
(Soil or Rock Mass) 30 35
Cohesion (psf) (Soil or Rock
Mass) 0 3000
Deformation Modulus, ED (ksi) 0.5 1000
Rock Mass Class based on
RMR̃̉76 (Description) N/A III (Fair
Rock)
Foundation Design Report
Midpoint Substation – Capacitor Banks

September 17, 2021

Page 5
American Geotechnics
Recommended Input Parameters for MFAD
Parameter Layer 1 Layer 2
*Estimated value

Recommended geotechnical parameters for the LPILE program are in the
table below.
Recommended Input Parameters for LPILE Program
Property Layer 1 Layer 3
Depth of Layer (ft) 0-4.5* 4.5-15
Soil Type (ASTM D2488
Classification), Consistency
Silt with Sand (ML), loose to
medium dense or Lean Clay
(CL), stiff
Basalt
Bedrock***
Effective Unit Weight** (pcf) 110 150
Friction Angle (deg) 30 N/A
Cohesion (psf) N/A N/A
Initial Modulus of Lateral
Subgrade Reaction, k (pci) 25 N/A
Strain Factor, ε50 (%) N/A 0.5
Unconfined Compressive
Strength (psi) N/A 6000
RQD, % N/A 50
Initial Modulus of Rock Mass,
(psi) N/A 500000
*Neglect the upper 2 feet of soil in calculating lateral load resistance of drilled pier.
**Groundwater was not encountered to a depth of 15 feet BGS during the site investigation.
***Model Basalt bedrock as Weak Rock in LPILE analysis.

3.0 Drilled Pier Foundation Construction
Recommendations
The design parameters are based upon the assumption that the pier
excavation will be advanced with conventional flight-auger equipment. Open
Foundation Design Report
Midpoint Substation – Capacitor Banks

September 17, 2021

Page 6
American Geotechnics
pit excavation should not be allowed during the pier installations; otherwise,
the pier design parameters provided herein may not be applicable.
In American Geotechnics’ opinion, the subsurface conditions at the project
site may not be suitable for open hole drilling. It is recommended that
temporary casing be available on site to stabilize the pier excavation during
drilling and concreting if required. The casing may be withdrawn during the
concreting process. However, the surface of the plastic concrete must
remain at least 5 feet above the bottom of the casing during casing removal
where possible.
Excavation of bedrock will be required for drilled pier installation. Depths to
bedrock vary from 2.5 feet BGS at Boring AG-2 to 8.5 feet BGS at Boring
AG-1. Clean the bottom of drilled holes before placing concrete for drilled
piers. Bedrock is classified as medium hard to hard with unconfined
compressive strength varying from 6,890 psi to 12520 psi.
The contractor should be responsible for selecting the means and methods
for advancing the pier excavation. However, excavation methods that result
in displacement of soil beyond the pier perimeter or sloughing of sidewall
materials should not be permitted.
The geotechnical engineer should be on site during shaft excavation to
evaluate construction method procedures and confirm that significant
sloughing, caving, or other sidewall disturbance does not occur. In the event
that such disturbance occurs, excavation activities must cease until the
drilling methods are modified to provide sufficient lateral confinement.
6.0 Shallow Foundation Design Recommendations
Design Requirements
Spread footing can also be used to support the structures and should meet
the following requirements:
• Footing width should be at least 36 inches in the least dimension.
• Footing should be placed at least 24 inches below the lowest adjacent
final grade for frost protection.
• The footings are constructed as recommended in below Section 7.0
Shallow Foundation Construction Recommendations
Foundation Design Report
Midpoint Substation – Capacitor Banks

September 17, 2021

Page 7
American Geotechnics
Allowable Bearing Capacity:
Allowable bearing capacity of 3 ksf can be used to design the spread footings
founded on structural fill providing the above design requirements are met.
Settlement of the footing is expected to be 1 inch or less, with differential
settlements of ½-inch or less. A one-third increase of the net allowable
bearing pressure may be used for transient wind or seismic loads.
Lateral Load Resistance:
Resistance to lateral load can be generated from the friction at the footing
bottom and the structural fill below the footing. A coefficient of friction
resistance of 0.40 can be used in the design.
Uplift Resistance:
Uplift resistance of the spread footing can be determined as the weight of
the footing plus the weight of soil on top of the footing. A safety factor of 1.5
is recommended for uplift resistance.
7.0 Shallow Foundation Construction
Recommendations
Recommendations for construction of the spread footings are as follows:
• The foundation excavation extends to at least 12 inches below the
foundation bottom and 12 inches outside the footing edges, if
bedrock is not encountered within that depth.
• The bottom of the excavation is proof rolled with a vibratory
compactor prior to placement of structural fill.
• Any soft or loose soil pockets encountered during proof-rolling at the
base of the foundation excavations are removed and replaced with
properly compacted structural fill.
• Backfill the excavation with structural fill in maximum loose lift
thickness of 8 inches and compact to at least 95% of the maximum
dry density as determined by ASTM D698 – Standard Proctor.
• Each lift of structural is documented for density.
• If bedrock is encountered during excavation, clean the bedrock
surface of loose materials and level it if needed with lean concrete or
compacted structural fill before placing the footings.
Foundation Design Report
Midpoint Substation – Capacitor Banks

September 17, 2021

Page 8
American Geotechnics
• Final lines and grades should be planned so drainage is directed at
least 10 feet away from the spread footing. All surface water runoff
should be directed to an approved discharge or collection area.
8.0 Closure
American Geotechnics appreciates the opportunity to provide you with these
engineering services and looks forward to working with you on future
projects. If you have any questions or need additional information, please
contact our office.
Foundation Design Report
Midpoint Substation – Capacitor Banks

American Geotechnics

Appendix A
Figure 1 – Vicinity Map
Figure 2 – Exploration Location Map
Site Photographs

Vicinity Map
Midpoint Substation
Jerome County, Idaho
Figure 1
File No.
03590 August 30, 2021
American Geotechnics
PROJECT
LOCATION
Site Photos
Midpoint Substation
03590

American Geotechnics Page 1 of 2

Photo 1: Advancing boring AG-2 using CME-75 drill

Photo 2: AG-1, SS-3, 7.5’ to 9.0’ BGS. Lean Clay (CL).

Site Photos
Midpoint Substation
03590

American Geotechnics Page 2 of 2

Photo 3: AG-3, SS-5, 2.5’ to 4.0’ BGS. Silt with Sand (ML).

Foundation Design Report
Midpoint Substation – Capacitor Banks

American Geotechnics

Appendix B
Logs of Exploration
Rock Core Photographs
Laboratory Test Reports

CME-75;
Automatic Hammer SPT per
ASTM D1586;
NWJ rods;
Auger I.D.:4-1/4-in;
Drilling Fluid: none;
SS: O.D.=2", I.D.=1-3/8";
Driller: Holt Services.
SS-1; pocket penetrometer
= 1 tsf.
SS-2; pocket penetrometer
= 0.5 to 1 tsf.
SS-3; pocket penetrometer
= 0 to 0.5 tsf.; SS bouncing
during last 5" of driving;
weathered basalt in tip of SS
sampler.
Auger grinding and slower
advancement from 7.5' to
10'.
Gravel Surface Course-
3/4" gravel.
Lean Clay (CL)- (NATIVE)
95% fines;
5% fine to medium sand;
brown.
as above, except wet.
Basalt Rock-
Bottom of Boring at 10.0 ft on 8/27/2021.
83
100
76
5-5-3
3-5-6
1-11-50/5"
191233
SS-1
SS-2
SS-3
PROJECT: Midpoint Substation - Capacitor Banks
LOCATION: Jerome County, Idaho
Groundwater not encountered on 8/27/2021
BORING NO. AG-1
LATITUDE: 42.83509°
LONGITUDE: -114.42846°by Hand Held GPS
GROUNDWATER:
METHOD: Hollow-Stem Auger
DATE LOGGED: 8/27/2021
LOGGED BY: Ryan VanLeuven, PE
FILE NO. 03590 PAGE 1 OF 1 BORING NO. AG-1
REMARKS
LI
T
H
O
L
O
G
Y
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
(Stratification lines represent
approximate boundaries
between materials)
RE
C
O
V
E
R
Y

%
BL
O
W
CO
U
N
T
S
LAB DATA
MC

(
%
)
PI

(
%
)
LL

(
%
)
TY
P
E

-

N
o
.
DE
P
T
H

(
f
t
)
2
4
6
8
10
CME-75;
Automatic Hammer SPT per
ASTM D1586;
NWJ rods;
Auger I.D.:4-1/4-in;
Drilling Fluid: none;
SS: O.D.=2", I.D.=1-3/8";
Driller: Holt Services.
SS-4; SS bouncing, basalt
in tip of SS sampler.
Auger grinding and slower
advancement from 2.5' to
3.5'.
Gravel Surface Course-
3/4" gravel.
Lean Clay (CL)- (NATIVE)
About 95% low plasticity fines; about 5% fine to medium sand; moist; brown.
Basalt Rock-
Bottom of Boring at 3.5 ft on 8/27/2021.
100 50/3"SS-4
PROJECT: Midpoint Substation - Capacitor Banks
LOCATION: Jerome County, Idaho
Groundwater not encountered on 8/27/2021
BORING NO. AG-2
LATITUDE: 42.83486°
LONGITUDE: -114.42823°by Hand Held GPS
GROUNDWATER:
METHOD: Hollow-Stem Auger
DATE LOGGED: 8/27/2021
LOGGED BY: Ryan VanLeuven, PE
FILE NO. 03590 PAGE 1 OF 1 BORING NO. AG-2
REMARKS
LI
T
H
O
L
O
G
Y
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
(Stratification lines represent
approximate boundaries
between materials)
RE
C
O
V
E
R
Y

%
BL
O
W
CO
U
N
T
S
TY
P
E

-

N
o
.
DE
P
T
H

(
f
t
)
2
CME-75;
Automatic Hammer SPT per
ASTM D1586;
NWJ rods;
Auger I.D.:4-1/4-in;
Drilling Fluid: none;
SS: O.D.=2", I.D.=1-3/8";
Driller: Holt Services.
Auger grinding and slower
advancement from 4.6' to 5'.
Switch to HQ-3 coring at 5'.
Gray return water from 5' to
15'.
Gravel Surface Course-
3/4" gravel.
Silt with Sand (ML)- (NATIVE)
About 85% non-plastic fines; about 15% fine to medium sand; moist; brown.
BASALT, highly vesicular, gray, very fine grained, fresh, strong rock (R4),
Discontinuities are very closely to moderately spaced and in poor condition, joints
range from horizontal to 60 degrees from assumed horizontal.
as above, except slightly to moderately vesicular.
Bottom of Boring at 15.0 ft on 8/27/2021.
67
90
(63)
100
(80)
4-6-15SS-5
CR-6
CR-7
PROJECT: Midpoint Substation - Capacitor Banks
LOCATION: Jerome County, Idaho
Groundwater not encountered on 8/27/2021
BORING NO. AG-3
LATITUDE: 42.83482°
LONGITUDE: -114.42786°by Hand Held GPS
GROUNDWATER:
METHOD: Hollow-Stem Auger
DATE LOGGED: 8/27/2021
LOGGED BY: Ryan VanLeuven, PE
FILE NO. 03590 PAGE 1 OF 1 BORING NO. AG-3
REMARKS
LI
T
H
O
L
O
G
Y
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
(Stratification lines represent
approximate boundaries
between materials)
RE
C
O
V
E
R
Y

%
(R
Q
D
)
BL
O
W
CO
U
N
T
S
TY
P
E

-

N
o
.
DE
P
T
H

(
f
t
)
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
Rock Core Photographs
Midpoint Substation
Jerome County, Idaho
03590

American Geotechnics

Photo 1: AG-3, CR-6; 5.0’ (left) – 10.0’ (right).

Photo 2: AG-3, CR-7; 10.0’ (left) – 15.0’ (right).

CME-75;
Automatic Hammer SPT per
ASTM D1586;
NWJ rods;
Auger I.D.:4-1/4-in;
Drilling Fluid: none;
SS: O.D.=2", I.D.=1-3/8";
Driller: Holt Services.
Auger grinding and slower
advancement at 5'. Switch
to HQ-3 coring at 5'.
Gray return water from 5' to
10'.
CR-9; low recovery likely
due to washed out core.
Gravel Surface Course-
3/4" gravel.
Silt with Sand (ML)- (NATIVE)
83% fines;
14% fine to medium sand;
3% gravel;
brown.
BASALT, highly vesicular, gray, very fine grained, fresh, strong rock
(R4), Discontinuities are very closely to moderately spaced and in
poor condition, joints range from horizontal to 60 degrees from
assumed horizontal.
Bottom of Boring at 10.0 ft on 8/27/2021.
100
53
(53)
6-4-4 16324SS-8
CR-9
PROJECT: Midpoint Substation - Capacitor Banks
LOCATION: Jerome County, Idaho
Groundwater not encountered on 8/27/2021
BORING NO. AG-4
LATITUDE: 42.83443°
LONGITUDE: -114.42823°by Hand Held GPS
GROUNDWATER:
METHOD: Hollow-Stem Auger
DATE LOGGED: 8/27/2021
LOGGED BY: Ryan VanLeuven, PE
FILE NO. 03590 PAGE 1 OF 1 BORING NO. AG-4
REMARKS
LI
T
H
O
L
O
G
Y
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
(Stratification lines represent
approximate boundaries
between materials)
RE
C
O
V
E
R
Y

%
(R
Q
D
)
BL
O
W
CO
U
N
T
S
LAB DATA
MC

(
%
)
PI

(
%
)
LL

(
%
)
TY
P
E

-

N
o
.
DE
P
T
H

(
f
t
)
2
4
6
8
10
Rock Core Photographs
Midpoint Substation
Jerome County, Idaho
03590

American Geotechnics

Photo 3: AG-4, CR-9; 5.0’ (left) – 10.0’ (right).

CME-75;
Automatic Hammer SPT per
ASTM D1586;
NWJ rods;
Auger I.D.:4-1/4-in;
Drilling Fluid: none;
SS: O.D.=2", I.D.=1-3/8";
Driller: Holt Services.
Hard auger grinding and
slow advancement at 4.5'.
Gravel Surface Course-
3/4" gravel.
Silt with Sand (ML)- (NATIVE)
About 85% non-plastic fines; about 15% fine to medium sand; moist; brown.
Basalt Rock-
Bottom of Boring at 4.6 ft on 8/27/2021.
89 2-2-2SS-10
PROJECT: Midpoint Substation - Capacitor Banks
LOCATION: Jerome County, Idaho
Groundwater not encountered on 8/27/2021
BORING NO. AG-5
LATITUDE: 42.83437°
LONGITUDE: -114.42789°by Hand Held GPS
GROUNDWATER:
METHOD: Hollow-Stem Auger
DATE LOGGED: 8/27/2021
LOGGED BY: Ryan VanLeuven, PE
FILE NO. 03590 PAGE 1 OF 1 BORING NO. AG-5
REMARKS
LI
T
H
O
L
O
G
Y
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
(Stratification lines represent
approximate boundaries
between materials)
RE
C
O
V
E
R
Y

%
BL
O
W
CO
U
N
T
S
TY
P
E

-

N
o
.
DE
P
T
H

(
f
t
)
2
4
21-0526 AG-1 SS-2 5.0'-6.5' 18.6 94.8 33 12 CL
--
21-0527 AG-4 SS-8 2.5'-4.0' 16.2 82.9 24 3 ML
--
Prepared By:__________________
SUMMARY OF LABORATORY RESULTS
RemarksLab
Number Borehole
Date Sampled: 8/27/2021
Sampled By: American Geotechnics
Date Received: 8/27/2021
Date Tested: 8/30 through 9/3/2021
Report to: Idaho Power
Project: Midpoint Substation - Capacitor Banks
Report Date: 9/3/2021
File No.: 03590
Water
Content
(%)
% Passing
#200
Sieve
Liquid
Limit
(%)
Plasticity
Index
Soil
Type
Travis Thomsen
Sample
Type
Depth
(ft)
American Geotechnics
Material Information
Project Information
American Geotechnics
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
0 20 40 60 80 100
ML
SS-2
SS-8
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
PL
A
S
T
I
C
I
T
Y

I
N
D
E
X
CL
MH
CH
Travis Thomsen
LL
33
24
21
21
PL
12
3
PI Fines
95
83
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
LEAN CLAY (CL)
SILT with SAND (ML)
Classification
18.6
16.2
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
CL-ML
Specimen Identification
LIQUID LIMIT (%)
Prepared By:__________________
MC
5.0
2.5
AG-1
AG-4
ATTERBERG LIMITS REPORT

American Geotechnics
PROJECT LOCATION:Jerome County, Idaho
PROJECT NAME:Midpoint Substation - Capacitor BanksCLIENT:Idaho Power
FILE NUMBER:03590
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
0.0010.010.1110100
Travis Thomsen
Cc CuD15%Sand%Gravel
1006 10 501/2
HYDROMETER
AG-1
AG-4
PE
R
C
E
N
T

F
I
N
E
R

B
Y

W
E
I
G
H
T
SAND
GRAIN SIZE IN MILLIMETERS

coarse
3
U.S. SIEVE OPENING IN INCHES
3 4
U.S. SIEVE NUMBERS
33
24
140
coarse SILT OR CLAYfinemedium
PARTICLE-SIZE DISTRIBUTION REPORT
Specimen Identification
8 14
--
0.088
3/4 3/8
Classification
COBBLES GRAVEL
D30D10 D60
5.0
2.5
--
--
6 60
--
--
PI%Fines D50
--
--
--
--
--
--
Specimen Identification
AG-1
AG-4

5.0
2.5
SS-2
SS-8
12
3
LLMC
94.8
82.9
SS-2
SS-8
Prepared By:__________________
0.0
3.0
24 16 301 20020 40
fine
1.5
LEAN CLAY (CL)
SILT with SAND (ML)
--
--
--
--
D85
18.6
16.2
5.2
14.1
American Geotechnics
PROJECT LOCATION:Jerome County, Idaho
PROJECT NAME:Midpoint Substation - Capacitor BanksCLIENT:Idaho Power
FILE NUMBER:03590
American Geotechnics
5260 Chinden Blvd.
Boise, Idaho 83714
Phone:[phone]
Fax: [phone]
Report to:Idaho Power
Project:Midpoint Substation- Capacitor Banks
Report Date:9/3/2021
Project No.: 03590
Date Sampled:8/27/2021
Sampled By:American Geotechnics
Date Received:8/27/2021
Date Tested:9/1 through 9/3/2021
Sample Average Average Compressive
Lab Number Sample ID Depth, ft Diameter, in Height, in Load, lbs Strength, psi
21-0528 AG-03, CR-6 7.0'-7.5'2.386 5.788 34,020 7,610
21-0529 AG-03, CR-7 13.0'-13.5'2.359 5.903 54,713 12,520
21-0530 AG-04, CR-9 8.0'-9.0'2.383 5.890 30,742 6,890
Reviewed By:Kelli Browning
Material Information
Compressive Strength of Intact Rock Cores ASTM D7012 Method C
FOR REFERENCE ONLY 
MPSN210001 GE SCOPE OF WORK 
 General Electric (GE) will furnish, construction and commission one (1) 345‐kV, 3‐phase, 60‐Hz, 
2100‐Amp per phase series capacitor bank which include the following (description may or may 
not be inclusive of all work to be performed): 
o Install all bus work on cap bank platform and bus or jumpers from the platform to the cap 
bank bypass breakers. 
o Connect the series capacitor platforms to the ground grid tails provided by others at the 
base of all foundations. 
o Install, splice, and terminate all fiber optics from the MPSN Series Capacitor Bank Control 
Building to the platform and associated existing Bypass Circuit Breakers. 
o Install conduit from cable trench up into their vendor cabinets/equipment for the bypass 
circuit breakers. 
o Install the GE supplied equipment in the new MPSN Series Capacitor Bank Control Building. 
o Install and terminate all yard and control cables that go between the new MPSN Series 
Capacitor Bank Control Building and the platform, the existing bypass circuit breakers, and 
the GE supplied control boxes in the yard (cable supplied by Idaho Power). 
o Install and terminate all interconnect cables between the GE’s equipment in the new MPSN 
Series Capacitor Bank Control building and Idaho Power’s panel(s) in the series capacitor 
control building (cable supplied by Idaho Power). 
o Install and terminate the control wiring from the GE equipment for the series capacitor bank 
back to Idaho Power’s RTU and SCADA equipment (cable supplied by Idaho Power). 
o Make all fiber splices on and between the series capacitor platform and GE’s equipment in 
the new MPSN Series Capacitor Bank Control building. Note: GE is responsible for the 
purchase of all fiber and inner duct needed to accomplish this task. 
o All necessary power cables from GE equipment to the load centers will be purchased, 
installed, and landed by GE. 
o Any additional wiring or fiber optic connections to the existing bypass breakers will be 
completed by GE. 

Product Manual
1HSB435416-11 en 2
LTB 1/72,5-245/420-550E1
BLG 1002AS
1-pole operation
ABB Power Technologies AB
S-771 80 LUDVIKA
1HSB445416-260 en -
Product Manual PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
- Circuit-Breaker
- Operating Mechanism 1
2
4
3
5
6
7
8
9
11
10
ENVIRONMENTAL INFORMATION
- SF6 gas
- Disposal and recycling
SPARE PARTS
- Circuit-Breaker
- Operating Mechanism
OVERHAUL INSTRUCTIONS
- Circuit-Breaker
OVERHAUL INSTRUCTIONS
- Operating Mechanism
LUBRICANTS
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE
CHECKLIST
ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
- Circuit-Breaker
- Damping element
ABB Power Technologies AB
Product Description
1HSB435455-11 en 3
SF6 Circuit-Breaker LTB 1/72,5-245/420-550E1 with
operating mechanism
BLG 1002AS
1-pole operation
The information in this document is subject to alteration without prior notice and should not be regar-
ded as an undertaking from ABB Power Technologies AB. ABB Power Technologies AB takes no
responsibility for errors that can occur in the documentation.
ABB Power Technologies AB is not responsible for damage incurred due to the misuse of this docu-
ment.
The document, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced or copied without prior permission from ABB
Power Technologies AB. It may not either be imparted to third party or otherwise be used without aut-
horisation. Infringement hereof will be subject to action in accordance with applicable laws.
© ABB Power Technologies AB
Article number:
1HSB435455-11 en 3
Approval date:
2006-12-08
1HSB435455-11en3
i1HSB435455-11 en 3
Product Description
LIST OF CONTENTS
1. Description.......................................................................... 1
1.1 Design of the by-pass switch ..........................................................1
1.2 Weights of the by-pass switch parts................................................2
1.3 The breaking principle....................................................................3
1.4 Function of the operating mechanism.............................................4
1.5 Standards.........................................................................................4
iii1HSB435455-11 en 3
Product Description
FIGURES
Figure 1-1. By-pass switch LTB 1/72,5-245/420-550E1 ...................................2
Figure 1-2. By-pass switch pole in Closed position ..........................................3
Description
11HSB435455-11 en 3
Product Description
1. Description
This Product Description applies to the SF6 by-pass switch
LTB 1/72,5-245/420-550E1 with operating mechanism BLG 1002AS.
1.1 Design of the by-pass switch
The by-pass switch consists of three separate poles and each pole has three main
parts. At the lower end is a mechanism in an aluminium alloy housing. Above the
mechanism housing is a hollow post insulator in which the insulating rod runs.
At the top is the breaking unit.
Each breaking unit consists of a breaking chamber insulator, which, together with
the upper and the lower terminal flanges, makes up the enclosure. The enclosure
contains the upper and the lower current paths and an Auto-pufferTM. The Auto-
pufferTM runs on the outside of the lower current path. The main contacts are
integrated in the upper current path and in the lower section of the Auto-pufferTM.
The poles are mounted on separate hot-dipped galvanized frames. The frame
consists of two welded halves, which are interconnected with bolted cross stays.
Description
2 1HSB435455-11 en 3
Product Description
1.2 Weights of the by-pass switch parts
Figure 1-1. By-pass switch LTB 1/72,5-245/420-550E1
Item Part Weight
1 By-pass switch pole See dimension drawing
2 Operating mechanism 460 kg
3 Frame 86-200 kg
B10034
1
2
3
Description
31HSB435455-11 en 3
Product Description
1.3 The breaking principle
The by-pass switch poles work according to the Auto-PufferTM- principle with the
puffer cylinder (1) divided into two chambers, an Auto-PufferTM section (2) and a
compression section (3).
When the normal operating current is
interrupted, the SF6 gas is compressed in
the compression section (2) to an over-
pressure.
When the arcing contacts part, the gas in
the compression section (2) flows out and
extinguishes the arc at a current zero
passage.
When the short-circuit current is
interrupted the requisite extinguishing
pressure is built up in the Auto-PufferTM
section (3). The pressure increase is
achieved with energy from the arc and no
extra energy is required from the operating
mechanism.
On closing, the puffer cylinder (1) moves
upwards, the contacts engage and the
puffer cylinder (1) is refilled with gas.
Figure 1-2. By-pass switch pole in Closed position
1
2
3
Description
4 1HSB435455-11 en 3
Product Description
1.4 Function of the operating mechanism
The LTB by-pass switch is operated by a motor-charged spring operating
mechanism BLG 1002AS.
The operating mechanism is connected to the by-pass switch pole through a pull rod
system.
The by-pass switch is opened by the opening springs, which are housed in the
operating mechanism. When the by-pass switch is opened the closing spring, which
is permanently coupled to the by-pass switch mechanism, gets recharged. The
closing latch in the operating mechanism keeps the by-pass switch in the open
position. Closing the by-pass switch only requires the release of the closing latch,
by activating the closing coil.
The normal operating sequence is:
C - 0.2 s - OC - 3 min - OC.
1.5 Standards
The by-pass switches comply with the requirements according to IEC and in most
cases also IEEE/ANSI and are restrike-free when breaking a capacitive load.
1HSB435455-11 en 3
2006-12-08
ABB Power Technologies AB
Circuit-Breaker Division
SE-771 80 LUDVIKA
SWEDEN
Telephone: [phone]
Telefax: [phone]
ABB Power Technologies AB
Product Description
1HSB515432-101 en 3
SF6 Circuit-Breaker Operating Mechanism
BLG 1002AS
The information in this document is subject to alteration without prior notice and should not be regar-
ded as an undertaking from ABB Power Technologies AB. ABB Power Technologies AB takes no
responsibility for errors that can occur in the documentation.
ABB Power Technologies AB is not responsible for damage incurred due to the misuse of this docu-
ment.
The document, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced or copied without prior permission from ABB
Power Technologies AB. It may not either be imparted to third party or otherwise be used without aut-
horisation. Infringement hereof will be subject to action in accordance with applicable laws.
© ABB Power Technologies AB
Article number:
1HSB515432-101 en 3
Approval date:
2004-10-04
i1HSB515432-101 en 3
Product Description
LIST OF CONTENTS
1. Description.......................................................................... 1
1.1 Design of the operating mechanism................................................1
1.2 Normal operating mode ..................................................................2
1.3 Closing operation............................................................................3
1.4 Opening operation...........................................................................4
2. Operations .......................................................................... 5
2.1 Remote/Local operation..................................................................5
2.2 Close operation ...............................................................................5
2.3 Open operation................................................................................6
2.4 Automatic rapid reconnection.........................................................6
3. Components........................................................................ 7
3.1 Drive unit........................................................................................7
3.2 Mechanical interlocking..................................................................7
3.3 Catch gear .......................................................................................8
3.4 Damper............................................................................................8
3.5 Auxiliary contact.............................................................................9
3.6 Heating element ..............................................................................9
iii1HSB515432-101 en 3
Product Description
FIGURES
Figure 1-1. Operating mechanism .....................................................................1
Figure 1-2. Normal operating mode ..................................................................2
Figure 1-3. Closing operation ............................................................................3
Figure 1-4. Opening operation ...........................................................................4
Figure 2-1. Remote/Local operation ..................................................................5
Figure 2-2. Close operation ...............................................................................5
Figure 2-3. Open operation ................................................................................6
Figure 3-1. Drive unit ........................................................................................7
Figure 3-2. Interlocking mechanism ..................................................................7
Figure 3-3. Catch gear .......................................................................................8
Figure 3-4. Closing and Opening damper ..........................................................8
Figure 3-5. Auxiliary contact .............................................................................9
Figure 3-6. Heating element ..............................................................................9
Description
11HSB515432-101 en 3
Product Description
1. Description
The spring operating mechanism BLG 1002AS is intended for operating a by-pass
switch with integrated closing springs.
N.B.Under no circumstances should the operating mechanism be operated without
first being attached and adjusted with the associated by-pass switch.
1.1 Design of the operating mechanism
The operating mechanism consists of a spring battery with associated drive unit,
that automatically charges the spring battery after each opening operation.
An opening catch gear holds the charged opening spring prepared for the opening of
the by-pass switch and the recharging of the closing springs. A closing catch gear
holds the open by-pass switch prepared for immediate closing.
The components of the operating mechanism are housed in a cubicle, which also
contains a control panel. The roof and doors of the cubicle can be removed to
facilitate service and overhaul procedures.
The operating sequence is C - 0.2 s - OC - 3 min - OC. The time between closing
operations should not be less than 1 minute during the testing of by-pass switches
and relay systems involving more than 3 closing operations.
Figure 1-1. Operating mechanism
Item
1Drive unit
2 Mechanism
3 Control panel
4 Spring battery
5 Heating element
(behind protection
plate)
Front Back, with the
cover removed
1
2
4
3
5
B20001
Description
2 1HSB515432-101 en 3
Product Description
1.2 Normal operating mode
During normal service the by-pass switch is in the open position. The closing spring
(1) on the by-pass switch and the opening springs (2) in the operating mechanism
are charged. The by-pass switch is kept in the open position by the closing catch
gear (3) of the operating mechanism.
Figure 1-2. Normal operating mode
Item
1 Closing spring
2 Opening springs
3 Closing catch gear
B20029
1
2
3
Description
31HSB515432-101 en 3
Product Description
1.3 Closing operation
To close the by-pass switch:
The latch in the closing catch gear (1) is released by actuating the closing coil. The
closing spring (2) pulls, via the pull rod (3), the operating lever (4) to the right. The
movement is damped at the end position by the closing damper (5). At the end
position the operating lever (4) rests against the cam disc (6).
The opening springs (7) are still charged.
Figure 1-3. Closing operation
Item
1 Closing catch gear
2 Closing spring
3Pull rod
4 Operating lever
5 Closing damper
6Cam disc
7 Opening springs
B20028
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
Description
4 1HSB515432-101 en 3
Product Description
1.4 Opening operation
To open the by-pass switch:
The latch in the opening catch gear (1) is released by actuating the opening coil. The
chain section (2) is released and transfers the energy from the opening spring (3) to
the cam disc (4). The cam disc (4) rotates 360° clockwise and pushes the operating
lever (5) to the left until the closing catch gear (6) engages. The movement is
damped in the end position by the opening damper (7). The closing spring (8) is
charged via the pull rod (9).
The chain section (10) travels up the same path as the chain section (2) travels
down.
Figure 1-4. Opening operation
Item
1 Opening catch gear
2 Chain section
3 Opening spring
4Cam disc
5 Operating lever
6 Closing catch gear
7 Opening damper
8 Closing spring
9Pull rod
10 Chain section
B20031
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Operations
51HSB515432-101 en 3
Product Description
2. Operations
2.1 Remote/Local operation
At normal operation mode the “Local/Remote/Disconnect” switch (1) is in the
“Remote” position for electrical remote operations. In the “Local” position,
operations can only be carried out using the “Open/Close” operation switch (2).
Figure 2-1. Remote/Local operation
2.2 Close operation
A Close operation using the “Open/Close” operation switch (2) or electrical remote
impulses can only take place if:
• The “Local/Remote/Disconnect” switch (1) is in the “Remote” or “Local”
position.
• The closing spring is charged.
• The by-pass switch is in the open position.
• The gas pressure is greater than the blocking level.
Figure 2-2. Close operation
Item
1 Local/Remote/Disconnect switch
2 Open/Close operation switch
Item
1 Local/Remote/Disconnect switch
2 Open/Close operation switch
12
12
Operations
6 1HSB515432-101 en 3
Product Description
2.3 Open operation
An Open operation of a closed by-pass switch can be made with the
“Local/Remote/Disconnect” switch (1) in the “Local” position and the
“Open/Close” operation switch (2) in the “Close” position.
Figure 2-3. Open operation
2.4 Automatic rapid reconnection
Automatic rapid reconnection, Close -0.2 s - Open- Close is possible if:
• The by-pass switch is open.
• The “Local/Remote/Disconnect” switch is in the “Remote” position.
• The mechanism’s opening spring is fully charged when the operating sequence
is started.
With automatic rapid reconnection, the switchgear’s relay equipment can give an
immediate Close impulse if the short-circuit still remains in the network. As the
operating circuits are electrically interlocked via the auxiliary contact, a Open
operation will always be completed before an Close operation is started, even if the
Open impulse has been given during a current Closing operation.
Item
1 Local/Remote/Disconnect switch
2 Open/Close operation switch
12
Components
71HSB515432-101 en 3
Product Description
3. Components
3.1 Drive unit
The drive unit is supplied with one motor with rating of either
60 V DC, 110 V DC, 220 V DC, 60 V AC 50, 60 Hz, 110 V AC 50, 60 Hz or
220 V AC 50, 60 Hz.
The motor should be able charge the springs at 85% of the nominal voltage
(acc. to IEC).
Figure 3-1. Drive unit
3.2 Mechanical interlocking
The interlocking mechanism prevents an opening operation from being carried out
if the by-pass switch is already in the open position. It also prevents opening if the
opening springs are uncharged or not fully charged. This can occur e.g. if the
opening catch gear is activited by hand or if a mechanical failure occurs in the catch
gear.
Figure 3-2. Interlocking mechanism
Item
1Drive unit
Item
1 Limit switch
2 Interlocking lever
3 Interlocking disc
4Cam disc
5 Operating rod
6 Operating lever shaft
1
B20031
1
4
3
2
65B20007
Components
8 1HSB515432-101 en 3
Product Description
3.3 Catch gear
The operating mechanism is as standard fitted with two opening coil and two
closing coils.
Standard voltage of the coils are 110, 220 V DC or AC, but other voltages may
occur.
The rated standard output of the coils is 200 W.
As an option, the coils can be rated to an output of 450 W when short closing time is
demanded.
Figure 3-3. Catch gear
3.4 Damper
The operating mechanism is equipped with one Opening damper (1) to slow down
the rotating movement of the cam disc and one Closing damper (2) to dampen the
final phase of the closing movement.
Figure 3-4. Closing and Opening damper
Item
1 Catch gear
Item
1 Opening damper
2 Closing damper
1B20034
1
2
B20024
Components
91HSB515432-101 en 3
Product Description
3.5 Auxiliary contact
The operating mechanism is as standard equipped with a 6-pole auxiliary contact (1)
consisting of six normally open and six normally closed contacts. Three normally
closed and one normally open contact are used for the operating mechanism’s own
function.
As an option, it is possible to add six normally closed and six normally open
contacts or twelve normally closed and twelve normally open contacts.
The shaft (2) of the auxiliary contact is in direct connection with the operating lever
of the operating mechanism and accordingly follows the movement of the breaker
contacts.
Figure 3-5. Auxiliary contact
3.6 Heating element
The operating mechanism is equipped with a heating element to prevent
condensation and should always be connected.
Figure 3-6. Heating element
Item
1 Auxiliary contact
2Shaft
Item
1 Heating element
12B20035
132
5 46
1
B20036
1HSB515432-101 en 3
2004-10-04
ABB Power Technologies AB
Circuit-Breaker Division
SE-771 80 LUDVIKA
SWEDEN
Telephone: [phone]
Telefax: [phone]
ABB Power Technologies AB
Assembly Instructions
1HSB435410-11 en 2
SF6 Circuit-Breaker LTB 1/72,5-245/420-550E1 with
operating mechanism
BLG 1002AS
1-pole operation
The information in this document is subject to alteration without prior notice and should not be regar-
ded as an undertaking from ABB Power Technologies AB. ABB Power Technologies AB takes no
responsibility for errors that can occur in the documentation.
ABB Power Technologies AB is not responsible for damage incurred due to the misuse of this docu-
ment.
The document, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced or copied without prior permission from ABB
Power Technologies AB. It may not either be imparted to third party or otherwise be used without aut-
horisation. Infringement hereof will be subject to action in accordance with applicable laws.
© ABB Power Technologies AB
Article number:
1HSB435410-11 en 2
Approval date:
2006-12-08
i1HSB435410-11 en 2
Assembly Instructions
LIST OF CONTENTS
1. General................................................................................ 1
2. Safety................................................................................... 3
2.1 Warning text....................................................................................3
2.2 Safety, general.................................................................................4
3. Delivery ............................................................................... 5
3.1 Weights............................................................................................5
3.2 Unpacking.......................................................................................6
3.3 Storage before assembly .................................................................7
4. Assembly ............................................................................ 9
4.1 Preparations.....................................................................................9
4.2 Frame assembly.............................................................................11
4.3 Assembling the frame on the foundation......................................12
4.4 Assembling the by-pass switch pole on the frame........................13
4.5 Preparations for assembling the operating mechanism and the
protective tube...............................................................................15
4.6 Assembly of corona rings .............................................................16
4.7 Assembling the operating mechanism..........................................17
4.8 Final assembly of the by-pass switch pole....................................18
4.9 Assembling the pull rods...............................................................19
4.10 Inspecting the bolted joints, etc.....................................................22
5. Electrical connections ..................................................... 23
5.1 Connection of the operating mechanism.......................................23
5.2 Assembly of busbars or overhead lines.........................................23
5.3 Charging the opening springs .......................................................24
6. Pressurising the poles..................................................... 25
6.1 Preparations...................................................................................25
6.2 Gas filling with SF6 gas................................................................26
6.3 Filling with mixed gas ..................................................................29
6.4 Gas monitoring system..................................................................30
6.5 Leakage test...................................................................................31
7. Commissioning................................................................. 32
7.1 Fitting the plate and cover.............................................................32

ii 1HSB435410-11 en 2
Assembly Instructions
8. Operating values...............................................................33
8.1 Times............................................................................................ 33
8.2 Motor and control circuits............................................................ 33
8.3 Resistance..................................................................................... 33
8.4 Contact stroke............................................................................... 33
iii1HSB435410-11 en 2
Assembly Instructions
FIGURES
Figure 3-1. By-pass switch parts ........................................................................5
Figure 3-2. Lifting the operating mechanism ....................................................6
Figure 4-1. Assembly markings .........................................................................9
Figure 4-2. Foundation ....................................................................................10
Figure 4-3. Frame assembly .............................................................................11
Figure 4-4. Frame assembly on the foundation ...............................................12
Figure 4-5. Lifting the by-pass switch pole .....................................................13
Figure 4-6. The non-return valve of the by-pass switch pole ..........................13
Figure 4-7. Fitting the by-pass switch pole on the frame ................................14
Figure 4-8. Dismantling the plate and cover ....................................................15
Figure 4-9. Assembling corona rings ...............................................................16
Figure 4-10. Assembly of the operating mechanism .........................................17
Figure 4-11. By-pass switch poles on the frame ................................................18
Figure 4-12. Checking of the opening lever’s locking lug ................................19
Figure 4-13. Adjusting the operating mechanism ..............................................19
Figure 4-14. Assembling the pullrod .................................................................21
Figure 5-1. Operating mechanism ...................................................................23
Figure 5-2. Charging the Opening spring ........................................................24
Figure 6-1. Gas filling ......................................................................................26
Figure 6-2. Density monitor and union nut ......................................................28
Figure 6-3. Gas monitoring ..............................................................................30
Figure 7-1. Fitting the plate and cover .............................................................32
General
11HSB435410-11 en 2
Assembly Instructions
1. General
This Assembly instruction applies to the SF6 by-pass switch
LTB 1/72,5-245/420-550E1 with operating mechanism BLG 1002AS for
1-pole operation and contain all essential information for assembly and
commissioning.
Read through the entire Assembly instruction before starting the assembly work.
Safety
31HSB435410-11 en 2
Assembly Instructions
2. Safety
2.1 Warning text
Warning text occurs where required and indicates that the text in question should be
observed extra carefully. The warning texts are marked as indicated below:
DANGER
indicates an immediate hazardous situation that, if not avoided, will result
in death or serious injury.
WARNING
indicates an immediate hazardous situation that, if not avoided, can result
in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
indicates a hazardous situation that can result in minor or moderate
injury.
N.B.is used for hazards that may only result in damage to the installation.
Safety
4 1HSB435410-11 en 2
Assembly Instructions
2.2 Safety, general
WARNING
By-pass switch with pressurized porcelain insulators.
Mechanical damage on the porcelain can cause it to explode with the
following risk of splintering.
Work on the by-pass switch that entails risk of a mechanical damage to the
insulators should be carried out at reduced gas pressure, 0.125 MPa (abs).
WARNING
By-pass switch with pressurized composite insulators.
Work on the by-pass switch that entails risk of mechanical damage to the
insulators should be carried out at reduced gas pressure, 0.125 MPa (abs).
WARNING
Do not operate the operating mechanism unloaded!
Operations should take place only after the mechanism has been
connected and trimmed with the associated pressurized by-pass switch.
The operating sequence is C - 0.2 s - OC - 3 min - OC. The time between closing
operations should not be less than 1 minute during the testing of by-pass switches
and relay systems involving more than 3 closing operations.
Delivery
51HSB435410-11 en 2
Assembly Instructions
3. Delivery
Check on arrival that the delivery corresponds with the order and delivery
documents and that no transport damage has occurred.
If any material is missing or if transport damage has occurred, please report this
immediately to ABB Power Technologies AB, Circuit Breaker Unit.
3.1 Weights
The weights of the by-pass switch parts are as follows:
Figure 3-1. By-pass switch parts
Item Part Weight
1 By-pass switch pole Stated on the applicable dimension drawing for the order
2 Operating mechanism 465 kg
3 Frame 86-200 kg
B10034
1
2
3
Delivery
6 1HSB435410-11 en 2
Assembly Instructions
3.2 Unpacking
The operating mechanism with blocking beams is packed in a wooden crate or on a
pallet. The crate is marked with the case number and the gross weight. Other
information is written on a plywood board/label, which is attached to two of the
crate’s sides.
The operating mechanism must be lifted using the lifting eyes on top of the cubicle,
see Figure 3-2. Slings must not be placed around the cubicle when lifting.
One sling should be attached to the lifting eye and another sling attached around the
bracket on the bottom when the operating mechanism is supplied in a crate,
see Figure 3-2.
The blocking beams should be stored for future maintenance and overhauling.
The by-pass switches be kept in the transport packaging until just before assembly.
All packing material can be recycled.
Figure 3-2. Lifting the operating mechanism
Supplied in a crate Supplied on a pallet
B20023
Delivery
71HSB435410-11 en 2
Assembly Instructions
3.3 Storage before assembly
3.3.1 General
The by-pass switches are normally delivered in units adapted for transport.
Intermediate storage of these units should be avoided. If intermediate storage can
not be avoided the units should be stored indoors or under a roof. They should also
be stored horizontally above ground level to avoid cracking or water damage. Upon
arrival it is important that the plastic cover is removed in order to prevent corrosion
due to condensation (except for spare parts, see chapter 3.3.5).
Storage in a humid climate, without proper ventilation, can lead to discolouring of
zinc coated surfaces. This discolouring is known as white rust, and consists mainly
of zinc oxide and zinc hydroxide and is a result of a chemical process between pure
zinc on the surface and moisture.
The long term rust protection is not affected because the steel-zinc layer under the
surface remains unaffected. According to Swedish standard the presence of white
rust is no reason to reject goods.
Upon arrival each unit should be checked regarding the following:
– The delivery corresponds with the order and shipping documents.
– Damage due to transport and missing parts.
If damage is discovered or suspected the case should be opened and photos taken.
Report damage as well as missing parts.
All components should be rationally stored for easy access. All material should be
stored in an approved store1, exceptions are stated below. Dust, smoke, corrosive or
inflammable gas, steam or salt must not pollute the surrounding air otherwise the
equipment must be cleaned before construction.
The original cases can be used for storage, but the plastic covering should be
removed. The assembly units’ coupling pieces as well as connections are provided
with transport covers or protective covers which must not be removed until shortly
before the by-pass switches are assembled.
3.3.2 Stacking of cases
Cases of different widths normally not be stacked (the pressure may destroy the
covers of the lower cases). If cases of different widths need to be stacked, a
framework must be used between the cases in order to distribute the pressure
evenly. Stacking of more than three cases is not allowed. It must be noted that
stacking causes instability sidewise and therefore the cases must be secured, i.e.,
prevented from tumbling down or rolling over.
1. An approved store is defined as consisting of:
roof
firm base
humidity below 50%
temperature 20°C (±10°C)
Delivery
8 1HSB435410-11 en 2
Assembly Instructions
3.3.3 Operating mechanism
The operating mechanism should be unpacked on arrival. If it is not kept in an
approved store, the heating element must be connected and permanently switched
on to prevent the control equipment from corrosion or damage due to freezing.
3.3.4 By-pass switches
The by-pass switches should be stored in their original cases where they are
properly protected from damage. The units not stand in water. The by-pass switches
can be stored outdoors. When stored outdoors they should be protected by at least a
tarpaulin. The tarpaulin must not be so tight that air circulation to zinc coated
surfaces is prevented. Any condense should easily drip off.
The lowest permitted ambient temperature for storage is -30°C.
3.3.5 Spare parts
Spare parts be kept indoors in an approved store and in their original packing. This
is especially important for rubber components (seals etc.), which must also be
protected from sunlight to avoid drying. Gaskets have a limited storage life, so
avoid storing them. Frames can be stored outdoors.
Assembly
91HSB435410-11 en 2
Assembly Instructions
4. Assembly
4.1 Preparations
Before starting the assembly, make certain that all required tools and documents are
at hand.
• Standard tools with torque wrenches (9 - 550 Nm).
• Lifting devices and lifting slings.
• Lubricant, see Lubricant instructions for suppliers and brand names.
Grease “G”: ABB article number 1171 4014-407
Grease “SV”: ABB article number 1171 4016-610.
• Contact paste.
• Applicable dimension drawings and wiring diagrams for the order.
4.1.1 Assembly markings
The by-pass switches are delivered dismantled in transport units. The parts are
marked to facilitate assembly. The by-pass switch poles and operating mechanisms
have been routine tested together.
Check that the assembly markings correspond with Figure 4-1 and that the serial
number on the operating mechanism corresponds with the serial number of the by-
pass switch pole.
Figure 4-1. Assembly markings
Item
1 Operating mechanism A1
2 Operating mechanism B1
3 Operating mechanism C1
4 By-pass switch pole A1
5 By-pass switch pole B1
6 By-pass switch pole C1
B10037
3 2 1
6 5 4
Assembly
10 1HSB435410-11 en 2
Assembly Instructions
4.1.2 Foundation
The by-pass switches foundation must be flat and level. Figure 4-2 shows the
permitted deviations in mm for the position of the foundation bolts.
Adjust any deviations using spacer washers, see “Chapter 4.3, Assembling the
frame on the foundation”. The nominal dimensions are stated on the applicable
dimension drawing for the order.
Figure 4-2. Foundation
Bolt length ≥ 110 mm
±1
±1
B10038
Assembly
111HSB435410-11 en 2
Assembly Instructions
4.2 Frame assembly
The frame is supplied as welded halves (1)with six cross stays (2) and nuts, bolts
and washers (3).
Bolt the halves (1) together as shown in Figure 4-3. Fit the cross stays (2)
according to the numbering 1-4, using the supplied nuts, bolts and washers (3).
N.B.Make sure the stays are fitted as indicated in Figure 4-3 and to the intended
operating mechanism.
Tighten the bolts (3) by hand.
N.B.Final tightening of the bolts (3) should be made after assembly of the frame
against the foundation.
Figure 4-3. Frame assembly
Item
1 Frame halves 2 pcs.
2 Stays 6 pcs.
3 Bolts M20x60
Nuts M20
Washers 21x37x3
8 pcs.
8 pcs.
16 pcs.
1
2
3
4
3
2
1
Assembly
12 1HSB435410-11 en 2
Assembly Instructions
4.3 Assembling the frame on the foundation
Check that the frames are upright and adjust them to the same level using the nuts
(2). The dimension of the foundation bolts (1), washers (3) and nuts (2) are stated on
the applicable dimension drawing for the order.
Foundation bolts (1), nuts (2) and spacer washers (4) are not supplied.
Fill the gap between the lower nut and foundation with spacer washers (4) .
The gap should be as small as possible.
Tighten the lower nut against the spacer washers (4). For the final tightening of the
frame against the foundation, use the upper nut, which is tightened with a tightening
torque of 300-350 Nm for M24 and 500-550 Nm for M30 nut.
Tighten the bolts (3) in Figure 4-3 with a tightening torque of 430 Nm.
Figure 4-4. Frame assembly on the foundation
Item
1 Foundation bolts, L ≥ 110 mm
(not supplied)
2 Nuts (not supplied) 8 pcs.
3 Washers 8 pcs.
4 Spacer washers (not supplied)
5 Foundations
6 Frame foot
300-350 Nm (M24)
or
500-550 Nm (M30)
TIGHTENING TORQUE
20
1
2
6
4
5
3
10
10
≥11
0

m
m
2
B10006
TIGHTENING TORQUE
430 Nm
Assembly
131HSB435410-11 en 2
Assembly Instructions
4.4 Assembling the by-pass switch pole on the frame
Place a lifting sling around the breaking unit’s top as shown in Figure 4-5 and, using
this method, lift the by-pass switch pole from its horizontal position in the transport
packaging.
Note the position of the lifting sling! For composite insulators: Place the lifting
sling as close to the terminal flange as possible and not on the rubber surface
Check that the bolts (1) are tightened with tightening torque 45 Nm before lifting
the pole to vertical position
Figure 4-5. Lifting the by-pass switch pole
Check that the by-pass switch pole
does not leak before assembly on
the frame.
1. Loosen the sealing cap (1).
2. Press the valve cone of the
non-return valve (2) inwards
using a rod with a diameter of
about 5 mm. A clear hissing
noise should be heard from
the pole. If no hissing noise is
heard, the pole leaks. This
must be rectified before
assembly.
3. Fit the sealing cap (1).
Figure 4-6. The non-return valve of the by-pass switch pole
B10040
1
2
1
B10008
Assembly
14 1HSB435410-11 en 2
Assembly Instructions
Fit a by-pass switch pole to each frame according to Figure 4-7. Fit the bolts,
washers and nuts (1) and tighten by hand.
N.B.Final tightening is carried out when the operating mechanism has been fitted.
Figure 4-7. Fitting the by-pass switch pole on the frame
Item
1 Bolts M20x70
Nuts M20
Washers 21x37x3
4 pcs.
4 pcs.
8 pcs.
1
B10041
Assembly
151HSB435410-11 en 2
Assembly Instructions
4.5 Preparations for assembling the operating mechanism and the
protective tube
Remove all the pole covers (1)
and the plates (2) with the Close-
Open signs, to gain the best
possible access to the pole
mechanisms.
Figure 4-8. Dismantling the plate and cover
Item
1 Cover
2Plate
1 2B10012
Assembly
16 1HSB435410-11 en 2
Assembly Instructions
4.6 Assembly of corona rings
1. Remove the four of the eight bolts (1) that hold the terminal flange against the
breaking chamber insulator.
2. Lift the corona rings (2) into position and tighten the bolts (3) by hand.
3. Refit the bolts (1) and tigthen with a tightening torque of 60 Nm.
4. Tighten the bolts (3) with a tightening torque of 60 Nm
Repeat points 1-4 to fit the other corona rings.
Figure 4-9. Assembling corona rings
Item
1 Bolts M12x50
Washers 13x28x3
8 pcs.
8 pcs.
2 Corona rings 2 pcs
3 Bolts M12x35
Washers 13x24x2,5
Nuts M12
8 pcs.
16 pcs
8 pcs.
TIGHTENING TORQUE
60 Nm
1
2
3
1
2
3
Assembly
171HSB435410-11 en 2
Assembly Instructions
4.7 Assembling the operating mechanism
The operating mechanism is delivered with the closing springs correctly adjusted to
the corresponding by-pass switch pole.
Fit the operating mechanism as indicated in Figure 4-10.
Fit all bolts, washers and nuts (1)and tighten them by hand. Then tighten the bolted
joints (1) with a tightening torque of 79 Nm.
Figure 4-10. Assembly of the operating mechanism
Item
1 Bolts M12x50
Nuts M12
Washers 13x24x2.5
10 pcs
10 pcs
20 pcs
2 Spring washer 13x29x3 4 pcs
1
1
1
1
2
TIGHTENING TORQUE
79 Nm
Assembly
18 1HSB435410-11 en 2
Assembly Instructions
4.8 Final assembly of the by-pass switch pole
Tighten the poles to the frame with a tightening torque of 300 Nm.
Figure 4-11. By-pass switch poles on the frame
B10041
TIGHTENING TORQUE
300 Nm
Assembly
191HSB435410-11 en 2
Assembly Instructions
4.9 Assembling the pull rods
Each pole is supplied set to a basic setting. Adjust the poles to the correct open
position when fitting the operating rods between the operating mechanism and the
pole.
Pull rod assembly takes place in stages:
• Preparations for assembling the pull rods.
• Assembling the pull rods between the operating mechanisms and the poles.
4.9.1 Preparations for assembling the pull rods
• Check that the opening lever’s (1) locking lug rests against the opening latch
roller (2).
Figure 4-12. Checking of the opening lever’s locking lug
• Adjust the operating mechanism as indicated in Figure 4-13. Press down the
locking lug (1) on the operating lever by inserting a tool, for example a large
screwdriver in the hole (2). Insert a screwdriver in hole (3) and press the
operating lever to the right.
Figure 4-13. Adjusting the operating mechanism
Item
1 Opening lever
2 Roller, opening catch gear
Item
1 Locking lug
2 Hole in mechanism
3 Hole in mechanism
2
1 B10013
2 3
B10035
3
1 2
Assembly
20 1HSB435410-11 en 2
Assembly Instructions
4.9.2 Assembling the pull rod between operating mechanism A1 and pole A1
Each pole is supplied set to a basic setting and its Closed and Open positions are
determined. Adjustment is made as indicated below (see Figure 4-14).
• Move by hand the operating lever (1) and the pull rod from the operating
mechanism (2) towards its Closed position sufficiently far so that the pull rod
(3) can be placed between the coupling link (4) and the pull rod from the
operating mechanism (2).
• Simultaneously screw the pull rod (3) into the operating mechanism’s pull rod
(2) (right-hand thread) and the pole’s coupling link (4) (left-hand thread).
N.B.Remember the two spring washers (5) under each locking nut (6).
• Turn the pull rod (3) so its length decreases at the same time as the by-pass
switches operating lever (7) moves anti-clockwise. Thread until measure 301
mm in the figure is obtained. Now the Closed position is pre-adjusted.
• Remove the tensioning tool (8) at the end of the closing device. Keep the cover
(9), remove the long bolt and complete with the delivered standard bolt and
washer (10).
• Before tigthening the locking nuts (6 and 11) the adjustment must be check
even in Open position. Correct Open position is when alignment check hole
(12) is directly aligned with the predrilled hole in the mechanism housing (13).
• Use a 6 mm diameter rod to check the alignment of the hole.
N.B.Before the circuit-breaker is operated to the Open position, the operating
mechanism should be electrically connected, see chapter 5.1 and the circuit-
breaker connected to the busbar, see chapter 5-2.
N.B.The by-pass switch must be filled with gas before it is operated to Open
position.
• If the holes are not aligning, move the operating lever (1) and pull rod (2) to the
Closed position by hand again and adjust the position. After the adjustment,
repeat the check in Open position and ensure that the check holes are aligning.
WARNING
Adjustment of the pull rod must be carried out in the Closed position.
High spring forces can otherwise cause personal injury or mechanical
damage to the installation.
• Finally check that the the pull rod (3) is screwed past the check holes
(14 and 15) in the coupling link and pull rod. The tightening torque for the
locking nuts is 300 Nm.
TIGHTENING TORQUE
300 Nm
Assembly
211HSB435410-11 en 2
Assembly Instructions
Figure 4-14. Assembling the pullrod
Repeat the procedure to assemble the pull rods between operating mechanism B1
and pole B1 and between operating mechanism C1 and pole C1.
Item
1 Operating lever
2 Pull rod from operating
mechanism
3Pull rod
4 Coupling link, pole
5 Spring washers
6 Locking nut
7 Operating lever
8 Tensioning tool
9 Cover
10 Bolt M16x30
Washer 17x30x3
11 Locking nut
12 Alignment check hole in
operating lever
13 Mechanism housing
14 Check hole in coupling link
15 Check hole in pullrod
14
B10014
4
56
12
13
2
1
3
7
8,10
9
11
5
15
301 mm
Assembly
22 1HSB435410-11 en 2
Assembly Instructions
4.10 Inspecting the bolted joints, etc.
• Use a 6 mm diameter pin to check that the operating lever’s alignment check
hole is aligned with the predrilled hole in the mechanism housing.
• Check that all bolted joints are tightened to the correct tightening torque in
accordance with the table below.
Bolted joint Tightening torque (Nm)
Frame 430
Foundation 300-350 (M24) or 500-550(M30)
By-pass switch pole 300
Operating mechanism 79
Pull rod 300
Corona rings for the breaking
unit
60
Density monitor 10
Protective tube 79
Plate 22,5
Cover 9
Electrical connections
231HSB435410-11 en 2
Assembly Instructions
5. Electrical connections
5.1 Connection of the operating mechanism
Insert the operation and signal cables through the gland plate at the bottom of the
cubicle. Fit the gland plate with cable gland suitable for the cable in question.
Connect the cables to the terminal blocks in accordance with the applicable wiring
diagram. The terminal blocks are of a snap-in type and are designed both for
through wiring with termination of a stranded conductor with a cross-section of
max. 4 mm2, and as disconnectable block with termination of a stranded conductor
with a cross section of max. 6 mm2 intended for motor circuits, AC circuits and
supply circuits.
Connect the earth wire to the earth terminal (1) on the side of the cabinet.
Figure 5-1. Operating mechanism
5.2 Assembly of busbars or overhead lines
WARNING
Work must not be carried out on a pressurized by-pass switch.
High voltage conductors consisting of aluminium busbars or aluminium connectors
for overhead lines can, after being treated with contact paste, be directly connected
to the breaking unit’s terminal flanges which are also made of aluminium.
However, if copper busbars or copper connectors are used for the overhead lines,
grease should be used and a bimetallic washer fitted in the joint. Bimetallic washers
can be supplied by ABB on request.
1 B10015
Electrical connections
24 1HSB435410-11 en 2
Assembly Instructions
Using contact paste or grease
1. Clean all grease and old paste from the contact surfaces.
2. Rub down the surfaces using an abrasive cloth, e.g. Scotch Brite No. 7447 or
emery cloth.
3.Apply immediately:
- Contact paste on aluminium surfaces.
- Grease “SV”, ABB’s article number 1171 4016-610, on copper surfaces.
4. Fit together the joint with the paste or grease still applied.
5. Wipe off any excess paste or grease.
N.B.Position the bimetallic washers so that the aluminium sides face the
aluminium surfaces and the copper sides are turned towards the copper
surfaces or the silver-plated surfaces.
N.B.The contact paste may only be used on fixed joints. It must not be used
inside the breaking unit.
5.3 Charging the opening springs
Open the by-pass switch and start the motor to charge the opening springs (1). The
drive sprocket (2) rotates anticlockwise and pulls up the chain section (3) so that the
spring yoke (4) is lifted and charges the opening springs. The chain section (5) runs
down, while the chain sections (6) and (7) do not move.
Figure 5-2. Charging the Opening spring
Item
1 Opening springs
2 Drive sprocket
3 Chain section
4 Spring yoke
5 Chain section
6 Chain section
7 Chain section
B20029
1
1
3
2
3
4
5
6
7
Pressurising the poles
251HSB435410-11 en 2
Assembly Instructions
6. Pressurising the poles
The by-pass switch poles are supplied vacuum-processed and filled with SF6 gas at
a pressure of 0.12- 0.13 MPa abs at 20°C.
6.1 Preparations
WARNING
During commissioning, the SF6 gas or the gas mixture needs to be refilled
to the pressure stated on the rating plate. Different gas pressures can occur,
depending on different requirements with regard to the lowest ambient
temperature.
Pressurisation takes place directly from a gas cylinder using the gas filling
equipment, ABB article number 1HSB 445439-A for SF6 gas or 1HSB 445439-B
for gas mixture.
The gas hose for the filling equipment is supplied vacuum-pumped and filled with
SF6 gas.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury while refilling, due to possible transport damage
to the porcelain, assembly personnel must exercise great care and stay in a
protected and safe area (with regard to splintering) away from the by-pass
switch. The gas cylinder and refilling equipment should be placed in the
same area.
• Connect the control cables to the operating mechanism’s terminal blocks for
opening and closing. The cables are routed to the control room or protected
area away from the by-pass switch.
• Connect the cables to appropriate pushbutton switches.
• Set the operating mechanism’s “Local/Remote/Disconnect” switch in the
“Remote” position.
• Switch on the motor starter so the opening springs are charged.
• Open the terminal blocks to which the density monitor cables are connected
and interrupt the circuit to the interlocking relays.
Pressurising the poles
26 1HSB435410-11 en 2
Assembly Instructions
6.2 Gas filling with SF6 gas
Figure 6-1. Gas filling
1. Place the gas cylinder (1) in a protected area.
2. Check the filling pressure and any possible gas mixture stated on the by-pass
switch rating plate.
3. Fit the regulator (2) on the gas cylinder. Set the right filling pressure,
compensated for the temperature as indicated in table 6-1 or table 6-2, on the
regulator.
4. Pull the O-rings off the density monitor (3) with your fingers.
N.B.Do not use a sharp tool.
5. Lubricate the O-rings thoroughly with grease “G” and refit them on the density
monitor.
Item
1 Gas cylinder
2 Regulator
3 Density monitor (old or new
design)
4 Coupling
5Valve
6 The by-pass switch’s gas valve
7Hose
8 Adaptor
9 Nipple with union nut
10 Equal union cross
11 Valve1
3
2
4 75
6
8
9
B10016 1110
3
Pressurising the poles
271HSB435410-11 en 2
Assembly Instructions
6. Connect the density monitor (3) to the coupling (4) or the equal union cross
(10). Open valve (5) or alternatively, valve (11). If the density monitor (3) is
connected to coupling (4), then valve (11) must be closed. However, if the
density monitor (3) is connected to the equal union cross (10), then valve (5)
must be closed.
7. Connect coupling (4) to the by-pass switch’s gas valve (6).
8. Connect the gas-filled hose (7) to the coupling.
9. Connect the hose (7) to the gas cylinder (1).
10. Go from the by-pass switch to the protected area and let the gas flow until the
regulator (2) switches off.
11. Wait until the gas temperature has reached the by-pass switch temperature level
before reading off the gas pressure on the density monitor (3). Adjust the
pressure if necessary
12. Dismantle the hose (7) from the coupling (4) on the by-pass switch.
13. Close the valve to the density monitor (3).
14. Dismantle the coupling (4) from the by-pass switch.
15. Release the pressure on the density monitor (3) by opening valve (5) or valve
(11).
16. Dismantle the density monitor (3) from the coupling (4) and fit it on the by-
pass switch.
17. Repeat from 4 through to 16 for poles B1 and C1.
N.B.When reading from the precision gauge, correct the filling pressure
depending on the temperature as indicated in table 6-1.
Table 6-1. Filling pressure
Filling pressure 0,7 MPa (abs) stated on the rating plate
Filling pressure read on the gauge
Temp. when
filling °C
MPa
(abs)
bar
(abs)
MPa
(overpressure)
bar
(overpressure)
+40 0.75 7.5 0.65 6.5
+30 0.72 7.2 0.62 6.2
+20 0.70 7.0 0.60 6.0
+10 0.66 6.6 0.56 5.6
± 0 0.63 6.3 0.53 5.3
-10 0.61 6.1 0.51 5.1
-20 0.58 5.8 0.48 4.8
Pressurising the poles
28 1HSB435410-11 en 2
Assembly Instructions
18. Close the valve on the gas cylinder when all poles have been filled.
19. Disconnect the hose from the gas cylinder and release the pressure in the
regulator by pressing in the non-return valve.
20. Release the regulator’s adjustment pressure by turning the adjuster valve so
that the wrong pressure is not filled in the next by-pass switch to be fitted.
N.B.When the density monitor (1) is finally fitted, tighten the union nut (2) with a
torque of 10 Nm as in Figure 6-2.
Figure 6-2. Density monitor and union nut
21. Operate the by-pass switch Close and Open 3 times from the control room.
22. Connect the cables to the density monitors.
23. Reset the circuits for the interlocking relays.
Item
1 Density monitor
2 Union nut
1 2 B10017
TIGHTENING TORQUE
10 Nm
Pressurising the poles
291HSB435410-11 en 2
Assembly Instructions
6.3 Filling with mixed gas
A mixture of SF6 and either N2 or CF4 gas is used at low temperatures, to prevent
condensation of the SF6 gas. Check the rating plate if this is applicable.
N.B.When filling with mixed gas, always fill the SF6 gas first.
The proportions of gases for pressurization should be acc. to the rating plate.
Example.
For a by-pass switch with a filling pressure of 0.70 MPa abs (+20 °C), first fill
0.52 x 0.7 = 0.36 MPa abs (+20 °C) SF6 gas and then N2 or CF4 gas to
0.70 MPa abs (+20 °C).
N.B.When reading from the precision gauge, correct the filling pressure
depending on the temperature as indicated in table 6-2.
Gas filling takes place otherwise as indicated in chapter 6.2.
Table 6-2. Filling with mixed gas
Filling pressure in MPa (abs) stated on the rating plate
SF6 Total filling
pressure
SF6 Total filling pressure
Filling pressure read on the gauge
Temp. when
gas filling
°C
MPa
(abs)
bar
(abs)
MPa
(abs)
bar
(abs)
MPa
(overp.)
bar
(overp.)
MPa
(overp.)
bar
(overp.)
+40 0.39 3.9 0.75 7.5 0.29 2.9 0.65 6.5
+30 0.37 3.7 0.72 7.2 0.27 2.7 0.62 6.2
+20 0.36 3.6 0.70 7.0 0.26 2.6 0.60 6.0
+10 0.34 3.4 0.66 6.6 0.24 2.4 0.56 5.6
± 0 0.33 3.3 0.63 6.3 0.23 2.3 0.53 5.3
-10 0.32 3.2 0.61 6.1 0.22 2.2 0.51 5.1
-20 0.30 3.0 0.58 5.8 0.20 2.0 0.48 4.8
-30 0,29 2,9 0,57 5,7 0,19 1,9 0,47 4,7
Pressurising the poles
30 1HSB435410-11 en 2
Assembly Instructions
6.4 Gas monitoring system
• Drill a 23 mm diameter hole in gland plate(1) on the bottom of the operating
mechanism and fit cable gland (2) with a sealing washer (3) and nut (4) in the
hole.
• Insert the cable through the cable gland in the operating mechanism and
connect it to the terminal blocks as stated on the applicable operating
mechanism’s circuit diagram.
• Tighten the cable gland (2) to secure the cable.
• Secure the cables to the frame’s leg using pipe clips (5) and nuts, bolts and
washers (6).
• Connect the cable to the density monitor’s terminal block.
N.B.The cable ends for the density monitor should be as long as necessary so that
the density monitor can be disconnected from the non-return valve without
the need of disconnecting the cable.
Figure 6-3. Gas monitoring
Item
1 Gland plate
2 Cable gland
3 Sealing washer
4Nut
5Pipe clips 4 pcs.
6Bolts M5x20
Nuts M5
Washers 5.3x10x1
4 pcs.
4 pcs.
8 pcs.
1
2
3
5
4
6
B10018
Pressurising the poles
311HSB435410-11 en 2
Assembly Instructions
6.5 Leakage test
Perform a leakage test using a leak detector around the density monitor’s
connections.
Commissioning
32 1HSB435410-11 en 2
Assembly Instructions
7. Commissioning
Before commissioning the by-pass switch carry out all checks as set out in “Check
list for assembling and commissioning 1HSB445410-101” and fill in the
operating values for the installation.
7.1 Fitting the plate and cover
• Fit all the end covers using bolts, nuts, washers on the mechanism housings.
Tighten the bolts with a tightening torque of 22.5 Nm.
• Fit all the plates (1) with the Close and Open signs using bolts and washers (2).
• Fit all the covers (3) using bolts and washers (2). Tighten with a tightening
torque of 9 Nm.
Figure 7-1. Fitting the plate and cover
Item
1Plate
2 Cover
3 Bolts M8x16
Washers 8.4x16x1.6
9 pcs.
9 pcs.
12
B10012
3
TIGHTENING TORQUE
9 and 22,5 Nm
Operating values
331HSB435410-11 en 2
Assembly Instructions
8. Operating values
The operating values in these instruction apply to SF6 by-pass switches
LTB 1/72,5-245/420-550E1 with operating mechanism BLG 1002AS.
8.1 Times
8.2 Motor and control circuits
8.3 Resistance
Main circuit resistance per pole max 39 μΩ.
8.4 Contact stroke
Main contact stroke is 120 ±3 mm.
Opening times max 50 ms
Closing time coil I max 21ms
(1)
(1) At min. operating voltage and 400 W coil
Closing time coil II max 21ms
(2)
(2) At min. operating voltage and 400 W coil
Open-Close time (3)
(3) The Open-Close- time refers to the time the main
contacts are opened during a opening operation
when a closing pulse is simultaneously connected
via the auxiliary contact.
max 50 ms
Charging time for motor max. 20 s
Operating voltage opening coil I V (according to the rating plate)
Operating voltage opening coil II V (according to the rating plate)
Operating voltage closing coil I V (according to the rating plate)
Operating voltage closing coil II V (according to the rating plate)
1HSB435410-11 en 2
2006-12-08
ABB Power Technologies AB
Head Office
SE-771 80 LUDVIKA
SWEDEN
Telephone: [phone]
Telefax: [phone]
ABB Power Technologies AB
Assembly of damping element
1HSB445409-4 en -
SF6 Circuit-Breaker Circuit-Breakers HPL and LTB
The information in this document is subject to alteration without prior notice and should not be regar-
ded as an undertaking from ABB Power Technologies AB. ABB Power Technologies AB takes no
responsibility for errors that can occur in the documentation.
ABB Power Technologies AB is not responsible for damage incurred due to the misuse of this docu-
ment.
The document, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced or copied without prior permission from ABB
Power Technologies AB. It may not either be imparted to third party or otherwise be used without aut-
horisation. Infringement hereof will be subject to action in accordance with applicable laws.
© ABB Power Technologies AB
Article number:
1HSB445409-4 en -
Approval date:
2004-09-14
i1HSB445409-4 en -
Assembly of damping element
LIST OF CONTENTS
1. General................................................................................ 1
1.1 Design of damping element............................................................1
2. Assembly of the damping elements to the foundation... 2
General
11HSB445409-4 en -
Assembly of damping element
1. General
This Assembly instruction applies to damping elements used for circuit-breaker and
bypass switchgear.
The damping elements are used in areas where there is a risk of earthquakes. The
dampers are used to prevent damages on the installed switchgear.
The dampers are fixed to the foundation bolts and mounted on an adapter plate
which have a hole pattern that suits a standard circuit-breaker frame.
1.1 Design of damping element
The spring washers (1) in the damping element
are delivered adjusted and measured.
The damping housing is delivered with the
internal surfaces well greased with grease “K”,
ABB art no. 1263 0011-102.
The damping elements do not need any further
overhaul during its lifetime.
Figure 1-1. Design of the damping element
Item
1 Damping housing
2 Spring washers 55 pcs.
3 Adjustment washers 10 pcs.
4 Friction ring 1 pcs.
5 Cone 1 pcs.
6 Retaining ring 1 pcs.
7 Guide cone 1 pcs.
8 Guide 1 pcs.
2
1
3
4
5
67
8
Assembly of the damping elements to the
2 1HSB445409-4 en -
Assembly of damping element
2. Assembly of the damping elements to the foundation
1. Adjust the nuts (1) to the same level using the spacer washers (2). Tighten the
nuts (1) with a tightening torque of 350 Nm.
2. Place the adapter plate (3) on the the nuts (2).
3. Assemble the guide cones (4) and the guides (5) on the foundation bolts. Check
that the guides (5) are in the right position. Grease the sliding surface between
the guide cones (4) and the guides (5) with grease “K”, ABB art no.
1263 0011-102.
4. Tighten the guide cones (4) with a tightening torque of 350 Nm. The
foundation bolts must not be higher than the guide cones (4).
Figure 2-1. Assembling the damper on the adapter plate
Item
1 Nut M24 (not supplied) 4 pcs.
2 Spacer washers (not supplied)
3 Adapter plate 1 pcs.
4 Guide cone 4 pcs.
5 Guide 4 pcs.
6 Damping element 4 pcs.
7 Bolts M12x60
Washers 13x24x2,5
24 pcs.
24 pcs.
8 Frame
9 Bolts M30x90
Washers 31x56x4
Nuts M30
4 pcs.
8 pcs.
4 pcs.
10 Washers 4 pcs.
TIGHTENING TORQUE
350 Nm
TIGHTENING TORQUE
350 Nm
8
6
5
3
7
4
129
10
Assembly of the damping elements to the
31HSB445409-4 en -
Assembly of damping element
5. Lift up the adapter plate (3) against the guide cones/guides. Use a piece of
wood for help.
6. Assemble the damping elements (6) to the adapter plate (3) using the bolts and
washers (7). Check that the guides (5) are in the right position in the lower part
of the damping elements (6). Tighten the bolts crosswise and by hand to avoid
bending. Tighten the bolts with a tightening torque of 79 Nm.
7. Assemble the frame (8) on the adapter plate (3) using the bolts and washers (9).
Tighten the bolts with a tightening torque of 350 Nm.
8. The correct pre-tension of the spring washers inside the damping elements (6)
is reached automatically when the bolts (7) are tightened.
1HSB445409-4 en -
2004-09-14
ABB Power Technologies AB
Circuit-Breaker Division
SE-771 80 LUDVIKA
SWEDEN
Telephone: [phone]
Telefax: [phone]
ABB Power Technologies AB
Check list, assembly
1HSB445410-101 en 2
SF6 Circuit-Breaker By-pass switch HPL and LTB
The information in this document is subject to alteration without prior notice and should not be regar-
ded as an undertaking from ABB Power Technologies AB. ABB Power Technologies AB takes no
responsibility for errors that can occur in the documentation.
ABB Power Technologies AB is not responsible for damage incurred due to the misuse of this docu-
ment.
The document, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced or copied without prior permission from ABB
Power Technologies AB. It may not either be imparted to third party or otherwise be used without aut-
horisation. Infringement hereof will be subject to action in accordance with applicable laws.
© ABB Power Technologies AB
Article number:
1HSB445410-101 en 2
Approval date:
2004-10-04
Check list for assembly and commissioning
11HSB445410-101 en 2
Check list, assembly
1. Check list for assembly and commissioning
The following points should be checked and the check list completed before the by-
pass switch is commissioned and taken into service. The check list should be kept in
the order binder.
Date:_______________
Installation:______________________________________________
Serial number:_____________________________
By-pass switch pole
1. Check that the by-pass switch and operating mechanism have been assembled
in accordance with the assembly instructions.
2. Check that all bolted joints are tightened to the tightening torques stated in the
assembly instructions.
3. Ensure that all poles are in the open position. The alignment check hole in the
operating lever should align with the predrilled hole in the mechanism housing.
The pull rods should be screwed past the alignment check holes in the coupling
links.
Operating mechanism
4. Make an visual inspection to check that oil from the oil dampers has not leaked
in the operating mechanism.
5. Tighten all screws in terminal blocks involved in the assembly work.
Gas filling
6. Connect the operating mechanism for remote operation from a protected area
in connection with gas filling and test operations. Set the
“Local/Remote/Disconnect” switch to “Remote”.
7. Connect the gas filling equipment for gas filling.
8. Fill each pole with gas one after the other from a protected area and perform an
operational test three times as indicated in in the assembly instructions.
9. Check the heating elements.
10. Make sure that the thermostat, if provided, is set to 10°C 1.
1. Other thermostat settings may occur, according to customers request.
Check list for assembly and commissioning
2 1HSB445410-101 en 2
Check list, assembly
Operating values
11. Compare the operating values of the by-pass switch with the applicable
operating values for the by-pass switch in the Assembly Instructions and note
the measured values in the table below.
CAUTION
Close-Open operations should not be performed without a time delay of
200 ms.
.
12. Check carried out by:________________________________
13. If points 1-11 as indicated above have been completed, the by-pass switch can
be commissioned and taken into service.
Check the following Measured values
Pole A Pole B Pole C
Closing time coil I ms ms ms
Closing time coil II ms ms ms
Opening time coil I ms ms ms
Opening time coil II ms ms ms
Open-Close time ms ms ms
Lowest control voltage closing coil I V V V
Lowest control voltage closing coil II V V V
Lowest control voltage opening coil I V V V
Lowest control voltage opening coil II V V V
Main circuit resistance μΩ μΩ μΩ
Filling pressure(1)
(1) Filling pressure in accordance with the rating plate.
MPa (abs) MPa (abs) MPa (abs)
1HSB445410-101 en 2
2004-10-04
ABB Power Technologies AB
Circuit-Breaker Division
SE-771 80 LUDVIKA
SWEDEN
Telephone: [phone]
Telefax: [phone]
ABB Power Technologies AB
Operating and Maintenance
1HSB435409-101 en 2
SF6 Circuit-Breaker By-pass switches LTB E
The information in this document is subject to alteration without prior notice and should not be regar-
ded as an undertaking from ABB Power Technologies AB. ABB Power Technologies AB takes no
responsibility for errors that can occur in the documentation.
ABB Power Technologies AB is not responsible for damage incurred due to the misuse of this docu-
ment.
The document, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced or copied without prior permission from ABB
Power Technologies AB. It may not either be imparted to third party or otherwise be used without aut-
horisation. Infringement hereof will be subject to action in accordance with applicable laws.
© ABB Power Technologies AB
Article number:
1HSB435409-101 en 2
Approval date:
2004-12-10
i1HSB435409-101 en 2
Operating and Maintenance
LIST OF CONTENTS
1. General................................................................................ 1
1.1 Warning text....................................................................................1
1.2 Safety of directives..........................................................................2
2. Preventive maintenance .................................................... 3
2.1 By-pass switch................................................................................3
2.2 Operating mechanism .....................................................................6
2.3 Spare parts.......................................................................................7
3. Inspection intervals............................................................ 8
3.1 Maintenance summary....................................................................9
3.2 Maintenance category A ...............................................................10
3.3 Maintenance category B................................................................11
3.4 Maintenance category C................................................................19
General
11HSB435409-101 en 2
Operating and Maintenance
1. General
This Operating and Maintenance Instruction applies to SF6 by-pass switches
LTB E with operating mechanism BLG 1002AS.
The instruction contains recommendations for the care and guidelines for the
maintenance of high voltage by-pass switches LTB E. The instructions are divided
into three parts:
• Inspection intervals
• Instructions for preventive maintenance of by-pass switch
• Instructions for preventive maintenance of operating mechanism
Periodic maintenance must be carried out at the the time or operation intervals
specified.
The equipment must be overhauled in accordance with specified criteria, e.g. after a
certain number of operations. Overhaul of the equipment must be carried out by
authorised service personnel.
1.1 Warning text
Warning text occurs where required and indicates that the text in question should be
observed extra carefully. The warning texts are marked as indicated below:
DANGER
indicates an immediate hazardous situation that, if not avoided, will result
in death or serious personal injury.
WARNING
indicates an immediate hazardous situation that, if not avoided, can result
in death or serious personal injury.
CAUTION
indicates a hazardous situation than can result in minor or moderate
injury.
N.B.is used for hazards that may only result in damage to the installation.
General
2 1HSB435409-101 en 2
Operating and Maintenance
1.2 Safety of directives
WARNING
By-pass switches with pressurized porcelain insulators.
Mechanical damage to the porcelain can cause it to explode with the
following risk of splintering.
Work on the by-pass switch that entails risk of mechanical damage to the
insulators should be carried out at reduced gas pressure, 0.125 MPa (abs).
WARNING
By-pass switches with pressurized composite insulators.
Work on the by-pass switch that entails risk of mechanical damage to the
insulators should be carried out at reduced gas pressure, 0.125 MPa (abs).
WARNING
Do not operate the operating mechanism unloaded!
Operations should take place only after the mechanism has been
connected and adjusted to the associated pressurized by-pass switch.
The standard operating sequence is C - 0.2 s - OC - 3 min - OC. The time between
closing operations should not be less than 1 minute during the testing of by-pass
switches and relay systems involving more than 3 closing operations.
Preventive maintenance
31HSB435409-101 en 2
Operating and Maintenance
2. Preventive maintenance
2.1 By-pass switch
2.1.1 By-pass switch service life
Assuming that the recommended inspection intervals have been carried out and the
appropriate measures have been implemented, the LTB E by-pass switch will have a
service life exceeding 30 years or 10,000 operations.
The following points will ensure a long service life:
1. Contact erosion of the arcing contacts is limited
2. Each breaking unit is equipped with an absorption agent with the service life
equivalent to that of the by-pass switch.
3. Bearings in the space filled with gas are maintenance-free
4. The seals have double O-rings.
Generally speaking, there are only two reasons to open the breaking unit:
– if the number of by-pass making operations are exceeding a value given
by the by-pass current IBP and its by-pass current frequency fBP. See 2.1.2.
– if the number of insertion events (opening operations) are exceeding 5,000
operations.
Other reasons for opening the breaking unit are limited to mechanical faults/
incorrect adjustment of the drive system that may cause damage to the components
inside the breaking unit.
N.B.Opening the breaking unit requires special instruction and may only be done
by trained and authorised personnel.
Preventive maintenance
4 1HSB435409-101 en 2
Operating and Maintenance
2.1.2 Service life of arcing contacts
• At by-pass current events (closing operations)
The accumulated number, n, of by-pass making operations must not exceed the
value determined by the formula below before inspection. n is dependent of the
peak by-pass current IBP in kA and the peak by-pass discharge current frequency fBP
in kHz. The product IBP x fBP is limited to 120 (kA x kHz).
n = 26 x104 /Σ(IBP x fBP)2
• At normal insertion events (opening operations)
Should not exceed 5,000 operations before inspection.
2.1.3 Tightness checking
The by-pass switches are equipped with density monitors for checking the gas
density. Each density monitor is equipped with a set of contacts that can be wired to
give an alarm in the event of abnormal leakage. Level 1 gives an alarm signal, while
Level 2 is used for blocking purpose.
N.B.A new or overhauled by-pass switch should be checked for tightness by
reading the density monitors after approx. 1 month and then at 1-2 year
intervals in connection with the regular visual inspections.
Preventive maintenance
51HSB435409-101 en 2
Operating and Maintenance
2.1.4 Cleaning the outside
Porcelain insulators must be cleaned from salt and other contamining deposits at the
same time as the cleaning of the other insulators in the substation. The time interval
for cleaning depends on local conditions, i.e. the amount of atmospheric pollution.
N.B.All LTB E by-pass switches with porcelain insulators are completely hose-
proof, i.e. by-pass switches in operation can be cleaned with high-pressure
water without any risk of water entering the by-pass switch and causing
damage to essential parts.
Composite insulators do not normally require any cleaning. Solvents or water-
hosing with high pressure may damage the silicone surface of the insulator.
2.1.5 Lubrication of the by-pass switch
Use only the lubricants recommended in the Lubricant instruction. This is
particularly important in cold climates with temperatures below -25°C.
The by-pass switch bearings are permently lubricated with Grease “G”1 and do
normally not need lubrication except during major overhauls.
See the Overhaul instructions applicable for the by-pass switch for lubrication of
O-rings.
For operating mechanism BLG 1002A the worm gear in the drive unit is lubricated
with Grease "M".
2.1.6 Rust protection
The closing and opening springs are rust protected by painting with two-component
paint.
1. See the document Lubricants Instruction for the names of suppliers and brands for grease
and oils.
Preventive maintenance
6 1HSB435409-101 en 2
Operating and Maintenance
2.2 Operating mechanism
2.2.1 Maintenance
Work on the operating mechanism with the by-pass switch in the Closed position
and with charged closing springs always involves a certain risk. It is therefore
important that the safety directives and instructions in the Overhaul instructions for
the operating mechanism are followed before the work is started.
2.2.2 Cleaning
Clean the operating mechanism when necessary using a vacuum cleaner. Check that
the filters in the ventilation valves are clean. Replace them if they are dirty.
2.2.3 Lubrication
The ball, roller and needle bearings in the operating mechanism are permanently
lubricated and require no maintenance. Lubrication is therefore limited to shafts in
the latch mechanism and the worm gear in the drive unit (BLG 1002A only). These
should be lubricated after 5,000 operations. The sliding surfaces of the spring fork
and damper must be lubricated with Grease “G”1 and the chains with Oil “A”1, in
connection with an overhaul.
The bearings in the operating mechanism are lubricated with Grease “G”1 and will
normally not need to be lubricated except during major overhauls.
The closing and opening dampers are filled with Oil “S”1.
2.2.4 Rust protection
Certain steel parts in the operating mechanism have manganese phosphated surface
treatment and then dipped in a rust protecion oil. This applies to latches, gear-
wheels, parts of the link system, etc.
The closing and opening springs are rust protected by painting with two-component
paint (BLG 1002A) or by manganese phosphatising and then dipped in a rust
protection oil (BLK 222).
The operating mechanism is equipped with anti-corrosion vapour phase inhibitors.
These inhibitors are only for protection during transport.
Despite the extensive rust protection treatment, minor corrosion can occur after
some years especially if the by-pass switch is located in a strongly corrosive
environment. Rust stains should be cleaned and new rust protection applied with a
brush or spray.
The recommended rust inhibitor is Grease “G”1 or Valvoline Tectyl 506
(ABB Art. No. 1241 0011-108).
N.B.Valvoline Tectyl 506 forms a waxy protective skin when it dries and should
therefore not be sprayed into bearings and latch mechanisms or on to gear
wheels and chains.
1. See the document Lubricants instruction for the names of suppliers and brands for
greases and oils.
Preventive maintenance
71HSB435409-101 en 2
Operating and Maintenance
2.3 Spare parts
Spare parts must be stored indoors in an approved storage space1 and in the original
packaging. This is particularly important for rubber components (seals etc.), which
also must be protected from sunlight to prevent them drying. Seals have a limited
shelf life. Support frames can be stored outdoors.
1. Approved storage space:
roof, solid foundation, relative humidity less than 50%, temperature +20oC (±10°C)
Inspection intervals
8 1HSB435409-101 en 2
Operating and Maintenance
3. Inspection intervals
Inspection of LTB E by-pass switch with operating mechanism BLK 222 or
BLG 1002A:
Important checkpoints, acceptable tolerances, certain functional values for
adjustments, and recommended inspection intervals can be found in the following
inspection chart.
The specified inspection intervals should be considered as recommended guide
values, and may be increased or decreased depending on the local conditions.
In corrosive or polluted air and in climates with a high relative humidity, it can be
necessary to halve the inspection intervals.
Inspection intervals
91HSB435409-101 en 2
Operating and Maintenance
3.1 Maintenance summary
Explanations:
1. Mech. CLOSE/OPEN operations = Mechanical Close-Open operations.
2. CLOSE/OPEN op. with el load = Close-Open operations with electrical
loading.
Type of measure Inspection interval
Explan-
ation
Condition of
by-pass
switch
during work
Com-
petence
require-
ments
A Visual inspection 1-2 years a1 a2
B Preventive maintenance
• General check of circuit-
breaker and operating
mechanism
• Thermovision check
15 years or 5,000 mech.
CLOSE/OPEN operations
1) b1 b2
C Overhaul
• Overhaul of breaking
chambers
• By-pass current events
(closing operations)
• Normal insertion current
(opening operations)
• Major overhaul
5,000 CLOSE/OPEN op.
with el. load.
30 years or 10,000 mech.
CLOSE/OPEN operations
2)
2)
1)
c1
d1
c2
c2
n = 26 x104 /Σ(IBP x fBP)2
Inspection intervals
10 1HSB435409-101 en 2
Operating and Maintenance
Status of by-pass switch during work:
a1) By-pass switch in service.
b1) Closing springs uncharged, by-pass switch open, disconnected and earthed. If
thermovision measurement is included, it should be done at normal load
before the by-pass switch is disconnected.
c1) Closing springs uncharged, by-pass switch open, disconnected and earthed.
Poles/breaking units dismounted and transported to workshop.
d1) Closing springs uncharged, by-pass switch open, disconnected and earthed.
Complete by-pass switch including operating mechanism transported to
workshop.
Competence requirements:
a2) Substation personnel with no special training.
b2) Personnel authorised by ABB to carry out assembly, commissioning and
maintenance work.
c2) Personnel authorised by ABB to carry out assembly, commissioning and
maintenance work. Support from ABB may be necessary in certain cases.
3.2 Maintenance category A
To be inspected Inspection interval Measures / Instructions / Tools
1.
By-pass switch 1-2 years. Visual inspection.
Check external cleanliness, heating
element function, gas pressure,
ventilation valves and drainage holes.
No special tools needed.
See chapter 2.1.3 and chapter 2.1.4
and Overhaul instructions for the
Operating mechanism.
Inspection intervals
111HSB435409-101 en 2
Operating and Maintenance
3.3 Maintenance category B
To be inspected Inspection interval Measures / Instructions / Tools
1.
By-pass switch 15 years or 5,000 mech. CLOSE/
OPEN operations
Visual inspection.
Check external cleanliness, heating
element function, gas pressure,
ventilation valves and drainage holes.
No special tools needed.
See chapter 2.1.3 and chapter 2.1.4
and Overhaul instructions for the
Operating mechanism.
2.
Operating mechanism 15 years or 5,000 mech. CLOSE/
OPEN operations.
Visual inspection.
Look for loose bolts and nuts, oil leaks
from dampers.
If leakage has occurred, replace the
complete damper.
No tools necessary.
See Overhaul instructions for the
Operating mechanism.
3.
Rating plates 15 years or 5,000 mech. CLOSE/
OPEN operations.
Make a note of the serial number.
4.
Operation counter 15 years or 5,000 mech. CLOSE/
OPEN operations.
Make a note of the number of
operations.
5.
SF6 gas
• Filling of gas (if
necessary.
• Dew point at normal
gas pressure in the by-
pass switch.
15 years or 5,000 mech. CLOSE/
OPEN operations.
Gas filling equipment.
See Assembly instructions for the by-
pass switch.
Dew point maximum - 5 °C at rated
filling pressure and + 20 °C
temperature.
Inspection intervals
12 1HSB435409-101 en 2
Operating and Maintenance
6a.
Porcelain insulators 15 years or 5,000 mech. CLOSE/
OPEN operations.
Visual inspection.
Spray and rub the insulators clean.
Check cementing, bolts and nuts.
Spray equipment, clothes and
wrenches.
See chapter 2.1.4
6b.
Composite insulators 15 years or 5,000 mech. CLOSE/
OPEN operations.
Visual inspection.
Check for damages to the insulators.
See chapter 2.1.4 .
7.
Main current circuit 15 years or 5,000 mech CLOSE/
OPEN operations.
By-pass switches only operating
<100 CLOSE/OPEN
operations/year after 6-8 years or
2500 mech. CLOSE/OPEN
operations.
Check resistance of by-pass switch.
Resistance bridge, test current min.
200 A DC.
Resistance value as specified in
Assembly instructions for the by-pass
switch.
Higher values allowed for frequent
operation with small currents (≤400Α).
Calculation of permissible resistance:
8a.
Contact system
• Opening position 15 years or 5,000 mech. CLOSE/
OPEN operations.
Inspection of alignment check holes in
operating lever and mechanism
housing.
See the Assembly instructions for the
by-pass switch.
To be inspected Inspection interval Measures / Instructions / Tools
R Rn
2-------In
I-----
1,65
=
R = Permissible increase in
resistance
Rn = Max. resistance as specified
in operating values
In = Rated current as specified on
rating plate
I = Current for which max.
resistance is calculated.
Inspection intervals
131HSB435409-101 en 2
Operating and Maintenance
8b.
Operating
characteristics
• Opening time
• Closing time
• Close-Open time
• Phase discrepancy
• Auxiliary switches
• Contact travel
• Contact damping
15 years or 5,000 mech. CLOSE/
OPEN operations.
Measurement with electronic timer.
Nominal operating voltage.
For times, see Assembly instructions
for the by-pass switch.
Max. phase discrepancy between
phases: at closing 4 ms; at opening
3 ms.
max discrepancy between breaks in the
same phase:
at closing 3 ms; At opening 2 ms.
See Overhaul instructions for the
Operating mechanism.
To be inspected Inspection interval Measures / Instructions / Tools
Inspection intervals
14 1HSB435409-101 en 2
Operating and Maintenance
9a.
Operational availability
• Pull rod system
• Safety of operation
• Anti-pumping device
15 years or 5,000 mech. CLOSE/
OPEN operations.
15 years or 5,000 mech. CLOSE/
OPEN operations.
15 years or 5,000 mech. CLOSE/
OPEN operations.
Check the tightening torque of nuts in
the pull rod system.
Torque wrench.
Torque according to the Assembly
instructions for the by-pass switch.
Measurement of minimum operating
voltage.
Closing coil: 85% IEC ( 72 % ANSI)
of nominal voltage.
Opening coil: 70% IEC ( 56 % ANSI)
of nominal voltage.
Variable D.C. voltage source required.
Check the anti-pumping function.
The by-pass switch in open position,
the operating mechanism charged,
“Close” and “Open” impulse given
simultaneously (keep the close button
pressed).
The by-pass switch will make a
CLOSE-OPEN operation and may not
close when the operating mechanism is
charged.
The pumping device must stay as long
as the close impulse remains. Lowest
operating voltage of the relay is
measured (85% of nominal).
9b.
Motor current 15 years or 5,000 mech. CLOSE/
OPEN operations.
Check the carbon on the motor/motors.
If it is below 10 mm, change carbon.
The motor current is to be measured at
the end of the charging operation. Max.
allowed motor current is 110% of the
value measured at routine test.
The charging time is allowed to vary up
to 30% from the value measured at
routine test.
The motor should be able to charge the
springs at min. 85% of nominal voltage
(acc. to IEC).
See Overhaul instructions for the
Operating mechanism.
To be inspected Inspection interval Measures / Instructions / Tools
Inspection intervals
151HSB435409-101 en 2
Operating and Maintenance
9c.
Damper 15 years or 5,000 mech. CLOSE/
OPEN operations.
Check the oil-level or record the
damping during operation alternatively.
Record the damping during operation
by using a by-pass switch analyzer with
transducers connected to:
• main shaft of the by-pass switch
mechanism when checking the
opening damper
• main shaft (cam shaft) of the
operating mechanism when
checking the closing damper.
These measurements are to be carried
out only by specially trained personnel.
See Overhaul instructions for the
Operating mechanism.
9d.
Catch gears 15 years or 5,000 mech. CLOSE/
OPEN operations.
Visual control of the adjustment.
Play of gaps in the catch gears acc. to
Overhaul Instructions for the Operating
mechanism.
Greasing of shafts and catch surfaces
with Grease “L” acc. to Lubricant
instruction.
Change the signal from coil 1 to coil 2.
9e.
Coils 15 years or 5,000 mech. CLOSE/
OPEN operations.
The resistances of coils and coil
currents are allowed to differ +/- 10%
from value measured at routine test.
9f.
Mechanical interlocking
Only applicable for BLG
1002A
15 years or 5,000 mech. CLOSE/
OPEN operations.
In “Open” position, the distance
between the interlocking arm and the
interlocking disc should be min. 2 mm.
In “Close “position, there must be full
contact between the arm and disc (no
gap is permitted).
See Overhaul instructions for the
Operating mechanism.
To be inspected Inspection interval Measures / Instructions / Tools
Inspection intervals
16 1HSB435409-101 en 2
Operating and Maintenance
9g.
Heating elements 15 years or 5,000 mech. CLOSE/
OPEN operations
Check the resistance:
If applicable, check signal for loss of
power.
See Overhaul instructions for the
Operating mechanism.
9h.
Central control cubicle
(if applicable)
15 years or 5,000 mech. CLOSE/
OPEN operations
Check the resistance.
Small cubicle:
48 W, 110 V R = 330 Ohms +/- 10%
48 W, 220 V R = 1000 Ohms +/- 10%.
Medium or large cubicle:
140 W, 110 V R = 86 Ohm +/-10%
140 W, 220 V R = 346 Ohm +/- 10%.
9i.
Thermostat 15 years or 5,000 mech. CLOSE/
OPEN operations
If applicable, check that the thermostat
is adjusted to requested value.
See Checklist, assembly HPL and LTB.
9j.
Terminal blocks 15 years or 5,000 mech. CLOSE/
OPEN operations
Check tightening of screws or clamps.
See Overhaul instructions for the
Operating mechanism.
9k.
Direct on line motor
starter
15 years or 5,000 mech. CLOSE/
OPEN operations
If applicable, check signal for loss of
power.
See Overhaul instructions for the
Operating mechanism.
To be inspected Inspection interval Measures / Instructions / Tools
Inspection intervals
171HSB435409-101 en 2
Operating and Maintenance
10.
Tightness of the SF6
gas
• Density monitoring 15 years or 5,000 mech. CLOSE/
OPEN operations.
Check the density switches and
signal/blocking circuits.
Accuracy test of the pressure gauge
must be done at standard reference
atmosphere i.e. +20 °C and 101.3 kPa
(1013 mbar).
Remove the density switch from the by-
pass switch for checking of function.
N.B.Min permissible voltage for test of
the circuits in the density switch
(30 V).
See Assembly instructions for the by-
pass switch.
11.
Blocking relays 15 years or 5,000 mech. CLOSE/
OPEN operations.
The relays should close when a density
switch is pulled out from a pole
pressurized to filling pressure.
12.
Corrosion,
rust protection
15 years or 5,000 mech. CLOSE/
OPEN operations.
Visual inspection.
Particularly check protected
components in unheated
compartments, pull rod system, clevis
couplings, springs.
Rust stains polished off and treated
with rust protection..
See chapter 2.2.4 and Overhaul
instructions for the Operating
mechanism.
13a.
Greasing 15 years or 5,000 mech. CLOSE/
OPEN operations.
Grease the worm gear (only BLG
1002A) and shafts in latches in the
operating mechanism with grease “M”.
See chapter 2.1.5 , chapter 2.2.3 and
Overhaul instructions for the Operating
mechanism.
13b.
Greasing
(only BLK 222)
15 years or 5,000 mechanical
Close-Open operations.
Check the oil level in the worm gear
housing.
See Overhaul instructions for the
operating mechanism.
To be inspected Inspection interval Measures / Instructions / Tools
Inspection intervals
18 1HSB435409-101 en 2
Operating and Maintenance
13c.
Greasing
(Only for BLG 1002A)
15 years or 5,000 mechanical
Close-Open operations.
Lubricate sliding surfaces of the spring
bridge in the operating mechanism with
Grease “M” and chains with Oil “A”.
See chapter 2.1.5 , chapter 2.2.3 and
Overhaul instructions for the Operating
mechanism.
14.
Tightening torque 15 years or 5,000 mech. CLOSE/
OPEN operations.
Check the tightening torque on screw
joints.
Tightening torques acc. to Assembly
instructions and Overhaul instructions
for the by-pass switch.
Tightening torque for earthing 79 Nm.
15.
Operation 15 years or 5,000 mech. CLOSE/
OPEN operations.
Operating test, if possible in
combination with measurement of
operating times (incl. Close-Open
times).
See Assembly instructions for the by-
pass switch.
To be inspected Inspection interval Measures / Instructions / Tools
Inspection intervals
191HSB435409-101 en 2
Operating and Maintenance
3.4 Maintenance category C
To be inspected Inspection intervals Measures / Instructions / Tools
1.
Overhaul of breaking
chambers
• By-pass current events
(closing operations)
• Normal insertion
current
(opening operations)
• All kinds of service
5,000 CLOSE/OPEN operation with
el. load.
Alarming result at diagnostic test.
Gas evacuated, poles/ breaking units
dismounted and transported to a clean
workshop.
Porcelain lift off, contacts and PTFE-
parts replaced with new ones.
See Overhaul Instructions for the by-
pass switch.
Standard tools, close fitting dust mask,
long sleeved overall, protective plastic
or rubber gloves.
See Overhaul instructions for the by-
pass switch.
2.
Major overhaul of
complete by-pass
switch and operating
mechanism
30 years or 10,000 mech.
CLOSE/OPEN operations.
Disassembly of the poles and
mechanisms. New contacts and PTFE-
components are to be mounted.
Exchange of outer worn out parts.
If the by-pass switch and operating
mechanism are overhauled for another
2,000 operations, selected worn out
parts are to be exchanged.
If the by-pass switch and operating
mechanism are overhauled for another
10,000 operations, in principle all
moving parts are to be exchanged.
Protection against decomposed gas as
standard tools above.
Instructions:
For by-pass switchs, see Overhaul
instructions for the by-pass switch.
Overhaul of the operating mechanism
only under supervision from ABB.
3.
Capacitor 30 years or 10,000 mech.
CLOSE/OPEN operations.
Check of values on:
C = CN+5%,-0%
PD < 5 pC
Tan d < 0,2%.
n = 26 x104 /Σ(IBP x fBP)2
1HSB435409-101 en 2
2004-12-10
ABB Power Technologies AB
Circuit-Breaker Division
SE-771 80 LUDVIKA
SWEDEN
Telephone: [phone]
Telefax: [phone]
ABB Power Technologies AB
Lubricants
1HSB445409-1 en 6
SF6 Circuit-Breaker Circuit-Breakers HPL and LTB
The information in this document is subject to alteration without prior notice and should not be regar-
ded as an undertaking from ABB Power Technologies AB. ABB Power Technologies AB takes no
responsibility for errors that can occur in the documentation.
ABB Power Technologies AB is not responsible for damage incurred due to the misuse of this docu-
ment.
The document, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced or copied without prior permission from ABB
Power Technologies AB. It may not either be imparted to third party or otherwise be used without aut-
horisation. Infringement hereof will be subject to action in accordance with applicable laws.
© ABB Power Technologies AB
Article number:
1HSB445409-1 en 6
Approval date:
2006-08-24
i1HSB445409-1 en 6
Lubricants
LIST OF CONTENTS
1. General................................................................................ 1
1.1 Safety instructions...........................................................................1
2. Lubricants........................................................................... 3
2.1 Oil....................................................................................................3
2.2 Grease..............................................................................................4
General
11HSB445409-1 en 6
Lubricants
1. General
This instruction is a guide to the selection of oils and lubricants for circuit-breakers
HPL and LTB with operating mechanism. It also covers earthing switches and
disconnectors.
A description is given below of the application areas as well as trade names and
suppliers.
1.1 Safety instructions
Protective gloves, long-sleeved overall and eye protection must be worn when
handling lubricants and oils.
All spillage should be covered with an absorption agent and taken care of as
chemical waste according to applicable local directives.
Lubricants
31HSB445409-1 en 6
Lubricants
2. Lubricants
2.1 Oil
Oil “A”
Thin, fully synthetic lubricating oil for precision components in the operating
mechanism and circuit-breaker. Also used for lubrication of bearings that can not be
lubricated with grease “G” without dismantling, e.g. links and link gears.
Viscosity at 40°C: 62-65 cSt
Lowest pour temperature: -52°C
Oil “D”
Circuit-breaker oil with a low viscosity ~ 6.0 cSt at 20°C. Also used as oil in
dampers. Damper with the letter “s” punched on the cover should be filled with oil
“S”.
Oil “S”
Silicone oil intended for dampers in heavy-duty operating mechanisms, type BLG.
Only dampers with the letter “s” punched on the cover should be filled with this oil.
SUPPLIER Oil “A” Oil “D” Oil “S”
ABB art. No. 1171 2039-1 1171 3011-102 1173 7011-106
ABB spare part No. 1HSB875318-A 1HSB875318-B 1HSB875318-C
MOBIL MOBIL 1 (481127)
5W-30
Circuit-breaker oil
Univolt 42 (44)
-
CASTROL FORMULA RS
5W-50
--
SHELL TMO Synthetic
5W-30
NYSWITCHO 3
NYSWITCHO 3X
DC 200 Fluid 200
CS
OK Super-synthetic
4W-40
Circuit-breaker oil
A65
Kälte-Schalteroel X
-
Lubricants
4 1HSB445409-1 en 6
Lubricants
2.2 Grease
Grease “G”
Low-temperature grease for all types of bearings, gearing and worm gears and
valves in air-blast circuit-breakers.
Also used for greasing O-rings and crevice corrosion protection on breakers type
HPL and for moving contacts (opening contacts) for disconnectors.
Grease “K”
Molykote grease for lubricating pins in link gears and earthquake dampers.
Grease “N”
For lubricating moving contacts and puffer cylinders in SF6 circuit-breakers. The
grease should be applied in a very thin layer on the sliding surfaces of the contacts.
Grease “L”
Low-temperature grease particularly suitable for lubricating precision components,
for example latch mechanisms in operating mechanisms that should work in severe
cold climates.
Grease “M”
Low-temperature grease for long-term and permanent lubrication of worm gears,
and spur gears and other machine elements. Counteracts wear and corrosion.
Also reduces electrical resistance in the lubrication point, and therefore suitable for
electrical joints and for lubricating contacts on earthing switches and disconnectors.
Grease “P”
Vaseline for coating contact surfaces on fixed joints on the inside of the breaking
unit.
Grease “S”
Fluorosilicone grease for lubricating the EPDM O-rings and as crevice corrosion
protection on circuit-breakers type ED as well as for lubricating rotating shaft seals
on circuit-breakers types LTB and HPL.
Grease “SV”
For lubricating moving contacts (opening contacts) for disconnectors, silver-plated
contacts and brushed aluminium surfaces on fixed joints outdoors.
Lubricants
51HSB445409-1 en 6
Lubricants
.
SUPPLIER Grease “G” Grease “K” Grease “N” Grease “L”
ABB art. No. 1171 4014-407 1263 0011-102 1171 4016-607 1171 4016-606
ABB spare part No. 5316 381-A 5316 381-M 5316 381-L 5316 381-H
ASEOL AG - - ASEOL SYLITEA
4-018
Dow Corning G-rapid plus
GULF 718EP Synthetic
grease
--
MOBIL Mobil grease 28 - -
Montefluos S.p.A. - Fomblin OT 20 -
SHELL Aero Shell
Grease 223
--
SUPPLIER Grease “M” Grease “P” Grease “S” Grease “SV”
ABB art. No. 1171 4016-612 1171 5011-102 1171 4014-406 1171 4016-610
ABB spare part No. 5316 381-X 5316 381-N 5316 381-G 5316 381-C
Klüber Isoflex Topas NB
52
-
Dow Corning - - FS-3451 No. 2
Fluortech AB TP55
SHELL - Shell vaseline
8401
Statoil Electrical grease
1HSB445409-1 en 6
2006-08-24
ABB Power Technologies AB
Circuit-Breaker Division
SE-771 80 LUDVIKA
SWEDEN
Telephone: [phone]
Telefax: [phone]
ABB Power Technologies AB
Overhaul Instructions
1HSB515409-101 en 4
SF6 Circuit-Breaker Operating mechanism
BLG 1002AS
The information in this document is subject to alteration without prior notice and should not be regar-
ded as an undertaking from ABB Power Technologies AB. ABB Power Technologies AB takes no
responsibility for errors that can occur in the documentation.
ABB Power Technologies AB is not responsible for damage incurred due to the misuse of this docu-
ment.
The document, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced or copied without prior permission from ABB
Power Technologies AB. It may not either be imparted to third party or otherwise be used without aut-
horisation. Infringement hereof will be subject to action in accordance with applicable laws.
© ABB Power Technologies AB
Article number:
1HSB515409-101 en 4
Approval date:
2004-12-09
1HSB515409-101en4
i1HSB515409-101 en 4
Overhaul Instructions
LIST OF CONTENTS
1. General............................................................................... 1
2. Safety................................................................................... 3
2.1 Warning text....................................................................................3
2.2 Safety directives..............................................................................4
3. Maintenance, general......................................................... 7
3.1 Tools................................................................................................7
3.2 Cleaning equipment ........................................................................7
3.3 Spare parts.......................................................................................7
3.4 Test equipment................................................................................7
4. Maintenance........................................................................ 8
4.1 General............................................................................................8
4.2 Preparations for maintenance........................................................11
4.3 Cleaning........................................................................................12
4.4 Corrosion.......................................................................................12
4.5 Lubrication....................................................................................13
4.6 Heating element ............................................................................14
4.7 Drive unit......................................................................................15
4.8 Catch gear .....................................................................................16
4.9 Damper..........................................................................................17
4.10 Link system and spring battery.....................................................19
4.11 Auxiliary contact...........................................................................19
4.12 Terminal blocks.............................................................................21
4.13 Manual closing and opening operations........................................22
iii1HSB515409-101 en 4
Overhaul Instructions
FIGURES
Figure 4-1. Operating mechanism .....................................................................8
Figure 4-2. Interlocking mechanism ..................................................................9
Figure 4-3. Releasing the interlocking .............................................................10
Figure 4-4. Control panel .................................................................................11
Figure 4-5. Heating element ............................................................................14
Figure 4-6. Drive unit ......................................................................................15
Figure 4-7. Catch gear .....................................................................................16
Figure 4-8. Checking the clearance .................................................................16
Figure 4-9. Closing and Opening damper ........................................................17
Figure 4-10. Damping curve, Opening damper .................................................18
Figure 4-11. Travelling curves, Closing damper ...............................................18
Figure 4-13. Auxiliary contact ...........................................................................19
Figure 4-14. Time measurement, contact travel ................................................20
Figure 4-15. Example of electrical equipment ...................................................21
Figure 4-16. Manual opening of the operating mechanism ...............................22
Figure 4-17. Drive unit ......................................................................................23
Figure 4-18. Fitting the blocking beams ............................................................23
Figure 4-19. Interlocking, by-pass switch closed, opening springs uncharged .24
Figure 4-20. Operating mechanism, manual opening operation ........................25
Figure 4-21. Manual closing operation ..............................................................26
Figure 4-22. Drive unit ......................................................................................27
Figure 4-23. Fitting the blocking beams ............................................................27
Figure 4-24. Interlocking, by-pass switch open, opening springs uncharged ....28
Figure 4-25. Operating mechanism, slow closing operation .............................29
Figure 4-26. Check dimension, opening springs ...............................................30
General
11HSB515409-101 en 4
Overhaul Instructions
1. General
This Overhaul instruction applies to the spring operating mechanism BLG 1002AS
intended to operate by-pass switches with integrated closing springs. Information
regarding overhaul is provided in this instruction.
Preventive maintenance and overhaul work on the operating mechanism
BLG 1002AS should be carried out at regular intervals.
• Visual inspection at intervals of 1-2 years.
• Lubrication after 15 years or 5,000 mechanical Close-Open operations.
• Preventive maintenance after 15 years or 5,000 mechanical Close-Open
operations.
• Overhaul after 30 years or 10,000 mechanical Close-Open operations.
Overhauling and repair work may only be carried out by service personnel
authorised by ABB Power Technologies AB.
Safety
31HSB515409-101 en 4
Overhaul Instructions
2. Safety
2.1 Warning text
Warning text occurs where required and indicates that the text in question should be
observed extra carefully. The warning texts are marked as indicated below:
DANGER
indicates an immediate hazardous situation that, if not avoided, will result
in death or serious injury.
WARNING
indicates an immediate hazardous situation that, if not avoided, can result
in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
indicates a hazardous situation that can result in minor or moderate
injury.
N.B.used for hazards that may only result in damage to the installation.
Safety
4 1HSB515409-101 en 4
Overhaul Instructions
2.2 Safety directives
On all types of work on high-voltage by-pass switches, the risks listed below must
be taken into consideration and corresponding measures must be taken.
WARNING
By-pass switches with pressurized porcelain insulators.
Mechanical damage to the porcelain can cause it to explode with the
following risk of splintering.
Work on the by-pass switch that entails risk of mechanical damage to the
insulators should be carried out at reduced gas pressure, 0.125 MPa (abs).
WARNING
By-pass switches with pressurized composite insulators.
Work on the by-pass switch that entails risk of mechanical damage to the
insulators should be carried out at reduced gas pressure, 0.125 MPa (abs).
WARNING
Do not operate the mechanism unloaded!
Operations should take place only when the mechanism has been
connected and adjusted with the associated pressurized by-pass switch.
The operating sequence is C- 0.2 s - OC - 3 min - OC. The time between closing
operations should not be less than 1 minute when by-pass switches and relay
systems are tested with more than 3 closing operations.
Safety
51HSB515409-101 en 4
Overhaul Instructions
WARNING
The work requires training and product knowledge and may only be
carried out by authorised personnel.
Risk Measure
Working next to high voltage. Isolate and earth next to the work
place. If work should take place next
to live equipment, the safety distance
in the applicable safety regulations
must be observed.
Working on ladders and platforms. Work should take place in
accordance with applicable safety
regulations. Work during difficult
weather conditions that requires
short shifts with a great deal of
climbing on ladders and platforms
should be avoided.
Working with low voltage.
Both alternating (AC) and direct (DC)
current can be routed to the
operating mechanism.
Switch off the control voltage and if
necessary the heater voltage.
Risk of crushing in the operating
mechanism and link system.
There is stored energy in both the
opening and the closing springs. The
mechanism can be tripped by heavy
vibrations or by unintentional contact
with the catch components.
Isolate and earth the high voltage
side. Uncharge the springs by
switching off the motor current and
perform a Close-Open operation or
move the drive shaft on the operating
mechanism backwards by hand (see
Chapter 4.13, Manual closing and
opening operations). For reasons of
safety, all springs must be uncharged
during transportation as well as
during assembly and storage.
Working next to pressurized
insulators.
The normal working pressure is up to
0.8 MPa (abs). Damage to the
porcelain can result in splintering.
Work next to the insulators of the by-
pass switch that may result in
damage to the porcelain must not
take place until the gas has been
reduced to max. 0.125 MPa (abs.)
pressure.
Maintenance, general
71HSB515409-101 en 4
Overhaul Instructions
3. Maintenance, general
All required equipment should be available before work is started so that
maintenance work can be carried out in the most effective way.
The following equipment is required.
3.1 Tools
• A normal set of tools including torque wrenches (9-550 Nm).
3.2 Cleaning equipment
• Vacuum cleaner.
• Drying cloths of a lint-free material.
3.3 Spare parts
• Lubricants and oils, see the Lubricant instruction for suppliers and trade
names.
Grease “G”: ABB Art. No. 1171 4014-407.
Grease “M”:ABB Art. No. 1171 4016-612.
Oil “A”: ABB Art. No. 1171 2039-1.
• Anti-corrosion agent.
Valvoline Tectyl 506: ABB Art. No. 1241 0011-108.
Grease “G”: ABB Art. No. 1171 4014-407.
3.4 Test equipment
• Equipment to record damping curves and operating times.
(e.g. Programma or ABB SA10).
Maintenance
8 1HSB515409-101 en 4
Overhaul Instructions
4. Maintenance
4.1 General
The Operating and Maintenance Instructions for the by-pass switch should be read
before work on the by-pass switch is started and followed while work is in progress.
WARNING
Do not operate the operating mechanism unloaded!
Operations should take place only after the mechanism has been
connected and adjusted with the associated pressurized by-pass switch.
The components of the operating mechanism are housed in a cubicle, which also
contains a control panel. The roof and doors of the cubicle can be removed to
facilitate service and overhaul procedures.
Figure 4-1. Operating mechanism
• Measure all operating times and note them down. If the measured values
correspond with the specified values for the by-pass switch, then only visual
inspection, cleaning and lubrication are required.
Item
1Drive unit
2 Mechanism
3 Control panel
4 Spring battery
5 Heater element
(behind protection
plate)
Front Back, with the
cover removed
1
2
4
3
5
B20001
Maintenance
91HSB515409-101 en 4
Overhaul Instructions
4.1.1 Mechanical interlocking
The interlocking mechanism prevents an opening operation from being carried out
if the by-pass switch is already in the open position. It also prevents opening if the
opening springs are uncharged or not fully charged. This can occur, e.g if the
opening catch gear is activated by hand or if a mechanical failure occurs in the catch
gear.
• Check that the gap between the interlocking arm (2) and the circumference of
the interlocking disc (3) is 2 mm as indicated in Figure 4-2.
• Check that the opening circuit is closed when the arm rests on the
circumference of the interlocking disc (3) (i.e. gap = 0 mm).
Figure 4-2. Interlocking mechanism
Item
1 Limit switch
2 Interlocking arm
3 Interlocking disc
4Cam disc
5 Operating rod
1
4
3
2
5
B20019
2
m
m
Maintenance
10 1HSB515409-101 en 4
Overhaul Instructions
Releasing the mechanical interlocking
If the movement of the cam disc has been stopped by the interlocking arm, it is not
possible to carry out an opening operation until the cam disc has been returned to its
normal position.
1. Manual uncharging of the opening springs.
a. Turn the “Local/Remote/Disconnect” switch on the control panel to the
“Disconnect” position.
b. Switch off the motor voltage with the direct-on-line starters.
c. Turn the “Hand/Motor” switch on the drive unit to the “Hand” position so
that the shaft for manual cranking is visible. Put the crank on the shaft.
2. Press the reverse catch button hard using a screwdriver and crank clockwise,
see Figure 4-3a, until the locking lug on the operating lever (1) is well past the
roller (2) in the opening catch gear.
3. Rectify the cause of the fault.
4. Crank anticlockwise, see Figure 4-3b, until the locking lug on the operating
lever (1) rests against the roller (2) in the opening catch gear.
Figure 4-3. Releasing the interlocking
Item
1 Operating lever
2 Roller, opening catch gear
21
B20020 a b
Maintenance
111HSB515409-101 en 4
Overhaul Instructions
4.2 Preparations for maintenance
The following should be done before maintenance is started:
1. Isolate and earth.
2. Switch off the motor current.
3. Perform a Open-Close operation so that the closing and opening springs are
uncharged.
4. Switch off the control voltage and, if necessary, also the heating voltage.
Figure 4-4. Control panel
Item
1 Control panel
2 Close/Open switch
3 Local/Remote/Disconnect
switch
4 Electric counter
5 Spring indicator
1 352
4
B20009
Maintenance
12 1HSB515409-101 en 4
Overhaul Instructions
4.2.1 Emptying the gas
Work that entails risk of damaging the insulators should not take place until the gas
pressure has been reduced to max. 0.125 MPa (abs).
WARNING
Unused SF6 gas is non-toxic, odourless and colourless. It is heavier than
air and can therefore easily collect in low-lying places, e.g. cable trenches,
tanks, etc., if released in large volumes
When large quantities of SF6 gas collect in such places, a risk of
asphyxiation may occur .
The SF6 gas is evacuated by using gas handling equipment, which cleans and
compresses the gas so that it can be reused or destructed.
N.B.Mixed gas, SF6 mixed with either N2 or CF4, should not be reused unless the
mixture ratio is kept under control. (Can be checked with a meter that
indicates the percentage of SF6.)
4.3 Cleaning
• Clean the inside of the operating mechanism using a vacuum cleaner.
• Check that the filters in the ventilation valves are clean. If they are dirty, they
should be replaced.
4.4 Corrosion
Some of the steel mechanism parts have been surface treated with manganese
phosphate and then rust protected by dipping in oil. This applies, for instance, to
catches, gears and components in the link system.
Despite good rust protection, small signs of corrosion can appear after a number of
years, especially on by-pass switches installed in very aggressive environments.
• Rust spots should be removed and new anti-corrosive agent should be applied
by brush or spray. Recommended anti-corrosive agents are Grease “G” or
Valvoline Tectyl 506.
N.B.After drying, Valvoline Tectyl 506 forms a protective wax-like film. Make
sure that Tectyl is not sprayed on bearings, catch gears, gears or chains.
Maintenance
131HSB515409-101 en 4
Overhaul Instructions
4.5 Lubrication
The ball, roller and needle bearings in the operating mechanism are permanently
lubricated and require no maintenance. Therefore only the shafts in catch gears and
worm gear in the drive unit need to be lubricated.
• Check whether the chains in the operating mechanism are dry and corroded
and, if necessary, lubricate with Grease “G” or oil “A”.
Sliding surfaces for the spring yoke and dampers should be lubricated during
overhaul with Grease “G” .
Maintenance
14 1HSB515409-101 en 4
Overhaul Instructions
4.6 Heating element
The operating mechanism is fitted with a heating element to prevent condensation
and should always be connected.
• Measure the resistance and check the voltage failure signal, if applicable, after
every 15 years or 5,000 operations.
Figure 4-5. Heating element
Data
The values of the heating elements are according to below:
For ambient temperatures > -25°C and 220 V: R=691 Ohms ±±10%, 70 W
For ambient temperatures > -25°C and 110 V: R=173 Ohms ±10%, 70 W
For ambient temperatures > -40°C and 220 V: R=691 Ohms ±10%, 70 W +
R=346 Ohms ±10% 140 W
For ambient temperatures > -40°C and 110 V: R=173 Ohms ±10% 70W +
R=86 Ohms ±10%, 140 W
For ambient temperatures > -55°C and 220 V: R=691 Ohms ±10%, 70 W +
2 x R=346 Ohms ±10%, 140 W
For ambient temperatures > -55°C and 110 V: R=173 Ohms ±10% 70W +
2 x R=86 Ohms ±10%, 140 W
70 W heating elements are permanently connected , while heating elements with
140 W or 2x140 W for temperatures below -25°C are thermostat controlled.
Item
1 Heating element
132
5 46
1
B20010
Maintenance
151HSB515409-101 en 4
Overhaul Instructions
4.7 Drive unit
• Check and clean the shafts in the catch gear and the worm gears in the drive
unit.
• Lubricate these with Grease “M” at intervals of 15 years or 5,000 operations.
• Measure the motor current at the end of the spring charging procedure at
intervals of 15 years or 5,000 operations. See the relevant Assembly
Instructions for the by-pass switch, chapter Operating values.
The motor is capable of charging the springs at 85% of its nominal voltage (IEC).
Figure 4-6. Drive unit
4.7.1 Hand-Motor switch
Check that the signal for voltage failure functions. If not, replace the “Hand/Motor”
switch.
Item
1Drive unit
1
B20011
Maintenance
16 1HSB515409-101 en 4
Overhaul Instructions
4.8 Catch gear
The operating mechanism is as standard fitted with two opening coils and two
closing coils.
Figure 4-7. Catch gear
• Check that the voltage to the coils does not fall below the minimum voltage,
see the delivery document for the operating mechanism.
• Check the play between the magnet arm (2) and the auxiliary catch (1), see
Figure 4-8. The play must be at least 1 mm. If the play is outside the specified
dimension, replace the entire catch gear.
Figure 4-8. Checking the clearance
Item
1 Catch gear
Item
1Catch
2 Magnet arm
1
Opening catch gear
Closing catch gear
B20012
1 mm
1
2
B20013
Maintenance
171HSB515409-101 en 4
Overhaul Instructions
4.9 Damper
The operating mechanism is fitted with an Opening damper (1) to slow down the
rotation of the cam disc, and a Closing damper (2) to dampen the final phase of the
closing movement.
Figure 4-9. Closing and Opening damper
Item
1 Opening damper
2 Closing damper
1
2
B20014
Maintenance
18 1HSB515409-101 en 4
Overhaul Instructions
4.9.1 Opening damper
Check the oil level in the damper by recording the damping effect during operation.
• Connect a travel transducer to the cam shaft in the operating mechanism and
record a damping curve. Check the damping distance and the damping time as
indicated in Figure 4-10. If the measured values for “a” and “b” are outside the
specified values, replace the complete damper.
Figure 4-10. Damping curve, Opening damper
4.9.2 Closing damper
Check the oil level in the damper by recording the damping effect during operation.
• Connect a travel transducer to the breaker’s shaft and record a travelling curve.
Check the damping distance and the damping time as indicated in Figure 4-11.
If the recorded curve differs from the correct curve, replace the complete
damper.
Figure 4-11. Travelling curves, Closing damper
“b”
“a
”
“a” = damping distance 15-25 mm
“b” = damping time 80-300 ms
B20015
Wrong Right WrongB20016
Maintenance
191HSB515409-101 en 4
Overhaul Instructions
4.10 Link system and spring battery
Perform a visual check of the spring battery, links and bearings. If necessary,
lubricate the links and bearings with Grease “M”.
4.11 Auxiliary contact
The operating mechanism is as standard fitted with a 6-pole auxiliary contact (1)
consisting of six normally open and six normally closed contacts. Three normally
closed and one normally open contact are used for the operating mechanism’s own
function.
The shaft (2) of the auxiliary contact (1) in direct connection with the operating
lever in the operating mechanism and accordingly follows the movement of the by-
pass switch contacts.
Figure 4-13. Auxiliary contact
After 15 years or 5,000 operations, check the contact travel by measuring the
opening and closing times and compare the results with those obtained during
commissioning. The comparison can then be used to check the condition of:
• Contact travel.
• Contact damping.
Item
1 Auxiliary contact
2Shaft
12
B20017
Maintenance
20 1HSB515409-101 en 4
Overhaul Instructions
1. Connect a time-meter across the signal contacts 20, 29, 291 and 292 in
accordance with the circuit diagram.
2. Measure the times t1, t2 and t3.
3. Turn the “Local/Remote/Disconnect” switch to the “Local” position.
4. Connect the time-meter across terminals X1:190 and X1:192.
5. Turn the “Close/Open” switch to the “Open” position and then the “Closed”
position.
6. Note down the times t1, t2 and t3.
7. Disconnect the time-meter.
8. Turn the “Local/Remote/Disconnect” switch to the “Remote” position.
Figure 4-14. Time measurement, contact travel
Contact travel
Arcing contact
Closed
Auxiliary contact
Open
t2
t3t1
Time
t1 ms Proportional to the contact’s opening speed.
t2 ms Time that determines contact damping.
t3 ms Proportional to the contact’s closing speed.
B20018
Contact travel
Maintenance
211HSB515409-101 en 4
Overhaul Instructions
4.12 Terminal blocks
Check all screws and pins.
Figure 4-15. Example of electrical equipment
Item
1 Auxiliary contact
2 Motors
3 Hand/Motor switch
4Relays
5 Contactors, for motor
circuit
6 Direct-on-line starters
7 Miniature circuit-breaker
8 Plug socket
9 Thermostat
10 Fuses
11 Closing coil
12 Terminal block
13 Opening coil
14 Cover
1
2
4
12
11
4
3
4
7
5
6
8
7
9
10
13
14
B20022
12
Maintenance
22 1HSB515409-101 en 4
Overhaul Instructions
4.13 Manual closing and opening operations
Some service work requires the by-pass switch to operate slowly, for example
preparing for overhaul of breaking unit on a two chamber breaker.
CAUTION
Manual closing and opening operations may only be carried out by
personnel that are very familiar with the operation of the mechanism and
by-pass switch, as there is a risk of personal injury and mechanical
damage.
Manual opening of the operating mechanism
Manual opening should only be carried out if:
1. The by-pass switch is in the closed position.
2. The “Local/Remote/Disconnect”
switch (1) on the control panel is
in the “Disconnect” position.
3. The motor voltage is switched
off with the direct-on-line
starters (2), (3).
4. The “Hand/Motor” switch (4) is
in the “Hand” position so that the
shaft for manual cranking is
released.
Figure 4-16. Manual opening of the operating mechanism
Item
1 Local/Remote/Disconnect switch
2 Direct-on-line starter
3 Direct-on-line starter
4 Hand/Motor switch
2
4
1
B20002
3
Maintenance
231HSB515409-101 en 4
Overhaul Instructions
5. The opening springs are uncharged.
a. Place the crank (1) on the shaft.
b. Press the reverse catch button (2) hard using a screwdriver to release the
reverse catch and uncharge the springs. Crank clockwise until the spring
yoke has reached the bottom position and rests against the foot of the
frame.
Figure 4-17. Drive unit
6. Blocking beams are fitted.
Fit the blocking beams
(1) around the guide
rod so that the fixing
hole is facing out
towards the cubicle.
Fit the bolts (2) in the
blocking beams.
Figure 4-18. Fitting the blocking beams
Item
1Crank
2 Reverse catch button
3 Hand/Motor switch
Item
1 Blocking beams 2 pcs.
2 Bolts M8x60 2 pcs.
Direction
Direction
Direction
3
1
2B20003
of rotation
of force of force
1
2B20004
1
2
Maintenance
24 1HSB515409-101 en 4
Overhaul Instructions
7. The interlocking mechanism is disengaged.
a. Press the operating rod (1) or the interlocking arm (2) upwards.
b. Insert the blocking pin (3) in the hole (4).
Figure 4-19. Interlocking, by-pass switch closed, opening springs uncharged
8. The blocking beams have moved against the mechanical end stop.
a. Crank anticlockwise, normally 6-8 turns, max. 10 turns.
9. The opening catch gear is released.
a. Press down the armature on the opening coil (1), see Figure 4-20.
The manual opening operation can be interrupted at any time before the locking lug
engages the roller. Press in the reverse catch button, so that the by-pass switch runs
slowly towards its closed position and stops in the required position when the button
is released.
1. Crank anticlockwise 310 turns. The cam disc (2) then rotates approx. 3/4 of a
turn and actuates the stop roller (3) so that the operating lever (4) slowly moves
the by-pass switch towards the open position. Towards the end of the
movement a click is heard when the locking lug (5) on the operating arm
engages behind the roller (6) in the closing catch gear.
2. Crank a few more turns anticlockwise, so that the tip on the cam disc (2) leaves
the stop roller (3). The operating lever is pulled quickly towards the closing
position by the power of the closing spring until the locking lug (5) hits the
roller (6).
3. Crank anticlockwise until the locking lug (7) is just resting against the roller
(8), thereby returning the cam disc to its normal position and releasing the
pressure on the blocking beams.
4. Remove the blocking beams.
5. Check that the locking lug (7) rests against the roller (8). Otherwise the cam
disc will be in the wrong position and the operating mechanism could be
damaged during an closing operation.
Item
1 Operating rod
2 Interlocking arm
3 Blocking pin
4 Hole for blocking pin
2
3
4
Closed
Open
B20005
1
position
position
Maintenance
251HSB515409-101 en 4
Overhaul Instructions
6. Pull the blocking pin (3) out of the hole (4), see Figure 4-19.
7. Turn the “Hand/Motor” switch to the “Motor” position.
8. Switch on the motor voltage with the direct-on -line starters.
9. Set the “Local/Remote/Disconnect” switch in the “Remote” position.
The by-pass switch is now in the open position and a normal closing operation can
be carried out.
N. B. Check that the blocking beams are removed before carrying out an closing
operation.
Figure 4-20. Operating mechanism, manual opening operation
Item
1 Opening coil
2Cam disc
3 Stop roller
4 Operating lever
5 Locking lug
6 Roller, closing catch gear
7 Locking lug
8 Roller, opening catch gear
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
7
B20006
Maintenance
26 1HSB515409-101 en 4
Overhaul Instructions
Manual closing operation
Manual closing operation should only be carried out if:
1. The by-pass switch is in the open position.
2. The “Local/Remote/Disconnect”
switch (1) on the control panel is
in the “Disconnect” position.
3. The motor voltage is switched
off with the direct-on-line
starters (2), (3).
4. The “Hand/Motor” switch (4) is
in the “Hand” position so that the
hand crank shaft can be released.
Figure 4-21. Manual closing operation
Item
1 Local/Remote/Disconnect switch
2 Direct-on-line starter
3 Direct-on-line starter
4 Hand/Motor switch
2
4
1
B20002
3
Maintenance
271HSB515409-101 en 4
Overhaul Instructions
5. The opening springs are uncharged.
a. Place the crank (1) on the shaft.
b. Press the reverse catch button (2) hard using a screwdriver to release the
reverse catch and uncharge the springs. Crank clockwise until the spring
yoke has reached the bottom position and rests against the foot of the
frame.
Figure 4-22. Drive unit
6. Blocking beams are fitted.
Fit the blocking
beams (1) around the
guide rod so that the
fixing hole is facing
out towards the
cabinet. Fit the bolts
(2) in the blocking
beams.
Figure 4-23. Fitting the blocking beams
Item
1Crank
2 Reverse catch button
3 Hand/Motor switch
Item
1 Blocking beams 2 pcs.
2 Bolts M8x60 2 pcs.
Direction of
Direction
Direction of
3
1
2B20003
ofof rotation
force force
1
2B20004
1
2
Maintenance
28 1HSB515409-101 en 4
Overhaul Instructions
7. The interlocking arm (1) is locked by the pin (5) and stops in the horizontal
position against the locking disc (4).
a. Press the interlocking arm (1) upwards.
b. Insert the blocking pin (2) in the hole (3).
Figure 4-24. Interlocking, by-pass switch open, opening springs uncharged
The manual closing operation requires “fetching” the operating lever (7) with the
cam disc (4), see Figure 4-25. The closing catch gear can then be released and the
operating mechanism is ready for a manual closing operation.
1. Crank anticlockwise until the blocking beams move against the mechanical end
stop. A light resistance on the crank can be felt. The cranking normally takes
6-8 turns, max. 10 turns.
2. Release the opening catch gear by pressing the armature on the opening coil
(1), Figure 4-25, so that the locking lug (2) is disengaged from the roller (3).
3. Turn the crank approx. 300 turns anticlockwise. If the crank is turned too many
turns, a “bang” is heard when the cam disc (4) moves past the stop roller (5)
and returns to the position shown in Figure 4-25. Make a new attempt. Follow
the instructions from point 1 and crank a few turns less.
4. Press in the reverse catch button in the drive unit.
5. Release the crank and let it rotate until it stops.
6. Release the closing catch gear by tapping the armature (6) lightly with e.g. a
screwdriver. The closing springs pull the operating lever (7) towards the closed
position. The movement is stopped when the stop roller (5) falls onto the cam
disc (4).
7. Keep the reverse catch button pressed in until the by-pass switch has been
drawn into the closed position by the closing springs. If the spring force is not
sufficient to move the locking lug (2) far enough to engage in the locked
position against the roller (3), press in the button and turn the crank clockwise.
8. Remove the blocking beams.
Item
1 Interlocking arm
2 Blocking pin
3 Hole for blocking pin
4 Locking disc
5Pin
Open
Closed
1
5
2
4
3
B20007
position
position
Maintenance
291HSB515409-101 en 4
Overhaul Instructions
9. Check that the locking lug (2) rests against the roller (3) in the opening catch
gear. Otherwise crank anti-clockwise until the locking lug rests against the
roller (3).
10. Pull the blocking pin (2) out of the hole (3), see Figure 4-24.
11. Turn the “Hand/Motor” switch to the “Motor” position.
12. Switch on the motor voltage with the direct-on-line starters.
13. Turn the “Local/Remote/Disconnect” switch to the “Remote” position.
The by-pass switchby-pass switch is now in the closed position and a normal
opening operation can be carried out.
N.B.Check that the blocking beams have been dismantled before carrying out an
closing operation.
Figure 4-25. Operating mechanism, slow closing operation
Item
1 Opening coil
2 Locking lug
3 Roller, opening catch gear
4Cam disc
5 Stop roller
6Armature
7 Operating lever
6
12
3
4
5
7
B20008
Maintenance
30 1HSB515409-101 en 4
Overhaul Instructions
4.13.1 Manual charging of the opening springs
1. Crank anticlockwise until the opening springs are fully charged. Check by
measuring between the bridge and the frame foot.
2. Turn the “Hand/Motor” switch on the drive
unit to the “Motor” position.
3. Reset the direct-on-line starters.
4. Turn the “Local/Remote/Disconnect”
switch on the control panel to the
“Remote” position.
5. Make a test operation.
Figure 4-26. Check dimension, opening springs
29
4

+
2
B20021
1HSB515409-101 en 4
2004-12-09
ABB Power Technologies AB
Circuit-Breaker Division
SE-771 80 LUDVIKA
SWEDEN
Telephone: [phone]
Telefax: [phone]
ABB Power Technologies AB
Overhaul Instructions
1HSB435409-210 en 2
SF6 Circuit-Breaker LTB 1/72,5-245/420-550E1 with
operating mechanism
BLG 1002AS
1-pole operation
The information in this document is subject to alteration without prior notice and should not be regar-
ded as an undertaking from ABB Power Technologies AB. ABB Power Technologies AB takes no
responsibility for errors that can occur in the documentation.
ABB Power Technologies AB is not responsible for damage incurred due to the misuse of this docu-
ment.
The document, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced or copied without prior permission from ABB
Power Technologies AB. It may not either be imparted to third party or otherwise be used without aut-
horisation. Infringement hereof will be subject to action in accordance with applicable laws.
© ABB Power Technologies AB
Article number:
1HSB435409-210 en 2
Approval date:
2006-12-08
i1HSB435409-210 en 2
Overhaul Instructions
LIST OF CONTENTS
1. General................................................................................ 1
2. Safety................................................................................... 3
2.1 Warning text....................................................................................3
2.2 Safety directives..............................................................................4
3. Overhaul, general............................................................... 7
3.1 Tools................................................................................................7
3.2 Gas handling equipment..................................................................7
3.3 Personal safety equipment ..............................................................7
3.4 Cleaning equipment ........................................................................7
3.5 Spare parts.......................................................................................8
3.6 Test equipment................................................................................8
3.7 Premises..........................................................................................8
4. Dismantling the by-pass switch........................................ 9
4.1 General............................................................................................9
4.2 Gas ................................................................................................10
4.3 Cleaning and waste handling........................................................11
4.4 Dismantling the by-pass switch pole for transport........................12
5. Dismantling the by-pass switch pole ............................. 13
5.1 Removing the breaking unit..........................................................13
5.2 Removing the post insulators........................................................14
5.3 Dismantling the breaking unit.......................................................15
6. Contact and Auto-PufferTM replacement....................... 16
6.1 Inspection of the upper current path .............................................16
6.2 Inspection of the Auto-PufferTM .................................................17
6.3 Inspection of the lower current path .............................................18
7. Overhaul of the mechanism ............................................ 19
8. Assembling the by-pass switch pole.............................. 20
8.1 Treatment of contact surfaces .......................................................20
8.2 Treatment of sealing surfaces and seals........................................21
8.3 Assembling the breaking unit .......................................................22
8.4 Assembling the post insulators .....................................................23
8.5 Assembling the by-pass switch pole.............................................25
8.6 Gas filling......................................................................................26

ii 1HSB435409-210 en 2
Overhaul Instructions
9. Dismantling the breaking unit for transport...................27
9.1 Assembling the breaking unit after an overhaul........................... 28
10.Assembling and commissioning....................................31
iii1HSB435409-210 en 2
Overhaul Instructions
FIGURES
Figure 4-1. Dismantling the by-pass switch pole ............................................12
Figure 5-1. Removing the breaking unit ..........................................................13
Figure 5-2. Removing the post insulators ........................................................14
Figure 5-3. Dismantling the breaking unit .......................................................15
Figure 6-1. Upper current path ........................................................................16
Figure 6-2. Auto-PufferTM .............................................................................17
Figure 6-3. Lower current path ........................................................................18
Figure 7-1. Mechanism housing ......................................................................19
Figure 8-1. Assembling the breaking unit .......................................................22
Figure 8-2. Assembling the lower post insulator and insulating rod ...............23
Figure 8-3. Assembling the post insulator .......................................................24
Figure 8-4. Assembling the by-pass switch pole .............................................25
Figure 9-1. Dismantling the breaking unit .......................................................27
Figure 9-2. Fitting the breaking unit ................................................................29
Figure 9-3. Mechanism housing’s sign. ...........................................................30
General
11HSB435409-210 en 2
Overhaul Instructions
1. General
This Overhaul Instruction applies to the SF6 by-pass switch LTB 1/72,5-245/
420-550E1, 1- pole operation. It contains information for overhaul and repair work.
Overhaul and repair work may only be carried out by technicians trained by
ABB Power Technologies AB, Circuit Breaker Unit.
Safety
31HSB435409-210 en 2
Overhaul Instructions
2. Safety
2.1 Warning text
Warning text occurs where required and indicates that the text in question should be
observed extra carefully. The warning texts are marked as indicated below:
DANGER
indicates an immediate hazardous situation that, if not avoided, will result
in death or serious injury.
WARNING
indicates an immediate hazardous situation that, if not avoided, can result
in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
indicates a hazardous situation that can result in minor or moderate
injury.
N.B.is used for hazards that may only result in damage to the installation.
Safety
4 1HSB435409-210 en 2
Overhaul Instructions
2.2 Safety directives
On all types of work on high voltage by-pass switches, the risks listed below must
be taken into consideration and corresponding measures must be taken.
WARNING
By-pass switch with pressurised porcelain insulators.
Mechanical damage to the porcelain can cause it to explode with the
following risk of splintering.
Work on the by-pass switch that entails risk of mechanical damage to the
insulators should be carried out at reduced gas pressure, 0.125 MPa (abs).
WARNING
By-pass switch with pressurized composite insulators.
Work on the by-pass switch that entails risk of mechanical damage to the
insulators should be carried out at reduced gas pressure, 0.125 MPa (abs).
WARNING
Do not operate the operating mechanism unloaded!
Operations should take place only after the mechanism has been
connected and trimmed with the associated pressurised by-pass switch.
The operating sequence is C - 0.2 s - OC - 3 min - OC. The time between closing
operations should not be less than 1 minute during the testing of by-pass switchs
and relay systems involving more than 3 closing operations.
Safety
51HSB435409-210 en 2
Overhaul Instructions
WARNING
Work requires training and product knowledge and may only be carried
out by authorised personnel.
Risk Measure
Working next to high voltage. Isolate and earth close to the work
place. If work should take place close
to live equipment, the safety distance
in the applicable safety regulations
must be observed.
Working on ladders and platforms. Work should take place in
accordance with applicable safety
regulations. Work during difficult
weather conditions that requires
short shifts with a great deal of
climbing on ladders and platforms
should be avoided.
Working with low voltage.
Both alternating (AC) and direct (DC)
current can be routed to the
operating mechanism.
Switch off the control voltage and if
necessary the heating voltage.
Risk of crushing in the operating
mechanism and link system.
There is stored energy in the closing
and opening springs. The
mechanism can be tripped by heavy
vibrations or by unintentional contact
with the mechanical latch
components.
Isolate and earth the high voltage
side. Uncharge the springs by
switching off the motor current and
perform an Open-Close operation or
move the operating mechanism drive
shaft backwards by hand (see the
Overhaul instructions for the
operating mechanism). For reasons
of safety all springs must be
uncharged during transportation as
well as during assembly and storage.
Working close to pressurized
insulators.
The normal working pressure is up to
0.8 MPa (abs). Damage to the
porcelain can result in splintering.
Work close to the insulators of the
by-pass switch that may result in
damage to the porcelain must not
take place until the gas pressure has
been reduced to max. 0.125 MPa
(abs.)
Overhaul, general
71HSB435409-210 en 2
Overhaul Instructions
3. Overhaul, general
Before the overhaul work is started, all the necessary equipment and replacement
parts should be available so that the overhaul work can be carried out in the most
effective way.
The following equipment is needed.
3.1 Tools
• A standard tool kit with torque wrenches (9-550 Nm).
• Lifting devices and lifting slings. The weights of the by-pass switch parts to be
lifted can be found on the applicable dimension drawing for the order.
3.2 Gas handling equipment
Gas handling equipment for evacuating, cleaning, compressing and storing the used
SF6 gas as well as instruments for monitoring the pressure and vacuum.
3.3 Personal safety equipment
• Full face mask with filter for fine particles and acidic gases.
• Long-sleeved overall.
• Protective gloves of plastic or rubber.
3.4 Cleaning equipment
• Vacuum cleaner with micro-filter and plastic nozzle.
• Drying cloths of a lint-free material.
• Sealed storage containers for waste products and used absorption filter.
• Wire brush for contact surfaces of aluminium.
• Cleaning pad, e.g. Scotch Brite, for contact surfaces of copper.
• Industrial alcohol 95% (vol), C2H5OH, for cleaning inside surfaces.
• Heavy-duty plastic sheet and plastic bags to prevent the ingress of moisture and
to protect cleaned components before assembly.
Overhaul, general
8 1HSB435409-210 en 2
Overhaul Instructions
3.5 Spare parts
• Set of contacts
1
• Set of seals
1
• Absorption agent
1
• Lubricants, see Lubricant instructions for names of supplier and brands
Grease “G”: ABB art. No. 1171 4014-407
Grease “K”: ABB Art. No. 1263 0011-102
Grease “M”: ABB Art. No. 1171 4016-612
Grease “N”: ABB art. No. 1171 4016-607
Grease “S”: ABB art. No. 1171 4014-406
Grease “SV”: ABB art. No. 1171 4016-610
Grease “P”: ABB art. No. 1171 5011-102.
• Anti-corrosion agent
Valvoline Tectyl 506, ABB art. No. 1241 0011-108.
• Locking fluid
Loctite 243, ABB art. No. 1269 0014-429
Loctite 270, ABB art. No. 1269 0014-408.
•SF6 gas.
• Nitrogen gas.
• Protective cover for the breaking unit, ABB art. No.1HSB445237-1.
• Protective cover for post insulator, ABB art. No. 5439 142-A.
3.6 Test equipment
• Equipment to record damping curves on the operating mechanism.
(e.g. Programma or ABB SA10).
• Operating time meter.
• Ohmmeter.
• Leak detector.
3.7 Premises
The circuit- breaker or breaking units must be opened indoors in dry and clean
premises. When the weather is good and settled and outdoor working conditions are
similar to indoor conditions, the breaking units can be removed outdoors and
transported to dry and clean premises for the overhaul.
N.B. Under no circumstances may the breaking unit be removed or dismantled
during rain or other unsettled weather conditions, nor when the relative
humidity is 80% or higher.
1. According to the spare parts lists for the by-pass switch in question.
Dismantling the by-pass switch
91HSB435409-210 en 2
Overhaul Instructions
4. Dismantling the by-pass switch
4.1 General
Before the by-pass switch is dismantled and during the course of the dismantling
work, the directives in the Operating and Maintenance Instructions must be read and
followed.
Check and make a note of the operating values for the by-pass switch before
dismantling.
Any deviations from the recommended values indicate that something must be
checked with special care during the overhaul.
The overhaul can take place in two different ways:
•First and foremost it is recommended that the entire by-pass switch is
dismantled for transport to a service workshop, where it can be dismantled in
detail for an overhaul.
• Alternatively, and secondly, only the breaking unit is dismantled.
The latter method does not entail so much work, but may only be used when the
weather is settled and the outdoor working conditions are similar to indoor
conditions.
N.B.Removal and assembly of the breaking unit must not be done when the
weather is such that there is a risk of rain.
WARNING
This work requires training and product knowledge and may only be carried
out by authorised personnel.
4.1.1 Preparations for the overhaul
The following must be done before starting the overhaul:.
• Isolate and earth.
• Uncharge the spring battery in the operating mechanism by switching off the
motor current and perform an Open-Close operation.
• Switch off the control voltage and, if necessary, also the heating power.
Dismantling the by-pass switch
10 1HSB435409-210 en 2
Overhaul Instructions
4.2 Gas
Work on the insulator of the by-pass switch or other live components, as well as
transport and dismantling of complete by-pass switch poles from the frame, may not
be done until the gas has been reduced to a pressure of max 0.125 MPa (abs).
Gas should be emptied fully to atmospheric pressure before opening a
normally pressurized space, e.g. a breaking unit.
WARNING
When nitrogen gas is used for cleaning inside the by-pass switch, the gas
may be discharged into the atmosphere, but only via a dust and absorption
filter. The emptying operation must be done outdoors and at ground level.
WARNING
Unused SF6 gas is non-toxic, odourless and colourless. It is heavier than
air and can therefore easily collect in low-lying places, e.g. cable trenches,
tanks, etc., if released in larger volumes.
When large quantities of SF6 gas collect in such places, a risk of
asphyxiation may occur due to lack of oxygen.
4.2.1 Removing the gas
Remove the SF6 gas and vacuum-pump the by-pass switch using the gas handling
equipment. This cleans and compresses the gas so that it can be reused or be
disposed of.
N.B.Mixed gas, SF6 mixed with either N2 or CF4, must not be reused unless the
mixture ratio is under control. (Can be checked with a meter that indicates the
percentage of SF6.)
After vacuum pumping, the by-pass switch is filled with dry nitrogen gas until
atmospheric pressure is reached and is then vacuum pumped again. In this way any
free-floating dust inside the by-pass switch will be extracted.
Finally the by-pass switch is filled again with dry nitrogen gas until atmospheric
pressure is reached. The by-pass switch is now ready to be dismantled.
Dismantling the by-pass switch
111HSB435409-210 en 2
Overhaul Instructions
4.3 Cleaning and waste handling
CAUTION
Some decomposition products formed in the breaking unit become
corrosive when coming in contact with moisture and can irritate the skin,
eyes and mucous membranes.
Protective gloves of plastic or rubber, long-sleeved overall and a full face mask with
a fine particle and acidic gas filter must be worn when cleaning the inside of the by-
pass switch.
The dust (decomposition products) that forms in the by-pass switch can be removed
using a vacuum cleaner fitted with a micro-filter and wiped off using a soft cloth
dampened with alcohol.
N.B. All dust, old absorption agent, used cloths, etc., should be collected in a
sealed vessel and treated as chemical waste according to applicable local
directives.
Protective gloves must be worn during all waste handling.
N.B.Drying cloths, protective gloves and vacuum cleaner bags should be rinsed
thoroughly in water after waste handling.
Dismantling the by-pass switch
12 1HSB435409-210 en 2
Overhaul Instructions
4.4 Dismantling the by-pass switch pole for transport
Before the by-pass switch pole is dismantled, the by-pass switch must be taken out
of service, see Chapter 4.1.1 , and the gas removed, see Chapter 4.2.1. The density
monitor must be dismantled and the sealing cap (1) fitted to the non-return
valve (2).
1. Dismantle the pull rod between the operating mechanism and the by-pass
switch.
2. Place a lifting sling under the breaking unit’s upper flange as shown in
Figure 4-1 and prepare to lift with a crane.
N.B.For composite insulators: Place the lifting sling as close to the terminal flange
as possible and not on the rubber surface.
3. Now loosen the by-pass switch pole (5), removing the four bolts (3) on the
frame and the four bolts (4) on the upper support to the operating mechanism.
4. Lift up the by-pass switch pole
and carefully lay it down on a
transport carriage. Block up the
by-pass switch pole so it lies
horizontally. The bottom of the
transport crate can be used. The
blocks (6) under the breaking
unit’s insulator should be of an
elastic material, e.g. wood or
rubber.
N.B.If possible, keep the supports,
supplied on delivery, for this
purpose.
Transport to the workshop or a new
site should take place with care so as
not to damage the insulators.
Figure 4-1. Dismantling the by-pass switch pole
Item
1 Sealing cap
2 Non-return valve
3 Bolts M20x70
Nuts M20
Washers 21x37x3
4 pcs.
4 pcs.
8 pcs.
4 Bolts M12x50
Nuts M12
Washers 13x24x2.5
4 pcs.
4 pcs.
8 pcs.
5 By-pass switch pole
6 Blocks
1
2
3
5
4
66
Dismantling the by-pass switch pole
131HSB435409-210 en 2
Overhaul Instructions
5. Dismantling the by-pass switch pole
The by-pass switch pole is fitted vertically on a suitable frame, e.g. a by-pass switch
frame or a frame on the floor of the workshop.
5.1 Removing the breaking unit
1. Fit the lifting sling from
the top of the breaking
unit (1) to the crane or
overhead crane. Tension
the lifting sling
moderately.
N.B.For composite
insulators: Place the
lifting sling as close to
the terminal flange as
possible and not on the
rubber surface
2. Remove the bolts (2)
between the upper post
insulator (3) and the
breaking unit (1).
3. Lift the breaking unit
75-100 mm.
4. Remove the split pins (4),
washers (5) and parallel
pin (6).
Set up the breaking unit
vertically on a suitable surface
so that it does not fall over.
Figure 5-1. Removing the breaking unit
Item
1 Breaking unit
2 Bolts M12x35
Washers 13x29x3
8 pcs.
8 pcs.
3 Post insulators
4 Split pins 2 pcs.
5 Washers 2 pcs.
6 Parallel pin
B10057
1
3
3
2
4,5,6
Dismantling the by-pass switch pole
14 1HSB435409-210 en 2
Overhaul Instructions
5.2 Removing the post insulators
Plan the work to remove the insulators so that it can be carried out quickly and
without long delays to prevent moisture in the air coming into lengthy contact with
the dust in the post insulators and on the insulating rod.
N.B.Use personal safety equipment such as overalls, protective gloves and face
mask.
1. Position the lifting sling from the top of the upper post insulator (2) to the crane
or overhead crane.
N.B.For composite insulators: Place the lifting sling as close to the terminal flange
as possible and not on the rubber surface.
2. Remove the lower post insulator’s (3) bolts and washers (4) from the
mechanism housing (5).
3. Lift the post insulators straight up until the insulating rod (6) is released. Hold
the insulating rod while lifting the post insulators.
N.B.Take care not to damage the insulating rod.
4. Remove the insulating rod (6) by removing the split pin (7), washer (8) and
clevis pin (9).
5. Clean the insulating rod (6) carefully and protect it using a plastic sheet.
6. Clean the post insulators carefully, inside and outside, and protect them using
plastic sheets.
Figure 5-2. Removing the post insulators
Item
1 Transport cover
2 Upper post insulator
3 Lower post insulator
4 Bolts M16x50
Washers 17x30x3
8 pcs.
8 pcs.
5 Mechanism housing
6 Insulating rod
7 Split pin
8 Washer 21x37x3 2 pcs.
9 Clevis pin
1 6
2
3
4
B10108
5
7,8,9
Dismantling the by-pass switch pole
151HSB435409-210 en 2
Overhaul Instructions
5.3 Dismantling the breaking unit
Plan the dismantling work so that it can be carried out quickly and without long
delays to prevent moisture in the air coming into lengthy contact with the dust in the
breaking unit and on the inside of the breaking chamber insulator.
N.B.Use personal safety equipment such as overalls, protective gloves and face
mask.
Collect the decomposition products in the breaking unit, in the form of powder, as
the breaking unit is successively opened. First use a vacuum cleaner and thereafter
carefully wipe the dismantled components.
1. Remove the bolts (1) and cover (2) and lift out
the absorption agent container (3).
N.B.Place the bag with absorption agent in a
container for chemical waste.
2. Remove the bolts (4) and upper terminal flange
(5) with the upper current path (6).
3. Remove the bolts (4) and breaking chamber
insulator (7) from the lower terminal flange (8).
4. Rinse the inside of the breaking chamber
insulator with water.
Figure 5-3. Dismantling the breaking unit
The main components of the breaking unit are now accessible for inspection,
cleaning and replacement of burnt or damaged parts.
Item
1 Bolts M12x35
Washers 13x28x3
8 pcs.
8 pcs.
2 Cover
3 Absorption agent container
4 Bolts M12x50
Washers 13x28x3
16 pcs.
16 pcs.
5 Upper terminal flange
6 Upper current path
7 Breaking chamber insulator
8 Lower terminal flange B10059
1
6
4
3 2
7
5
8
4
Contact and Auto-PufferTM replacement
16 1HSB435409-210 en 2
Overhaul Instructions
6. Contact and Auto-PufferTM replacement
If the by-pass switch is not going to be reassembled immediately after cleaning the
components, protect them against contamination and moisture by packing them in
plastic bags with a desiccant to absorb moisture.
The insulators are suitably protected by tying heavy-duty plastic sheets over the end
surfaces.
Inspect the upper and lower current paths and the Auto-pufferTM in accordance with
the instructions below. If any component is burnt or worn and will be replaced, the
other components must also be replaced at the same time.
6.1 Inspection of the upper current path
Replace the entire current path if the fixed arcing contact, Figure 6-1, has been burnt
so that the distance to the reference surface is more than 6 mm or if the outside
surface has been severely burnt. Also replace the upper current path if the silver
surface on the current path is worn so that copper is visible.
Tighten the bolted joints (2) with a tightening torque of 22.5 Nm.
Figure 6-1. Upper current path
Item.
1 Upper terminal flange
2 Bolts M8x20
Spring washers
Washers 8,4x18x2
12 pcs.
12 pcs.
12 pcs.
3 Current path
4 Arcing contact
1
3
4
B10060
Reference surface
2
ma
x
.
6

m
m
TIGHTENING TORQUE
22.5 Nm
Contact and Auto-PufferTM replacement
171HSB435409-210 en 2
Overhaul Instructions
6.2 Inspection of the Auto-Puffer
TM
Move the contact spring (5) upwards from position a to b. Lift off the Auto-PufferTM
and check that the sliding surfaces on the exhaust tube are not worn.
Check that the nozzle (1) is not punctured. Also check that the contact surfaces on
the Auto-PufferTM cylinder (3) are not burnt or worn so that copper is visible.
Replace the entire Auto-PufferTM if it has burnt or worn surfaces or if the nozzle has
been punctured.
Figure 6-2. Auto-PufferTM
Item
1 Nozzle
2 Exhaust tube
3 Auto-puffer
TM cylinder
4 Bolts M8x16
Washers 8,4x16x1,6
8 pcs.
8 pcs.
5 Contact spring
1
2
Contact surface
3
B10061
4
5
Contact surface
b
a
TIGHTENING TORQUE
22.5 Nm
Contact and Auto-PufferTM replacement
18 1HSB435409-210 en 2
Overhaul Instructions
6.3 Inspection of the lower current path
Check that the O-ring (5), Teflon band (4) and guide bushing (6) are not worn. Also
check that the valve washer (7) is flat and seals.
Check that the silver on the lower current path (3) is not worn so that copper is
visible.
If there are signs of wear, replace the lower current path (3).
Tighten the bolted joints (2) with a tightening torque of 22.5 Nm.
Figure 6-3. Lower current path
Item
1 Lower terminal flange
2 Bolts M8x20
Spring washers
Washers 8,4x18x2
8 pcs.
8 pcs.
8 pcs.
3 Current path
4 Teflon band
5O-ring
6 Guide bushing
7 Valve washer 2
1
3
5
74
B10062
6
TIGHTENING TORQUE
22.5 Nm
Overhaul of the mechanism
191HSB435409-210 en 2
Overhaul Instructions
7. Overhaul of the mechanism
Clean the mechanism housing using a vacuum cleaner and then wipe it. Inspect and
lubricate the bearings and O-rings.
Protect untreated or manganese phosphated steel outside the gas chamber using
Valvoline Tectyl 506, ABB art. No. 1241 0011-108.
1. The operating shaft (2) is journalled on a large ball-bearing (4) on the outside
of the gas chamber. The bearing is visible for inspection and lubrication when
the operating lever (3) and retaining ring (5) are dismantled.
2. Pull the operating shaft (2) out of the mechanism housing and remove the ball-
bearing (4) from the shaft.
3. Lubricate the ball-bearing (4)
with grease “G”.
4. Remove the bushing (6) that
holds the O-rings in position by
means of the two bolts (M5),
which are screwed into the
holes at the end of the bushing.
Replace the O-rings (7, 8) in the
bushing behind the ball-bearing
and lubricate with grease “S”.
5. Check that the roller-bearing
(9) rotates easily. If not,
lubricate with grease “G”.
Figure 7-1. Mechanism housing
Item
1 Mechanism housing
2 Operating shaft
3Operating lever
4 Ball-bearing
5 Retaining ring
6 Bushing
7 X-ring 69.2x5.7
8 O-ring 89.1x5.7
9 Roller-bearing
10 Washer
Inner mechanism
1
2
Outer mechanism
3
Bearings and O-rings
9
7
5
4
8
B10027
6
2
10
Assembling the by-pass switch pole
20 1HSB435409-210 en 2
Overhaul Instructions
8. Assembling the by-pass switch pole
To re-assemble the breaking unit follow the dismantling instructions in the reverse
order, see Chapter 5.
N.B.When re-assembling the breaking unit, all O-rings must be new. Careful
cleaning and treatment of the sealing surfaces is required.
8.1 Treatment of contact surfaces
Before re-assembling the breaking unit, treat the contact surfaces as follows:
8.1.1 Fixed contact surfaces
•Silver-plated surfaces
If necessary, clean silver-plated contact surfaces, using a soft cloth and solvent
(alcohol).
N.B.Polishing using Scotch Brite or grinding must not take place.
•Copper surfaces
Copper surface must be clean and free from oxide. If necessary, clean with a
polishing cloth, e.g. Scotch Brite.
N.B.After cleaning with Scotch Brite always remove all loose particles from the
surfaces using alcohol.
• Aluminium surfaces
Brush clean contact surfaces of aluminium, using a wire brush. Immediately
thereafter carefully clean the surfaces to remove any loose particles with a dry,
clean cloth. Then coat the surfaces with a thin layer of Vaseline, grease “P”
(ABB art. No. 1171 5011-102).
N.B.Grease should be applied within five minutes of cleaning and the joint should
be fitted within 15 minutes.
8.1.2 Moving contact surfaces
• Silver-plated surfaces
If necessary, clean silver-plated movable contact surfaces, using a soft cloth
and solvent (alcohol).
•Non-silver-plated surfaces
Clean moving contact surfaces that are not silver-plated in a similar way to
silver-plated surfaces. However, they may also be cleaned with Scotch Brite.
After cleaning with Scotch Brite, always be remove all loose particles.
•Lubrication
Apply grease “N” (ABB art. No. 1171 4016-607) in a covering, but very thin
layer to the lower current path’s silver-plated section, the upper current path’s
contact surfaces and the Auto-PufferTM cylinder’s contact surfaces. Carefully
wipe off all excess grease.
Assembling the by-pass switch pole
211HSB435409-210 en 2
Overhaul Instructions
8.2 Treatment of sealing surfaces and seals
Clean, degrease and inspect all sealing surfaces in connection with the assembly.
N.B.Sealing grooves and other sealing surfaces must not have lateral scratches.
Any small scratches on sealing surfaces can be removed by polishing with a
fine abrasive, e.g. Scotch Brite. Polishing should take place along the sealing
line and never across this.
When re-assembling the by-pass switch, replace all seals with new seals.
Lubricate sealing surfaces and seals sparingly to facilitate the sealing against the
surface and as corrosion protection. Excess grease that could seep out on flanges in
the gas chamber must not occur.
Coat flange surfaces outside the seal with a thin, well-covering layer of anti-
corrosion agent matched to the flange material in question, usually Grease “G”
(ABB art.No. 1171 4014-407).
Degreasing and cleaning material:
• Alcohol.
Lubricating material for seals:
• Grease “G” for static seals.
Grease “S” for moving seals, e.g. shaft seals.
Assembling the by-pass switch pole
22 1HSB435409-210 en 2
Overhaul Instructions
8.3 Assembling the breaking unit
1. Fit the Auto-Puffer
TM (1) on the lower current path (2). When the Auto-
PufferTM starts to go down over the O-ring, carefully turn it so that the O-ring
or the Auto-PufferTM cylinder’s fingers are not damaged.
2. Roll the contact springs (4) down over the contact fingers from position a to
position b, see Figure 8-1.
3. Place the O-ring on the lower flange (5) and lift on the breaking chamber
insulator (6). Centre it and tighten the bolts (7) with a tightening torque of
60 Nm.
4. Fit the upper current path (8) with the
O-ring in the breaking chamber
insulator (6). Centre the current path
in relation to the Auto-PufferTM (1).
Tighten the bolts (7) with a tightening
torque of 60 Nm.
Fit the new absorption agent container first
in connection with the assembly of the
breaking unit on the post insulator,
see Chapter 8.5.
Figure 8-1. Assembling the breaking unit
Item
1 Auto-Puffer
TM
2 Lower current path
3 Bolts M8x20
Washers 8,4x20x2
Spring washers 8,4x18x2
16 pcs.
16 pcs.
16 pcs.
4 Contact springs 2 pcs.
5 Lower terminal flange
6 Breaking chamber insulator
7 Bolts M12x50
Washers 13x24x2.5
16 pcs.
16 pcs.
8 Upper current path
9 Absorption agent container
TIGHTENING TORQUE
60 Nm
8
6
1
3
2
B10152
5
9
7
Position a
Position b
6
4
TIGHTENING TORQUE
60 Nm
Assembling the by-pass switch pole
231HSB435409-210 en 2
Overhaul Instructions
8.4 Assembling the post insulators
1. Turn the support lever (1) and link (2) over the edge of the mechanism housing
and fit the insulating rod (3) using the clevis pin (4), washer (5) and split pin(6).
N.B.Fit the clevis pin (4) so that the split pin (6) faces towards the large bearing.
2. Place the O-ring on the
mechanism housing (9),
lift on the lower post
insulator (7) and tighten
the bolts (8) with a
tightening torque
of 79 Nm.
Figure 8-2. Assembling the lower post insulator and insulating rod
Item
1 Support lever
2Link
3 Insulating rod
4 Clevis pin
5 Washer 21x37x3
6 Split pin 5x40
7 Lower post insulator
8 Bolts M16x50
Washers 17x30x3
8 pcs.
8 pcs.
9 Mechanism housing
6
4
5
1
2
3
9
7
8
TIGHTENING TORQUE
79 Nm
Assembling the by-pass switch pole
24 1HSB435409-210 en 2
Overhaul Instructions
3. Place the guide with the O-rings (1) on the lower post insulator (2) and lift on
the upper post insulator (3). Tighten the bolts (4) with a tightening torque of
190 Nm.
Figure 8-3. Assembling the post insulator
Item
1 Guide with O-rings
2 Lower post insulator
3 Upper post insulator
4 Bolts M16x70
Washers 17x30x3
Nuts M16
8 pcs.
16 pcs.
8 pcs.
TIGHTENING TORQUE
190 Nm
3
4
2
1
B10108
Assembling the by-pass switch pole
251HSB435409-210 en 2
Overhaul Instructions
8.5 Assembling the by-pass switch pole
1. Suspend the breaking unit (1) in the lifting sling and pull out the Auto-Puffer
TM
so its exhaust tube (2) is accessible for assembly.
2. Carefully clean the sealing surface for the O-ring on the upper post insulator
(3). Also clean the lower terminal flange (4) and lubricate well using grease
“G” so that the O-ring is held in place during the assembly. Place the O-ring in
its slot.
3. Slowly lower the breaking unit (1) so that it comes into position to fit the
insulating rod (5) , approx. 75-100 mm above the post insulator (2).
4. Connect the Auto-
PufferTM exhaust
tube (2) to the
insulating rod using
the parallel pin (6),
washers (7) and split
pins (8).
Figure 8-4. Assembling the by-pass switch pole
Item
1 Breaking unit
2 Auto-PufferTM Exhaust tube
3 Upper post insulator
4 Lower terminal flange
5 Insulating rod
6 Parallel pin
7 Washers 2 pcs.
8 Split pins 2 pcs.
9 Bolts M12x35
Washers 13x29x3
8 pcs.
8 pcs.
10 Upper terminal flange
11 Absortion agent container
12 Cover
13 Bolts M12x35
Washers 13x28x3
8 pcs.
8 pcs.
B10057
2
1
3
4
5
6,7,8
9
10
11
1213
Assembling the by-pass switch pole
26 1HSB435409-210 en 2
Overhaul Instructions
5. When the insulating rod (5) is connected, lower the breaking unit (1) carefully
onto the post insulator (2) and centre it. Tighten the breaking unit (1) using the
bolts and washers (9) with a tightening torque of 60 Nm.
6. Clean the sealing surface on the upper terminal flange (10) and coat with
grease “G”. Place the O-ring on top of the upper terminal flange (10).
7. Open the new absorption agent package and place the agent in the absorption
agent container (11).
8. Fit the absorption agent container (11) and the cover (12) and tighten the bolts
(13) with a tightening torque of 60 Nm.
N.B.Put on the cover immediately after the absorption agent container has been
fitted.
8.6 Gas filling
• Vacuum-pump down to 100 Pa and let the vacuum pumping continue for at
least one hour after this pressure has been reached.
• Stop the vacuum pumping and fill the by-pass switch with dry and pure
nitrogen to atmospheric pressure. Allow it to stand for a few hours or
overnight.
• Vacuum-pump again down to 100 Pa and fill with pure SF6 gas to
0.125 MPa (abs).
Store the filling hoses so that they are not exposed to moisture or contamination.
They must not be used other than for their intended purpose.
TIGHTENING TORQUE
60 Nm
TIGHTENING TORQUE
60 Nm
Dismantling the breaking unit for transport
271HSB435409-210 en 2
Overhaul Instructions
9. Dismantling the breaking unit for transport
Dismantling of just the breaking unit for overhaul may only be carried out in good
and settled weather conditions and if the relative humidity does not exceed 80%.
1. Take the by-pass switch out of service. Make sure it is in closed position.
2. Empty the gas, see Chapter 4.2.1. Fill with nitrogen to atmospheric pressure.
3. Place a lifting sling
around the top section of
the breaking unit (1) and
prepare to lift.
4. Remove the bolts (2) and
carefully lift the breaking
unit (1) a 75-100 mm.
N.B.The breaking unit must
not be lifted more than
100 mm.
If a large amount of moisture
should enter the post insulator
(3), fill it immediately with
nitrogen gas and transport it to
a workshop as soon as
possible for dismantling and
careful cleaning.
Figure 9-1. Dismantling the breaking unit
Item
1 Breaking unit
2 Bolts M12x35
Washers 13x29x3
8 pcs.
8 pcs.
3 Post insulators
4 Split pins 2 pcs
5 Washers 2 pcs.
6 Parallel pin
7 Auto-Puffer
TM exhaust tube
B10057
1
3
3
2
4,5,6
7
Dismantling the breaking unit for transport
28 1HSB435409-210 en 2
Overhaul Instructions
5. Disconnect the breaking unit (1) by removing the split pins (4), washers (5) and
parallel pin (6).
N.B.Ensure that neither the split pins nor the washers fall into the post insulator
during the dismantling. Cover the opening for example by tying a cloth over
it.
6. Fit the protective cover, ABB art. No. 5439 142-A, with the O-ring over the
upper post insulator (3). When the cover has been bolted in position, increase
the nitrogen pressure in the post insulator to 0.125 MPa abs.
7. Push the Auto-Puffer
TM exhaust tube (7) into the breaking unit (1) and fit the
protective cover, ABB art. No. 1HSB445237-1, with the O-ring.
The breaking unit is now ready for transport.
If the post insulator or breaking unit is left in this condition for a long period
without the breaking unit being re-assembled , the post insulator or breaking unit
should be vacuum-pumped and filled with nitrogen, see Chapter 8.6.
9.1 Assembling the breaking unit after an overhaul
1. Suspend the breaking unit (1) and remove the protective cover, ABB art. No.
1HSB445237-1, and pull out the Auto-PufferTM so that the Auto-PufferTM
exhaust tube (2) is accessible for assembly.
2. Reduce the nitrogen pressure in the post insulator (3) to atmospheric pressure
and remove its protective cover.
3. Carefully clean the sealing surface for the O-ring on the upper post insulator
(3) and coat with grease “G”. Fit the O-ring in its slot.
4. Slowly lower the breaking unit (1) so that it is in position for fitting with the
insulating rod (5), approx. 75-100 mm above the post insulator (3).
5. Connect the Auto-Puffer
TM exhaust tube (2) to the insulating rod (5) using the
parallel pin (6), washers (7) and split pins (8).
6. When the parallel pin (6) is fitted, lower the breaking unit (1) carefully down
towards the post insulator (3) and centre it. Bolt the breaking unit (1) in
position using the bolts and washers (9), with a tightening torque of 60 Nm.
7. Clean the upper terminal flange (10) and coat with grease “G”. Place the O-ring
on top of the upper terminal flange (10).
8. Open the packaging of the new absorption agent and fill the agent in the
absorption agent container (11).
TIGHTENING TORQUE
60 Nm
Dismantling the breaking unit for transport
291HSB435409-210 en 2
Overhaul Instructions
9. Fit the absorption
agent container (11)
and the cover (12) and
tighten the bolts (13)
with the tightening
torque 60 Nm.
Figure 9-2. Fitting the breaking unit
10. Fill the by-pass switch pole with gas.
a. Vacuum-pump down to 100 Pa and let the vacuum pumping continue for
at least one hour after this pressure has been reached.
b. Stop the vacuum-pumping and fill the by-pass switch with dry and pure
nitrogen to atmospheric pressure. Allow it to stand for a few hours or
overnight.
c. Vacuum-pump again down to 100 Pa and fill with pure SF6 gas to
0.125 MPa (abs).
Store the filling hoses so that they are not exposed to moisture or contamination.
They must not be used other than for their intended purpose.
Item
1 Breaking unit
2 Auto-Puffer
TM exhaust tube
3 Upper post insulator
4 Lower terminal flange
5 Insulating rod
6 Parallel pin
7 Washers 2 pcs.
8 Split pins 2 pcs.
9 Bolts M12x35
Washers 13x29x3
8 pcs.
8 pcs.
10 Upper terminal flange
11 Absorbtion agent container
12 Cover
13 Bolts M12x35
Washers 13x28x3
8 pcs.
8 pcs.
B10057
2
1
3
4
5
6,7,8
9
10
11
1213
TIGHTENING TORQUE
60 Nm
Dismantling the breaking unit for transport
30 1HSB435409-210 en 2
Overhaul Instructions
11. Operate the by-pass switch slowly towards the open position by cranking the
operating mechanism by hand and check that the alignment check hole,
D=6 mm, for the open position in the operating lever aligns with the hole in the
mechanism housing.
Figure 9-3. Mechanism housing’s sign.
A
B
A+B
Adjustment of pull rod in OPEN POSITION
Correct contact position when holes A and B coincide
Check with pin, diameter D=6
Inställning av manöverstång i FRÅN-LÄGE
Rätt kontaktläge när hål A och B sammanfaller
Kontrollera med en pinne diameter D=6
B10032
Assembling and commissioning
311HSB435409-210 en 2
Overhaul Instructions
10. Assembling and commissioning
Assembly and commissioning should be carried out in accordance with the
applicable assembly instructions for the by-pass switch.
After assembling the by-pass switch, check and note down the operating values.
Check carried out on the:________________________________
First overhaul.
Check the following Measured values
Pole A Pole B Pole C
Closing time coil I ms ms ms
Closing time coil II ms ms ms
Opening time coil I ms ms ms
Opening time coil II ms ms ms
Open-Close times(1)
(1) The by-pass switch must not be operated Close - Open without an intermediate delay of 200 ms.
ms ms ms
Lowest control voltage to coil I V V V
Lowest control voltage to coil II V V V
Lowest control voltage from coil I V V V
Lowest control voltage from coil II V V V
Main circuit resistance μΩ μΩ μΩ
Filling pressure (2)
(2) Filling pressure according to rating plate.
MPa (abs) MPa (abs) MPa (abs)
Assembling and commissioning
32 1HSB435409-210 en 2
Overhaul Instructions
Check carried out on the:________________________________
Second overhaul.
Check the following Measured values
Pole A Pole B Pole C
Closing time coil I ms ms ms
Closing time coil II ms ms ms
Opening time coil I ms ms ms
Opening time coil II ms ms ms
Open-Close times(1)
(1) The by-pass switch must not be operated Close - Open without an intermediate delay of 200 ms.
ms ms ms
Lowest control voltage to coil I V V V
Lowest control voltage to coil II V V V
Lowest control voltage from coil I V V V
Lowest control voltage from coil II V V V
Main circuit resistance μΩ μΩ μΩ
Filling pressure (2)
(2) Filling pressure according to rating plate.
MPa (abs) MPa (abs) MPa (abs)
1HSB435409-210 en 2
2006-12-08
ABB Power Technologies AB
Circuit-Breaker Division
SE-771 80 LUDVIKA
SWEDEN
Telephone: [phone]
Telefax: [phone]
ABB Power Technologies AB
SF6-gas
1HSB445409-2 en 3
SF6 Circuit-Breaker Circuit-Breakers HPL and LTB
The information in this document is subject to alteration without prior notice and should not be regar-
ded as an undertaking from ABB Power Technologies AB. ABB Power Technologies AB takes no
responsibility for errors that can occur in the documentation.
ABB Power Technologies AB is not responsible for damage incurred due to the misuse of this docu-
ment.
The document, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced or copied without prior permission from ABB
Power Technologies AB. It may not either be imparted to third party or otherwise be used without aut-
horisation. Infringement hereof will be subject to action in accordance with applicable laws.
© ABB Power Technologies AB
Article number:
1HSB445409-2 en 3
Approval date:
2004-08-20
i1HSB445409-2 en 3
SF6-gas
LIST OF CONTENTS
1. SF6 gas................................................................................ 1
iii1HSB445409-2 en 3
SF6-gas
FIGURES
Figure 1-1. Impulse voltage withstand, kV, 10 mm gap ....................................1
Figure 1-2. Contribution to the greenhouse effect in per cent ...........................2
SF6 gas
11HSB445409-2 en 3
SF6-gas
1. SF6 gas
Sulphur hexafluoride, SF6, is a synthetic gas that is colourless, odourless and non-
combustible. The gas is formed through a chemical reaction between molten
sulphur and fluorine gas. The six fluorine atoms are symmetrically positioned
around the sulphur atom, which makes it chemically very stable. At room
temperature the gas does not react with any other substance.
The stability of the gas is the reason behind its use in electrical equipment as it gives
extremely high electrical insulation and can effectively extinguish arcs. These
characteristics found in SF6 make it possible to design apparatus and equipment
with a small footprint, that require less material, are safe and have a long service
life. In electrical equipment, the SF6 gas is only used in enclosed and sealed
systems, such as insulation gas in switchgear and as insulation and extinguishing
medium in circuit-breakers for high and medium voltages.
The dielectric strength of SF6 is
approx. 2.5 times better than air.
The SF6 gas is usually used at a
pressure of 0.3-0.5 MPa and then
insulates approximately 10 times
better than atmospheric air. These
characteristics are utilised to
construct small, compact units that
give an all around low
environmental impact.
The gas is strongly electronegative,
i.e. the gas molecules capture free
electrons, and form heavy negative
ions with low mobility. This is
effective against the occurrence of
electron avalanches, which can
result in flashovers.
Figure 1-1. Impulse voltage withstand, kV, 10 mm gap
In connection with discharges, the SF6 gas partly decomposes. This takes place in
the temperature interval where the arc is extinguished, 1500-5000 K, and provides
efficient cooling. Gaseous and solid decomposition products are then formed. All
decomposition products are reactive, which means that they are quickly degraded
and disappear.
During normal operation, the concentration of gaseous decomposition products is
kept low by integrated absorbers. The solid decomposition products are primarily
metal fluorides in the form of a powder. The powder can easily be taken care of as a
separate waste product and does not constitute a long-term environmental hazard.
For service and maintenance, special routines apply as decomposition products in
large quantities are corrosive and toxic.
250
200
150
100
50
Ai
r
SF
6
SF
6
Va
c
u
u
m
Oi
l
0.
1

M
P
a
0.
5

M
P
a
kV
SF6 gas
2 1HSB445409-2 en 3
SF6-gas
Pure SF6 gas is non-toxic and is not dangerous to inhale if the oxygen content is at
least 20%. SF6 is approx. 5 times heavier than air. This means that the gas can
collect for example in cable trenches or at the bottom of tanks.
WARNING
The risk of asphyxiation can occur due to a lack of oxygen in such
areas where large quantities of SF6 gas can collect.
The SF6 molecule contributes to
the greenhouse effect, but contains
no chlorine and thereby does not
affect the ozone layer. Ever since
SF6 gas started to be used 50 years
ago, small amounts of the gas have
leaked out into the atmosphere.
There is now approx. an 3 x10-12
volume part of SF6 in the
atmosphere. Due to the low
concentration, its contribution
towards the total greenhouse effect
is less than one thousand.
Figure 1-2. Contribution to the greenhouse effect in per cent
Electrical equipment with SF6 has been used for a long time with good results.
When the equipment or switchgear has to be opened, the SF6 gas is collected and
reused.
The policy of ABB is that no SF6 gas should be released during installation, service
or decommissioning of equipment.
%
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
CO2 CH4 Others SF6
1HSB445409-2 en 3
2004-08-20
ABB Power Technologies AB
Circuit-Breaker Division
SE-771 80 LUDVIKA
SWEDEN
Telephone: [phone]
Telefax: [phone]
ABB Power Technologies AB
Disposal and recycling
1HSB445409-3 en 3
SF6 Circuit-Breaker Circuit-breakers HPL and LTB
The information in this document is subject to alteration without prior notice and should not be regar-
ded as an undertaking from ABB Power Technologies AB. ABB Power Technologies AB takes no
responsibility for errors that can occur in the documentation.
ABB Power Technologies AB is not responsible for damage incurred due to the misuse of this docu-
ment.
The document, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced or copied without prior permission from ABB
Power Technologies AB. It may not either be imparted to third party or otherwise be used without aut-
horisation. Infringement hereof will be subject to action in accordance with applicable laws.
© ABB Power Technologies AB
Article number:
1HSB445409-3 en 3
Approval date:
2004-08-20
i1HSB445409-3 en 3
Disposal and recycling
LIST OF CONTENTS
1. Disposal and recycling ...................................................... 1
1.1 General............................................................................................1
1.2 Taking care of spent equipment......................................................1
1.3 The circuit-breaker’s component parts ...........................................1
1.4 SF6-gas............................................................................................1
1.5 Porcelain..........................................................................................2
1.6 Electronics.......................................................................................2
1.7 Metals..............................................................................................2
1.8 Plastics ............................................................................................2
1.9 Oils and greases ..............................................................................3
1.10 Rubber.............................................................................................3
1.11 Other materials................................................................................3
Disposal and recycling
11HSB445409-3 en 3
Disposal and recycling
1. Disposal and recycling
1.1 General
ABB Power Technologies attempts to minimize environmental impact during the
entire service life of the product. Environmental aspects are in focus during
technical and product development. An eco-cycle approach is attained and the
impact on the environment and possibilities of recycling are observed.
Manufacturing processes are selected that are as gentle as possible on the
environment.
1.2 Taking care of used equipment
Worn-out products should be taken out of service in an environmentally correct
manner according to the following instructions.
After discarding used equipment, a great deal of materials, or the energy content of
materials, can be recycled after sorting and cleaning. The degree of recycling varies
depending on the technical resources and experience available in respective
countries.
Non-recyclable components should be taken to an approved recycling centre for
destruction or disposal.
1.3 Circuit-breaker components
The greatest weight share in a circuit-breaker, almost 70%, is porcelain. The
remaining 30% is mainly metal, primarily iron, steel and aluminium. Rubber and
different plastics make up approximately 0.5% each and chemicals and gas less than
0.5%.
1.4 SF6-gas
Before disposal of a circuit-breaker, the SF6-gas must be emptied. All handling of
SF6-gas must be done carefully and in accordance with applicable regulations to
prevent gas leakage. The gas can be taken care of in different ways depending on the
circumstances:
• Regenerated on site, and reused in other equipment
• Sent to a gas supplier for regeneration
• Sent for destruction at a special waste disposal centre
When the circuit-breaker is filled with mixed gas, the SF6 -gas is separated from the
mixture for continued handling as set out above. Alternatively, the gas mixture can
be sent for destruction without being separated.
ABB Power Technologies will make an offer for handling the gas when the circuit-
breaker is to be discarded.
Disposal and recycling
2 1HSB445409-3 en 3
Disposal and recycling
1.5 Porcelain
Porcelain can after cleaning be left for disposal or used for other purposes, for
example as filling material.
1.6 Electronics
Leave electronic equipment at an approved recycling company or sort in its
component parts and take care of accordingly.
1.7 Metals
Sort metals according to type and surface treatment and leave to an approved
recycling company. After removal of any paint or other surface treatment the metal
can generally be melted down and used in new products. Many iron, steel and
aluminium parts are large and easy to identify, for example, the frame and
mechanism housing.
The aim of ABB Power Technologies is to reduce the use of precious metals and the
emission of environmentally hazardous metals. Recycling these is extremely
important.
Precious metals such as copper and silver are expensive and occur only in small
quantities in the earth’s crust. Copper is primarily used in the current paths, puffer,
contacts and cables. Silver plating of contacts can occur. Some metals can cause
damage if discharged. This appliesnamong others to copper, but also to zinc and
nickel which are used sparingly as surface treatment.
1.8 Plastics
Separate different types of plastic and leave at an approved recycling centre or
recycling company. The energy content in thermoplastics and thermoset plastics can
frequently be recovered through combustion in purpose built installations.
Generally, thermoplastics can be melted down and used again without degrading
quality too much. Composites can be fractionised and used as filling agent in other
materials or be left for disposal.
The composites found in small quantities in insulators, pipes and cable glands are
thermoset plastics. Thermoplastics can be found in components such as guide rings,
belts, bushings and support rings. The thermoplastics in sleeves, nozzles, pipe and
collars contain fluorine and are not suitable for recycling- They can, however, be
disposed of without risk of leaking hazardous substances.
Disposal and recycling
31HSB445409-3 en 3
Disposal and recycling
1.9 Oils and greases
Empty oils, greases etc. before disposal and leave at an approved recycling centre or
to a recycling company. Oil waste can be separated into oil, water and different
contaminants through the use of gravimetric forces. In many cases the oil can be
reused. Alternatively, the energy content can be recovered through combustion in
purpose built installations.
Oil can be found in dampers and grease is used as a lubricant.
1.10 Rubber
Rubber can be left at an approved recycling centre either for disposal or reuse.
Rubber can be found in seals.
1.11 Other materials
Sort and leave other materials at an approved recycling centre.
1HSB445409-3 en 3
2004-08-20
ABB Power Technologies AB
Circuit-Breaker Division
SE-771 80 LUDVIKA
SWEDEN
Telephone: [phone]
Telefax: [phone]
ABB Power Technologies AB
Spare Parts
1HSB435409-310 en 3
SF6 Circuit-Breaker LTB 1/72,5-245/420-550E1 with
operating mechanism
BLG 1002AS
1-pole operation
The information in this document is subject to alteration without prior notice and should not be regar-
ded as an undertaking from ABB Power Technologies AB. ABB Power Technologies AB takes no
responsibility for errors that can occur in the documentation.
ABB Power Technologies AB is not responsible for damage incurred due to the misuse of this docu-
ment.
The document, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced or copied without prior permission from ABB
Power Technologies AB. It may not either be imparted to third party or otherwise be used without aut-
horisation. Infringement hereof will be subject to action in accordance with applicable laws.
© ABB Power Technologies AB
Article number:
1HSB435409-310 en 3
Approval date:
2006-12-08
1HSB435409-310en3
i1HSB435409-310 en 3
Spare Parts
LIST OF CONTENTS
1. General................................................................................ 1
2. By-pass switch pole........................................................... 2
2.1 Breaking unit...................................................................................3
2.2 Set of contacts.................................................................................4
2.3 Post insulator...................................................................................5
2.4 Mechanism......................................................................................6
2.5 Closing device.................................................................................6
3. Accessories ........................................................................ 7
3.1 Absorption agent container.............................................................7
3.2 Density monitor...............................................................................7
3.3 Set of seals ......................................................................................8
3.4 Assembly set...................................................................................8
3.5 Non-return valve.............................................................................8
4. Tools and lubricants........................................................... 9
4.1 Protective cover...............................................................................9
4.2 Tool for unloading the closing device.............................................9
4.3 Lubricants......................................................................................10
iii1HSB435409-310 en 3
Spare Parts
FIGURES
Figure 1-1. By-pass switch LTB 1/72,5-245/420-550E1 ...................................1
Figure 2-1. By-pass switch pole ........................................................................2
Figure 2-2. Breaking unit ...................................................................................3
Figure 2-3. Set of contacts .................................................................................4
Figure 2-4. Post insulator ...................................................................................5
Figure 2-5. Mechanism housing ........................................................................6
Figure 2-6. Closing device .................................................................................6
Figure 3-1. Absorption agent container .............................................................7
Figure 3-2. Density monitor ...............................................................................7
Figure 3-3. Non-return valve .............................................................................8
Figure 4-1. Tensioning tool ................................................................................9
General
11HSB435409-310 en 3
Spare Parts
1. General
Spare parts for the SF6 by-pass switch LTB 1/72,5-245/420-550E1 with operating
mechanism BLG 1002AS are supplied by:
ABB Power Technologies AB
SE-771 80 Ludvika
Sweden
Tel: [phone]
Spare parts recommended to be kept in stock are marked with an R. With more than
ten by-pass switches in operation the spare parts marked with RR are also
recommended to be kept in stock. To be able to make quick replacements and avoid
long periods of downtime the parts marked by RRR can also be stocked.
Figure 1-1. By-pass switch LTB 1/72,5-245/420-550E1
Please state the type designation and serial number with all enquiries and orders of
spare parts or tools. Please also state the order number if possible.
Item Designation Note
1 By-pass switch pole RRR
2 Operating mechanism RRR
3 Frame
B10034
1
2
3
By-pass switch pole
2 1HSB435409-310 en 3
Spare Parts
2. By-pass switch pole
Figure 2-1. By-pass switch pole
Please state the type designation and serial number with all enquiries and orders of spare parts
or tools. Please also state the order number if possible.
Item Designation Note
1 Breaking unit
2 Post insulators
3 Mechanism
4 Closing device
B10122
1
2
3
4
By-pass switch pole
31HSB435409-310 en 3
Spare Parts
2.1 Breaking unit
Figure 2-2. Breaking unit
Please state the type designation and serial number with all enquiries and orders of spare parts
or tools. Please also state the order number if possible.
Item Qty. Designation Note
1 1 Breaking chamber insulator RR
2 1 Upper current path Included in set of contacts
3 1 Lower current path Included in set of contacts
4 1 Auto-Puffer
TM Included in set of contacts
B10123
1
2
4
3
By-pass switch pole
4 1HSB435409-310 en 3
Spare Parts
2.2 Set of contacts
Figure 2-3. Set of contacts
Please state the type designation and serial number with all enquiries and orders of spare parts
or tools. Please also state the order number if possible.
Qty. Designation Note
1 Set of contacts R
B10124
Upper current path Auto-puffer Lower current path
By-pass switch pole
51HSB435409-310 en 3
Spare Parts
2.3 Post insulator
If the by-pass switch is
equipped with composite
insulators, the two insulator
units are replaced with one
insulator unit.
Figure 2-4. Post insulator
Please state the type designation and serial number with all enquiries and orders of spare parts or
tools. Please also state the order number if possible.
Item Qty Designation Note
1 1 Upper post insulator RR
2 1 Lower post insulator RR
3 1 Insulating rod RR
41Guide
52Guide
1
2
3
4
5
By-pass switch pole
6 1HSB435409-310 en 3
Spare Parts
2.4 Mechanism
Figure 2-5. Mechanism housing
2.5 Closing device
Figure 2-6. Closing device
Please state the type designation and serial number with all enquiries and orders of spare parts or
tools. Please also state the order number if possible.
Item Qty. Designation Note
11 Mechanism RR
Item Qty. Designation Note
1 1 Closing device RR
1
B10012
B10126
1
Accessories
71HSB435409-310 en 3
Spare Parts
3. Accessories
3.1 Absorption agent container
Figure 3-1. Absorption agent container
3.2 Density monitor
Figure 3-2. Density monitor
Please state the type designation and serial number with all enquiries and orders of spare parts or
tools. Please also state the order number if possible.
Item Qty. Designation Note
1 1 Absorption agent container
2 1 Absorption agent R
Item Qty. Designation Note
1 1 Density monitor,
temperature compensated
- reference volume
R
2 1 Density monitor,
temperature compensated
- bimetal
(Old Design)
R
3 1 Density monitor,
temperature compensated
- bimetal
(New design)
R
12
B10117
1
B10052
2
3
Accessories
8 1HSB435409-310 en 3
Spare Parts
3.3 Set of seals
Set of seals for a complete by-pass switch pole.
3.4 Assembly set
Set of bolts for a by-pass switch pole.
Set of pins for a complete by-pass switch pole.
3.5 Non-return valve
Figure 3-3. Non-return valve
Please state the type designation and serial number with all enquiries and orders of spare parts
or tools. Please also state the order number if possible.
Qty. Designation Article number Note
1 Set of seals 1HSB436309-P R
Qty. Designation Article number Note
1 Set of bolts 1HSB436309-R R
Qty. Designation Article number Note
1 Pins with circlips 1HSB436309-C R
Item Qty. Designation Note
1 1 Non-return valve RR
1
B10053
Tools and lubricants
91HSB435409-310 en 3
Spare Parts
4. Tools and lubricants
4.1 Protective cover
4.2 Tool for unloading the closing device
Figure 4-1. Tensioning tool
Please state the type designation and serial number with all enquiries and orders of spare parts
or tools. Please also state the order number if possible.
Item Qty. Designation Article number Note
1 1 Protective cover for breaking unit 1HSB445237-1 R
2 1 Protective cover for post insulator 5439 142-A R
Item Qty Designation Article Number Note
1 1 Tensioning tool 1HSB446381-A R
1
B10054
Tools and lubricants
10 1HSB435409-310 en 3
Spare Parts
4.3 Lubricants
For individual grease and oil, see lubricant instruction 1HSB445409-1.
Please state the type designation and serial number with all enquiries and orders of spare parts or
tools. Please also state the order number if possible.
1HSB435409-310 en 3
2006-12-08
ABB Power Technologies AB
Circuit-Breaker Divison
SE-771 80 LUDVIKA
SWEDEN
Telephone: [phone]
Telefax: [phone]
ABB Power Technologies AB
Spare Parts
1HSB515409-201 en 3
SF6 Circuit-Breaker Operating mechanism
BLG 1002AS
The information in this document is subject to alteration without prior notice and should not be regar-
ded as an undertaking from ABB Power Technologies AB. ABB Power Technologies AB takes no
responsibility for errors that can occur in the documentation.
ABB Power Technologies AB is not responsible for damage incurred due to the misuse of this docu-
ment.
The document, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced or copied without prior permission from ABB
Power Technologies AB. It may not either be imparted to third party or otherwise be used without aut-
horisation. Infringement hereof will be subject to action in accordance with applicable laws.
© ABB Power Technologies AB
Article number:
1HSB515409-201 en 3
Approval date:
2006-12-08
i1HSB515409-201 en 3
Spare Parts
LIST OF CONTENTS
1. General................................................................................ 1
2. Components........................................................................ 2
2.1 Drive unit........................................................................................2
2.2 Damper............................................................................................3
2.3 Catch gear .......................................................................................5
2.4 Auxiliary contact.............................................................................6
2.5 Heating element ..............................................................................7
2.6 Electrical equipment .......................................................................8
3. Lubricants........................................................................... 9
iii1HSB515409-201 en 3
Spare Parts
FIGURES
Figure 1-1. Operating mechanism .....................................................................1
Figure 2-1. Drive unit ........................................................................................2
Figure 2-2. Closing damper ...............................................................................3
Figure 2-3. Opening damper ..............................................................................4
Figure 2-4. Catch gear .......................................................................................5
Figure 2-5. Auxiliary contact .............................................................................6
Figure 2-6. Heating element ..............................................................................7
Figure 2-7. Electrical equipment .......................................................................8
General
11HSB515409-201 en 3
Spare Parts
1. General
Spare parts for operating mechanism BLG 1002AS are supplied by:
ABB Power Technologies AB
SE-711 80 Ludvika
Sweden
Tel: [phone]
Replacement modules are supplied complete and fully tested.
Please state the type designation and serial number with all enquiries and orders of
spare parts or tools. Please also state the order number, if possible.
Figure 1-1. Operating mechanism
Item
1Drive unit
2 Mechanism
3 Control panel
4 Spring battery
5 Heating element (behind protection plate)
Front Back, with the
cover removed
1
2
4
3
5
Components
2 1HSB515409-201 en 3
Spare Parts
2. Components
2.1 Drive unit
Figure 2-1. Drive unit
Please state the type designation and serial number with all enquiries and orders of spare
parts or tools. Please also state the order number, if possible.
Type of drive unit(1)
(1) See wiring diagram
Article number
1 Motor, 220 V 0-60 Hz 2361 113-AU
1 Motor, 110 V 0-60 Hz 2361 113-AS
B20031
Components
31HSB515409-201 en 3
Spare Parts
2.2 Damper
2.2.1 Closing damper
Figure 2-2. Closing damper
Please state the type designation and serial number with all enquiries and orders of spare
parts or tools. Please also state the order number, if possible.
Designation Article number
Closing damper HPL A1, A2 5256 707-CA
LTB E1, E2 5256 707-CE
B20033
Components
4 1HSB515409-201 en 3
Spare Parts
2.2.2 Opening damper
Figure 2-3. Opening damper
Please state the type designation and serial number with all enquiries and orders of spare
parts or tools. Please also state the order number, if possible.
Designation Article number
Opening damper 5256 707-BN
B20032
Components
51HSB515409-201 en 3
Spare Parts
2.3 Catch gear
Figure 2-4. Catch gear
Please state the type designation and serial number with all enquiries and orders of spare
parts or tools. Please also state the order number, if possible.
Designation Article number
Opening catch gear Standard, 2-coil 5436 009-X
2-coils, with interlocking
device
5436 009-AC
Closing catch gear Standard 5436 009-Z
With manual closing
device
5436 009-AD
With manual closing
and 69 device
5436 009-AF
B20034
Components
6 1HSB515409-201 en 3
Spare Parts
2.4 Auxiliary contact
Figure 2-5. Auxiliary contact
Please state the type designation and serial number with all enquiries and orders of spare
parts or tools. Please also state the order number, if possible.
Designation Article number
Auxiliary contact 6- or 12-pole 5751 805-F
18-pole 5751 805-H
B20035
Components
71HSB515409-201 en 3
Spare Parts
2.5 Heating element
Figure 2-6. Heating element
Please state the type designation and serial number with all enquiries and orders of spare
parts or tools. Please also state the order number, if possible.
Designation Voltage range Article number
Heating element 110-127 V AC, 70 W 5291 800-R
220-254 V AC, 70 W 5291 800-S
110-127 V AC, 70+140 W 5291 800-U
220-254 V AC, 70+140 W 5291 800-V
110-127 V AC,
70+140+140 W
5291 800-X
220-254 V AC,
70+140+140 W
5291 800-Y
132
5 46
B20036
Components
8 1HSB515409-201 en 3
Spare Parts
2.6 Electrical equipment
Spare parts for electrical equipment BLG 1002AS.
Figure 2-7. Electrical equipment
Please state the type designation and serial number with all enquiries and orders of spare
parts or tools. Please also state the order number, if possible.
Item Designation Voltage range
Article
number
1 Contactors 110-125 V DC 5351 749-2
110-130V, 50/60 HZ 5351 749-4
220-250 V DC 5351 749-1
220-250 V, 50/60
Hz
5351 749-3
2 Direct-on-line motor
starters
110-125 V, 4-6 A 5576 0760-2
220-250 V, 2.4-4A 5576 0760-1
3 Relay, 3-pole 42-48 V DC 5619 758-4
110 V DC 5619 758-2
125 V DC 5619 758-8
220 V DC 5619 758-1
250 V DC 5619 758-7
Relay, 4-pole 42-48 V DC 5619 750-4
110 V DC 5619 750-2
125 V DC 5619 750-8
220 V DC 5619 750-1
250 V DC 5619 750-10
4 Counter 42-48 V DC 5692 965-3
110-125 V DC 5692 965-2
220-250 V DC 5692 965-1
B20002
2
3
1
4
5
Lubricants
91HSB515409-201 en 3
Spare Parts
3. Lubricants
For individual grease and oil, see lubricant instruction 1HSB445409-1.
Please state the type designation and serial number with all enquiries and orders of spare
parts or tools. Please also state the order number, if possible.
1HSB515409-201 en 3
2006-12-08
ABB Power Technologies AB
Circuit-Breaker Division
SE-771 80 LUDVIKA
SWEDEN
Telephone: [phone]
Telefax: [phone]

03590

Foundation Design Report

Midpoint Substation – Capacitor Banks
Jerome County, Idaho

Prepared for:
Idaho Power Company
September 17, 2021
Foundation Design Report
Midpoint Substation – Capacitor Banks

September 17, 2021

Page i
American Geotechnics
Table of Contents
FOUNDATION DESIGN REPORT ................................................................................................. 1
1.0 Introduction ......................................................................................................................... 1
2.0 Subsurface Exploration ...................................................................................................... 1
3.0 Subsurface Conditions ....................................................................................................... 2
4.0 Drilled Pier Design Recommendations .............................................................................. 3
5.0 Drilled Pier Foundation Construction Recommendations ................................................ 5
6.0 Shallow Foundation Design Recommendations ............................................................... 6
7.0 Shallow Foundation Construction Recommendations ..................................................... 7
8.0 Closure ................................................................................................................................. 8

Appendices
A Figure 1 – Vicinity Map
Figure 2 – Exploration Location Map
Site Photographs

B Logs of Exploration
Rock Core Photographs
Laboratory Test Results
Foundation Design Report
Midpoint Substation – Capacitor Banks

September 17, 2021

Page 1
American Geotechnics
FOUNDATION DESIGN REPORT
1.0 Introduction
This project includes replacing the existing capacitor banks, construction of a
small control building, and installation of various equipment founded on
shallow foundations or drilled piers in the 500kV yard of the Midpoint
Substation. The Substation is located on E 750 N in Jerome County, Idaho.
The 500kV yard is shown in Figure 2 in Appendix A.
The purpose of the investigation by American Geotechnics was to evaluate
the in-situ soil and rock properties and develop recommendations for
designing the foundations of the capacitor banks, a small control building
and various equipment.
2.0 Subsurface Exploration
Holt Services of Boise, Idaho performed the subsurface investigation in
August 2021. This included drilling five test borings (AG-1 through AG-5) to
explore the subsurface conditions. The borings were advanced in the vicinity
of the planned structures. Idaho Power provided the exploration locations,
and some of the locations were adjusted slightly in the field to accommodate
drill rig access. The table below summarizes the information on the borings
that were completed for this project.

Summary of Information on Borings
Boring
No. Structure Boring Depth
(ft)
Depth to Rock
(ft)
AG-1 Various Equipment 10 8.5
AG-2 Capacitor Bank & Various Equipment 3.5 2.5
AG-3 Capacitor Bank & Various Equipment 15 4.6
AG-4 Capacitor Bank & Various Equipment 10 5.0
AG-5 Capacitor Bank & Various Equipment 4.6 4.5

Foundation Design Report
Midpoint Substation – Capacitor Banks

September 17, 2021

Page 2
American Geotechnics
The drilling was performed with truck-mounted drill rig equipment using
hollow-stem augers for soil sampling. The soil samples were obtained using
a standard split-spoon sampler in general accordance with ASTM D1586.
HQ-3 cores were used to advance the borings where bedrock was
encountered in borings AG-3 and AG-4.
An American Geotechnics geotechnical engineer identified, described, and
classified the soil samples recovered in the field in general accordance with
ASTM D2488 classification procedures. Representative soil and rock core
samples were packaged and transported to the American Geotechnics
laboratory for testing.
Logs of the subsurface conditions were recorded at the time of the fieldwork
by an American Geotechnics geotechnical engineer and are presented in
Appendix B.
Field testing included Standard Penetration Tests (SPT) performed with an
automatic hammer in accordance with ASTM D1586 to determine the
relative density or stiffness of cohesive soils. The N-values at their
respective testing depths are shown on the boring logs in Appendix B.
Sections of rock core recovered from the HQ-3 core were measured for
percent recovery and Rock Quality Designation (RQD) in accordance with
ASTM D6032. The percent recovery and RQD values are shown on the boring
logs in Appendix B.
3.0 Subsurface Conditions
Based on the results of the subsurface exploration, the subsurface conditions
at the locations of the proposed structures can be generally described as
follows.
• Gravel Surface Course: Gravel surface course existed from the
ground surface to a depth of about 0.5 foot below ground surface
(BGS).
• Stiff Lean Clay (CL) was encountered below the gravel surface course
to depths ranging from 2.5 feet BGS at Boring AG-2 to 8.5 feet BGS
at Boring AG-1. The SPT N-values varied from 8 to 11 blows per foot
of penetration (bpf). Lab test results for lean clay indicated liquid
limit (LL) of 33, plastic index (PI) of 12 and moisture content of 19%.
Foundation Design Report
Midpoint Substation – Capacitor Banks

September 17, 2021

Page 3
American Geotechnics
• Loose to Medium Dense Silt with Sand existed below the gravel
surface course to depth of 4.5 feet BGS at Boring AG-3, 5.0 feet BGS
at Boring AG-4, and 4.5 feet BGS at Boring AG-5. The SPT N-values
varied from 4 to 21 blows per foot of penetration (bpf). Lab test
results for this soil indicated liquid limit (LL) of 24, plastic index (PI)
of 3 and moisture content of 16%. Pocket penetration indicated
compressive strength ranging from 0 to 1 tsf.
• Basalt bedrock was encountered at depths ranging from 2.5 BGS at
Boring AG-2 to 8.5 feet BGS at Boring AG-1. Recovery percentage at
AG-3 and AG-4 varied from 53% to 100%, and RQD varied from 53%
to 80%, indicated rock quality was fair to very good. Laboratory test
results indicate compressive strength ranges from 6,890 to 12,520
psi, indicated rock was medium hard to hard (R3 to R4).
Groundwater was not encountered to a depth of 15 feet BGS during the
investigation in August 2021.
4.0 Drilled Pier Design Recommendations
The design parameters recommended below are based on the assumption
that the drilled piers will be installed as recommended in this report.
The proposed structures at the Midpoint Substation can be founded on
drilled piers to resist lateral and vertical forces. The drilled piers should have
minimum diameter of 2 feet and minimum penetration of 10 feet.
The following tables present the recommended geotechnical input
parameters for designing the drilled piers.
Recommended soil parameters for determining drilled pier axial resistance
are in the below table.

Foundation Design Report
Midpoint Substation – Capacitor Banks

September 17, 2021

Page 4
American Geotechnics
Recommended Soil Parameters for Drilled Pier Axial Resistance
Soil Type Depth Range
(ft)
Allowable Unit Skin
Friction (psf)
Allowable Unit End
Bearing (psf)
Silt with Sand (ML), loose
to medium dense or
Lean Clay (CL), stiff
0 to 4.5* 0.13 (σv)** 2000
Bedrock 4.5 to 15 6000 N/A
*Average depth to bedrock between 5 borings.
**σv is effective overburden stress at mid-depth of drilled pier in the soil stratum.

Neglect the upper 2 feet of soil in calculating skin friction for axial resistance
of drilled piers. Neglect the end bearing in calculating the axial resistance of
drilled piers embedded in bedrock. For cast-in-place drilled piers, the
allowable uplift resistance of the foundation may be considered as a sum of
the foundation dead weight and the applicable skin friction.
Recommended geotechnical parameters for the MFAD program are in the
table below.
Recommended Input Parameters for MFAD
Parameter Layer 1 Layer 2
Bottom of Layer (ft) 4.5 15
Stratum Description
(ASTM D2488 Soil
Classification), Consistency
Silt with Sand (ML), loose to
medium dense or Lean Clay (CL),
stiff
Basalt
Bedrock
Moist Unit Weight (pcf) 110 150
SPT N-value (Average) 10* N/A
Effective Friction Angle (deg)
(Soil or Rock Mass) 30 35
Cohesion (psf) (Soil or Rock
Mass) 0 3000
Deformation Modulus, ED (ksi) 0.5 1000
Rock Mass Class based on
RMR̃̉76 (Description) N/A III (Fair
Rock)
Foundation Design Report
Midpoint Substation – Capacitor Banks

September 17, 2021

Page 5
American Geotechnics
Recommended Input Parameters for MFAD
Parameter Layer 1 Layer 2
*Estimated value

Recommended geotechnical parameters for the LPILE program are in the
table below.
Recommended Input Parameters for LPILE Program
Property Layer 1 Layer 3
Depth of Layer (ft) 0-4.5* 4.5-15
Soil Type (ASTM D2488
Classification), Consistency
Silt with Sand (ML), loose to
medium dense or Lean Clay
(CL), stiff
Basalt
Bedrock***
Effective Unit Weight** (pcf) 110 150
Friction Angle (deg) 30 N/A
Cohesion (psf) N/A N/A
Initial Modulus of Lateral
Subgrade Reaction, k (pci) 25 N/A
Strain Factor, ε50 (%) N/A 0.5
Unconfined Compressive
Strength (psi) N/A 6000
RQD, % N/A 50
Initial Modulus of Rock Mass,
(psi) N/A 500000
*Neglect the upper 2 feet of soil in calculating lateral load resistance of drilled pier.
**Groundwater was not encountered to a depth of 15 feet BGS during the site investigation.
***Model Basalt bedrock as Weak Rock in LPILE analysis.

3.0 Drilled Pier Foundation Construction
Recommendations
The design parameters are based upon the assumption that the pier
excavation will be advanced with conventional flight-auger equipment. Open
Foundation Design Report
Midpoint Substation – Capacitor Banks

September 17, 2021

Page 6
American Geotechnics
pit excavation should not be allowed during the pier installations; otherwise,
the pier design parameters provided herein may not be applicable.
In American Geotechnics’ opinion, the subsurface conditions at the project
site may not be suitable for open hole drilling. It is recommended that
temporary casing be available on site to stabilize the pier excavation during
drilling and concreting if required. The casing may be withdrawn during the
concreting process. However, the surface of the plastic concrete must
remain at least 5 feet above the bottom of the casing during casing removal
where possible.
Excavation of bedrock will be required for drilled pier installation. Depths to
bedrock vary from 2.5 feet BGS at Boring AG-2 to 8.5 feet BGS at Boring
AG-1. Clean the bottom of drilled holes before placing concrete for drilled
piers. Bedrock is classified as medium hard to hard with unconfined
compressive strength varying from 6,890 psi to 12520 psi.
The contractor should be responsible for selecting the means and methods
for advancing the pier excavation. However, excavation methods that result
in displacement of soil beyond the pier perimeter or sloughing of sidewall
materials should not be permitted.
The geotechnical engineer should be on site during shaft excavation to
evaluate construction method procedures and confirm that significant
sloughing, caving, or other sidewall disturbance does not occur. In the event
that such disturbance occurs, excavation activities must cease until the
drilling methods are modified to provide sufficient lateral confinement.
6.0 Shallow Foundation Design Recommendations
Design Requirements
Spread footing can also be used to support the structures and should meet
the following requirements:
• Footing width should be at least 36 inches in the least dimension.
• Footing should be placed at least 24 inches below the lowest adjacent
final grade for frost protection.
• The footings are constructed as recommended in below Section 7.0
Shallow Foundation Construction Recommendations
Foundation Design Report
Midpoint Substation – Capacitor Banks

September 17, 2021

Page 7
American Geotechnics
Allowable Bearing Capacity:
Allowable bearing capacity of 3 ksf can be used to design the spread footings
founded on structural fill providing the above design requirements are met.
Settlement of the footing is expected to be 1 inch or less, with differential
settlements of ½-inch or less. A one-third increase of the net allowable
bearing pressure may be used for transient wind or seismic loads.
Lateral Load Resistance:
Resistance to lateral load can be generated from the friction at the footing
bottom and the structural fill below the footing. A coefficient of friction
resistance of 0.40 can be used in the design.
Uplift Resistance:
Uplift resistance of the spread footing can be determined as the weight of
the footing plus the weight of soil on top of the footing. A safety factor of 1.5
is recommended for uplift resistance.
7.0 Shallow Foundation Construction
Recommendations
Recommendations for construction of the spread footings are as follows:
• The foundation excavation extends to at least 12 inches below the
foundation bottom and 12 inches outside the footing edges, if
bedrock is not encountered within that depth.
• The bottom of the excavation is proof rolled with a vibratory
compactor prior to placement of structural fill.
• Any soft or loose soil pockets encountered during proof-rolling at the
base of the foundation excavations are removed and replaced with
properly compacted structural fill.
• Backfill the excavation with structural fill in maximum loose lift
thickness of 8 inches and compact to at least 95% of the maximum
dry density as determined by ASTM D698 – Standard Proctor.
• Each lift of structural is documented for density.
• If bedrock is encountered during excavation, clean the bedrock
surface of loose materials and level it if needed with lean concrete or
compacted structural fill before placing the footings.
Foundation Design Report
Midpoint Substation – Capacitor Banks

September 17, 2021

Page 8
American Geotechnics
• Final lines and grades should be planned so drainage is directed at
least 10 feet away from the spread footing. All surface water runoff
should be directed to an approved discharge or collection area.
8.0 Closure
American Geotechnics appreciates the opportunity to provide you with these
engineering services and looks forward to working with you on future
projects. If you have any questions or need additional information, please
contact our office.
Foundation Design Report
Midpoint Substation – Capacitor Banks

American Geotechnics

Appendix A
Figure 1 – Vicinity Map
Figure 2 – Exploration Location Map
Site Photographs

Vicinity Map
Midpoint Substation
Jerome County, Idaho
Figure 1
File No.
03590 August 30, 2021
American Geotechnics
PROJECT
LOCATION
Site Photos
Midpoint Substation
03590

American Geotechnics Page 1 of 2

Photo 1: Advancing boring AG-2 using CME-75 drill

Photo 2: AG-1, SS-3, 7.5’ to 9.0’ BGS. Lean Clay (CL).

Site Photos
Midpoint Substation
03590

American Geotechnics Page 2 of 2

Photo 3: AG-3, SS-5, 2.5’ to 4.0’ BGS. Silt with Sand (ML).

Foundation Design Report
Midpoint Substation – Capacitor Banks

American Geotechnics

Appendix B
Logs of Exploration
Rock Core Photographs
Laboratory Test Reports

CME-75;
Automatic Hammer SPT per
ASTM D1586;
NWJ rods;
Auger I.D.:4-1/4-in;
Drilling Fluid: none;
SS: O.D.=2", I.D.=1-3/8";
Driller: Holt Services.
SS-1; pocket penetrometer
= 1 tsf.
SS-2; pocket penetrometer
= 0.5 to 1 tsf.
SS-3; pocket penetrometer
= 0 to 0.5 tsf.; SS bouncing
during last 5" of driving;
weathered basalt in tip of SS
sampler.
Auger grinding and slower
advancement from 7.5' to
10'.
Gravel Surface Course-
3/4" gravel.
Lean Clay (CL)- (NATIVE)
95% fines;
5% fine to medium sand;
brown.
as above, except wet.
Basalt Rock-
Bottom of Boring at 10.0 ft on 8/27/2021.
83
100
76
5-5-3
3-5-6
1-11-50/5"
191233
SS-1
SS-2
SS-3
PROJECT: Midpoint Substation - Capacitor Banks
LOCATION: Jerome County, Idaho
Groundwater not encountered on 8/27/2021
BORING NO. AG-1
LATITUDE: 42.83509°
LONGITUDE: -114.42846°by Hand Held GPS
GROUNDWATER:
METHOD: Hollow-Stem Auger
DATE LOGGED: 8/27/2021
LOGGED BY: Ryan VanLeuven, PE
FILE NO. 03590 PAGE 1 OF 1 BORING NO. AG-1
REMARKS
LI
T
H
O
L
O
G
Y
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
(Stratification lines represent
approximate boundaries
between materials)
RE
C
O
V
E
R
Y

%
BL
O
W
CO
U
N
T
S
LAB DATA
MC

(
%
)
PI

(
%
)
LL

(
%
)
TY
P
E

-

N
o
.
DE
P
T
H

(
f
t
)
2
4
6
8
10
CME-75;
Automatic Hammer SPT per
ASTM D1586;
NWJ rods;
Auger I.D.:4-1/4-in;
Drilling Fluid: none;
SS: O.D.=2", I.D.=1-3/8";
Driller: Holt Services.
SS-4; SS bouncing, basalt
in tip of SS sampler.
Auger grinding and slower
advancement from 2.5' to
3.5'.
Gravel Surface Course-
3/4" gravel.
Lean Clay (CL)- (NATIVE)
About 95% low plasticity fines; about 5% fine to medium sand; moist; brown.
Basalt Rock-
Bottom of Boring at 3.5 ft on 8/27/2021.
100 50/3"SS-4
PROJECT: Midpoint Substation - Capacitor Banks
LOCATION: Jerome County, Idaho
Groundwater not encountered on 8/27/2021
BORING NO. AG-2
LATITUDE: 42.83486°
LONGITUDE: -114.42823°by Hand Held GPS
GROUNDWATER:
METHOD: Hollow-Stem Auger
DATE LOGGED: 8/27/2021
LOGGED BY: Ryan VanLeuven, PE
FILE NO. 03590 PAGE 1 OF 1 BORING NO. AG-2
REMARKS
LI
T
H
O
L
O
G
Y
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
(Stratification lines represent
approximate boundaries
between materials)
RE
C
O
V
E
R
Y

%
BL
O
W
CO
U
N
T
S
TY
P
E

-

N
o
.
DE
P
T
H

(
f
t
)
2
CME-75;
Automatic Hammer SPT per
ASTM D1586;
NWJ rods;
Auger I.D.:4-1/4-in;
Drilling Fluid: none;
SS: O.D.=2", I.D.=1-3/8";
Driller: Holt Services.
Auger grinding and slower
advancement from 4.6' to 5'.
Switch to HQ-3 coring at 5'.
Gray return water from 5' to
15'.
Gravel Surface Course-
3/4" gravel.
Silt with Sand (ML)- (NATIVE)
About 85% non-plastic fines; about 15% fine to medium sand; moist; brown.
BASALT, highly vesicular, gray, very fine grained, fresh, strong rock (R4),
Discontinuities are very closely to moderately spaced and in poor condition, joints
range from horizontal to 60 degrees from assumed horizontal.
as above, except slightly to moderately vesicular.
Bottom of Boring at 15.0 ft on 8/27/2021.
67
90
(63)
100
(80)
4-6-15SS-5
CR-6
CR-7
PROJECT: Midpoint Substation - Capacitor Banks
LOCATION: Jerome County, Idaho
Groundwater not encountered on 8/27/2021
BORING NO. AG-3
LATITUDE: 42.83482°
LONGITUDE: -114.42786°by Hand Held GPS
GROUNDWATER:
METHOD: Hollow-Stem Auger
DATE LOGGED: 8/27/2021
LOGGED BY: Ryan VanLeuven, PE
FILE NO. 03590 PAGE 1 OF 1 BORING NO. AG-3
REMARKS
LI
T
H
O
L
O
G
Y
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
(Stratification lines represent
approximate boundaries
between materials)
RE
C
O
V
E
R
Y

%
(R
Q
D
)
BL
O
W
CO
U
N
T
S
TY
P
E

-

N
o
.
DE
P
T
H

(
f
t
)
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
Rock Core Photographs
Midpoint Substation
Jerome County, Idaho
03590

American Geotechnics

Photo 1: AG-3, CR-6; 5.0’ (left) – 10.0’ (right).

Photo 2: AG-3, CR-7; 10.0’ (left) – 15.0’ (right).

CME-75;
Automatic Hammer SPT per
ASTM D1586;
NWJ rods;
Auger I.D.:4-1/4-in;
Drilling Fluid: none;
SS: O.D.=2", I.D.=1-3/8";
Driller: Holt Services.
Auger grinding and slower
advancement at 5'. Switch
to HQ-3 coring at 5'.
Gray return water from 5' to
10'.
CR-9; low recovery likely
due to washed out core.
Gravel Surface Course-
3/4" gravel.
Silt with Sand (ML)- (NATIVE)
83% fines;
14% fine to medium sand;
3% gravel;
brown.
BASALT, highly vesicular, gray, very fine grained, fresh, strong rock
(R4), Discontinuities are very closely to moderately spaced and in
poor condition, joints range from horizontal to 60 degrees from
assumed horizontal.
Bottom of Boring at 10.0 ft on 8/27/2021.
100
53
(53)
6-4-4 16324SS-8
CR-9
PROJECT: Midpoint Substation - Capacitor Banks
LOCATION: Jerome County, Idaho
Groundwater not encountered on 8/27/2021
BORING NO. AG-4
LATITUDE: 42.83443°
LONGITUDE: -114.42823°by Hand Held GPS
GROUNDWATER:
METHOD: Hollow-Stem Auger
DATE LOGGED: 8/27/2021
LOGGED BY: Ryan VanLeuven, PE
FILE NO. 03590 PAGE 1 OF 1 BORING NO. AG-4
REMARKS
LI
T
H
O
L
O
G
Y
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
(Stratification lines represent
approximate boundaries
between materials)
RE
C
O
V
E
R
Y

%
(R
Q
D
)
BL
O
W
CO
U
N
T
S
LAB DATA
MC

(
%
)
PI

(
%
)
LL

(
%
)
TY
P
E

-

N
o
.
DE
P
T
H

(
f
t
)
2
4
6
8
10
Rock Core Photographs
Midpoint Substation
Jerome County, Idaho
03590

American Geotechnics

Photo 3: AG-4, CR-9; 5.0’ (left) – 10.0’ (right).

CME-75;
Automatic Hammer SPT per
ASTM D1586;
NWJ rods;
Auger I.D.:4-1/4-in;
Drilling Fluid: none;
SS: O.D.=2", I.D.=1-3/8";
Driller: Holt Services.
Hard auger grinding and
slow advancement at 4.5'.
Gravel Surface Course-
3/4" gravel.
Silt with Sand (ML)- (NATIVE)
About 85% non-plastic fines; about 15% fine to medium sand; moist; brown.
Basalt Rock-
Bottom of Boring at 4.6 ft on 8/27/2021.
89 2-2-2SS-10
PROJECT: Midpoint Substation - Capacitor Banks
LOCATION: Jerome County, Idaho
Groundwater not encountered on 8/27/2021
BORING NO. AG-5
LATITUDE: 42.83437°
LONGITUDE: -114.42789°by Hand Held GPS
GROUNDWATER:
METHOD: Hollow-Stem Auger
DATE LOGGED: 8/27/2021
LOGGED BY: Ryan VanLeuven, PE
FILE NO. 03590 PAGE 1 OF 1 BORING NO. AG-5
REMARKS
LI
T
H
O
L
O
G
Y
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
(Stratification lines represent
approximate boundaries
between materials)
RE
C
O
V
E
R
Y

%
BL
O
W
CO
U
N
T
S
TY
P
E

-

N
o
.
DE
P
T
H

(
f
t
)
2
4
21-0526 AG-1 SS-2 5.0'-6.5' 18.6 94.8 33 12 CL
--
21-0527 AG-4 SS-8 2.5'-4.0' 16.2 82.9 24 3 ML
--
Prepared By:__________________
SUMMARY OF LABORATORY RESULTS
RemarksLab
Number Borehole
Date Sampled: 8/27/2021
Sampled By: American Geotechnics
Date Received: 8/27/2021
Date Tested: 8/30 through 9/3/2021
Report to: Idaho Power
Project: Midpoint Substation - Capacitor Banks
Report Date: 9/3/2021
File No.: 03590
Water
Content
(%)
% Passing
#200
Sieve
Liquid
Limit
(%)
Plasticity
Index
Soil
Type
Travis Thomsen
Sample
Type
Depth
(ft)
American Geotechnics
Material Information
Project Information
American Geotechnics
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
0 20 40 60 80 100
ML
SS-2
SS-8
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
PL
A
S
T
I
C
I
T
Y

I
N
D
E
X
CL
MH
CH
Travis Thomsen
LL
33
24
21
21
PL
12
3
PI Fines
95
83
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
LEAN CLAY (CL)
SILT with SAND (ML)
Classification
18.6
16.2
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
CL-ML
Specimen Identification
LIQUID LIMIT (%)
Prepared By:__________________
MC
5.0
2.5
AG-1
AG-4
ATTERBERG LIMITS REPORT

American Geotechnics
PROJECT LOCATION:Jerome County, Idaho
PROJECT NAME:Midpoint Substation - Capacitor BanksCLIENT:Idaho Power
FILE NUMBER:03590
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
0.0010.010.1110100
Travis Thomsen
Cc CuD15%Sand%Gravel
1006 10 501/2
HYDROMETER
AG-1
AG-4
PE
R
C
E
N
T

F
I
N
E
R

B
Y

W
E
I
G
H
T
SAND
GRAIN SIZE IN MILLIMETERS

coarse
3
U.S. SIEVE OPENING IN INCHES
3 4
U.S. SIEVE NUMBERS
33
24
140
coarse SILT OR CLAYfinemedium
PARTICLE-SIZE DISTRIBUTION REPORT
Specimen Identification
8 14
--
0.088
3/4 3/8
Classification
COBBLES GRAVEL
D30D10 D60
5.0
2.5
--
--
6 60
--
--
PI%Fines D50
--
--
--
--
--
--
Specimen Identification
AG-1
AG-4

5.0
2.5
SS-2
SS-8
12
3
LLMC
94.8
82.9
SS-2
SS-8
Prepared By:__________________
0.0
3.0
24 16 301 20020 40
fine
1.5
LEAN CLAY (CL)
SILT with SAND (ML)
--
--
--
--
D85
18.6
16.2
5.2
14.1
American Geotechnics
PROJECT LOCATION:Jerome County, Idaho
PROJECT NAME:Midpoint Substation - Capacitor BanksCLIENT:Idaho Power
FILE NUMBER:03590
American Geotechnics
5260 Chinden Blvd.
Boise, Idaho 83714
Phone:[phone]
Fax: [phone]
Report to:Idaho Power
Project:Midpoint Substation- Capacitor Banks
Report Date:9/3/2021
Project No.: 03590
Date Sampled:8/27/2021
Sampled By:American Geotechnics
Date Received:8/27/2021
Date Tested:9/1 through 9/3/2021
Sample Average Average Compressive
Lab Number Sample ID Depth, ft Diameter, in Height, in Load, lbs Strength, psi
21-0528 AG-03, CR-6 7.0'-7.5'2.386 5.788 34,020 7,610
21-0529 AG-03, CR-7 13.0'-13.5'2.359 5.903 54,713 12,520
21-0530 AG-04, CR-9 8.0'-9.0'2.383 5.890 30,742 6,890
Reviewed By:Kelli Browning
Material Information
Compressive Strength of Intact Rock Cores ASTM D7012 Method C
EXHIBIT C ‐ SPECIAL CONDITIONS
2022 Design Build Install 525kV Series Capacitor Bank Midpoint
  Special Conditions ECP 022 (09/2021) 
 Table of Contents 

Table of Contents 
SC‐1 IPC’S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE .....................................................................................1 
SC‐2 GENERAL SUMMARY OF SCOPE OF WORK .............................................................................1 
SC‐3 MILESTONES ...........................................................................................................................1 
SC‐4 OUTAGE/SWITCHING SCHEDULING ........................................................................................1 
SC‐5 CLEARANCES ...........................................................................................................................2 
SC‐6 WORKING HOURS AND RESTRICTIONS ...................................................................................2 
SC‐7 CAMPS AND CONVENIENCES ..................................................................................................2 
SC‐8 UTILITIES .................................................................................................................................2 
SC‐9 ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE ............................................................................................2 
SC‐10 PERMITTING ...........................................................................................................................3 
SC‐11 MATERIALS TESTING ...............................................................................................................3 
SC‐12 OTHER PROJECT REQUIREMENTS ...........................................................................................3 
SC‐13 IPC FURNISHED MATERIALS ....................................................................................................4 
SC‐14 CONTRACTOR FURNISHED MATERIALS ..................................................................................4 
SC‐15 INVOICES .................................................................................................................................5 

EXHIBIT C ‐ SPECIAL CONDITIONS
2022 Design Build Install 525kV Series Capacitor Bank Midpoint
 Special Conditions ECP 022 (09/2021) 
Page 1 of 5 
SC‐1 IPC’S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE 
A. The IPAR for the Project shall be Mike Bracke through Project completion unless IPC provides written
notice to Contractor designating another IPAR.
SC‐2 GENERAL SUMMARY OF SCOPE OF WORK 
A. Contractor’s general scope of Work includes, but is not limited to, the following:
1. Design, build, and install 525kV series capacitor bank at IPC's Midpoint substation.
2. Commission and Test
3. Provide an onsite operation and maintence training course aimed at maintance personnel,
technicians and systems operators.
B. IPC or its agents will complete the following Work on this Project:
1. Disassemble and relocate existing series capacitor bank.
2. Install foundations
3. Construct new capacitor bank control building, completion planned for July/August 2023.
4. See Exhibit B Table of Demarcation for full list.
C. Contractor’s scope of Work is more fully set forth in Exhibit B and other Contract Documents.
SC‐3 MILESTONES 
1. Milestone 1 Engineering Study submittals provided to IPC
2. Milestone 2 Approval drawings submitted and approved by IPC
3. Milestone 3 Final C506 drawings delivered to IPC
SC‐4 OUTAGE/SWITCHING SCHEDULING 
A. Line Outages/Switching- IPC has reserved the pending outage window(s) listed below to complete all
applicable Work. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Contractor shall submit to IPAR details of all Contractor
switching requests: i) for all transmission Work, a minimum of 35 days prior to the desired switching date;
and ii) for all distribution Work, a minimum of 15 days prior to the desired switching date, to obtain the
confirmed outage/switching window(s) for the Work. Failure by Contractor to notify IPAR in accordance
with these time periods may result in the unavailability of an outage and will be considered a delay of the
Work caused by Contractor.
1. MPSN-HMWY line outage: 10/23/2023 to 10/27/2023
2. MPSN-HMWY line outage: 01/16/2024 to 01/18/2024
B. Substation Outages/Switching- IPC has reserved the pending outage window listed below to complete all
applicable Work; Notwithstanding the foregoing, Contractor shall submit to Greg Habel, phone 208-316-
1568, details of all Contractor switching requests: i) for all transmission Work, a minimum of 35 days prior
to the desired switching date; and ii) for all distribution Work, a minimum of 15 days prior to desired
switching date, to obtain the confirmed outage/switching window(s) for the Work. Failure by Contractor
to notify in accordance with these time periods may result in the unavailability of an outage and will be
considered a delay of the Work caused by Contractor.
1. Cap Bank out of service: 9/11/2023 to 01/19/2024
EXHIBIT C ‐ SPECIAL CONDITIONS
2022 Design Build Install 525kV Series Capacitor Bank Midpoint
 Special Conditions ECP 022 (09/2021) 
Page 2 of 5 
C. Contractor shall use IPC’s radio communication system to communicate with IPC’s dispatchers, when
applicable.
SC‐5 CLEARANCES 
A. Contractor shall obtain a clearance in accordance with OSHA’s requirements for working clearances and
best utility work practices prior to commencing any applicable Work.
B. Contractor shall obtain all clearances as follows:
1. For distribution clearances (69kV and below), Contractor shall contact IPC Regional Dispatch
at 208-388-5175.
2. For transmission clearances (138kV and above), Contractor shall contact IPC System Dispatch
at 208-388-2861.
C. Contractor shall contact the applicable IPC Dispatch listed above to release Contractor’s clearance upon
completion of applicable clearance Work.
D. Contractor’s representative to whom the applicable clearance was issued shall be on site while all Work
under the clearance is being performed.
SC‐6 WORKING HOURS AND RESTRICTIONS  
A. Construction activities may occur Monday – Friday from sunrise to sunset. Work on Saturdays, Sundays,
and IPC-observed holidays requires written pre-approval from the IPAR.
B. Where night Work is approved, sufficient light shall be provided by the Contractor to safeguard the
workers and the public, and to allow adequate facilities for properly placing and inspecting the Work.
SC‐7 CAMPS AND CONVENIENCES 
A. Unless otherwise approved in advance by IPC, neither the Contractor nor subcontractors or vendors will
be allowed to camp on-site. All housing shall be provided by the Contractor off-site.
SC‐8 UTILITIES 
IPC will arrange for the following services at the Work site:
1. Power (1 phase 120/208V) for Contractor’s construction trailers and local service power to
the yard.
Utilities required for the Project that are not listed above shall be Contractor’s responsibility.
SC‐9 ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE  
A. Contractor shall comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and regulations requiring
environmental and cultural protections necessary for completion of the Work.
B. IPC may include (as part of Exhibit B to the Agreement) an Environmental and Cultural Protections
Requirement Summary ("Summary"). If included, the Summary will contain a high-level overview of the
environmental and cultural protections required for the Work. The Summary is not exhaustive and in no
way, relieves the Contractor of its obligations to fully review and comply with all environmental
requirements and necessary permits (further discussed in SC-10 below).
C. In addition to the above requirements, during performance of the Work Contractor shall:
EXHIBIT C ‐ SPECIAL CONDITIONS
2022 Design Build Install 525kV Series Capacitor Bank Midpoint
 Special Conditions ECP 022 (09/2021) 
Page 3 of 5 
1. Ensure compliance with Best Management Practices (BMP) as required by the Storm Water
Pollution Prevention Permit (SWPPP). Contractor is responsible for procuring, installing and
maintaining BMP’s;
2. Maintain appropriate dust and air pollution abatement. Contractor is responsible for all costs
associated with the necessary abatement activities. Contractor’s failure to control dust and/or
air pollution may result in temporary suspension of the Work, for which additional time will
not be granted. The Party responsible for unloading materials shall be responsible for any
abatement needed at the storage yard(s) during the material delivery timeframe (if
applicable). Following the delivery of all material Contractor is responsible for dust abatement
at the material storage yard, if necessary.
3. Ensure mud and dirt are kept off of the roadways;
4. Properly maintain equipment to ensure construction noise is within federal, state, and local
laws, ordinances and regulations.
SC‐10 PERMITTING 
A. Pursuant to Section 25 of the General Conditions, IPC has secured or will secure the permit(s),
environmental and non-environmental, listed in Exhibit G to the Project Construction Agreement (“Exhibit
G Permits”). The Exhibit G Permits are or will become part of this Agreement and Contractor shall comply
with all requirements found therein.
B. Permits required for the Project that are not listed in Exhibit G, including but not limited to traffic control
permits, shall be Contractor’s sole responsibility to secure.
C. With respect to traffic control necessary for completion of the Work, Contractor is responsible for: i)
securing all traffic control permits, ii) implementing all necessary traffic control; iii) maintaining traffic
control plans, and iv) ensuring implementation of all traffic control safety.
SC‐11 MATERIALS TESTING 
A. IPC will retain a materials testing agency to provide testing of subgrades, trenches, concrete, asphalt, etc..
SC‐12 OTHER PROJECT REQUIREMENTS   
A. Contractor’s Authorized Representative shall have a working cellular and/or a mobile satellite phone or
other real-time communication method(s) for contacting IPC or emergency services at all times during the
Project.
B. Excess excavated materials, and all other types of construction debris may not be spoiled on-site.
Contractor must dispose all such material and debris off-site. Contractor is responsible for locating a
suitable site.
C. Payment Schedule
1. Progress Payment Schedule required (if required, attached as Exhibit F to Agreement)
D. Meetings
1. Pre-Construction. IPC may schedule and hold an on site pre-construction meeting
approximately 4 weeks prior to commencement of Work. The Contractor’s Authorized
Representative, assigned project foreman, and approved subcontractors must attend the pre-
construction meeting. In addition, the Contractor’s representative to whom any applicable
Project clearances are issued shall attend the pre-construction meeting.
EXHIBIT C ‐ SPECIAL CONDITIONS
2022 Design Build Install 525kV Series Capacitor Bank Midpoint
 Special Conditions ECP 022 (09/2021) 
Page 4 of 5 
2. Per Milestone. Contractor shall schedule and hold a meeting with the IPAR when Contractor
believes it has completed each Milestone. At this meeting, Contractor shall submit a Certificate
of Substantial Completion certifying completion of each Milestone achieved.
3. Substantial Completion. Contractor shall request a meeting with the IPAR when Contractor
deems Substantial Completion has occurred in accordance with Section GC-20.1 of the General
Conditions. At the meeting, Contractor shall certify/sign the Certificate of Substantial
Completion certifying that Contractor has achieved Substantial Completion of the Work.
Attendance at the meeting to discuss Substantial Completion is mandatory for the Contractor’s
Authorized representative and the Project foreman.
4. Final Completion. Contractor shall request a meeting with the IPAR when Contractor deems
Final Completion has occurred in accordance with Section GC-21.2 of the General Conditions.
At this meeting, Contractor shall certify/sign the Notice of Final Completion. Attendance at the
meeting to discuss Final Completion is mandatory for the Contractor’s Authorized
Representative and the Project foreman.
E. Final as-built drawings shall be provided to the IPAR:
1. The final as-built drawings, shall be submitted to IPC during the Substantial Completion
meeting. All other Record Documents shall be submitted to IPC at the Final Completion
meeting.
SC‐13 IPC FURNISHED MATERIALS 
A. Contractor will supply all material needed to build and install the series capacitor bank. In the event any
materials are supplied by Idaho Power, Contractor will receive all material at IPC Twin Falls Operation
Center located at 243 Blue Lakes Blvd, Twin Falls, ID 83301. Contractor shall call [phone], a
minimum of five days in advance, to coordinate receipt of any material.
B. Contractor shall be responsible for unloading all IPC-furnished materials, unless otherwise identified.
C. Contractor shall inspect IPC-furnished materials upon arrival jointly with IPC. If any materials are in
damaged condition or if shortages are indicated by a comparison of the shipping invoices, or if Contractor
finds that the materials are not suitable for their intended use, IPC shall be promptly notified thereof in
writing.
D. All material not used must be returned in the same condition and manner as it was issued to the
appropriate IPC Stores facility within five business days of completion of the Work. Returns must be
scheduled with IPC’s Stores department at least two business days prior to delivery.
SC‐14 CONTRACTOR FURNISHED MATERIALS 
A. In accordance with GC-5.8 Contractor shall, at its expense, furnish all material and other miscellaneous
items that may be required to accomplish the Work unless otherwise specifically stated in the Contract
Documents. Contractor shall provide all material needed to build and install the series capacitor bank.
B. Also in accordance with GC-5.8, Contractor shall supply its own radio equipment for use with IPC’s trunked
radio system during Contractor’s performance of the Work. Contractor’s radio equipment must be Tait
Communications portable (handheld) or mobile (fleet) radio, capable of operation in the 217-220 MHz
band, digital mobile radio (“DMR”) Tier 3 trunking licensed, Over-the-Air-Programming (“OTAP”) licensed,
and equipped with a numeric keypad and display and Contractor shall provide such radio equipment to
IPC for programming prior to commencing the Work. Contractor shall use and maintain the radio
equipment in compliance with all applicable laws and is solely responsible for ensuring such equipment is
fully operational at all times during performance of the Work, and is operated in a safe and prudent manner
by adequately trained employees of Contractor. Contractor understands and acknowledges its radio
equipment may need to be updated from time to time to meet the requirements necessary for IPC’s trunked
EXHIBIT C ‐ SPECIAL CONDITIONS
2022 Design Build Install 525kV Series Capacitor Bank Midpoint
 Special Conditions ECP 022 (09/2021) 
Page 5 of 5 
radio system. Contractor is authorized to use IPC’s radio frequencies provided by IPC prior to Contractor
commencing Work. Contractor may use these frequencies during Contractor’s performance of the Work
for IPC with the understanding that IPC may terminate the shared use at any time for any reason. Shared
use shall follow all IPC operational procedures and comply with applicable Federal Communications
Commission (“FCC”) regulations. Contractor understands and acknowledges the FCC requires routine
radio equipment checks, and Contractor agrees to cooperate with such requirement, and shall notify IPC
when these checks are completed.

SC‐15 INVOICES 
A. Progress Payment(s) and Final Invoice shall be sent to:
Idaho Power Company
Attn: Mike Bracke
PO Box 70
Boise, ID 83707
Email: [e-mail]
(208) 388- 5384
B. An Application for Progress Payment shall include an itemized and detailed invoice and be in conformance
with the Progress Payment Schedule, and Schedule of Unit Prices, as applicable.
C. Contractor shall self-impose a five percent (5%) retainage on each Application for Progress Payment.
D. For progress payments, Contractor shall provide to IPC, with the invoice, an executed Conditional Waiver
& Release Upon Progress Payment form of Annex A in the amount of Contractor’s Application for Progress
Payment.
E. For final payment, Contractor shall provide to IPC, with the invoice, an executed Release and Waiver of
Liens Upon Final Payment form of Annex A.

END OF SPECIAL CONDITIONS